1

< Day Day Up >

Mastering Digital Photography, Second

Edition
By David D. Busch
...............................................
Publisher: Course Technology
Pub Date: 2006
ISBN: 1-59863-017-2
Pages: 432

Table of Contents | Index

Coverage includes

• David D. Busch has been demystifying arcane computer and imaging technology since the
early 1980s. However, he had a successful career as a professional photographer for a
decade before he sat down at the keyboard of his first personal computer. Busch has worked
as a newspaper photographer, done commercial studio and portrait work, shot weddings,
and roved the United States and Europe as a photojournalist. His articles on photography
and image editing have appeared in magazines as diverse as Popular Photography and
Imaging, Petersen's PhotoGraphic, Rangefinder, and The Professional Photographer, as well
as computer magazines such as Macworld and Computer Shopper. He's currently reviewing
digital cameras for CNet and Computer Shopper.
• Full-color book with excellent illustrations.
• Written by a working photographer and well-known author in the digital photography field.
• Full-color images clearly illustrate each hands-on lesson.
< Day Day Up >
< Day Day Up >

Mastering Digital Photography, Second

Edition
By David D. Busch
...............................................
Publisher: Course Technology
Pub Date: 2006
ISBN: 1-59863-017-2
Pages: 432

Table of Contents | Index

Copyright
About the
Author
Acknowledgments
Contributor Bio
Preface
Introduction
Why Another
Digital

1
2
Photography
Book?
What You'll
Find Here
Who Are
You,
Anyway?
Who Am I?
What You
Need
Chapter
Outline
Part I: Your
Lean, Mean
Pixel Machine
Chapter 1.
Digital
Photography
from 50,000
Feet
How You
Got Here
How the
Technology
Got Here
Transferring
Skills
Key Uses
for Digital
Photography
Where
We're
Going
Next Up
Chapter 2.
Inside a
Digital
Camera
Guided
Tour of a
Digital
Camera
How a
Digital
Camera
Works
Making
Sense of
Sensors
About
Digital
SLRs
Selecting a
Digital

2
 3
Camera
Choose
Your
Weapons
Next Up
Chapter 3.
Mastering
Camera
Controls
Taking
Control
Understanding
Exposure
Working
with
Autoexposure
Manipulating
Focus
Sequencing
Other
Kinds of
Exposures
Next Up
Chapter 4.
Dealing with
Digital
Camera File
Formats
Why So
Many
Formats?
Image
Size, File
Size, and
File
Compression
Key File
Formats
JPEG,
TIFF, and
RAW
A
Sampling
of RAW
Browsers
Next Up
Part II:
Techniques
Unlimited
Chapter 5.
Action
Photography
The Two
Keys to

3
4
Great
Action
Shots
Digital
Cameras
and Shutter
Lag
Your
Action
Arsenal
Lens
Taking a
Position
Here's the
Drill
Shooting
Sequences
Project for
Individual
Study:
Stop a
Bullet
Next Up
Chapter 6.
People
Photography
Home
Studio or
Nature's
Studio?
Setting Up
Your
Studio
What You
Need
Portrait
Lighting
Basics
Using
Multiple
Light
Sources
Lighting
Techniques
Outdoor
Lighting
Posing and
Shooting
Project for
Individual
Study:
Learn to
Retouch
Next Up

4
 5
Chapter 7.
Scenic
Photography
What You
Need
Landscapes
Key Types
of Scenics
Project for
Individual
Study:
Infrared
Photography
Next Up
Chapter 8.
Architectural
Photography
What You
Need
Solving
Architectural
Photography
Problems
Project for
Individual
Study:
Painting
with Light
Next Up
Chapter 9.
Travel
Photography
What You
Need
Tips for
Getting
Great
Travel
Pictures
Next Up
Chapter 10.
Macro
Photography
Made for
Each Other
Close-ups
Up Close
What You
Need
Lighting
Equipment
Background
Information
Getting

5
6
Down to
Business
Close-ups
for Online
Auctions
Project for
Individual
Study:
Pitching a
Tent
Some Final
Tips
Next Up
Appendix
Illustrated
Glossary of
Photographic
and Digital
Terms
Index
< Day Day Up >
< Day Day Up >

Copyright
&"docText">The Thomson Course Technology PTR logo and related trade dress are trademarks of Thomson
Course Technology and may not be used without written permission.

All trademarks are the property of their respective owners.

Important: Thomson Course Technology PTR cannot provide software support. Please contact the appropriate
software manufacturer's technical support line or Web site for assistance.

Thomson Course Technology PTR and the author have attempted throughout this book to distinguish
proprietary trademarks from descriptive terms by following the capitalization style used by the manufacturer.

Information contained in this book has been obtained by Thomson Course Technology PTR from sources
believed to be reliable. However, because of the possibility of human or mechanical error by our sources,
Thomson Course Technology PTR, or others, the Publisher does not guarantee the accuracy, adequacy, or
completeness of any information and is not responsible for any errors or omissions or the results obtained
from use of such information. Readers should be particularly aware of the fact that the Internet is an
ever-changing entity. Some facts may have changed since this book went to press.

Educational facilities, companies, and organizations interested in multiple copies or licensing of this book
should contact the publisher for quantity discount information. Training manuals, CD-ROMs, and portions of
this book are also available individually or can be tailored for specific needs.

ISBN: 1-59863-017-2

Library of Congress Catalog Card Number: 2005929769

Printed in the United States of America

6
 7

05 06 07 08 09 BU 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

Publisher and General Manager, Thomson Course Technology PTR: Stacy L. Hiquet

Associate Director of Marketing: Sarah O'Donnell

Manager of Editorial Services: Heather Talbot

Marketing Manager: Jordan Casey

Executive Editor: Kevin Harreld

Senior Editor: Mark Garvey

Project Editor: Jenny Davidson

Technical Reviewer: Michael D. Sullivan

Thomson Course Technology PTR Editorial Services Coordinator: Elizabeth Furbish

Interior Layout Tech: Bill Hartman

Cover Designer: Mike Tanamachi

Indexer: Sharon Shock

Proofreader: Sara Gullion

Thomson Course Technology PTR, a division of Thomson Course Technology

25 Thomson Place
Boston, MA 02210
http://www.courseptr.com

Dedication
For Jonathan and Teryn
< Day Day Up >
< Day Day Up >

About the Author

David D. Busch has been demystifying arcane computer and imaging technology since the early 1980s.
However, he had a successful career as a professional photographer for a decade before he sat down at the
keyboard of his first personal computer. Busch has worked as a newspaper photographer, done commercial
studio and portrait work, shot weddings, and roved the United States and Europe as a photojournalist. His

7
8
articles on photography and image editing have appeared in magazines as diverse as Popular Photography and
Imaging, Petersen's PhotoGraphic, Rangefinder, and The Professional Photographer, as well as computer
magazines such as Macworld and Computer Shopper. He's currently reviewing digital cameras for CNet and
Computer Shopper.

Busch has written more than 70 books since 1983, including the mega-best-sellers Digital Photography
All-In-One Desk Reference for Dummies, Mastering Digital SLR Photography, and The Hewlett-Packard
Scanner Handbook. Other recent books include Digital Photography Solutions and Mastering Digital
Scanning with Slides, Film, and Transparencies, both from Thomson Course Technology. This is his tenth
book on digital photography.

He earned top category honors in the Computer Press Awards the first two years they were given (for Sorry
About the Explosion, Prentice-Hall; and Secrets of MacWrite, MacPaint and MacDraw, Little, Brown), and
later served as Master of Ceremonies for the awards.
< Day Day Up >
< Day Day Up >

Acknowledgments
Thanks to executive editor Kevin Harreld, for valuable advice as the book progressed, as well as project
editor, Jenny Davidson; book/cover designer, Mike Tanamachi; interior design, Bill Hartman; proofreader,
Sara Gullion; and indexer, Sharon Shock.

Also thanks to my agent, Carole McClendon, who has the amazing ability to keep both publishers and authors
happy.
< Day Day Up >
< Day Day Up >

Contributor Bio
Technical Editor Michael D. Sullivan added a great deal to this book in addition to checking all the text for
technical accuracy. A veteran photographer (in the military sense of the word!), he contributed some of the
best images in this book and volunteered his expertise in Mac OS X for important behind-the-scenes testing of
software and hardware.

Mike began his photo career in high school where he first learned the craft and amazed his classmates by
having Monday morning coverage of Saturday's big game pictured on the school bulletin board. Sullivan
pursed his interest in photography into the U.S. Navy, graduating in the top ten of his photo school class.
Following Navy photo assignments in Bermuda and Arizona, he earned a B.A. degree from West Virginia
Wesleyan College.

He became publicity coordinator for Eastman Kodak Company's largest division where he directed the press
introduction of the company's major consumer products and guided their continuing promotion. Following a
25-year stint with Kodak, Sullivan pursued a second career with a PR agency as a writer-photographer
covering technical imaging subjects and producing articles that appeared in leading trade publications. In
recent years, Sullivan has used his imaging expertise as a technical editor, specializing in digital imaging and
photographic subjects for top-selling books.
< Day Day Up >
< Day Day Up >

8
 9

Preface
This isn't a digital camera book. It's a book about digital photography: how to take great pictures and make
great images using imaging technology, while taking into account the special needs of digital cameras.
Whether you're a snap-shooting tyro, or an experienced photographer moving into the digital realm, you'll find
the knowledge you need here. Every word in this book was written from the viewpoint of the serious
photographer.

This isn't just a photography book, either. It's a digital photography book. The focus is on the special
capabilities and needs of computer imaging. You'll learn how to take close-up photographs with cameras that
have optical viewfinders, and techniques for producing professional-looking portraits with cameras that aren't
designed to work with multiple light sources. No fast shutter speeds? No problem! You'll learn a professional
sports photographer's secret for stopping action with any camera. It's time you stopped taking snapshots, and
started taking photographs!
< Day Day Up >
< Day Day Up >

Introduction
All too often, digital photographs are taken with a "Ready, Fire, Aim!" approach. In an age when both "point
and click" and "point and shoot" have come to represent no-brainer simplicity, there are many serious
photographers like yourself who want their photos to reflect the serious thought put into them.

That's not to say you need to sit for hours (or even minutes) contemplating each photo you take. "Serious
thought" may take only a moment or two deciding what you want to accomplish with a photo, and another
few seconds examining your composition in the viewfinder. The difference between casual snapshooting and
serious photography is often nothing more than an awareness of the process gained through practice and
experience.

Truman Capote was thinking of the process of writing, not photography, when he rebuffed the work of a hack
author by remarking, "That's not writing that's typing." Just as writing is more rewarding than mindless
typing, you've already discovered that pointing your camera and pushing the button isn't photography, and
isn't particularly satisfying. Whether you're trying to capture an image that will hang in a gallery, grabbing a
shot for publication, or attempting to create a digital treasure chest of vacation memories, you'll enjoy your
digital camera a lot more if you put some thought into what you're doing.

It's time to move to the next level, and this book will help you. The first step is to know where you're going
and to understand the tools you'll be using. Then, you need to master the simple techniques that separate the
amateurs from the pros. You'll find all that information between these covers.
< Day Day Up >
< Day Day Up >

Why Another Digital Photography Book?

There are easily a hundred books that purport to address the topic of digital photography. I've written ten of
them myself. Do we really need another book on the topic? Of course we do! The technology is changing so
quickly that updated books like this one are your best bet for staying current and learning the latest
techniques.

I've been busy writing books on various aspects of digital photography because I think there is a serious
shortage of books written from the photographers' viewpoint. Too many of the books on the shelves

9
10
concentrate on the gee-whiz aspects of the technology and stuff that's only peripherally related to picture
taking. I examined several dozen existing books before sitting down to write this one. They averaged about 16
chapters each, which broke down into, unfortunately, perhaps only three or four chapters actually dealing with
digital photography. These were prefaced by chatty chapters explaining the history of digital photography, the
pros and cons of digital cameras, and acronym-hobbled discussions of CCD, CMOS, and CIS image sensors.
There were thick sections on selecting storage media, and each had perhaps half a dozen chapters on image
editing.

I'm sick of "digital photography" books that tell you how to get the picture you want after the photo has
already been taken, using an image editor like Photoshop or Photoshop Elements. That's not digital
photography; that's picture repair.

I dispense with most of the background "historical" stuff with a few pages in Chapter 1, "Digital Photography
from 50,000 Feet." I suspect you don't need any convincing that digital imaging is cool, and you probably
have little interest in ancient history. I figure that you don't really want to know much about amorphous
semiconductors, wouldn't bother to read separate chapters on digital camera peripheral devices, and if you
want a Photoshop book, you'll buy a Photoshop book. (If you're serious about photography, Photoshop CS
2.0: Photographers' Guide from Thomson Course Technology is a good choice for you.)

The manual that came with your camera probably has lots of great tips on how to turn it on, focus, and snap
off a picture. I'm going to concentrate on what your camera's controls mean to your photographs, not how to
access them. There are plenty of general-purpose photography guides that apply equally to point-and-shoot
film cameras as to the average digital model. This book concentrates on creative techniques for the digital
photographer. There is enough nuts-and-bolts in the first four chapters, and image editing is mentioned only in
passing as it applies to particular techniques. The rest of the book deals with honest-to-gosh photography. If
you have a Windows PC or Macintosh and a digital camera, you'll find what you need here. You'll learn:

• Creative posing for group and individual portraits

• How to capture close-up scenes on your desktop using the digital camera's special capabilities
• How to use this book's lighting diagrams to get professional portrait lighting the first time
• Ways to capture breathtaking scenic photographs
• Action photography techniques the professionals use to counter shutter lag problems
• Inside information on the latest digital sensors and emerging technologies
• Professional tips for removing defects before you take the picture
• Easy special effects that can transform any photograph

What is not contained in this book is as important as what you'll find here. The shrewd folks at Thomson
Course Technology recognize that digital photography is a huge topic, so all the things I don't address fully
within these pages are covered in other books in the Photographers' Guide and Mastering series. These
include:

Photoshop CS 2.0: Photographers' Guide. This book serves as an introduction to intermediate and more
advanced Photoshop techniques, specifically from the photographer's viewpoint.

Digital Retouching and Compositing: Photographers' Guide. Here you'll find everything you need to know to
turn your shoebox reject photos into triumphant prizewinners. It covers both eliminating defects and repairing
pictures to more sophisticated techniques for combining two or more images into a realistic (or, if you choose,
fantastic) composite.

Mastering Digital Imaging with Slides, Film, and Transparencies. Shooting pictures on negative films or
slides doesn't lock you out of the digital imaging realm. Lowcost film scanners, as well as flatbed scanners
with film scanning capabilities, and third-party scanning services make it easy for anyone to manipulate
images captured by silver instead of silicon. This book is your introduction to a whole new world of digital
imaging possibilities.

10
 11
Mastering Digital SLR Photography. This is a more advanced guidebook with extra techniques especially for
those who are using digital SLR cameras.
< Day Day Up >
< Day Day Up >

What You'll Find Here

I've tried to pack this book with exactly the kind of information you need to graduate from snapshooting to
serious photography. It's divided into two parts. One part gives you the background you need to understand
the special requirements of digital photography. You'll learn a little about how digital photography works;
why so many options, features, and formats exist; and how you can use these to improve your pictures. The
second part deals with professional techniques that anyone can use to take better action photos, portraits,
scenics, close-ups, and other kinds of pictures. You'll find an outline of the chapters in Parts I and II at the end
of this Introduction.

I'm especially proud of the hefty illustrated glossary I put together for this book. It's not just a word list, but,
instead, a compendium of definitions of the key concepts of photography. You'll find all the most important
terms from this book, plus many others you'll encounter while creating images. I've liberally sprinkled the
glossary with illustrations that help clarify the definitions. If you're reading this book and find something
confusing, check the glossary first before you head to the index. Between the two of them, everything you
need to know should be at your fingertips.
< Day Day Up >
< Day Day Up >

Who Are You, Anyway?

Mastering Digital Photography is aimed squarely at digital camera buffs and business people who want to go
beyond point-and-click snapshooting and explore the world of photography to enrich their lives or do their
jobs better and smarter. If you've learned most of your digital camera's basic features and now wonder what
you can do with them, this is your dream guide to pixel proficiency. If you fall into one of the following
categories, you need this book:

• Individuals who want to get better pictures, or perhaps transform their growing interest in
photography into a full-fledged hobby or artistic outlet.
• Those who want to produce more professional-looking images for their personal or business website.
• Small business owners with more advanced graphics capabilities who want to use photography to
document or promote their business.
• Corporate workers who may or may not have photographic skills in their job descriptions, but who
work regularly with graphics and need to learn how to use digital images for reports, presentations, or
other applications.
• Professional webmasters with strong skills in programming (including Java, JavaScript, HTML, Perl,
etc.) but little background in photography.
• Graphic artists and others who may be adept in image editing with Photoshop or another program, but
who need to learn more about digital photography.
• Trainers who need a non-threatening textbook for digital photography classes.
< Day Day Up >
< Day Day Up >

11
12

Who Am I?
Perhaps introductions are in order, but maybe not. You may have seen my photography articles in Popular
Photography & Imaging magazine. I've also written about 2,000 articles for Petersen's PhotoGraphic,
Rangefinder, Professional Photographer, and dozens of other photographic publications. You can find my
opinions about digital photography on CNet, too (www.cnet.com). First, and foremost, I'm a photojournalist
and made my living in the field until I began devoting most of my time to writing books.

Most digital photography books (I call them digital camera books) are not written by photographers. They
may contain some snazzy pictures, but if you check the credits, you may find acknowledgements to the actual
photographers who contributed the best shots in the book. Certainly, the authors have some experience in
taking pictures, if only for family vacations, but they have little knowledge of lighting, composition, techie
things like the difference between depth-of-field and depth of focus, and other aspects of photography that can
make or break a picture. The majority of these books are written by well-meaning folks who know more about
Photoshop than they do about photons.

Mastering Digital Photography, on the other hand, was written by someone with an incurable photography
bug. I've worked as a sports photographer for an Ohio newspaper and for an upstate New York college. I've
operated my own commercial studio and photo lab, cranking out product shots on demand and then printing a
few hundred glossy 8 x 10s on a tight deadline for a press kit. I've served as photo-posing instructor for a
modeling agency. People have actually paid me to shoot their weddings and immortalize them with portraits. I
even prepared press kits and articles on photography as a PR consultant for a large Rochester, N.Y., imaging
company. My trials and travails with imaging and computer technology have made their way into print in
book form an alarming number of times, including nine tomes on scanners and ten on digital photography.

So, what does that mean? In practice, it means that, like you, I love photography for its own merits, and view
technology as just another tool to help me get the images I see in my mind's eye. It also means that, like you,
when I peer through the viewfinder, I sometimes forget everything I know and take a real clunker of a picture.
Unlike most, however, once I see the result, I can offer detailed technical reasons that explain exactly what I
did wrong, although I usually keep this information to myself. (The flip side is that when a potential disaster
actually looks good, I can say "I meant to do that!" and come up with some convincing, but bogus,
explanation of how I accomplished the "miracle.")

This combination of experience both good and bad and expertise lets me help you avoid making the same
mistakes I sometimes do, so that your picture taking can get better with a minimum of trial-and-error pain.

I hope this book will teach anyone with an interest in computers and/or photography how to spread their
wings and move to the next level. This book will reveal the essentials of both photography and only the
important aspects of digital technology without getting bogged down in complicated details. It's for those who
would rather learn the difference between a digital and optical zoom, and how it affects their picture taking
than find out which type of image sensor is the best. I do cover both topics, though, because I think it's
possible to feed your technology curiosity without neglecting meaty photographic aspects.
< Day Day Up >
< Day Day Up >

What You Need

A few of you will be reading this book to satisfy your curiosity about digital photography before actually
taking the plunge and buying a camera or scanner. The information here may help you decide just how much
camera you need.

However, most of you already own a digital camera and want to know, "Is this book for me?" That's an
excellent question, because books that try to do everything invariably provide too little information for each of

12
 13
its audiences. I'm going to target information for a broad range of the digital picture taking public, but if you
can satisfy a few prerequisites, you'll find this book will be much more useful to you.

I'm going to assume that your digital camera has certain minimal features common to the most widely used
digital models, in terms of resolution, an LCD viewing screen, removable storage, and automated features. If
you have a camera that exceeds the minimum specs, each chapter will offer additional suggestions of things
you can do with your premium capabilities. If you happen to own a camera that doesn't quite meet the
recommendations, I'll have suggestions on how to work around your limitations.

Most of the time, I'm not going to name specific models, for the simple reason that model names are
irrelevant. One of the cameras I use regularly is an old Epson PhotoPC 600 dating from the latter years of the
last millennium. Many of you will be using much newer basic cameras with similar features and capabilities,
so the exact model you or I use doesn't matter. So, when I talk about a 12-megapixel camera, or a 6-megapixel
device, or even something between 3- and 4-megapixels, I mean to refer to those kinds of cameras generically,
not a specific model. The techniques in this book apply to all digital cameras within the rough groupings I'll
outline in Chapter 2.

For most of the techniques in this book, I'll assume you have a digital camera with at least 3.3 to 6 megapixels
of resolution. (If you don't understand resolution right now, don't panic; I'll explain what all these megapixels
mean in Chapter 2.) I'll show you how to get the most from your resolution, which is probably plenty for web
pages and up to 8 x 10-inch prints. As I mentioned earlier, my trusty old 1024 x 768-max-resolution Epson
camera still gets plenty of use, particularly at its lowest 640 x 480 setting for eBay auction pictures that must
be kept slim and trim for efficient downloading.

Should your digital camera have 6 megapixels of resolution, or more, you'll have even more flexibility. You'll
be able to make larger prints, as full size 11 x 14-inch prints are possible even at the 2048 x 1536 resolution of
a 3-megapixel camera. You can also crop small sections out of the center of your pictures, and create more
subtle effects. I'll have some suggestions for those who have these more advanced cameras, too.

The other most important basic specification will be your lens. To get the most from the techniques in this
book, you should have a zoom lens with a 3:1 (or better) zoom ratio and, preferably, a close-up focus setting.
Some of the most interesting effects call for a wide-angle or telephoto look and a close viewpoint. However,
even if you have a low-cost digital camera without a zoom or close-up ("macro") capability, I'll show you how
to use what you have to get similar effects.

Most of the other components, such as amount and type of memory storage, manual/automatic exposure and
focusing options, built-in flash capability, and so forth can vary widely. You'll learn how to make the most of
each of these features.
< Day Day Up >
< Day Day Up >

Chapter Outline

Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine

This part will provide both an overview and detailed look at digital photography and digital cameras from a
photographer's perspective. How has digital technology changed photography? How are cameras changing
now, and what will they be like in the future? How can a digital photographer choose a camera that does what
is needed today and tomorrow? How do camera controls differ between film and digital cameras?

13
14
Chapter 1: Digital Photography from 50,000 Feet

This chapter focuses on the rapid convergence of conventional photography and digital photography, in terms
of features, capabilities, techniques, and price considerations. It outlines the skills film photographers already
have that are directly transferable to digital photography, and shows how those skills actually become
enhanced given the special features of digital cameras. The goal here is to create excitement among
photographers who have worked with conventional cameras, showing them how they are well prepared to
move smoothly into digital photography with the help of this book.

Chapter 2: Inside a Digital Camera

Serious photographers have always been gadget freaks, even before solid-state technology began to intertwine
itself into the workings of conventional cameras in the 1980s, and gave birth to the all-electronic digital
cameras of the 1990s and 2000s.

This chapter provides an inside look at how digital cameras work now, and some information on how they
will work in the very near future when breakthroughs like the Foveon sensor become more widely used.
You'll learn about lenses, sensors, storage, and other topics.

Chapter 3: Mastering Camera Controls

Although every camera uses different buttons and menus to control key features, nearly every digital image
grabber includes some variation on the basic array of controls. This chapter provides an overview of the
controls a digital photographer must master, and includes descriptions of how these controls differ between
digital cameras and film cameras. You'll learn about the different exposure modes, and how they can be used
creatively. You'll master focusing tricks, use of shutter speeds, and choosing resolution and compression
settings that best suit the kind of pictures you're taking.

Chapter 4: Dealing with Digital Camera File Formats

The average amateur photographer with a digital camera just points and clicks, without a thought about which
file format, from among those offered by a particular camera, is the best. More serious photographers will
want to know why optional formats are offered, and how to choose the right one for a particular shooting
session. This chapter covers each of the major formats, why they exist, and how you can use them to your
advantage.

Part II: Techniques Unlimited

This part is all photography, written from the viewpoint of someone who wants to take better photographs and
who probably has some experience with a conventional film camera. Each chapter will jump into a different
type of photography, and explain exactly what special demands digital photography makes as well as the
special capabilities of a digital camera. Although each chapter explains all the jargon used, and will be written
so that even photography tyros can catch up quickly, the text will explore each topic in more depth than found
in digital photography books written by computer guru/amateur photographers. Each chapter will be sprinkled
with "Tips from the Pros," which are special tricks that pros use, and that amateurs would use if they knew
about them.

14
 15
Chapter 5: Action Photography

Action isn't limited to sports! Whether your subject matter is your kids' Little League or soccer teams, or the
company picnic, bowling tournament, or company products in action, you'll need these tips on grabbing
fast-moving subjects. You'll learn how to stop action, choose your shooting spots, and use flash. Some of the
topics covered include stopping action, using motion blur, and coping with fastmoving events.

Chapter 6: People Photography

Tips and tricks for photographing people for attractive portraits. Learn how to arrange and photograph groups,
full-length portraits, head shots, and other people pictures. Among the Tips from the Pros in this chapter is a
sure-fire way to know whether any of your subjects in a group photo had their eyes closed during the shot
(without squinting at your digital camera's LCD). Topics covered include group and individual portraits, with
lighting diagrams that let you reproduce lighting techniques of the masters, as well as candid portraits.

Chapter 7: Scenic Photography

The wide open spaces provide wide open opportunities for capturing great photos, whether you're on vacation
or just want to document the natural wonders around your home. This chapter includes topics such as filter
tricks for great scenics, creating panoramas, and selection of lens zoom settings to get stunning nature and
scenic photos.

Chapter 8: Architectural Photography

Photographing buildings, monuments, and other structures offers some special challenges. This chapter shows
how you don't need a view camera to correct perspective, and ways to enhance photos of architecture to lift an
ordinary shot of your home, office, or other structure to a new level. Among the topics are ways to correct for
perspective distortion and solving the typical digital camera's wide-angle "problems."

Chapter 9: Travel Photography

Travel photography shares a lot of techniques with scenic and architectural work, but there are some special
tricks you need to know. This chapter shows how to get good pictures while visiting interesting cities, the
countryside, and the people when you're on the road and away from home.

Chapter 10: Macro Photography

Make your hobby collections or business products look their best whether on location or in a "studio" the
photographer can set up and take down quickly. Learn how to set up this quick-and-dirty "studio" with
effective backgrounds and lighting, and use close-up techniques. Topics in this chapter will include simple
plans for creating a close-up studio, or taking your shooting on the road. You'll also learn about depth-of-field,
in depth, and how to choose add-ons to enhance your digital camera's close-up capabilities.

Appendix A: Illustrated Glossary of Photographic and Digital Terms

This section explains all the photography and digital imaging terms in the book, illustrated by photographs
that will help you understand the terms more easily.
< Day Day Up >

15
16 Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine
< Day Day Up >

Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine

This part will provide both an overview and a detailed look at digital photography and digital
cameras from a photographer's perspective. How has digital technology changed
photography? How are cameras changing now, and what will they be like in the future? How
can a digital photographer choose a camera that does what is needed today and tomorrow?
And, how do camera controls differ between film and digital cameras? And, hey! What are all
those digital camera file formats used for?

As you can see, Part I is the nuts-and-bolts portion of the book, with everything you need to
know to make the transition from serious film-oriented photographer (or even just a
snapshooter) to digital imaging proficiency. The first part gets you started making great
digital images with your camera. You'll learn how to choose your equipment and operate the
basic controls.

Then, in Part II, we'll get into the digital photography techniques that will spark your
imagination and get your creative juices working overtime.

< Day Day Up >

< Day Day Up >

Chapter 1. Digital Photography from 50,000 Feet

Digital photography has gone through some amazing changes since I wrote the first edition of this book. At
that time, I was floored by the introduction of the original Canon Digital Rebel, a 6-megapixel single lens
reflex (SLR) camera available for less than $1000. That Digital Rebel, I predicted, would be seen as the
harbinger of a significant digital photography revolution.

After all, back in 2003, glorified point-and-shoot digital cameras with fixed lenses and optical viewfinders
could cost more than $1,000. Canon's innovation caused the entire industry to regroup. Such a low price point
suddenly made digital photography more attractive to the millions of serious photographers who would settle
for nothing less than an SLR, but who couldn't afford the $2,000 tariff on even the least expensive models.
Second, the presence of a $1,000 dSLR on the market meant that everyone else's non-SLR models became
much less attractive at that price. Vendors began dropping prices, packing their new cameras with more
features, and digital photography immediately became even more of a booming mainstream consumer trend
than ever before.

Indeed, while I wouldn't have been foolish enough to predict the "death" of film only a few years ago, that's in
fact what has effectively happened. Since the first edition of this book came out, Kodak has announced that it
has ceased researching future improvements in film, and discontinued its Advanced Photo System cameras
entirely. The film quality benchmark Kodachrome, once worthy of a hit song by Paul Simon, can today be
processed in only a dwindling number of labs. Film giants Agfa and Ilford are insolvent, digital cameras of all
classes outsell film cameras, and a growing number of professionals are using high-end digital cameras from
Canon, Nikon, Mamiya, and Hasselblad. We've seen the introduction of the last professional Nikon film
camera, and that's viable only because its removable back probably will be easily swappable for a digital back
sometime down the road.

16 Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine

Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine 17
Photographers, even those of us who cut our teeth on Tri-X Pan and Microdol-X are today living in a digital
age. There's no going back. That original Digital Rebel has already been replaced by an improved Digital
Rebel XT. New digital SLRs from Nikon, Minolta, Pentax, and Olympus are clustered around the $1000 price
point and far below. Even more important for photo enthusiasts are the new non-SLR models at even cheaper
prices that are still bedecked with 7- to 8-megapixel (and higher) sensors, longer zooms, and sophisticated
features. Serious photographers today can get in on the ground floor for $500 or less.

So, traditionalist film photographers have transformed themselves, one after another, into computer nerds. It's
not hard to understand their motivation: Successful photographers have an unusual combination of artistic
eye, dedication to a demanding craft, a huckster's knack for self-promotion, more than a smattering of good
business sense, and an affinity for the mechanical and electronic gadgetry that make up our cameras and
darkroom equipment. Digital photography is, on one level, just another outrageously powerful kind of photo
gadget. If you liked autofocus, can't live without automatic bracketing, and think databacks are cool, you'll
love digital imaging.

In fact, if you're an avid photographer, your interest in digital photography probably predates practical digital
photography itself, because affordable electronic models that could compete with traditional film cameras
have been available only since the beginning of this millennium. This is one technology in which all of us are
getting in on the ground floor. Some younger photographers have never used anything else.

But for veteran photographers who have longed for decades for the kind of capabilities that digital
photography brings to the table, this is the best of all times to be taking pictures. You're probably the happiest
clam on the beach as you watch technology finally catch up to your needs.

However, it's been a long and strange trip. Only a photographer can truly appreciate how weird it is that the
ability to correct, retouch, edit, and manipulate digital pictures with a computer became common a full decade
before the technology to originate images in digital form became practical for the average picture taker. How
is it that we had Photoshop back in the 1990s, but had to wait for practical digital cameras until the 21st
century? Certainly, the ability to edit conventional photographs within image editors like Photoshop (after the
photos are duly scanned and digitized) is valuable whether digital cameras are widely used or not. But doesn't
it make more sense to eliminate that intermediate step? Doesn't digital image editing cry out for digital
photos? Figure 1.1 shows what the Photoshop interface looked like roughly 10 years ago on a Macintosh
Quadra 650. Figure 1.2 shows how far we've come, with a shot of the latest version running on a
Pentium-powered PC that operates roughly 80 times faster.

Figure 1.1. This version of Photoshop was introduced even before practical digital cameras were available.

[View full size image]

Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine 17

18 Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine

Figure 1.2. Today, the latest version of Photoshop CS 2.0 is ready for anything your digital camera can produce.

[View full size image]

Yet, while Photoshop is blossoming into its ninth edition, Photoshop CS 2.0, and other popular image editors
like Photoshop Elements and Paint Shop Pro gain in popularity, we're just now seeing affordable digital
cameras that can truly do everything a serious photographer's film counterpart can handle. You're probably
thinking "about time!" along with millions of other picture takers.

18 Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine

Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine 19
This book is going to delve a little deeper into digital photography than many of the books you might have
read. Unlike most of the other books on the shelf, this is a photographers' guide, designed to leverage the
things you already know about photography as you spread your wings in the digital realm. This first chapter is
intended to be an overview of digital photography and technology a glimpse from 50,000 feet that provides
you with some perspective on where we are, where we're going, and how we got here.

This chapter, as well as this entire book, is intended for serious photographers at all levels of the digital realm,
and covers both digital SLRs as well as non-SLR models, including point-and-shoot cameras and those using
electronic viewfinders. If your interests lie with digital SLRs, I hope you'll check out my companion volume,
Mastering Digital SLR Photography, also from Thomson/Course Technology, which goes into a lot more
detail about the things dSLR users need to know.

You might not have seen the background information I'm going to present in the digital camera books you've
read probably because the authors weren't photographers. A computer guru who understands microprocessors
and software applications might have no clue as to what makes a great image. However, if you're serious
about photography, you know that simple knowledge of the mechanics of taking pictures isn't enough. You
must also have the right tools, know how they are best applied, and understand how to use them. That's what
you'll be gleaning from this book.

You'll learn exactly how digital frees us to do things with images that could only be accomplished by tedious
work and experimentation with conventional tools. Photographers who have darkroom experience might have
combined images with double exposures, sandwiched two slides together, cross-processed chromes in
color-negative developing solutions, or pushed super-fast films to ridiculous exposure indexes to get a
particular effect. These techniques usually involve more error than trial when you're working with
conventional films. With a digital camera, you can instantly reshoot a picture until you get the results you
want. The computer both the one on your desktop and the one built into your camera gives you the freedom
to tweak, re-tweak, and start over if the final results don't please you. Indeed, there is a whole litany of tricks
that couldn't be done at all before the introduction of digital imaging.

Individual image components can be isolated, combined with other components, reversed, rebalanced, or
removed entirely with barely a trace of what has been done remaining for the casual eye to detect. We can
relocate the Great Pyramid of Egypt, show Elvis shaking hands with aliens from space, or remove an intrusive
mother-in-law from a bridal portrait.

More than anything else, digital photography is fun. Most of us, even though we're capable of doing good
work with simple equipment, don't hesitate to take advantage of all the tools that are available. So, it was only
a matter of time before digital imaging started seducing photographers who previously had no intention of
using computers. As cameras became more electronic and computerized, it was a logical next step to
incorporate scanned images, electronic retouching, and eventually digitally originated images into the average
photographer's repertoire. That's why so many perfectly good photographers have found it necessary to
become computer nerds.
< Day Day Up >
< Day Day Up >

How You Got Here

The path to digital photography has almost as many roads as those leading to Rome. Many of you probably
first discovered the joys of film-based photography. Perhaps you yearned to transcend the ordinary vacation
photograph and bring back pictures that would provide memories that would last a lifetime. Or, you might
have discovered photography as an artistic outlet, either because you lacked skills with a brush or chisel or
simply saw images in your head that could only be made tangible through creative picture taking.

Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine 19

20 Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine
In my case, I was a writer with a passion for photography first, and discovered when I applied for a job as a
reporter for our local newspaper that they needed my budding skills as a photographer more than they needed
additional news writers. The fit proved to be a good one, and after turning in a few well-crafted three- and
four-page cutlines for some of my solo photography assignments, I earned my first hyphen, as a
reporter-photographer. I spent almost 10 years as a photojournalist before I sat down in front of my first
personal computer, so it's safe to say that conventional photography was engrained in my system long before
the first digital cameras impinged on my consciousness.

Photography also attracts adherents who never dreamed they'd one day love peering through a viewfinder.
You might be an eager cog in some corporate wheel, who discovered that photos can spice up your
PowerPoint presentations or enhance your résumé. What starts as a lark maybe, snapshooting at company
picnics can easily develop into a reputation as the only staff member who really understands photography.
You might be a webmaster looking to improve your personal site or that of your organization. Even the most
dedicated computer nerd can discover the joys of graphics processing, and from there, it is only a short step to
photography and digital photography.

No matter how you got here, it's safe to say you're hooked.
< Day Day Up >
< Day Day Up >

How the Technology Got Here

For millennia, text and pictures were more or less equals: Scribes illuminated or illustrated a manuscript at the
same time the text was drawn. The only technology involved was, say, a quill pen and the tools used to
sharpen it. When both text and graphics were hand-drawn, it took a little longer to create an illustration, but,
as they say, a sketch is worth a thousand words. Until the invention of movable type, text and graphics merged
seamlessly, with neither form of visual communication having a "technological" advantage over the other. Of
course, manual methods sharply limited access to visual information, unless you were royalty, rich, or worked
in a profession that required literacy.

That balance between text and graphics changed dramatically when movable type simplified the printing of
books about 500 years ago. The distribution of text suddenly became several orders of magnitude easier than
the reproduction of images. Movable type let text reach the masses, but pictures still had to be laboriously
carved as woodcuts, engraved in steel, or converted to halftone dots before they could be printed. The
transmission of words by telegraph predated wirephotos and fax machines by roughly a century, and the first
35 years of the Computer Age were dominated by text and numbers. Newspaper advertisements in the 1860s
were better illustrated than accounts of the Civil War, and computer artists a century later sometimes created
portraits by assembling ASCII characters into crude mosaics (if you've seen some of the pinups that resulted,
you'll know why they were considered crude).

It's only been in the past few years that digital imaging has provided the technology we need to meld text and
pictures seamlessly with our documents, computer presentations, web pages, and other electronic media.

The advantages of digital imaging are simple: If you have a digital camera, computer, and printer, you can
capture images, refine or retouch them, and distribute them though printouts, e-mail, or web pages. You can
accomplish all these things in the span of a few minutes or hours without relying on film manufacturers,
photofinishers, professional retouchers, or, in most cases, the postal system.

The disadvantages are vanishing. Digital cameras still cost more than film cameras of equivalent features and
quality, but the cost "penalty" is becoming smaller and smaller. Today, you can pay a few hundred dollars for
a good film camera, or buy a digital camera with the same quality but greater convenience for perhaps 20 to
50 percent more. Digital "film," while almost infinitely reusable, costs more than film, but memory cards can
be purchased today for $20-50 that will hold hundreds of images. Computer-generated prints you make at

20 Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine

Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine 21

home are still more costly than the drugstore kind, but today your drugstore will be happy to make those
prints for you for about the same price as making prints from film.

As recently as two centuries ago, unless you had met a relative personally or came from a family wealthy
enough to have commissioned a portrait, you probably didn't even know what your ancestors looked like.
Your own grandfather might have been a stranger to you unless you had met him personally. Today, you can
snap a picture of the old geezer with your digital camera and e-mail it to a long-lost relative who might never
be able to drop by for a visit. The average computer owner today can do useful things with images that were
beyond the imagination of the wealthiest royalty in the past.

Even though we're currently immersed in a transition from conventional film photography to digital
photography, the two technologies actually have very little in common, except on an abstract level. Digital
photography didn't evolve from film imaging any more than audio CDs evolved from phonograph records or
magnetic tape cassettes. While the technologies serve the same needs, their origins are very different.
Traditional photography has its roots in chemical technology, which gave us photosensitive films, plates, and
papers. Digital imaging comes from a foundation of electronics (even though digital sensors are created
chemically). The chief technological convergence between the two lies in the optical and exposure systems of
cameras: Both film and digital cameras use lenses, viewfinders, and lens apertures.

We can skip the history of conventional photography entirely, and jump ahead roughly 100 years to 1951,
when Bing Crosby Laboratories (yes, that Bing Crosby) developed the first videotape recorder to convert live
TV images to a format that could be stored onto magnetic tape. A few years later, Ampex marketed the first
commercial VTR for a whopping $50,000. Although TV cameras had been available previously, the ability to
save those images permanently really marks the beginnings of digital photography. Video cameras and digital
cameras generally use a sensor called a CCD (charged coupled device), developed in 1970 (although other
types of sensors will be important in the future). The early VTRs are truly the granddaddies of our present day
digital cameras.

Which Came First?

A case can also be made for scanners, first developed by Kodak in the mid-20th century, as a
progenitor of the digital camera. However, scanners capture information line-by-line over a
period of time and are limited to objects that can be placed close to the scanner's sensor. Video
systems also scan, but take only 1/30th of a second, and can grab anything the eye of the video
camera can see.

True digital photography came later in stages, nudged along by your tax dollars at work. In the 1960s, NASA
converted from analog to digital signals for the lunar missions that mapped the surface of the moon, because,
as you probably know, analog signals can fade in and out, whereas digital information can be captured
virtually error-free. The first heavy-duty image processing was developed in this era, as NASA put the power
of computer technology to work, enhancing the images returned by its various space probes. The Cold War,
replete with spy satellites and various super-secret imaging systems, also helped push the development of
digital photography.

The first film-free electronic camera was patented by Texas Instruments in 1972. One of the patent drawings
for this system is shown in Figure 1.3. The chief drawback of this system was that, had it ever been produced,
it would have required viewing the still photos on a television. TV viewing was also an option for the later
Sony Mavica, introduced in August, 1981 as the first commercial electronic camera. However, the Mavica
could also be attached to a color printer. Yet, even the Mavica wasn't a true digital camera; it was more of a
video camera that was able to capture and display individual frames.

Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine 21

22 Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine
Figure 1.3. The first filmless electronic camera was patented by Texas Instruments more than 30 years ago.

[View full size image]

Who Needed A 1.3 Megapixel, $30,000 Digital

Camera?
Among the earliest users of digital cameras were news magazines and newspapers. They found
the digital camera to be ideal for beaming spot news photos back to photo editors moments after
they were taken. All the photographer needed was a digital camera, a telephone, and a device for
sending the photo's bitstream over the phone lines. Before the advent of digital cameras, news
organizations would set up makeshift darkrooms at sites where news was breaking, develop film,
and then transmit images back using facsimile devices. Digital cameras were at least an hour
faster, and well worth the $30,000 investment!

Other early adopters of expensive digital cameras were catalog photographers, who could create
a lighting setup and then capture dozens (or hundreds) of electronic photos, one after the other,
each ready for immediate placement into a computerized layout.

The Mavica (for Magnetic Video Camera) recorded up to 50 images on two-inch floppy disks with a 570 x
490-pixel CCD sensor rated at the equivalent of ISO 200. It had a single shutter speed of 1/60th of a second, a
manual aperture setting, and three interchangeable lenses in 25mm wide-angle, 50mm normal, and 16-65mm
zoom focal lengths. The system might seem primitive today, but keep in mind that the original Mavica was
developed a quarter century ago!

The emergence of electronic photography in the 1980s was particularly exciting for me. I was doing work for
Eastman Kodak Company (an early leader in digital photographic technology) as a technical writer and helped
introduce products like the first megapixel sensor, the Kodak Photo CD system, and the Kodak DCS-100.
Based on a Nikon F3 body and priced at $30,000, this was one of the first digital cameras I ever used. (Thanks
to a Kodak loan; I certainly couldn't have afforded to buy one!) This pioneering system had a 1.3 megapixel
sensor (about the same resolution as many $100 digital cameras today), and stored its images on an external
200MB hard drive. The total kit weighed 55 pounds, so only well-muscled and well-heeled photographers

22 Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine

Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine 23
who needed to make prints no larger than 5 x 7 images could justify one of these babies.

The whole decade of the 1990s was a tantalizing one, as vendors with their roots in conventional photography
(such as Kodak and Fuji) vied with more electronics-oriented firms like Apple, Casio, and Sony to produce
digital cameras that, at $500 to $1,000, were actually affordable. Unfortunately, early models like the Apple
QuikTake 100 (1994), the Casio QV-11 (introduced late in 1995 with an LCD monitor), and my own first
Epson PhotoPC 600 (1997), were handicapped by what we today would consider to be extremely low
resolution, ranging from 320 x 240 to 1024 x 768 pixels. Digital cameras of that era had just enough muscle to
make them attractive, but not enough to make them useful, except for illustrating web pages or (in my case)
for quick snapshots published as two-inch wide illustrations in books and magazines.

Digital photography really didn't start to take off until the new millennium, when sensors with two megapixels
or more of resolution, built-in zoom lenses, and inexpensive removable storage devices like CompactFlash
began making digital cameras the functional equivalent of their film counterparts (in many ways) at prices that
anyone who really needed digital imaging could afford.

The availability of $100-$200 inkjet printers that could produce inexpensive photo-quality prints didn't hurt
either. Digital photographers might work with their images on-screen, but they still want to be able to create
prints to pass around, send to relatives who don't have electronic mail, or paste into albums. In some respects,
photo printers were the last piece of the puzzle needed to make digital photography popular to the masses.
< Day Day Up >
< Day Day Up >

Transferring Skills
You don't need to have started out as a film photographer to succeed in digital photography, but it certainly
doesn't hurt. As a photographer, if you've shot with film for any length of time you've accumulated a lot of
useful knowledge and skills that help you take better pictures than the average snapshooter. For example, you
know not to shoot into the sun (unless you're looking for a silhouette), and that the tiny built-in flash on a
point-and-shoot camera isn't powerful enough to capture the lead singer at a concert when you're seated in the
balcony.

You've instinctively learned to hold the camera steady when shooting in dim light, or to take multiple shots
when photographing groups, because somebody in each photo is going to be making a face or have his eyes
closed. You might not even be aware of all the photographic techniques you use automatically, but being
photo savvy does offer an important edge when it comes to making outstanding pictures. The good news is
that, despite the differences in technology, most of what you've learned can be transferred directly to digital
photography. An experienced film photographer making the transition to digital photography always has an
edge over a beginner.

The photographic skills you possess become even more useful when you begin editing your digital photos in
Photoshop or another image editor. Terms like lens flare, motion blur, and grain are probably familiar to you.
If you are a more advanced photographer, you might understand techniques like solarization, or perhaps even
graphic reproduction concepts like halftones, mezzotints, or unsharp masking. Those whose perspective is
more pixel- than photography-oriented must learn these terms the hard way. Photography can sometimes
appear to be a highly technical enterprise to those who just want to take a picture.

Fortunately, serious photographers have always been a little gadget-freaky. Early photographers built their
own cameras, and through the years photographers have continued to craft their own custom-built devices and
accessories. Today, you'll still find that some of the coolest gadgets for photography are home-brewed
contraptions. The first photographers also had to be something of a scientist, as they experimented with
various processes for coating and sensitizing plates and film, exposing images by the illumination from
electrical sparks.

Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine 23

24 Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine
Until electronic photography began making inroads, the avid photographer with a home darkroom still
dabbled in photographic chemistry as a way to increase the sensitivity and improve the image quality of his
film through refined darkroom technology. Now that many chemical tricks can be reproduced digitally, photo
alchemy has become the exception rather than the rule. I still have a darkroom in my basement, but it's been
gathering dust for the last decade. The joys of working with images in the darkroom have been supplanted by
computerized image processing.

So, while many of the skills a digital photographer needs to acquire are the same, others are very different.
You no longer need to know how to build a camera or mix chemicals. Instead, a basic familiarity with
computer technology has become something of a prerequisite for using microprocessor-driven digital and
conventional film cameras. But, while photography has become "easier," don't underestimate the wealth of
knowledge and skills you've picked up. The things you already know will stand you in good stead when you
advance to digital photography and computer-enhanced photo manipulation. The skills you can continue to
refine and use fall into 10 broad categories. I'll run through them quickly in the next sections.

Basic Composition

Compositional skills, so necessary for lining up exactly the right shot in the camera, are equally important in
conventional and digital photography. Your finished product should be well-composed regardless of how it
was captured. The chief difference in the digital realm is that image editing can let you repair compositional
errors after the fact. If you want your subjects in a group shot to squeeze together for a tighter composition,
Photoshop lets you rearrange your subjects. If you discover you've overlooked a tree that appears to be
growing out of the head of one of your subjects, you can remove it. However, it's still important to be able to
spot these photographic faux pas when they crop up. The ability to recognize good composition and put it into
practice is an invaluable skill that not all photographic beginners have. Figure 1.4 shows the kind of
compositional corrections a serious photographer makes almost instinctively.

Figure 1.4. Ooops! What's growing out of the statue's head? Simply taking a step to one side improves the
composition.

Lens Selection

Beginners don't think about the choice of a lens or lens setting at all. The only thing they care about is that
their camera can "zoom in" on something far away and make it appear closer or "zoom out" to let them
include more of a scene in the photo. Photographers, on the other hand, understand that the choice of a
particular lens or zoom setting can be an important part of the creative process. For example, telephoto
settings compress the apparent distance between objects, making them appear to be closer together.
Cinematographers use this telephoto trick when the hero of a flick runs in and out of traffic, apparently just

24 Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine

Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine 25
missing vehicles that are actually dozens of feet apart. Wide-angle settings expand in the apparent distance,
giving you vast areas of foreground while making distant objects appear to be farther away. Faces can seem to
be broader or narrower depending on lens selection, too.

The perspective of different lenses and zoom settings operates in similar ways within both the conventional
and digital photographic worlds. The chief difference you'll notice in digital photography is that your choice
of settings is liable to be more limited. The typical digital wide-angle view isn't very wide at all, frequently no
broader than you'd get with a 35mm to 24mm lens on a film camera. The longest telephoto effect you might
achieve can be no longer than the equivalent of 200mm with a film camera (although some newer fixed-lens
cameras exceed the equivalent of 400mm). Digital "zooming" can electronically enlarge a portion of your
image to simulate a longer telephoto lens, but the quality often suffers. Even so, if you know how to use your
lens arsenal with a film camera, you can apply the same concepts to digital imaging.

Selective Focus

One thing that differentiates the knowledgeable photographer from the snapshooter is the ability to use focus
to isolate or emphasize portions of a subject. When one thing is in focus and the rest of the image is blurry,
our eye is automatically drawn to the sharp portion of the image. Whether you're using a conventional or
digital camera, you need to make these decisions at the time you take the photo. Unfortunately, the process is
complicated with most digital cameras, because virtually everything in a digital image might be sharp,
regardless of what lens settings you use. I'll get into the reasons behind this in Chapter 3, "Mastering Camera
Controls." On the plus side, those working with digital images have tools that are not available to the
traditional photographer. An image editor can apply selective focus effects quickly, and in a much more
precise, repeatable, and easily modified way.

Indeed, one of the key advantages of applying effects in an image editor is that you don't have to risk ruining
an original piece of film every time you experiment.

Choosing the Right Film

Just as a painter chooses a palette of colors or a sculptor selects the right piece of marble or clay, traditional
photographers have long been able to select a film with the characteristics they need for their images. Each
variety and brand of film has a personality of its own, which, quite literally, colors your image with subtle
nuances of contrast, texture, and hue. For example, some films are more sensitive than others, offering the
ability to capture images in less light or with shorter shutter speeds to freeze action. Of course, these fast films
tend to have higher contrast, more grain, and muted colors.

Other films manipulate the contrast/texture/hue triad in different ways. Some are known for their bright,
vibrant colors or their ability to reproduce flesh tones realistically. Professional photographers often rely on an
array of films formulated for these characteristics, selecting the film with bright colors and snappy contrast for
product photography to make inanimate objects more attractive. An entirely different film might be the choice
for portrait or wedding photography, when accurate skin tones and a softer, more flattering look are desired.
These films tend to be lower in speed and have more compact grain, so the texture of the film becomes
invisible.

Still other films are selected solely because of their sharpness or finer grain, which makes it possible to make
bigger enlargements. Some films are chosen specifically because they will be used for some sort of darkroom
manipulation, such as "crossprocessing," when a color transparency film is processed in chemicals designed
for color negative films (and vice versa). As you can see, film photographers have a rich set of film tools from
which to choose.

Digital photographers have fewer options when taking a photo, because most of the characteristics of the

Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine 25

26 Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine

digital sensor are hardwired into the solid-state device. However, digital picture takers have many more
options when making the picture within an image editor, as contrast, texture, and color can all be modified to
an extent much greater than is possible through selection of a conventional film alone.

However, you can make some adjustments that control how your digital "film" behaves. Most digital cameras
let you change the sensitivity of the sensor by adjusting the ISO rating (which is roughly equivalent to the ISO
film speed). If you opt for a higher rating to shoot in lower light or at faster shutter speeds, quality will suffer
the same as with higher speed films. Instead of grain, you'll get electronic artifacts, a kind of fuzziness that
does resemble film grain in many ways. Other digital camera controls might let you change the color
sensitivity ("white balance"), image contrast, color saturation ("richness"), and other characteristics. In these
cases, though, you're not really modifying your digital film (the sensor) as much as you're telling the camera's
built-in computer chip's software what image processing changes to make to the raw data as an image is
stored in memory.

The latest digital cameras let you adjust characteristics such as contrast and saturation before you take the
picture, in effect, letting you choose the kind of digital film you're using. The two photos of some artificial
flowers shown in Figure 1.5 were taken seconds apart with a digital camera mounted on a tripod. Thanks to
intelligent design by the camera manufacturer, switching from one saturation level to another required only
pressing a single button and turning a control wheel. Other cameras may require you to make a quick trip to a
menu to effect a similar change. The top photo shows the cloth flowers as they actually appeared in the shade
on an overcast day. The bottom version brings the fake blooms to life with a boost in saturation. I could have
performed the transformation in Photoshop, but the ability to do the same thing in the camera is more in the
spirit of digital photography's "shoot, review, re-shoot (if necessary)" capabilities.

Figure 1.5. Press a button and turn a control wheel or access a menu option to instantly change the color
saturation of these flowers from blah (top) to vivid (bottom).

Most of the time you'll still want to rely on your image editor to adjust colors, change contrast, blur, or
sharpen images. Although digital photographers don't change their "film" much, in the final analysis, they

26 Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine

Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine 27

have much the same capabilities as their film-shooting counterparts, plus many more that can't be equaled
outside a computer.

Darkroom Techniques

Knowledge of darkroom techniques is becoming something of a lost art these days, but if you're the kind of
photographer used to huddling under the dim illumination of a safelight while the acrid fumes of stop bath fill
the air, your knowledge will prove to be invaluable in the digital realm. And, even if you don't have darkroom
experience, you're likely to be more than a little familiar with what can be done in the darkroom. Even
photographers who don't mess with processing and printing themselves tend to understand the techniques, if
only so they can make intelligent decisions when ordering images from their own photolab.

Your darkroom savvy will prove useful when it comes time to edit your images within an application like
Photoshop. After all, there's a good reason why Photoshop's predecessors had names like Digital Darkroom.
The number of darkroom techniques that have been directly transferred to Photoshop is enormous. From the
Dodging and Toning tools to the tremendous range of masking techniques, dozens of Photoshop capabilities
have direct counterparts in the darkroom.

Remember, the words for the first imaging device camera obscura comes from the Latin for "dark room."

Image Editing Fast Track

This book doesn't delve deeply into image editing in Photoshop, but instead emphasizes digital
camera techniques. If you want to learn more about mimicking darkroom and camera effects in
Photoshop, or to master advanced image editing skills, I recommend another book in this series,
Photoshop CS 2.0: Photographers' Guide. If even more sophisticated image manipulation is your
cup of tea, check out Digital Retouching and Compositing: Photographers' Guide. Like this book,
these are written from the photographers' perspective and are available from Thomson/Course
Technology.

Retouching

When I started in photography, retouchers were true artists who worked directly on film negatives,
transparencies, or prints with brush and pigment. They applied their skills in a variety of ways. Some worked
on assembly lines, improving the complexions in millions of high school senior portraits with a few deft dabs.
Others were involved in more painstaking efforts, laboriously restoring treasured family photos or perfecting a
high-ticket portrait. The most skilled artisans were employed in advertising, using both retouching and
compositing skills (described next) to turn a product or fashion photo into a marketing masterpiece. Today,
Photoshop enables those with artistic sentiments who lack an artist's physical skills the ability to retouch
images. Even the most ham-fisted among us can remove or disguise blemishes, touch up dust spots, repair
scratches, and perform many tasks that were once totally within the purview of the retouching artist.

Compositing

Compositing is no longer the exclusive domain of million-dollar advertising campaigns and supermarket
tabloids. Those who want to combine several products into an exotic collage, or show Tony Blair shaking
hands with a space alien, can now do it on their own. If you want to mock up a photo that seems to imply that
you drove the family car to Samoa, the task is within your reach. Or, perhaps your goals are less lofty: All you

Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine 27

28 Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine
want to do is excise that clod of an ex-brother-in-law from the family reunion snapshot. Compositing is the
key. You can perform this magic in minutes using an image editor. Photographic masters of the past had to
spend hours double-exposing images in the camera, or toil for days to meld negatives, transparencies, or
prints. Today, the chore takes only a few minutes, as you can see in Figure 1.6, taken from my book Digital
Retouching and Compositing: Photographers' Guide. It shows a castle on a cliff overlooking the sea. The
castle, cliff, and clouds are from three different photos, yet on first glance, the composite is fairly convincing.

Figure 1.6. This image combines three photos into one composite.

Color Correction

As a digital photographer, you have more flexibility in getting accurate color in your images, but the
techniques you used with film cameras provide valuable background for implementing digital techniques. In
the film realm, color correction is often achieved using filters over the camera lens to compensate for slight
color casts. Other filters correct for the unique requirements of fluorescent lighting. Color correction can also
be done when making a print. If you understand all these methods, you'll know how to use your digital
camera's white balancing tools to provide the best color in your raw image. You'll certainly have a head start
if more drastic corrections are required in an image editor. One advantage digital color correction has over
conventional methods is that your corrections can be updated and refined as you work. If you snap a photo
and the LCD view screen shows that the image is badly balanced, you can adjust your camera and reshoot the
picture. Corrections made with your image editor are also fast, repeatable, and reversible. If you like, you can
even make several changes to your image's color and decide which you like best.

Monochrome

Most of the digital black-and-white photos I've seen resulted when a tyro photographer pressed the wrong
button and set his or her camera for monochrome capture. However, black-and-white photography is alive and
well, and widely practiced by professional photographers and some of the most avid amateurs. These days,
black-and-white pictures are generally produced solely for creative reasons; color is routinely used for
everything else. My local newspaper publishes two or three of my publicity photos each month, and I always
provide them with a color 5 x 7 print from my inkjet, even though 90 percent of the time the photo is
published in monochrome.

28 Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine

Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine 29
From a creative standpoint, though, black-and-white photography is a great tool, letting you strip an image
down to its bare essentials, untinted by the mental images conjured up by full color photography. Tones can
be more stark and moodinvoking in black and white. Images can also display a full range of subtle shades that
are often ignored when color predominates. Serious photographers understand this, and can use the
capabilities of digital photography to explore the artistic possibilities of the world of black and white.

Many of the latest digital cameras are sensitive to infrared illumination, so, equipped with the right filter, you
can even explore the amazing world of black-and-white infrared photography. I'm going to include a section
on infrared techniques later in this book.

Filters

You can never be too rich, too thin, or own too many filters. Slap a filter on the front of your lens and you can
transform a boring image into a kaleidoscopic marvel. Filters let you apply split-field colorization (that is,
blue on top and reddish on the bottom of an image, or vice versa) in the camera, or create a romantic blur in a
glamour portrait. Conventional photography has long been rich with clever filter techniques that add
star-points to highlights, apply serious color changes to images, and polarize sunlight to reduce reflections off
shiny objects. If you've ever packed a stack of decamired (color correction) filters in your camera bag, or
wondered which Cokin filter to buy next, you're already hooked on the optical effects you can get with glass
or gelatin.

Filters are such an important part of serious photography that I'd never consider a new digital camera with a
fixed lens that didn't have a screw mount on the front of the lens for the filters. I'd even give extra weight to a
model that accepted (or could use an adapter for) my extensive collection of 37mm and 52mm diameter
filters. Your knowledge of using filters can be transferred easily to digital photography, and will come in
handy with image editors, which themselves are designed to use software "filters" to modulate images. The
first thing a photographer notices when introduced to Photoshop is how many of the image editor's filters
mimic traditional photographic filters and darkroom effects.
< Day Day Up >
< Day Day Up >

Key Uses for Digital Photography

One aspect of digital photography that we can easily examine from 50,000 feet is the broad range of areas in
which digital technology has become important. This section looks at a few of the traditional photography
realms that have seen the most impact.

Photojournalism

You don't have to be a professional photojournalist to realize that news and digital photography were made for
each other. You don't need to be a working press photographer to use the fast-working capabilities of digital
photography in your own work, either. Figure 1.7 was taken on an "emergency" basis to publicize an art show
at my kids' school. I was able to snap the picture, run home and make a print, and deliver it to the local
newspaper an hour after the shooting session. Newspaper photographers work under tighter deadlines every
day.

Figure 1.7. From snapshot to newspaper in less than an hour. Digital photography is perfect when you need a
photo quickly.

Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine 29

30 Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine

Indeed, digital imaging made strong inroads at newspapers and other news organizations quite early because
the technology is such a good match for the needs of fast-breaking news events. However, several
developments that preceded digital photography actually helped drive the transition.

First, newspapers began to see a real need for good quality editorial color in their pages, not necessarily as a
service to their readers, but because color made good economic sense for them. Economics at newspapers
usually involves advertising dollars more than circulation revenues so, as you might expect, the impetus came
from the ad side of most publications. As advertisers began paying for more pages of spot color or full color
as a way of making their ads stand out and catch reader attention, color in daily newspapers became the norm.

Of course, an advertiser might need only a single page or corner of a page for a full-color ad, providing the
opportunity for the editorial department to grab an almost-free ride with an editorial photo or two elsewhere
on the same sheet. Before long, newspapers had found that editorial color pleased readers. Back in the days
when more larger cities had competing dailies, color-using pioneers discovered that their street sales of issues
featuring color on the front page topped those of their rivals. Circulation boosts help raise ad rates, and by the
time USA Today helped make daily editorial color a standard feature, the question was no longer "Should we
use color?" but "How many color pages can we get?"

Digital photography arrived at the perfect time to answer the newspapers' need for speed and growing appetite
for color images. Electronic images don't have to be processed. A photographer can rush back to the
newspaper, download images to a computer, and immediately select the best shots. Even when digital images
are physically transported, just as film must be, the electronic shoot saves half an hour or more over one that

30 Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine

Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine 31

requires conventional processing. Digital pictures can be transmitted electronically, saving the drive time
required to move film images.

Today, digital cameras are available built on the Canon and Nikon camera bodies favored by photojournalists.
They can shoot color or black-and-white images using the full complement of lenses and aperture/shutter
speed combinations available for conventional photography. With resolutions topping 16 megapixels, these
cameras easily provide the quality needed for news applications, where images will be two, three, or four
columns in most cases, and not ordinarily enlarged beyond that. Indeed, a Nikon DX2 or Canon EOS 1-Ds
Mark II is almost overkill for photojournalism!

As a bonus (depending on how you view it), some digital cameras have the effect of extending the effective
focal length of lenses, which gives sports photographers more telephoto for their buck (even while
photojournalists shooting in tight quarters get less wide angle for their buck, too). Most digital cameras can
capture several frames per second to emulate motor drives, although the number of frames you can fire off is
often limited to seven to ten. Professional digital cameras can often grab dozens of consecutive images at 8
fps or better rates.

Popping out a digital camera's memory card can be much faster than changing a roll of film. An assistant or
photo editor on site can be previewing pictures you took a minute ago while a shoot is still underway. As long
as the removable media holds out, or can be downloaded/erased, digital photo sessions can be open-ended.
Digital images are already in the right format to transmit them by conventional telephone modem, cell phone
modem, satellite uplinks, or other means back to the main office.

Portrait Photography

Portrait photography is something that appeals to professionals as well as amateurs. Perhaps you need a
formal photo of a revered relative to hang over the fireplace. You might want to take your own passport
photos to ensure that the traveler is recognizable. Or, you might simply need a quickie portrait like the one
shown in Figure 1.8 for, say, a wanted poster. I'll tell you more about digital portraiture later in Chapter 6,
"People Photography."

Figure 1.8. Grab a digital portrait in minutes, whether it's for your passport or a wanted poster.

Digital portraiture is attractive to serious photographers and professionals for similar reasons. Traditional
portrait photography has always been something that took a bit of time, although the investment on the part of

Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine 31

32 Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine
the photographer and sitter is somewhat less than that required for a painted portrait. Formal portrait sittings
using conventional film technology were often followed some time later by a session at which proofs were
reviewed, and the client made the final selection. Prints might be delivered at yet another session.

While there is something to be said for the opportunities that can crop up when you get a client back to a
studio three or more times, this procedure has its drawbacks from a marketing standpoint. For one thing,
enthusiasm is always highest at the original sitting, and has cooled off by the time the proofs are available.
Clients might have other things they'd rather spend their money on, or had second thoughts about ordering
that big print they originally planned on.

For the professional photographer, digital portraiture offers an immediacy not available with traditional film
alone. Pros can snap off a series of poses, either captured 100 percent digitally, or using a system that grabs a
digital version at the same time an image is also exposed onto film. Then, they can show the sitter the digital
images immediately and write up the order. Big prints can be sold by displaying on a large screen, or
projecting images into a frame that shows how the image will look on the wall in the larger size.
Photographers have been doing this with conventional proofs for a long time, and digital imaging just refines
the technique.

The digital image also has some advantages when it comes time to retouch a portrait. You'll find that
Photoshop can do all the corrections that you might have used dyes for in the past, plus many more.
Removing bags under eyes, cleaning up a teenager's complexion, de-emphasizing Dumbo-sized ears, and
softening of wrinkles are all child's play for an accomplished digital worker.

The chief disadvantage of digital portraiture is that your output options are a little more limited. Your home or
office inkjet printer probably handles paper no larger than 8.5 x 11 inches, although inexpensive wide-carriage
models can be purchased for less than $500. Professional studios with some money to spend can equip
themselves to print directly to dye-sublimation printers, but those capable of larger than 8 x 10 size are
expensive, and you're still limited to only a few paper surfaces. If you want the full range of paper surfaces
and texturizing effects that portrait photographers commonly sell, you might have to output to film and make
conventional prints. These limitations are gradually vanishing as photographic/digital printing technologies
converge.

Outdoor and in-home portraiture should lend itself to some kinds of digital photography much sooner,
although I think that weddings are probably the most natural application for this technology. Some
photographers like to select their own best shots and present them in an album the couple can use to make a
final selection, but the problem with this approach is that the review often must take place long after the
honeymoon. Digital images, on the other hand, can be reviewed as soon as the pair return, or right at the
reception (if you think that photography holds a high enough priority at that special time I personally don't
think so).

Photoillustration

The third professional area that has seen a dramatic increase in the use of digital photography has been the
related fields of photoillustration and corporate/industrial photography. Photoillustration can take many forms.
For the amateur photographer, it often involves taking attractive photos of hobby collections, such as model
ships or Lladró porcelain. Or, perhaps you're interested in photographing flowers or animals. Figure 1.9 was
taken to provide an illustration for an eBay auction page. Professionals need to capture images of similar
objects, plus a great deal more.

32 Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine

Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine 33
Figure 1.9. Enhance your online auctions using photo illustrations you create yourself with a digital camera.

In some commercial applications, such as catalog work, digital photography has become the way to go. It also
lends itself to other kinds of illustration, too. Certainly, time can be an important consideration. One
professional photographer told me about a client who came into his studio in the morning, helped set up a
digital shot, and was on press with the image that same afternoon.

Today, digital cameras easily provide the quality needed to produce 11 x 17 and larger images. Some other
features of digital cameras might be useful in these applications. For example, the ability to link a camera to a
computer and preview images as they are taken can be helpful in fine-tuning a setup. In industrial
photography, this capability, coupled with remote control, allow digital cameras to be used effectively in
remote monitoring situations. An assembly line, product conveyor, or other factory scene can be
photographed continuously at frame rates that are slower than those produced by video cameras but with
better resolution. Images can be fed to a computer located some distance from the monitoring point and stored
on a large hard disk for review at any time.

Industrial photographers who must document processes for quality or certification studies also like the speed
of digital cameras and the ease of converting images to computer format for use in desktop publishing or other
applications. Medical photographers can also use digital images. Opthalmic photography, for example, uses
special camera setups to photograph the fundus (back inside surface) of the eye. Fluorescein dye injected into
the patient's blood stream glows when illuminated by ultraviolet light, and the resulting patterns of blood
vessels in the fundus can be used to diagnose many illnesses.
< Day Day Up >
< Day Day Up >

Where We're Going

I'll be covering emerging and future technologies in later chapters, but the view from 50,000 feet looks bright.
The "average" resolution of a mid-priced (say, $500) digital camera has been increasing dramatically. As I
write this, just about anyone who is serious about photography can afford a 7- to 8-megapixel camera, and
megapixel monsters from Nikon and Canon with (what seems to me) an astounding 12-to 16-megapixel scope
can cost less than a week at Disney World for a family of four.

Storage will get cheaper and more capacious, too. The last 1GB memory card I bought cost about $50, and
I've seen 6GB minidrive hard disks for digital cameras available for less than $200. These prices and
capacities should seem laughable by the time the next edition of this book is published. (This comes from

Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine 33

34 Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine
someone who paid $300 to upgrade to 32,768 bytes of memory in 1978, and paid $1,000 for a 200- megabyte
hard drive roughly a decade later.)

Look for better zoom lenses, smaller cameras, more efficient viewing systems, faster transfer speeds, and
dozens of features, including time-lapse photography, image stabilization that cancels hand and camera shake,
and ever faster "sequence" photography bursts. These are all becoming available in more expensive digital
cameras; before long you'll find features that you didn't even know you needed standard on digital cameras
costing $200-$300. Image stabilization has already become a common feature on sub-$300 cameras.

The most interesting thing about looking to the future is knowing that much of what is headed our way are
things that we didn't imagine could exist, used in ways we couldn't have predicted. Crystal balls make
predicting technology simple, but the consequences are more difficult to foresee. After all, futurists of the
19th century and earlier had no trouble predicting the advent of the horseless carriage. But not one of them
foresaw smog, traffic jams, or road rage.

In one sense, the chief value of predicting the future lies in the amusement it might provide our ancestors.
Edward Bellamy, in his 1888 book Looking Backward: 2000-1887, insisted that in the 20th century it would
no longer be necessary to go to concert halls to enjoy music. Average citizens would be able to listen to
musical selections of their choice from the comfort of their own homes. Of course, Bellamy wasn't predicting
radio, phonograph records, or even audio CDs. Nor did he have a clue about how MP3s and peer-to-peer file
sharing would affect music distribution. His idea was that we would use telephones (a relatively new
invention in 1888) to call various symphony halls and listen to the live music in progress!

Predicting the future of digital photography is fraught with similar pitfalls. One part is easy. I can safely say
that digital cameras in the very near future will have higher resolutions, greater sensitivity, and much lower
cost than the cameras on the market today. In my first book on digital photography, written in 1995, I
described "cameras with 3000 x 2000 pixel sensors that equal the resolution of ISO 100 film, yet contain
enough fast static RAM to let you shoot 50 to 100 images at four to six frames per second." Today, I own a
$1000 digital camera that shoots 3008 x 2000 pixel images, and, with a fast memory card, can grab 20-30
images at 3 frames per second with no problem. In ten years, the future I predicted has come true.

Other predictions are not so easy. Will digital cameras replace film in all applications? It's now looking as if
that will happen. Will new applications for digital photography be developed once sophisticated equipment
becomes affordable? Will it still make sense to distribute digital images in the same old ways? What are the
key issues we'll be facing as digital photography takes over completely from conventional photography?

Making Your Images Your Own

Copyright extended in 1978 to the artist's lifetime, plus 75 years has through recent court rulings been made
almost perpetual if the copyright holder chooses to exercise all the options. But what good is a copyright in an
age when perfect copies of digital images can be made, and pretty good duplicates can be made of analog
versions by anyone with access to a scanner or color copier?

Photographers who want to protect their work must now face this problem. Every image you create in every
format can be illegally copied and reused without payment. The process might be simple or difficult,
depending on the format and expertise of the person doing the copying. Transparencies can't be easily
duplicated without using a photolab, a slide-compatible scanner, or some other technology. Prints, on the
other hand, can be copied using any flatbed scanner, giving you a fairly good digital file, or taken to a photo
kiosk at a department store and duplicated quickly and easily.

The most annoying possibility of all is that someone will gain access to your original digital
image essentially the same as a camera negative or transparency and then be able to make exact duplicates at
will.

34 Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine

Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine 35
Of course, the copyright law might let you collect from those who use images without permission after the
fact, if you're lucky enough to discover the usage and can prove it's your image. Proof might not be as easy as
you think. Pursuing copyright defense through the legal system is, in any case, very expensive, and the results
are uncertain. Worse, the law is not clearly defined in many areas. Just because someone flagrantly uses your
image does not automatically mean you have an enforceable claim.

For example, consider the image in Figure 1.10, a view of Toledo, Spain from a hilltop outside of town. The
vantage point from this hill is perfect, and El Greco used it several times to create paintings that now hang in
the Metropolitan Museum of Art in New York City, and the Museo del Greco in Toledo. This view is so
popular, that I own no less than five books that use similar photographs on their covers. All the photographs
are by different photographers, but are virtually identical except under very close examination. I discovered
why this is so some years back when I drove up the hill myself and discovered a well-trod scenic overlook
that must have been used by thousands of photographers, and perhaps the Greek painter himself, over the
years.

Figure 1.10. If someone steals this photo for their own use, how will the photographer know?

Some types of images, particularly news photographs, scenics, and other pictures that don't contain unique
subject matter, are difficult to prove as your own. However, even the most unusual image must be solidly
established as belonging to you if you expect to recover damages. This is true if the image is reused in its
entirety, and more difficult if parts of the image were "sampled." I won't get into the differences between new
works and derivative works, or things like "fair use." There are plenty of law-and-the-photographer books
available that address these issues.

Instead, I'll tell you some of the ways digital photographers can "mark" their works much as they use an ink
stamp, embossing, or some other device on conventional photographs.

One way to protect work is to include information in file headers within the digital file itself. A little expertise
and the right disk-editing tools can let a photographer insert a code or text signature in the file in a place
where it won't affect image quality. Of course, anyone with the same expertise and tools can take it right out.

Another method involves overprinting the digital image with a faint watermark, which (supposedly) doesn't
interfere with evaluating the image, but makes it impossible to duplicate or use the file without reproducing
the watermark as well. Of course, you still have to supply the unaltered digital file for reproduction, so this
form of protection is far from complete.

Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine 35

36 Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine
A third method is to use encryption, and works particularly well with images distributed on Photo CD, an
older format that's been largely supplanted by the Picture CD, but which is still used by professional
photographers. Every Photo CD using the original format contains several copies of the image at five to six
different resolutions. The low-res versions can be left unencrypted so they can be viewed on-screen. Some
distributors even give permission to reproduce these images, with proper credit, since they are suitable only
for basic desktop publishing applications anyway. Then, when a buyer wants to gain rights to a
high-resolution version of an image, a decryption code can be purchased by paying the necessary fee.

Encryption is a good solution, but distributing images on Photo CDs is inefficient in some cases. You might
have to send along a hundred different Photo CDs containing the ones the client wants to look at, whereas it
might make more sense to burn a special CD-ROM with only the 100 images that fit the requirements.
Moreover, even if you encrypted a bunch of TIFF files, you'd have to create a special low-res version of each
so the client could view the images on a screen.

A company named Digimarc Corporation has developed a scheme that might solve most of the problems
inherent in other image identification methods. It involves embedding a random code pattern right in the
digital file as a form of noise that is present at such a low level that it can't be detected with the eye. Yet, the
code can be detected reliably even after the image has been subjected to the photomechanical reproduction
process. That is, you can scan in a suspect image that has been printed in a book, magazine, newspaper,
poster, or whatever, and find the embedded digital signature using the right software. The encoded
information is holographic; the entire code can be read from any smaller portion of the reproduced image.
Cropping your work drastically won't disguise the code one bit.

A lot of work remains to make this technology viable. It has been incorporated into a Photoshop plug-in to
add the codes to any images you want. It could even be included in a chip in copy print stations or
photocopiers that would alert the machine that a copyrighted image was present. The code can include
information on how to obtain permission, so if you tried to copy a certain image, a dialog box would pop up
saying, call 800-xxx-xxxx, obtain a code, then key it in to proceed.

For photographers to recover damages, the reliability would have to be established in a court, much as radar
gun manufacturers routinely send experts to testify about the accuracy of their devices the first time they are
used in a given jurisdiction.

There are advantages to this method. The code can be supplied to an image when it is finished, or actually
applied by the digital camera when the picture is first made. It automatically will be reproduced along with the
file, and can't be removed without destroying the image, unless you have the original creator's code. As with
common encryption schemes today, both public and private codes can be incorporated one code that allows
verifying an image and can be freely distributed, and a second, private code known only to the photographer.
That prevents others from falsely stamping other images with anyone else's code. Photographers who sell all
rights to an image could remove their own code, and allow the new owner to embed one of his own.

The Digimarc system also bypasses having to encrypt the images themselves, so they can be freely
distributed, viewed, and used. It doesn't stop unscrupulous people from stealing pictures, but does make it
easier to prove their theft if you catch them. Since Digimarc works with any digital file, including video,
audio, or text, its broad commercial applications are an incentive to work out the last few kinks in the system.

Is Film Dead?

Back in the 1970s, when newsfilm cameras began to be replaced in a few markets by electronic news
gathering (ENG) equipment portable videotape cameras and recorders a trade paper rocked the industry by
publishing an article with the headline, "Is Film Dead?" It was predicted that videotape would replace film in
television news (which it eventually did, although film hung on quite a few years as the favored medium for
local television documentaries), and, eventually, in the production of theatrical motion pictures. A decade

36 Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine

Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine 37
later, pundits were saying the same things about film in all still photographic applications. Today, it's
beginning to look like they were right.

But don't expect film to vanish totally overnight. Many motion pictures today are still shot on color negative
film, and many still photographs are still produced using negatives or transparencies exposed in a camera.
Certainly, digital photography has already taken over some fields, such as catalog photography, completely
and utterly. But not all worlds have been conquered. There are artistic reasons for retaining film capabilities,
too, as anyone who shoots a lot of black-and-white film will testify. The film "look" may someday have a
cachet of its own in an age of digital imaging. If you want the lowest cost media, the broadest range of film
speeds, spectrum sensitivity, and grain characteristics, film today provides options that you needn't expect
from electronic gear anytime soon. In the future, though, it may become a high-priced option as processing
becomes harder to find.

Pricing

If you sell your photographs (or hope to!), digital photography is likely to cause some changes to how pictures
are sold. Should they be adjusted because no processing is required? Can a photographer who works with an
assistant or stylist hire a computer nerd instead, and bill higher rates because the nerd gets paid more?

Or, how about the cost of supplying images? Instead of circulating dupe slides and sending camera originals
or prints only when absolutely necessary, can you use DVDs with full resolution TIFF files? Will clients
expect you to pass along the savings if any to them?

The problem is that photography has always been a difficult business to quantify. A shooting day you can bill
for probably requires two days of preparation. That image shown earlier of Toledo, Spain might be worth
quite a bit to someone who needs it taken at a certain day or time and doesn't want to fly to Spain to get it.
But, if all you need is any old picture from that hillside, a stock house can provide it for a reasonable fee. My
average-looking shot might be good enough, even when compared to one by, say, Ansel Adams, although
Adams' will have a neat moon positioned in just the right spot and have a lot longer tonal scale.

Digital stock photography may revolutionize the industry in several ways, some good, some bad.
Photographers will have many more outlets for distributing their photographs, and the availability to end-users
will become much broader, but overall prices should come down significantly. I can remember when digital
fonts used for desktop publishing cost $100 per typeface. Now you can buy a CD-ROM with 2,000 decent
typefaces for $5.00, and even pro-quality fonts are selling for a tiny fraction of their original price. When
buyers can purchase traditional stock fodder for a few dollars, your own seaside sunsets, Yellowstone Park
scenics, cute kid and kitten photos, and other efforts must either be cheaper (not likely) or better than the
alternatives. Unless you're a "name" photographer, or happen to grab a one-time shot of a news event, the
days of collecting thousands of dollars for a single picture, year after year, might be over. Now that Adobe has
included a stock photo library with Photoshop, prices for individual shots may drop even further.

Look for new ways to bill for photography to emerge as digital photography becomes more mature.

Ethics

Anytime I interview a news organization about digital photography, one of the first things they
emphasize even if I never bring up the topic myself is how they have measures in place to ensure that
images are never, ever altered in a misleading way. Even something as innocuous as moving the pyramids
around for a National Geographic cover, or placing Martha Stewart's head on a model's body for Newsweek
sends shivers of terror down the spines of most journalists and their critics alike.

For thousands of years, "seeing is believing" was more or less true. Viewers of an early motion picture that

Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine 37

38 Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine
showed a train heading straight at the audience fled the theater in terror, because they couldn't comprehend
that this fuzzy, black-and-white image wasn't the real thing. Today, we're confronted with realistic photos of
the President shaking hands with space aliens, or Elvis attending the (most recent) wedding ceremony of his
daughter. It's hard to know what to believe. Some images are obvious fakes, such as the one shown in Figure
1.11, but others are not. How do you know which photos are real?

Figure 1.11. Some digital photos are obvious fakes, but others might be more believable.

As much fun as digital manipulation is, there are several areas in which it must be used with caution. The
most obvious is in news photography. Picture editors have long worked with restrictions on what they could
do and not do. Publishing a picture which shows a male politician hugging a lovely woman, but cropping out
his smiling wife standing right behind him would be misleading, to say the least. News publications keep such
situations in mind.

There are many ways to juxtapose images, crop, or otherwise present a photograph in a way that
misrepresents the truth, even without digital manipulation, and newspapers are used to dealing with this. Even
the NPPA (National Press Photographers Association) concedes that color correction, dodging, burning,
contrast enhancement, and other techniques that have long been used to improve an image without altering the
meaning of its content are acceptable in the digital realm.

Strict rules govern images collected for evidence or forensic purposes in legal applications. Pictures must
portray a scene accurately, to the extent that crime scene photographers often provide many different views
and wide-angle perspectives to show the overall picture before zeroing in on a specific piece of evidence. An
unbroken chain of possession must be established, proving that these are, indeed, the photos taken at that time
and place, rather than some others that might have been substituted intentionally or by accident.

In this regard, digital photography has some advantages over conventional processes. Digital images don't
have to change possession as many times, since a separate processing step isn't required. In addition, images
stored in a vendor's proprietary, raw camera format have been accepted by courts as proof enough that they
haven't been previously altered.

A third area in which photographers must be extremely careful is in advertising. Digital photography lends
itself to the kind of manipulation that courts have frowned on as being misleading. You can do what you like
to make a product look good, but it must still accurately represent the product to the consumer.

38 Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine

Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine 39
Many years ago, there was a case in which a soup vendor put marbles in the bottom of a bowl of soup, to
make all the vegetables rise to the top and make a photograph of the soup appear richer than it really was.
Today, we'd probably just clone extra food chunks using Photoshop. However, any such manipulation could
be done only to the extent that it didn't misrepresent the product, as the soup manufacturer found out. You can
brighten a sweater, add drops of dew to a bowl of fruit, drizzle some digital juice down the front of a
sandwich, but the final image must be representative.

The vagaries of the reproduction process can be compensated for, but not overcompensated. One camera
manufacturer was allowed to include photos in an advertisement that were actually sharper than those
typically produced by the camera in question. (They were shot with a 120 SLR rather than the 35mm camera
being touted.) It proved that by the time the ad was printed, the sharpness of the photos was still less than
similarly sized prints from the advertised camera. Lighting and other aspects of the images were all similar to
what the camera could produce, even though a larger format was used.

Like journalistic and legal photography, advertising illustration is a field in which the pitfalls are well known,
and most photographers, art directors, picture editors, and others know what to look out for. There are several
other areas, such as medical photography, industrial documentation, and so forth, in which deceptive
manipulation is also a potential problem, but there is little incentive to falsify information in these arenas, so
digital photography presents few problems at present.
< Day Day Up >
< Day Day Up >

Next Up
I once visited photographer Maureen Lambray in her New York City Studio soon after she completed work on
The American Film Directors. She told me that she was fascinated with cinema because it is an artform that
began not too long before she herself was born, and that many of its pioneers like Raoul Walsh, Howard
Hawks, and Fritz Lang were still alive (then) for her to talk with and photograph.

Digital photography today is still very much in its infancy. Many of the pioneers who will be revered 20 years
from now are still unknowns today. You have a remarkable opportunity to get in on the ground floor of a new
and growing technology that will change the way we produce and use images. The Fritz Langs and Alfred
Eisenstadts of digital imaging are out there working right now. Don't miss this chance to pattern your work
after these legends of the future, or perhaps even become one of those leading lights yourself.

If you think digital photography from 50,000 feet is interesting, consider the panorama visible from behind
the viewfinder. We'll delve into digital cameras in the next chapter.
< Day Day Up >
< Day Day Up >

Chapter 2. Inside a Digital Camera

Today's digital camera didn't just drop out of the sky, fully formed. Even though digital cameras are a
relatively recent innovation in the 165-year history of photography, the road to all-electronic digital
photography has been a gradual transition, extending over decades. Solid-state technology began to intertwine
itself into the workings of conventional cameras more than 20 years ago, as electronic metering was joined by
electronic shutters, programmed exposure modes, automatic focus, and other computer-oriented innovations
in film cameras. If you first became active in photography in the digital era, you may be surprised to learn that
many of the key features of modern digital cameras were first found in film cameras.

Indeed, since motorized film transport became common, advanced film cameras and the most sophisticated
digital models that followed have had more in common than not. Some of the newest cameras with

Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine 39

40 Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine
interchangeable lenses both film and digital use electronics to set both the shutter speed and lens aperture.
Nikon's G series lenses, for example, don't have an aperture ring at all. You set the f-stop with camera
controls. Many of the early high-end digital cameras were little more than 35mm SLRs with a sensor located
where the film plane ought to be. If you're comfortable using one of the latest film cameras, you'll be right at
home using many of the current digital models.

Studio cameras have needed even less modification to enter the digital world. Electronic studio cameras
frequently have been built through the simple expedient of designing a digital back that replaces the sheet-film
holder of a conventional view camera or the rollfilm back of a medium format camera. Mamiya has a
particularly nice digital back for its 645 line, so the Mamiya ZD digital back makes an excellent complement
to the Mamiya ZD digital camera. Catalog photographers in particular favor solutions of this sort because they
can alternate between capturing digital and film images seamlessly. Mitsubishi, Kodak, and Fuji are among
the vendors of digital camera backs for Hasselblad, Mamiya, Bronica, and Contax, priced between $12,000
and $20,000.

Basing digital camera design on existing film cameras made a lot of sense when digital cameras were
expensive to produce (the sensor of a professional digital camera sometimes cost as much as the rest of the
camera) and sales of such an expensive device were low. Instead of designing a new camera body, vendors
patterned digital models on existing film camera systems and used many of the same parts, including lenses.
That was cost-effective from a developmental point of view. But, as we'll see, that wasn't a very good way of
designing a digital camera which has, after all, its own set of requirements, ranging from sensor size to lens
parameters.

Fortunately, when the cost of high-resolution sensors became reasonable, new cameras were designed from
scratch to take advantage of their capabilities, and to sell at lower prices. Today, even expensive digital
cameras and their accessories have less and less in common with their film counterparts. Olympus, in
particular, with its Four-Thirds designs, has pioneered creating digital cameras that are built from the ground
up to meet the needs of electronic imaging.

This chapter will help you understand how digital cameras work. You'll also learn about the differences
between film and digital cameras, particularly the features that digital cameras have and film cameras do not.
You'll find this nuts-and-bolts information especially useful when shopping for a new camera, because not
every camera has every feature. But even if you already own the digital camera of your dreams, you'll still
find this chapter helpful in sorting out the most useful features from those that are likely to be more trouble
than they are worth.
< Day Day Up >
< Day Day Up >

Guided Tour of a Digital Camera

We're going to start with a generic tour of a typical non-SLR digital camera. Later on, we'll get into the
features of digital SLR cameras, too, but if you want a great deal of detail on how dSLRs work, I recommend
my companion volume, Mastering Digital SLR Photography. There's more than you ever expected to know
about the digital single lens reflex camera.

Digital cameras come in many shapes and sizes. Yours might resemble one of the cameras shown in Figure
2.1, which range from ultracompacts about the size of a deck of cards (like the camera in front) to more
sophisticated models like those shown in the back row.

40 Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine

Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine 41
Figure 2.1. Digital cameras come in all shapes and sizes.

Digital models look even more different from the rear. All of them will sport an LCD viewfinder, but that
LCD may range in size from a puny 1.5 inches diagonally to the generous 2.5 inches shown in the model in
Figure 2.2.

Figure 2.2. From the rear, digital cameras are usually dominated by their LCDs and array of controls.

For this chapter, I've chosen to illustrate how digital cameras work using a medium-range model that has lots
of features. It's an electronic viewfinder (EVF) model, which provides SLR-like operation. Except for the
EVF, you'll find most of the features in this camera in the majority of sub-$1,000 digital shooters.

Your camera may not look exactly like my example, which is based on an existing camera but genericized a
bit in shape and layout to more closely represent cameras that are on the market. Digital cameras vary widely
in appearance, but all of them share certain common components. Although the location for individual
controls and features may differ slightly, and the camera body may be square, cubical, or rounded, virtually all
digital cameras have a taking lens, an optical or electronic viewfinder, a color LCD display panel for
previewing an image and showing menus, a shutter release, and a clutch of control buttons. You'll find the
layouts in many cases are surprisingly similar to my example.

Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine 41

42 Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine
Most also have one or more slots for removable storage, such as Secure Digital or CompactFlash cards; a
built-in electronic flash unit; a top-mounted monochrome LCD panel (found on digital SLRs for displaying
the number of remaining exposures, current camera mode, and other status information); and a serial or USB
port for connecting the camera to your computer when you want to download photos. You also might find a
tripod socket, or an infrared port for wireless transmission of pictures.

We'll look at our example camera from four different views: the front, back, top plate, and the "control" side
(which contains many of the important controls). The other two surfaces of the average digital camera are less
interesting: the bottom side might contain a tripod socket and maybe a compartment for batteries, while the
right side is gripped by the photographer and usually has little more than a cover that hides the digital memory
card access slot.

It's possible that not all the terms in the following tour will be familiar to you. I'll explain about shutter speeds,
f-stops, autofocusing, programmed exposures, single lens reflexes, and other topics later in this chapter.
Consider this a basic orientation tour, and feel free to come back and review once you are comfortable with all
the components of a digital camera.

First up is the front view, shown in Figure 2.3. I've numbered the key features and listed their functions below.

1. Control wheel/jog wheel. This control is usually placed near the shutter release or on the back of the
camera so it can be operated easily by the index finger or thumb of the right hand. Some cameras,
particularly digital SLRs, have two control wheels. This dial is used to change settings when the
camera is up to your eye just before the photo is taken. For example, one camera puts the control
wheel to work changing both shutter speed and aperture settings (depending on whether the shutter
speed or lens opening control buttons are pressed with the other hand). The same camera uses this
wheel to change filters, flip between various white balance settings, and to adjust other parameters.
You'll learn more about each of these kinds of settings later in this chapter and Chapter 3.
2. Shutter release. Pressing the shutter release partway down locks the exposure and focus settings of
most cameras and may trigger a display of information about those settings in the viewfinder. Press
the shutter release down all the way to take the photo.
3. Microphone/speaker. Many digital cameras have voice annotation capabilities that let you record
comments about each photo as it's taken. The microphone can also record sound when the camera is
used in motion picture mode (which is available with many non-SLR models). Cameras also can emit
sounds, either during playback of annotations/movies or to simulate the sound a mechanical shutter
makes when the picture is taken.
4. Handgrip. The handgrip gives you something solid to hold, and helps position your fingers over the
shutter release and other controls on the right side of the camera. In compact cameras, the handgrip
may be small, bordering on the vestigial; as cameras grow in sophistication, their handgrips generally
grow with them.
5. Focus ring. Digital cameras that allow manual focus may place the focusing ring around the lens, for
convenience and for familiarity, because that's how focusing is done with a film camera, and for
design reasons (when the ring physically moves lens elements to achieve sharp focus). Other cameras
may provide manual focus using the cursor pad keys.
6. Zoom-ring. You'll find one of two common systems used to change the zoom setting of a digital
camera. Some cameras have W (Wide) and T (Tele) buttons on the back surface of the camera, which
operate a motorized zoom feature. Others operate more like traditional film cameras with manually
operated zoom, often using a ring around the circumference of the lens.
7. Lens. Every digital camera has a lens of some sort, which usually will be marked with the actual focal
length settings of the lens, plus, often, with the equivalent length for a 35mm camera. Our example
camera has a 7.2mm to 50.8mm zoom lens, the equivalent of a 28mm to 200mm lens on a
conventional camera. Because sensor size varies, the amount of magnification provided by a lens of a
particular focal length varies from camera to camera, so equivalent focal lengths are used to make
comparisons easier. I'll address this issue in more detail later in the chapter.
8. Filter thread. Most lens accessories attach via a screw-on thread on the front of the lens. These can

42 Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine

Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine 43
range from close-up attachments to add-on wide-angle and telephoto converters that enhance the
magnification range of your fixed lens. You can also attach various filters, lens hoods, and other
accessories to the filter thread. The advantage of a standard screw thread on the front of your lens is
that you can attach a wide variety of accessories, including inexpensive add-ons not made by your
camera vendor. Note that not all cameras come with this convenient feature, and some require special
adapters to attach even the simplest lens accessory.

Figure 2.3. Here's the front view of a typical digital camera.

Not shown:

The example camera uses an electronic viewfinder (EVF, an LCD screen viewed through an eyepiece), so this
illustration does not show the window for an optical viewfinder, which is needed for any camera that doesn't
have either an EVF or true through-the-lens viewing.

Next up is a back view of the example camera, shown in Figure 2.4.

1. Eyepiece. Most digital cameras have an eyepiece for viewing the optical viewfinder, electronic
viewfinder, or through-the-lens view. However, an increasing number of compact digital cameras
have no optical viewfinder at all and rely totally on the back-panel LCD for viewing and reviewing
images. Those with viewfinders often have a control for adding plus or minus diopter correction so
that photographers with vision problems can view without needing to wear their glasses. This
particular camera model also has a sensor to the right of the eyepiece to turn the electronic viewfinder
on and off as you move the camera to your eye.
2. LCD view screen. This screen can be used to display menus, for framing your compositions,
previewing images, reviewing images, and for focusing (if your camera doesn't have an electronic
viewfinder or SLR view). Some cameras also display status information, such as shutter speed or
number of shots remaining. With most digital SLR cameras, the LCD is used only for menus, status
display, and reviewing images. The dSLRs that allow previewing images before they are taken are
rather few in number.
3. Battery compartment. Most digital cameras use removable rechargeable battery cells or packs. Others
may use disposable lithium cells or standard AA batteries. The compartment may open on the back of
the camera, the bottom, or one side, depending on your model.
4. Viewfinder controls. You may be able to adjust the type of information displayed in your camera's
viewfinder. Options include a plain view, a view with focus area showing, or a complete view with all
status information (such as focus, exposure, shooting mode) displayed. Choose a plain view to
declutter your viewfinder, or opt for a full display to give you the most information as you shoot.

Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine 43

44 Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine
Some cameras have a viewfinder control that sets whether the LCD or electronic viewfinders are used
alone or in combination, while others rely on menu controls for these features.
5. Spot meter/spot focus control. Digital cameras sometimes have a button that switches metering or
focusing into a "spot" mode that reads from a small section of the image shown in the viewfinder.
You can use this control to finetune exposure or focus to a specific area.
6. Menu button. Pressing this button pops up various setup menus in your LCD display or electronic
viewfinder. Many camera functions not controlled by specific buttons and dials can be set through
menus.
7. Cursor controls. The cursor movement controls serve multiple functions in most cameras. You might
use them to navigate menus, move from picture to picture in review mode, relocate the focusing
"spot," or scroll around enlarged views of images. The button in the center selects the highlighted
menu option or performs some other Enter/Return key function.
8. Quick view/Delete button. Automatically trashes the most recent photo you shot or lets you call the
image back to the LCD screen for review.
9. Ports and sockets. Digital cameras bristle with various ports and sockets, ranging from DC power
jacks to USB connections to audio/video OUT connectors.

Figure 2.4. The back of a digital camera is the "business" end of a digital camera.

The top view, shown in Figure 2.5, has a variety of camera controls.

1. Hot shoe cover. You may find a mount to hold a more powerful electronic flash unit on top of your
digital camera. This "hot shoe" provides electrical contact with the camera, and is frequently protected
by a plastic cover like the one shown in the illustration.
2. Viewfinder swivel. Your electronic or LCD viewfinder may swivel to let you point the camera in one
direction and view from another angle. Some models, like our example camera, allow only a small
amount of adjustment, from 0 to 90 degrees. Others let you swing the LCD out and twist it to many
different angles. Several models let you point both the LCD and lens at yourself (so you can shoot a
self-portrait) and automatically invert the LCD display when you've turned the viewscreen 180
degrees (to avoid the need to look at an upside-down view of yourself).
3. Exposure program modes. Choosing the right combination of shutter speed and lens opening can be
tricky, so camera vendors have computerized the process. The example camera has five different
program settings for (left to right) portraits, action photos, sunsets, night portraits, and text. These are
chosen by pressing the button to the immediate right of the program mode strip. The button marked P
at the far right resets the camera to normal program mode. Many cameras have these program modes
on the main control dial, too.

44 Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine

Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine 45

4. Shutter release. As mentioned earlier, pressing the shutter release partway down locks the exposure
and focus settings of most cameras, and may display those settings in the viewfinder. Press the shutter
release down all the way to take the photo.
5. Control wheel/jog wheel. Also described above, this wheel is used to change settings just before the
picture is snapped.
6. Access cover for flash memory card. You'll find one or more slots for solidstate memory cards
underneath this hinged door.
7. Main control dial. This dial controls the camera's main functions, such as switching the camera on and
off, changing from shooting mode to playback or movie modes, or to set up controls and transfer
images from your camera to your computer.
8. LCD status screen. This monochrome display shows the number of pictures left, exposure program
mode, and other status information. This data is sometimes repeated in the viewfinder.

Figure 2.5. The top of the camera has key controls for camera operation and exposure modes.

With many digital cameras, the left side is crowded with controls like those shown in Figure 2.6.

1. Flip-up electronic flash. The best electronic flash on digital cameras flip up to raise them as far from
the lens as possible, to better reduce red-eye effects (which are accentuated when the lens and flash
are located close together). Usually, raising the flash also turns it on, unless you've explicitly disabled
the flash using your camera's controls.
2. Zoom ring. Changing the magnification of a lens manually with a zoom ring is usually faster than the
motorized zooms some cameras have. Generally, inexpensive cameras with 3:1 or less zoom ratios
use motorized zoom, while more expensive cameras with much longer zoom ratios (like the 7:1 of our
example camera) use manual zoom because it's faster for such long stretches.
3. Macro button. Digital cameras with close-up capabilities usually have a macro button to switch to
close-focusing mode. The button may be on the lens (as in this case) or located elsewhere on the
camera. Many cameras let you switch into macro mode by pressing one of the cursor pad buttons,
avoiding a trip to the menus.
4. Focus ring. Manual focus, if available, is most convenient when a ring around the lens is used to
adjust the focus position.
5. Filter/color/contrast/exposure options. Multifunction dials are the norm with digital cameras. This one
can be set to four different positions. The user then presses the button in the center of the dial and
chooses the option desired with the control/jog wheel. Options for this dial include colored filters,

Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine 45

46 Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine
color saturation, contrast, and exposure compensation.
6. Sensitivity/program mode/white balance/focus/sequence options. In this case the options are MEM
(store current camera settings for instant recall); metering mode (choose segmented, spot, or
center-weighted readings); PASM (select programmed exposure, aperture or shutter priority, and
manual); Drive (single or multiple exposures, plus self-timer and time-lapse); WB (white-balance
options); or ISO (sensor "sensitivity" or "speed").
7. Automatic focus/Manual focus button. I won't use a digital camera that doesn't have this kind of focus
control. Press the button to toggle between automatic and manual focus. That's it! Digital SLR
cameras may have an AF/M slide switch on the lens or camera body. Some digital cameras force you
to switch to manual mode or use menu options to access manual focus. Ack!
8. External flash terminal. While many digital cameras accept detachable flash units, some of them are
so sensitive to the voltage used to trip the flash that you must use only electronic flash offered by or
recommended by the vendor. A better option is a standard external flash terminal like this one, which
allows you to use virtually any third-party flash unit that can be used with a PC cord. If your digital
camera does not have an external PC connection, you may be able to find one that slides into the hot
shoe.
9. Eyepiece diopter correction control. If you wear glasses, use the diopter control to correct for some
kinds of vision problems so you can view your subject without those spectacles.

Figure 2.6. Many frequently used controls are placed on the side for quick access during shooting.

What About Lefties?

Left-handers will notice that all the controls described so far are laid out for the convenience of
right-handed photographers. Those who are left-handed probably have learned to put up with
abuse they suffer both in and out of the computer realm. Everything, from keyboards to mice to
arrow-shaped cursors, is designed for right-handed users. (At least you can change the
orientation of cursors in your control panel!) If you're left-handed (or even just left-eyed), digital
cameras can be a pain to use in some cases. Many lefties report that they have no difficulties at
all. Others, particularly those who don't have full (or any) use of their right hand, are up a creek
with only one paddle.

46 Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine

Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine 47

The only advice I can offer you (other than experimenting to see if a particular camera is easy to
use when held upside down) is to give any digital camera you plan to buy a rigorous workout to
see if the controls are at least workable for a southpaw. Some digital cameras put most of the
controls on the left side, but you still must hold the camera in the right hand and (preferably)
view through the right eye. If you find a camera that is comfortable for left-handers, be sure to
spread the word. There are many "sinister" web pages and mailing lists devoted to your needs,
and you'll have an eager audience.

< Day Day Up >

< Day Day Up >

How a Digital Camera Works

This section provides a quick look at how a digital camera works. You don't really need to understand
quantum physics to operate a digital camera, but a basic comprehension of what's going on inside your picture
box can help you troubleshoot vexing photographic challenges later on; plus, if you're the typical serious
photographer, satisfy your curiosity. While this explanation will be simplified greatly, you'll find the concepts
apply to virtually all the digital cameras on the market today.

Capturing the Image

The birth of a digital picture begins when illumination from a light source bounces off a subject (or is
transmitted through a backlit translucent subject like a stained glass window). Each portion of the subject
absorbs some of the wavelengths of light while allowing others to find their way to your camera's lens ([1] on
the diagram shown in Figure 2.7). In the illustration, I show only two big fat "beams" of rainbow-colored light
passing through the front of the lens, when in truth there are zillions, all composed of photons (light particles)
that behave as if they were waves. (Wave/particle duality is one of those quantum physics puzzles we're going
to steer clear of!)

Figure 2.7. A lot goes on inside your digital camera when a picture is taken, as represented by this diagram.

The light strikes the lens' glass elements, represented by [2] in the diagram. I show just a single convex
element in the illustration, but in real life lenses consist of 4 to 15 or 20 or more elements of varying shapes,
which move in unison or individually, depending on how the lens is focused or zoomed. To make things even

Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine 47

48 Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine
more interesting, lens elements can shift to compensate for camera shake, countering the photographer's
tendency for unsteadiness at slow shutter speeds!

Fixed-focus, non-zooming lenses are the simplest: They are designed to focus an image on the sensor in a
single way, so no provision has to be made for moving the elements. As the lens' functions become more
complex, additional elements are required to correct the image at particular magnifications or focus positions.
The goal in all cases is to direct the light beams ([3] in the diagram) to a sharply focused position on the
camera's sensor, marked with a [4] in the illustration.

The sensor serves as the camera's "film" and, like film, contains substances that are sensitive to light. Most
digital cameras today use either CCD (charge coupled device) or CMOS (complementary metal oxide
semiconductor) sensors. We'll look at sensor types in a little more detail shortly. For now, all you need to
know is that a sensor is an array (a layout of rows and columns) of very tiny light-sensitive diodes. Electrons
are created when enough photons strike one of the diodes. The greater the number of photons that reach a
single photosite, the more electrons that accumulate and the brighter that pixel becomes in your final image.

The minimum number of photons required to register an image determines the "sensitivity" of the sensor; very
sensitive sensors require fewer photons and thus can record an image with less light. When you crank up the
ISO setting of your digital camera (say, from ISO 100 to ISO 800), you're effectively changing this threshold
and telling the sensor to require fewer photons before recording an image for a particular photosite or pixel.
That's why you get a grainy "noise" effect at higher ISOs: The sensor may record electrical interference or
other non-picture information as a pixel at these higher sensitivities. In general, the larger the sensor, the less
noise produced.

Traditional CMOS chips are inherently less sensitive to light, and so more susceptible to noise. Yet, they
require up to 100 times less power to operate (which translates into longer battery life) and are much cheaper
to produce than CCD chips, which is why they have become popular in digital cameras (and scanners). CMOS
sensors have become sophisticated enough that they're seeing use in more advanced cameras (costing $1,000
or more) and, impressively, boast some of the best low-noise characteristics among digital cameras.

With a CCD sensor, the electrical charge is transported to a corner of the pixel array and converted from an
analog signal to a digital value. CMOS chips include transistors at each position in the array to amplify the
signal and conduct it to the analog-to-digital converter through tiny wires. Even though CCD chips
predominated a few years ago, CMOS technology is improving all the time, and is now found in the most
sophisticated digital cameras, including 12- and 16-megapixel models from Nikon and Canon. They're also
used in the simplest devices, including camera phones, web cameras, and toy cameras.

Viewing the Image

Once the light from your subject reaches the sensor, a lot of things start happening. The most important event
is your opportunity to view or preview the image, either through a color LCD display panel on the back of the
camera or through a viewfinder ([5] in the diagram). The electronic nature of a digital camera provides many
viewing options. You may use one or more of the following viewing choices, depending on your camera
model.

• View on the LCD display. These viewing panels, which operate like miniature laptop display screens,
show virtually the exact image seen by the sensor. The LCDs measure roughly 1.5 to 2.5 inches
diagonally (although there are some 3.5-inch LCDs that should find their way into cameras in the near
future). They generally display 98 percent or more of the picture view seen by the lens. An LCD may
be difficult to view in direct light, and some sort of backlighting scheme generally is used to make
them as bright as possible in such illumination. LCDs also can be difficult to see when shooting dim
subjects if the camera doesn't amplify the signal to provide a bright view.
• View through an optical viewfinder. Many digital cameras have a glass direct-view system called an

48 Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine

Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine 49

optical viewfinder that you can use to frame your photo. Optical viewfinders can be simple
window-like devices (with low-end, fixed-magnification digital cameras) or more sophisticated
systems that zoom in and out to roughly match the view that the sensor sees. The advantage of the
optical viewfinder is that you can see the subject at all times (with other systems the view may be
blanked out during the exposure). Optical systems may be brighter than electronic viewing, too. A big
disadvantage is that an optical viewfinder does not see exactly what the sensor does, so you may end
up cutting off someone's head or otherwise do some unintentional trimming of your subject.
• View through an electronic viewfinder (EVF). The EVF operates like a little television screen inside
the digital camera. You can view an image that closely corresponds to what the sensor sees but is
easier to view than the LCD display. The EVF goes blank during exposures, however, and it may
have problems displaying images in low light, or produce ghost images when subjects move.
• View an optical image through the camera lens (with single-lens reflex models). Another kind of
optical viewfinder is the through-the-lens viewing provided by the SLR camera. With such cameras,
an additional component (not shown in the diagram) reflects light from the taking lens up through an
optical system for direct viewing. Some kinds of cameras use a mirror system. The mirror reflects
virtually all the light up to the viewfinder. Then, the mirror swings out of the way during an exposure
to allow the light to reach the sensor instead. Sometimes, a beamsplitting device is used instead. A
beamsplitter does what you expect: It splits the beam of light, reflecting part to the viewfinder and
allowing the rest of the light to strike the sensor.

As you might guess, because a beamsplitter steals some of the illumination for the viewfinder, neither the
sensor nor the viewfinder receives the full intensity of the light. However, the system does mean that the
image needn't blank out during exposure.

When is an Lcd not an Lcd?

Kodak was the first to introduce a digital camera with an "LCD" display screen that isn't an LCD
at all. The EasyShare LS633, introduced in mid-2003, featured an OLED (organic light emitting
diode) display. Because an LED doesn't need backlighting, OLED displays use much less battery
power. As a bonus, these displays look great from any viewing angle.

Taking the Picture

When you press the shutter release button ([6] in the diagram), the camera takes the photo. Some cameras
have actual mechanical shutters that open and close for a specific period of time (representing the shutter
speed), while others perform the same function electronically. Electronic shutters actually "dump" the image
from the sensor just prior to the exposure, then make the sensor active again just for the interval when the
picture is taken, providing a very good simulation of how a mechanical shutter works.

If you partially depress the shutter release before pushing it down all the way, most cameras carry out a few
last-second tasks. Your automatic exposure and focus are locked in. If you like, you can reframe your image
slightly and the camera will keep the same exposure and focus settings. With autofocus, the focus is adjusted
by maximizing the contrast of the main subject, or by more sophisticated means. For example, Sony pioneered
an autofocus system using a Class 1 laser that projects a grid of light on your subject. The camera then
analyzes the contrast between the subject and the laser pattern. This system is particularly good in low light
levels in which the subject's contrast under the existing illumination may not be enough to focus easily. Other
cameras use a simple LED lamp as a focus assist light.

If the existing illumination is not sufficient, the electronic flash ([7] in the illustration) may fire. Most cameras
interpret the amount of electronic flash light bouncing back from the subject to calculate the correct exposure.

Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine 49

50 Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine

Some use a preflash a moment before the main flash to calculate exposure. The preflash also may cause the
irises of living subjects to contract slightly, reducing the chance of red eye. The best systems elevate the
on-board flash as high as possible above the lens, as shown in the dSLR example in Figure 2.8, which
produces more natural lighting and further reduces red-eye effects.

Figure 2.8. The higher the flash and farther from the lens, the less likely red eye will crop up.

The shutter speed has no effect on the exposure from the electronic flash in most cases, because the electronic
flash's duration (1/1,000th to 1/50,000th second or less) is much briefer than the typical shutter speed. While
lens openings can adjust exposure within limits, most electronic flash provides additional exposure flexibility
by emitting varying amounts of light, providing a shorter exposure at closer distances.

The electrical signals from the sensor, once converted to digital form within the electronics of the camera, are
stored on digital media, such as CompactFlash (CF), Secure Digital (SD) cards, or some other media, such as
the Sony Memory Stick, xD card, or Hitachi MicroDrive mini hard disk. The time needed to store an image
can be as little as a few seconds to 30 seconds or longer, depending on the size of the image, the compression
method and ratio you've selected, and the "speed" of the storage media. (Some memory cards take
significantly longer to store an image than others.) I've located the electronics and storage at [8] on the
diagram, but the actual position can vary widely by digital camera vendor and model. The most popular
position seems to be the right side of the camera, or in a compartment on the bottom.
< Day Day Up >
< Day Day Up >

Making Sense of Sensors

Understanding how sensors operate can be important, because, ultimately, the resolution and quality of your
digital image is largely determined by the solid-state capture array. Certainly, the lens that focuses the image
on the sensor has an equal role, but optical technology is fairly mature, dating back to the invention of the first
magnifying glasses (used for reading) in the 13th century. Even fairly recent developments, such as aspheric
(non-spherical) lenses and optics created especially for digital cameras involve little more than refined
application of well-understood principles.

Digital sensors are a whole new ballgame. The first CCD sensors were created around 30 years ago, and
Kodak introduced the first megapixel sensor (with an incredible 1.4 million pixels) in 1986. The technology
has improved in several directions, the most important of which for digital photographers is the increase in

50 Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine

Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine 51

resolution that has come hand in hand with a huge reduction in price. We now have sensors with 16 million
pixels or more, and the cost to produce them has dropped enough that cameras that can capture 6 to 8
megapixels or more can be purchased for much less than $1,000. During the life of this book, I fully expect
the pixel counts to double while the cost is cut in half.

The most interesting developments seem to be coming in technology like that used with the Foveon X3
sensor, the first sensor capable of capturing any of the primary colors of light at any pixel position. As odd as
it might seem, standard digital camera sensors only grab part of a picture with each exposure, using a
mathematical process called interpolation to make some educated guesses about the missing pixels. This will
all become clear after a bit of explanation.

Figure 2.9 shows a six-by-six pixel section of a CCD or CMOS sensor. The full sensor for a 6-megapixel
camera would have something like 3,000 columns and 2,000 rows of pixels, but the array essentially would be
identical to the section in the illustration. For the figure, I've broken the sensor section apart into two layers.
The gray layer on the bottom is the actual photosites that capture photons for each pixel's information. The
colorful layer on top consists of colored filters that each pass red, green, or blue light and block the other
colors. Because of the filters, each of the six million pixels in the sensor can register only the amount of one
of these three colors at its position.

Figure 2.9. A typical sensor consists of a sensor array overlaid with a series of filters arranged in a mosaic
pattern.

Of course, a pixel designated as green might not be lucky enough to receive green light. Perhaps that pixel
should have registered red or blue instead. Fortunately, over a 6-million pixel range, enough green-filtered
pixels will receive green light, red-filtered pixels red light, and blue-filtered pixels blue light that things
average out with a fair degree of accuracy. Algorithms built into the camera can look at surrounding pixels
and calculate with some precision what each pixel should be. Those are the pixels saved when an image is
stored as a JPEG or TIF file on your memory card. (Saving the uninterpolated RAW data is another option,
which I'll explain in Chapter 4.)

For reasons shrouded in the mists of color science, the pixels in a sensor array are not arranged in a strict
red-green-blue alternation, as you might expect to be the case. Instead, the pixels are laid out in what is called
a Bayer pattern, which you can see in Figure 2.9: one row that alternates green and red pixels, followed by a
row that alternates green and blue filters. Green is "over-represented" because of the way our eyes perceive
light: We're most sensitive to green illumination. That's why monochrome monitors of the computer dark ages
were most often green on black displays. Some sensors alternate true green pixels with a sort of
blue-greensensitive pixel called emerald in an attempt to provide even better color correction.

Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine 51

52 Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine

Film Guys Do Digital

The Bayer pattern was first suggested by Dr. Bryce E. Bayer, a Kodak scientist, about 30 years
ago. The first real digital camera was built by Kodak's Steve J. Sasson around the same time. In
the 1980s, Kodak introduced the first megapixel sensor. I mentioned other Kodak digital
innovations in Chapter 1. Do you get the feeling that there is a reason why the Father of Film has
become the #1 seller of digital cameras in the United States?

The arrangement used is called a mosaic or Bayer pattern, and one result is that a lot of the light reaching the
sensor is wasted. Only about half of the green light reaching the sensor is captured, because each row consists
of half green pixels and half red or blue. Worse, only 25 percent of the red and blue lights are registered.
Figure 2.10 provides a representation of what is going on. In our 36-pixel array segment, there are just 18
green-filtered photosites and 9 each of red and blue. Because so much light is not recorded, the sensitivity of
the sensor is reduced (requiring that much more light to produce an image), and the true resolution is
drastically reduced. Your digital camera, ostensibly with 6 megapixels of resolution, actually captures three
separate images measuring 3 megapixels (of green), 1.5 megapixels (of blue), and 1.25 megapixels (of red).

Figure 2.10. A sensor's mosaic captures 50 percent of the green information, but only 25 percent of the red and
blue.

The Unfulfilled Promise of Foveon Technology

The Foveon sensor is a CMOS device that works in a dramatically different way, but to date hasn't been
perfected enough to threaten to displace traditional Bayerarrayed CCD and CMOS sensors. It's long been
known that the various colors of light penetrate silicon to varying depths. So, the Foveon device doesn't use a
Bayer filter mosaic like that found in a conventional sensor. Instead, it uses three separate layers of
photodetectors, which are shown in Figure 2.11 colored blue, green, and red. All three colors of light strike
each pixel in the sensor at the appropriate strength as reflected by or transmitted through the subject. The blue
light is absorbed by and registers in the top layer. The green and red light continue through the sensor to the
green layer, which absorbs and registers the amount of green light. The remaining red light continues and is
captured by the bottom layer.

52 Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine

Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine 53
Figure 2.11. The Foveon sensor can record red, green, or blue light at each pixel position, with no interpolation
needed.

So, no interpolation (called demosaicing) is required. Without the need for this complex processing step, a
digital camera can potentially record an image much more quickly. Moreover, the Foveon sensor can have
much higher resolution for its pixel dimensions, and, potentially, less light is wasted. Of course, as a CMOS
sensor, the Foveon device is less sensitive than a CCD sensor, anyway, so photons are wasted in another,
different way. Compare its coverage pattern, shown in Figure 2.12 with that of the conventional mosaic in
Figure 2.10.

Figure 2.12. The Foveon sensor captures each color at every pixel position, using three layers of photodetectors.

Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine 53

54 Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine

To date, the Foveon sensor is used in only a few cameras, including two models from Sigma. Although the
vendors call their cameras "10-megapixel" cameras, they are, in truth, 3.3 megapixel models. Because no
interpolation has to be done to calculate the true color value of pixels, a camera equipped with a Foveon
sensor does provide higher effective resolution, even if the absolute number of pixels is lower. So far, camera
buyers have not flocked to this emerging technology.

CMOS vs CCD

After reading the previous section, you might conclude that CCD sensors are headed for the dustbin and that,
in the very near future, we'll all be using the next generation of CMOS or Foveon-style imagers. In the real
world, while the newest technologies have a lot of theoretical advantages, there are currently some
disadvantages that need to be overcome. This next section discusses some of the techie issues. If you're not
interested in nuts-and-bolts, you can skip ahead.

CCD and CMOS sensors have been duking it out for the past several years. As recently as a few years ago,
most digital cameras, especially the highest-quality models, used CCDs. As I mentioned earlier, CMOS
devices were most often used in lower-end cameras. Today, that distinction is no longer valid. Canon, which
uses a type of CMOS sensor in its higher-end cameras, and Foveon, which produces the sensor used initially
in the Sigma SLR, have mastered the art of coaxing high-quality images from CMOS sensors. Even Nikon has
joined the fold with its $5,000 pro-model D2X, and the recently discontinued Kodak DCS Pro/n and Pro/c
cameras used CMOS sensors, too.

The two types of sensors manipulate the light they capture in different ways. A CCD is an analog device.
Each photosite is a photodiode that has the ability (called capacitance) to store an electrical charge that
accumulates as photons strike the cell. The design is a simple one, requiring no logic circuits or transistors

54 Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine

Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine 55
dedicated to each pixel. Instead, the accumulated image is read by applying voltages to the electrodes
connected to the photosites, causing the charges to be "swept" to a readout amplifier at the corner of the
sensor chip.

A CMOS sensor, on the other hand, includes transistors at each photosite, and every pixel can be read
individually, much like a computer's random access memory (RAM) chip. It's not necessary to sweep all the
pixels to one location, and, unlike CCD sensors, with which all information is processed externally to the
sensor, each CMOS pixel can be processed individually and immediately. That allows the sensor to respond to
specific lighting conditions as the picture is being taken. In other words, some image processing can be done
within the CMOS sensor itself, something that is impossible with CCD devices.

However, the chief advantage of CMOS technology is that CMOS chips are less expensive to produce. They
can be fabricated using the same kinds of processes used to create most other computer chips. CCDs require
special, more expensive, production techniques. So, in the war between CCD and CMOS, there is quite an
array of pros and cons facing each type of sensor. Things become even more interesting in the case of the
Foveon chip, which has some additional limitations that I haven't mentioned yet.

First, you'll recall that light of all three primary colors strikes the Foveon chip, passing through the blue,
green, and red layers. Some light is absorbed in each layer, so a much smaller amount reaches the bottom
layer, providing reduced color information. In addition, a phenomenon called blooming, or the spreading of
light from one layer to another, can occur. If one layer is overexposed, the excess light can "bleed" into the
layer below. When you add these to the reduced sensitivity and extra noise of CMOS chips, you can see that,
as promising as the Foveon sensor is, there is plenty of room for improvement before digital camera vendors
abandon CCD technology.

There are other characteristics of sensors that are relevant and interesting, such as the infrared sensitivity that's
inherent in CCD sensors. Indeed, camera vendors must install infrared blocking filters in front of sensors, or
include a component called a hot mirror to reflect infrared to provide a more accurate color image. Luckily
(for the serious photographer) enough infrared light sneaks through that it's possible to take some stunning
infrared photos with many digital cameras. That's a capability we're going to have a lot of fun with in Chapter
7, "Scenic Photography."

A relatively recent development is the "4/3" standard proposed by Kodak and Olympus, which will establish a
common 4:3 aspect ratio for sensors used in digital cameras, along with a standard size sensor and back focus
distance. If adopted, it would mean that, among other things, lenses for digital cameras would perform
similarly regardless of which camera they were used with.

How Shutters Work

Digital cameras can have either a mechanical shutter, which opens and closes to expose the
sensor or an electronic shutter, which simulates the same process. The type of shutter your
camera has depends a great deal on the kind of sensor that is built into your camera. In terms of
the kind of shutter they can use, sensors fall into one of two categories, interline and full frame.
Both terms deal with how the sensor captures an image. (Don't confuse full-frame shutter types
with "full-frame" sensor sizes.)

The interline sensor, developed originally for video cameras, isolates an entire image in one
instant, and then gradually shifts it off the chip into the camera electronics for processing and
conversion from an analog signal to digital format. While this process is underway, a new image
can be accumulating on the chip. That's because the interline sensor is, in effect, two sensors in
one; while one sensor is exposed to light, the other is masked. The two sensors exchange places
so that the previously masked sensor can then accept light while the sensor that was previously

Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine 55

56 Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine

exposed is shielded so it can offload its image to the camera's electronics. This capability was
important for video cameras, which expose their sensors at a rate of 30 frames per second.
Because of this ability to isolate an image in a fraction of a second, interline sensors can function
as an electronic, non-mechanical shutter.

A full-frame sensor, in contrast, is a single sensor that cannot isolate an image while it is still
exposed to light. The sensor must be physically covered, uncovered to make the exposure, and
then covered again while the image is transferred to the camera's electronics. If the sensor is still
exposed to light when an image is moved from the chip, the image will be smeared by
illumination that strikes the photosites while the old image is being shifted. That calls for a
mechanical shutter.

< Day Day Up >

< Day Day Up >

About Digital SLRs

Most of the technology I've described so far applies equally to digital SLR, EVF, and
optical-viewfinder-equipped cameras. (Funny how it seems easiest to differentiate the main camera types by
the systems they use for viewing images!) There are some differences between how a dSLR works and how
other cameras work, and you'll find all the gory details in Mastering Digital SLR Photography, also by
Thomson Course PTR. However, if you're planning to purchase a digital SLR like the one shown in Figure
2.13, you'll want to keep the following technical differences in mind.

• Interchangeable lenses. Digital SLRs let you remove the lens mounted on the camera and substitute
another. That gives you extra flexibility in choosing optics to broaden your view or extend your reach
to far-away subjects. In addition, some lenses have extra capabilities, such as image stabilization and
close-up focusing that you'll find useful.
• Through-the-lens viewing. A dSLR lets you view the exact image the sensor will see, without the
electronic fuzziness you get in an LCD or EVF. That makes these cameras easier to use to view,
focus, and compose images before you take the picture.
• Better quality. A digital SLR will use much larger sensors with larger pixels, producing improved
quality and lower noise than a non-SLR camera of the same (or even higher) pixel count. A
6-megapixel dSLR can easily provide better results than an 8-megapixel point-and-shoot camera
simply by virtue of its better sensor.
• No LCD preview. Digital SLRs use a mirror to bounce light to the viewfinder. The mirror flips out of
the way at the time of exposure to let the light strike the sensor instead. That means you can't use the
LCD on a dSLR to preview your picture.

Figure 2.13. A digital SLR actually uses a lot of the same technology as its non-SLR cousins.

56 Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine

Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine 57

In most other respects, however, digital SLRs are very similar to other digital cameras in their technology.
They use sensors, electronic/mechanical shutters, lenses equipped with apertures to control the amount of
light, circuitry to capture and store images on memory cards, and controls that are very much like those found
on other digital shooters as well as late-model traditional film SLR cameras.
< Day Day Up >
< Day Day Up >

Selecting a Digital Camera

For the serious photographer, buying a camera can be a major undertaking. The point-and-shoot set may
purchase a camera based on one or two marginally relevant characteristics, such as whether the camera is
small enough to tuck into a pocket, or whether it has 7 or 8 megapixels of resolution. You know the type:
They want a camera that takes "sharp, clear" pictures and don't care about much else. Because they just want
snapshots, evaluating camera features in depth is just not worth the time for them.

Those who see photography as something more than a tool to record vacation pictures have more at stake in
their selection of a camera, especially when you consider that digital cameras still command a premium price.
If you pay $800 to $1,000 (or a lot more) for a digital camera and find it won't do what you want, you might
be stuck with your bad decision for a long time. Not all of us are as lucky as the friend of mine who can afford
to buy a new digital camera every six months (nor even as fortunate as his close relatives, who receive the
hand-medown cameras on a schedule that they eagerly anticipate).

One way to choose a camera is to read the reviews found in magazines and websites. Unfortunately, such
reviews will tell you how a particular camera is suitable for the kinds of photographs the reviewer takes but
may not have information that applies directly to you. The reviewer may not even be a photographer. You're
best off if you rely on the most highly regarded review sites, such as www.dpreview.com or www.cnet.com.

In general terms, however, this next section should help you, because I'm not going to recommend specific
camera models. Instead, I'll provide some perspective on what kind of features you can expect to find, and
how (and why) they may be important to you.

You may have purchased your first digital camera before you bought this book. Or, perhaps you're the type
who likes to learn everything he can before making a purchase. You may be reading this chapter to make sure
that the digital camera selection you make is a wise one, and that your camera will suit your needs for a very
long time. In either case, it's very likely that the digital camera you now own or plan to buy in the near future

Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine 57

58 Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine
will not be the last one you ever purchase. No matter how feature-laden your current camera is, or how
lengthy the feature list of the camera you have your eye on, there will be a better one with more features at a
lower price in the future, whether it's six months from now or two years from now.

For most of us, a digital camera isn't a lifetime investment. It's more of a purchase like a computer: a tool we
buy now so we can enjoy the advantage of current technology, but with the full expectation of replacing it
somewhere down the road with a smaller, better, more powerful, more flexible device at a lower cost. No
matter what type of digital camera buyer you are veteran, beginner, or someone who hasn't dipped a toe into
the digital waters yet this section will assist you.

Defining Your Expectations

Among my many photography-oriented jobs, I was the manager of a camera store for two years. Saturday was
the traditional day when the store was flooded with eager photography fans who poured in, cash in their
feverish hands, all posing the same question: What's the best camera to buy? My response was always: What
do you plan to do with it? The question "what's the best camera?" is a little like "what's the best car?"
Depending on what you plan to do, your needs, like your mileage, may vary. Do you want basic
transportation? Do you want an exotic machine that makes your friends drool with envy? Are you looking for
a sports utility choice that does everything well once you master its demanding features? You'll find analogs
for all these automobile types within the digital camera realm from the economy compact to the luxury model
with everything from power steering to power zoom.

Not even the well-heeled with unlimited funds can escape the need to establish a list of needs. Digital
photography is one area in which the most expensive equipment may not be the best. You can spend a lot, and
still end up with a camera that won't do what you want, or, as is more likely, which is so complicated to use
that you'll never figure out how to take the pictures you want to take.

I owned one particular digital camera for more than 18 months and still was unable to remember which menu
I needed to switch to manual focus, and even when I managed that, focusing required pressing an odd
combination of buttons. Changing from fully automatic exposure to shutter priority mode (necessary for
shooting sports pictures when you want to use the highest shutter speed possible) was equally
time-consuming. Digital photography was a tough town before the invention of mode dials.

I eventually switched to a newer non-SLR camera that makes manual focus a dream. I press a button labeled
AF/MF until an MF (manual focus) indicator appears in the viewfinder and then rotate a focus ring around the
base of the lens. A reassuring readout in the viewfinder shows the current focus distance. If I want to change
to aperture priority mode, all I need to do is twist a dial to the "exposure mode" position and turn a jog wheel
next to the shutter release until "aperture priority" appears in the viewfinder. If a particular camera confuses
someone who has used hundreds of different cameras over a span of many years, think how a model like that
might confound someone trying to master their first digital camera!

There are many other factors to consider in addition to ease of use. Rather than buy the wrong camera, you'll
want to think about this checklist before you go shopping.

Do You Plan to Edit Your Images?

For the avid photographer, image editing is usually part of the game plan. You may intend to spice up your
digital photos with filters, correct colors, or combine several images to create a whole new picture. For many,
that sort of image editing is one of the main reasons for switching to digital photography. The photo shown in
Figures 2.14 and 2.15 shows the kind of image editing you can do, although in this case the image is a
misguided attempt to remove by retouching a hand-railing that obscures a gargoyle perched on Notre Dame
Cathedral in Paris. If you're going to be manipulating pictures that extensively, you'll want a camera with the
most flexibility, easiest access to manual features, extra resolution, and many bonus capabilities that give you

58 Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine

Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine 59
pictures worth editing.

Figure 2.14. Go ahead and snap this photo with your digital camera you can fix it in your image editor!

Figure 2.15. Retouching can sometimes work miracles, as in this attempt at removing the handrail from the photo
above.

However, other digital photographers are part of a second group which intends to do little or no editing.
Maybe you're shooting home exteriors and interiors for a real-estate firm. Or, you might need pictures of
items for your eBay auctions and will be doing nothing more than cropping your images. Perhaps you require
some quickie product shots for an online catalog. In all these cases, the best camera for the job may be one
with the widest-angle lens (for those home interiors) or the best close-up capabilities (for those eBay
auctions). A less expensive camera may be in order, or, at least, one with different capabilities than the one a
devoted Photoshop freak will be considering.

Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine 59

60 Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine
What Are Your Resolution Requirements?

Some types of photography demand higher resolutions. If you want to create large prints (anything larger than
8 x 10 inches), you'll need multimegapixels. If you want to crop out small sections of an image, you'll want a
camera with 6 to 8 megapixels or more.

On the other hand, if your primary application will be taking pictures for display on a web page, or you need
thumbnail-sized photos for ID cards or for a catalog with small illustrations, you may get along just fine with
a 4-megapixel camera (if you can still find one!).

Tip from the Pros

Before choosing a lower-resolution camera, keep in mind that you'll be limiting yourself to
low-resolution photography. Pro photographers know that if you need a feature, such as higher
resolution, even 10 percent of the time, it makes sense to go for a more advanced camera that
includes it. Those one-in-ten shots will soon easily pay for the extra expenditure. Should you
take the low-res road, maximize your pixels by composing very, very carefully.

When choosing a camera's resolution, remember to consider not only the top resolution, but all the optional
resolution and compression options the camera provides. For example, a 5-megapixel camera that can capture
2560 x 1920 pixel images will also include controls that let you choose other resolutions, such as 1600 x 1200
or 1280 x 960. Compression ratios can also be user selected and can range from ultra-high quality (and
ultra-large) TIF (on a diminishing number of cameras) and RAW files to several levels of JPEG squeezing
that trade some image quality for smaller file sizes. These options can come in handy when you need a lower
resolution so you can shoot at a faster frame rate for "motor drive" picture sequences, need to cram more
images onto a film card, or simply don't need the higher resolution.

We'll take a closer look at resolution and compression in Chapter 4, "Dealing with Digital Camera File
Formats."

Do You See Photography as a Creative Outlet?

Like those who plan to make Photoshop their second home, creative photographers will want cameras with
the most convenient manual controls, accurate viewfinders, and other options. Perhaps you need a model that
can be adapted for infrared photography. Would you like to take time-lapse photos of a flower opening or the
moon setting? Are you interested in photography of fireworks? Do you have a special yen to specialize in
black-and-white photography? There are cameras that are more suited to each of these pursuits than other
models, so if creative flexibility is high on your list, you'll want to choose your camera carefully.

How Many Pictures Do You Take in One Session?

If you often find yourself shooting pictures far from easy access to your computer, you'll want a camera and
accessories that cater to the needs of the high-volume photographer. Some types of media have capacities of a
gigabyte or more. If you take many photos, or need to use the highest resolution settings and file formats of
your camera, storage capabilities will be a major consideration.

Should your plans include taking lots of photos at one time, or over the course of a trip, buy a camera that uses
high capacity media that's priced low enough so you can afford to stock up. Also consider buying one of those
stand-alone hard disk drives that can download all the images from your digital camera. If you have a 40GB
or 60GB iPod, you're all set: there's a simple add-on for the iPod that lets you download images. You don't

60 Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine

Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine 61
even need an iPod Photo. As a bonus, you can also listen to music!

Another alternative is taking along a laptop to hold your images, or to serve as a gateway to upload images to
your Internet web space. All you need is a PC Card to Compact Flash (or SD card) adapter for your laptop,
like the one shown in Figure 2.16. Or, you can connect a card reader, like the one shown in Figure 2.17, to
your laptop using a USB or FireWire cable.

Figure 2.16. A laptop equipped with a PC Card slot and an adapter can serve as a home away from home for your
digital photos.

Figure 2.17. Or, use a portable card reader that can be powered by your laptop's USB connector.

Will Your Camera Be a Long-Term Investment?

Photography is one field populated by large numbers of technomaniacs who simply must have the latest and
best equipment at all times. The digital photography realm rarely disappoints these gadget nuts, because
newer, more sophisticated models are introduced every few months.

Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine 61

62 Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine
If you want to remain on the bleeding edge of technology, a digital camera can't be a long-term investment.
You'll have to count on buying a new camera at least once a year. Keep in mind that you'll be duplicating your
investment in the near future, and your old camera will be worth more as a hand me down to another user than
as a trade-in. Don't spend $5,000 for a 12-megapixel digital SLR today if you'll be unhappy and unable to
afford the upgrade next year when 16-megapixel models cost $4,000. (Hey, it could happen!)

On the other hand, many digital camera buyers aren't looking for a shiny new gadget: They want pictures.
Once they acquire a camera that does the job for them, they're not likely to upgrade until they develop an
important job their current model can't handle.

If you're in the anti-upgrade camp, you should get a camera that does the job for you at a price you can afford.
If your desires are large but your pocketbook is limited, you may want to scale back your purchase to make
those inevitable frequent upgrades feasible.

Is Size Important?

Some intermediate or advanced cameras are small enough to slip into a pocket so you can carry them
everywhere. You can even find 5-megapixel models that verge on the tiny, although they probably don't offer
the degree of manual control a photo enthusiast requires. Other cameras with roughly similar features and
comparable price tags may be so chunky you'll need a camera bag, perhaps with wheels, to carry them around.
On closer inspection, you'll find there are some differences (say, in storage media or zoom lens range), so
you'll need to decide if the tradeoffs are worth the smaller size.

Is the Camera Likely to Be Lost, Stolen, or Damaged?

Will you be taking your digital camera on your boat for some exciting regatta photos? Planning on toting
along a camera during your next free climb up Terror Cliff? Will your 9 year old be taking the camera to
school? Don't spend a lot for a digital camera that will be used under perilous conditions unless you can afford
to write off the camera if it's lost, stolen, or damaged. Certainly, your homeowners or other insurance policy
may pay for the camera once but it's always a good idea not to try to shift the responsibility off on the nice
folks you may rely on to replace your home the next time it burns to the ground. It's more prudent to avoid
that kind of exposure in the first place and purchase a less expensive camera for hazardous duty.

Do You Want to Share Lenses and Accessories with a Conventional Film Camera?

Do you already own a Nikon, Canon, Pentax, or Minolta film SLR camera with lots of lenses and other
accessories? You may be able to justify a digital camera built around a camera body similar to the one used by
your film camera. The camera need not come from Nikon or Canon, either. Other vendors, such as Kodak
(until recently) and Fuji build cameras based on models from the two market leaders.

The list of compatible gadgets that can be shared is long, ranging from electronic flash units through filters,
close-up attachments, tripods, and so forth. I have a zillion glass filters and accessories in 52mm size to fit my
existing 35mm cameras. I was happy to discover a digital camera that used 49mm accessories, because a
simple 49 to 52mm step-up ring let me use my existing accessories with the newer camera. Figure 2.18 shows
a more drastic adaptation, from 28mm up to 52mm. Check compatibility now, before you purchase your
digital camera.

Figure 2.18. Adapter rings let you get double duty from your filters and other lens accessories.

62 Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine

Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine 63

Tip from the Pros

Buy yourself some step-up and step-down rings in common sizes, even if you don't need them
now. In an emergency, you can always borrow a filter from a colleague, but an adapter ring may
be more difficult to scrounge up. Try out the rings on your camera ahead of time, too. A large
step-up may mean that the ring and accessory intrude on the optical viewport of your camera,
obscuring part of the frame. In that case, be prepared to switch to the LCD viewfinder. Finally,
these rings can vignette the corners at wide-angle settings. Buy "thin" rings if you can.
Otherwise, you might need to take a step backwards and zoom in a tad to get the framing you
want without clipping the corners.

Choosing a Camera Category

Until recently, digital cameras fell into a few neat categories, defined by the resolution of the sensor. Beginner
cameras had about 4 megapixels; intermediate cameras were those with around 5 megapixels, while advanced
cameras topped out in the neighborhood of 7-8 megapixels. For more resolution than that, you had to spend
big bucks for a professional camera.

The reason for the neatly defined categories is that sensors were easily the most expensive component of the
camera, accounting for a large percentage of the vendor's cost. So, you never saw a 7-megapixel model with
nothing but point-and-shoot capabilities; the manufacturer would still have to charge $1,000 for the camera
because of the sensor's cost, and who would pay $1,000 for a camera not loaded down with other features?

The prices for sensors have dropped dramatically, so today we're seeing compact, fully automated cameras at
relatively low prices with 7- and 8-megapixel sensors, but with a limited feature set that allows them to be
sold at bargain prices. These are sold side by side with more fully featured cameras with longer zooms,
electronic viewfinders, and other goodies, but basically the same 7- to 8-megapixel resolution. You'll see 6 8
megapixel SLRs selling for $1,000 from the same vendors who offer a $4,000 version with the same
resolution but capabilities that have been beefed up in other areas. The lines between digital camera categories
are blurring. Even so, it's useful to describe the various categories as they still exist, because your digital
camera will probably fit into one of them, one way or another.

Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine 63

64 Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine
Basic Point-and-Shoot Models

Aside from webcams and a few "toy" digital cameras, any model that falls roughly into the $100 $150 price
range is probably a point-and-shoot camera. These will have a top resolution in the 4 to 5-megapixel
neighborhood. There will be a builtin flash good for shots from 5 to about 11 feet, and either a non-zooming,
fixed focal length lens or a very modest 3:1 ratio zoom lens. Focusing may be fixed or limited, and there will
be few, if any, manual controls. You'll frame your picture through a simple optical viewfinder and view it on a
1.5- to 2.5-inch LCD. In point-and-shoot tradition, you simply press the button and everything else is taken
care of for you.

Intermediate Models

The largest number of digital camera models fall into the intermediate category, because cameras of this type
appeal to casual snapshooters who want sharp, clear pictures and a bit of versatility in their pixel grabber.
Most of these cameras have from 5 to 7 megapixels and cost $200 to $600. They have more powerful builtin
flash units, automatic focus and exposure, and zoom lenses with 6:1 or greater ratios. There may even be a
few manual settings, such as exposure compensation for backlight (photos taken toward the sun) or full
manual control, including shutterpriority and aperture-priority options. Anyone who is not a photo buff can
probably take any picture they care to create with a camera of this sort.

Advanced Models

While intermediate cameras are numerically more common, slightly more advanced models have become a
hotbed of interest as prices have dropped. Your $500 to $600 can buy an 8-megapixel (or more) camera with a
6:1 to 12:1 or longer zoom range, more manual control options, and other bonus features. These cameras
appeal to those who aren't yet photo hobbyists, but who realize they can take better and more interesting
pictures with a digital camera that has a little more horsepower. These models are liberally studded with
multifunction buttons and dials, lots of modes, dozens of menus, and thick manuals. They're often sold with a
rich bundle of image-editing software. Those who need, or think they need, the features these cameras boast,
should prepare to spend some time learning to use them. A whole new category of advanced models is likely
to be spurred by the introduction of the Canon Digital Rebel XT, which boasts 8 megapixels of resolution, but
is a true SLR camera, even though aimed at consumers rather than the "prosumers" discussed in the next
section.

Prosumer Models

What's a "prosumer" camera? This particular kind of camera has been around since before the digital age a
model with truly sophisticated features, offering a knowledgeable photographer lots of control, but lacking in
some of the features and ruggedness that a professional absolutely must have. These are the cameras that
advanced amateur photographers favor, because their lower cost frees up money to purchase extra accessories.
They are also the cameras that pros use on weekends for their personal photography, or which they purchase
as cheap, extra cameras to supplement their "good" equipment. Today, most prosumer cameras are digital
SLRs, like the one shown in Figure 2.19, or EVF models.

Figure 2.19. Serious photographers are turning to digital SLRs.

64 Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine

Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine 65

For about $1,000 to $5,000 (and prices are dropping all the time), you can buy a 6- to 14-megapixel camera
with enough precision optical glass to detect life on Jupiter. Some of these are based on existing SLR models
from Nikon or Canon, or are designed from the ground up as a digital SLR camera.

What do you get for the extra cash? Prosumer cameras either have interchangeable lenses or have fixed zoom
lenses with 7:1 to 10:1 ratios that practically eliminate the need for removable lenses in the first place. They'll
have through-the-lens viewing or, at the low end, an electronic viewfinder. There will be enough builtin
memory buffer to let you snap off five or six frames individually or in motor drive mode without pausing for
breath.

What's the downside? Some of these cameras are a little like conversion vans, offering the disadvantages of
both the conventional photographic worlds without all the advantages of the digital dominion. For example,
they may be heavier than most digital cameras, yet not as flexible as a traditional film camera in some ways.
Because the digital sensors are smaller than the 24 x 36mm size of the standard 35mm film frame, a given
lens's field of view may not be what you expect. Your 55mm normal lens becomes a short telephoto lens, and
your 105mm portrait lens becomes a longer telephoto. The price of a prosumer camera is a lot to spend on a
device that will certainly be obsolete (from a technological viewpoint; not in practice) alarmingly soon.
However, if you've got the bucks and need the features, go for it.

Professional Models

For $5,000 to $30,000 or so, you can get yourself a camera that is in virtually all respects the equal of a
professional film camera. If you need one of these, you don't need me to tell you so. However, if you're not
ready to venture into this territory, you may wonder exactly what all the fuss is about. Why does Nikon, for
example, offer both pricey professional digital cameras as well as a seemingly similar "amateur" model with
roughly the same resolution for one-third the price?

A few hours with these stablemates and you'll know the reason. Professional digital cameras are built with
stronger, more rugged bodies, often made of titanium or some other metal, rather than the lighter
polycarbonate frames found in prosumer models. Pro cameras may be quicker to start up, allow snapping
longer sequences of photos at the camera's full resolution, use faster and more accurate automatic focus and
exposure mechanisms, or have beefier power sources. They also may have full-frame sensors so you don't
have to calculate in your head the "true" focal length of the lens you are using. If your living depends on
getting a photo, you'll want one of these (actually three of these) in your camera bag.

Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine 65

66 Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine

Tip from the Pros

A particular photo shoot may be important to you (say, it's your first trip to Europe and you don't
want to go home empty-handed) or to someone else (a client is paying you for the pictures). It's
always a good idea to have a backup for every important piece of equipment. If you're working
professionally, three workable alternatives is probably the bare minimum. That means three
cameras, three electronic flash units (if you're using external flash), three times as many batteries
as you think you're going to need, and triple the number of digital memory cards that you believe
a job requires. The equipment needn't be 100 percent identical in all cases; functional
equivalency is often sufficient. So, you'll want to carry a backup digital camera of some sort
along with your main camera, perhaps some alkaline batteries to supplement your heavy-duty
rechargeables, and a clamp-style camera stand in case your tripod suddenly falls to pieces. When
I was a traveling photojournalist, I insisted on having at least three of even the most expensive
pieces of equipment: one to use, one as a backup, and one in the shop being repaired.

< Day Day Up >

< Day Day Up >

Choose Your Weapons

Narrowing down your choices to a specific camera category is only half the job. Because features can vary
widely even within a category, you'll still need to decide which capabilities are "must haves" and which are
"nice to haves if they don't cost an arm and a leg." This section will outline your chief options among lens
requirements, resolution, storage options, exposure controls, and viewfinders.

Understanding Lens Requirements

The lens is the eye of your camera. It captures and focuses the light from your scene onto your sensor. Your
digital camera's lens affects the quality of your images as well as the kinds of pictures you can take. What
really counts is the quality of the lens, the amount of light it can transmit, its focusing range (how close you
can be to your subject), and the amount of magnification (or zooming) that the lens provides. Here are some
of the things you should consider.

Lens Aperture

The lens aperture is the size of the opening that admits light to the sensor, relative to the magnification or
focal length of the lens. A wider aperture lets in more light, allowing you to take pictures in dimmer light. A
narrower aperture limits the amount of light that can reach your sensor, which may be useful in very bright
light. A good lens will have an ample range of lens openings (called "f-stops") to allow for many different
picture-taking situations.

F-stops are actually the denominators of fractions rather than actual measurements, so an f2 opening is larger
than an f4 opening, which is in turn larger than an f8 aperture, just as 1/2 is larger than 1/4, which is larger
than 1/8. Each stop you open up (going from, say f8 to f5.6) doubles the amount of light reaching the sensor.

You generally don't need to bother with f-stops when taking pictures in automatic mode, but we'll get into
apertures from time to time in this book. For now, all you need to know is that for digital photography, a lens
with a maximum (largest) aperture of f2.8 is "fast," while a lens with a maximum aperture of F8 is "slow." If
you take many pictures in dim light, you'll want a camera that has a "fast" lens. The sensitivity of the sensor,
discussed later, is also important for low-light pictures.

66 Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine

Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine 67
Digital camera lenses tend to be slower than their prime lens (non-zooming) counterparts. That's because
digital optics are almost always zoom lenses, and zoom lenses tend to have smaller maximum apertures at a
given focal length than a prime lens. For example, a 28mm non-zoom lens for a 35mm camera might have an
f2 or f1.4 maximum aperture. Your digital camera's zoom lens will probably admit only the equivalent of f2.8
to f3.5 when set for the comparable wide-angle field of view. The shorter actual focal length of digital camera
lenses also makes it difficult to produce effectively large maximum apertures.

What about the minimum aperture? The smallest aperture determines how much light you can block from the
sensor, which comes into play when photographing under very bright lighting conditions (such as at the beach
or in snow). Digital cameras don't have as much flexibility in minimum aperture as film cameras, partly
because of lens design considerations and partly because the ISO 100 speed of most sensors is slow enough
that apertures smaller than f5.6 or f8 rarely are needed. A digital camera's shutter can generally reduce the
amount of exposure enough that resorting to the f11, f16, or f22 minimum apertures found on film cameras
isn't necessary. (If you're using a digital SLR that uses the same lenses as a film camera, you'll of course have
access to these smaller apertures.)

Seasoned photographers will know that a second reason for using a smaller lens aperture is to increase
depth-of-field. The smaller the lens opening, the more depth-of-field that is available. In practice, a
phenomenon known as diffraction reduces the effective sharpness of lenses at smaller apertures. A particular
lens set at f22 may offer significantly less overall resolution than the same lens set at f5.6, even though that
sharpness is spread over a larger area. Depth-of-field is also tied to the absolute focal length of the lens, too,
though, so digital cameras with those 7mm to 35mm zoom lenses already have enough depth-of-field, even at
maximum aperture, that stopping down provides no additional benefit. So, unless you're using a digital SLR
that accepts conventional lenses, the minimum aperture available isn't particularly important.

Manual Exposure Adjustments

Digital camera lenses that have a selection of f-stops adjust themselves for the proper exposure automatically.
The only exceptions are the least expensive models with lenses that cannot be adjusted for exposure at all.
Serious photo-hobbyists and professionals might also want the option found in higher-end cameras of setting
the lens f-stop manually to provide special effects or more precise exposure. These controls come in several
forms, and I'll discuss them in the exposure control section later in this chapter.

Zoom Lens

A zoom lens is a convenience for enlarging or reducing an image without the need to get closer or farther
away. You'll find it an especially useful tool for sports and scenic photography or other situations where your
movement is restricted. Only the least expensive digital cameras lack a zoom lens. Some offer only small
enlargement ratios, such as 2:1 or 3:1, in which zooming in closer produces an image that is twice or three
times as big as one produced when the camera is zoomed out. More expensive cameras have longer zoom
ranges, from 4:1 to 10:1 and beyond.

In addition, there are two ways to zoom a lens. With so-called optical zoom, the relationships of the individual
elements of the lens are changed to produce the changes in magnification. Because the lens elements can be
fine-tuned, this produces the sharpest image at each lens magnification. For example, a typical zoom might be
described as having 10 elements in eight groups. Each of the groups can be moved individually to provide the
desired magnification and the best image. The optical science behind these relationships is complex, and we
should be thankful that our spanking new digital cameras have 50 years or more of research backing the
optical component.

Digital cameras also feature digital zoom, in which the apparent magnification is actually produced by simply
enlarging part of the center of the image. Your camera's viewfinder will probably have a frame or other
indicator that shows just what portion of the viewed image will be magnified to simulate the zoom setting.

Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine 67

68 Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine

Digital zoom is less sharp than optical zoom. Indeed, you can often do a better job by simply taking the
picture at your camera's maximum optical zoom setting and enlarging the image in your image editor.

That's all you really must know about zoom lenses. However, here's a bit more detail for the technically
inclined. It's easiest to think of zoom ranges in terms of magnification, but the magnification of an image is
actually measured in something called focal length. Focal length is a ratio between the size of the film or
sensor image and the distance from a position in the lens to the plane of the film or sensor. Focal length is
used to measure whether a lens provides a wide-angle, normal, or telephoto view with a particular size sensor
or film.

So, a 6.5mm focal length lens or zoom setting would provide a wide-angle picture with a .5 inch sensor, while
a 12mm focal length lens or zoom setting would provide a telephoto effect. Camera vendors often express the
focal length of digital camera lenses in terms of how they are equivalent to the common lenses used with 35
mm cameras. They do this because most camera buffs already know that a 28mm lens is a wide-angle optic on
a 35mm camera, a 50mm lens is a "normal" lens, and a 135mm lens is a particular kind of telephoto. Digital
camera sensor size can vary from model to model, so the actual focal length of a digital camera lens means a
lot less than its 35mm "equivalent."

That Crop Factor

With digital SLR cameras, the situation becomes a little more complex, because the lenses used
actually are, in many cases, designed for 35mm film cameras. Although dSLR sensors are larger
than those found in non-SLR digital cameras, they are still, by and large, smaller than a full
35mm film frame. (Although some digital SLRs do use full-frame sensors.) That means it's
necessary to use a crop factor (sometimes called a lens multiplier) to calculate the effective focal
length of a lens. Common crop factors are 1.3X, 1.5X, and 1.6X. Mount a 100mm lens on one of
these cameras and your field of view will be equivalent to 130mm, 150mm, or 160mm
respectively even though the range of sharp focus (or depth-of-field) remains the same as what
you'd expect with a 100mm lens.

While the crop factor increases the telephoto reach of a lens, as shown in Figure 2.20, it also
reduces the perspective of wide-angle lenses. Your 18mm super-wide lens becomes an ordinary
29mm wide angle when mounted on a camera with a 1.6X crop factor. To gain true wide-angle
coverage, digital SLR owners often have to purchase new, expensive lenses.

Figure 2.20. A 50mm lens on a full-frame camera produces the view at left. On a dSLR with a 1.5X
crop factor, the view looks more like that of a short telephoto lens.

68 Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine

Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine 69
Because the elements of a lens are moving around in strange and mysterious ways, the effective aperture and
focus of a lens may vary as the magnification settings change. A lens that has an f2.8 maximum aperture at its
wide-angle setting may provide only the amount of light admitted by an f3.5 lens at the tele position. Focus
can change, too, so when you focus at, say, the wide-angle position and then zoom in to a telephoto view, the
original subject might not technically still be in sharpest focus (although the huge amount of depth-of-field
provided by digital camera lenses might make the difference impossible to detect). You'd notice the
differences only when using the camera in manual exposure or focusing mode, anyway. When set to autofocus
and autoexposure, your camera will provide the optimum setting regardless of zoom magnification.

Focus Range

The ability to focus close is an important feature for many digital camera owners. One of the basic rules of
photography is to get as close as possible and crop out extraneous material. That's particularly important with
digital cameras, because any wasted subject area translates into fewer pixels available when you start cropping
and enlarging your image. So, if you like taking pictures of flowers or insects, plan to photograph your
collection of Lladró porcelain on a tabletop, or just want some cool pictures of your model airplane or stamp
collections, you'll want to be able to focus up close and personal.

What's considered close can vary from model to model; anything from 12 inches to less than an inch can be
considered "close-up," depending on the vendor. Fortunately, those short focal length lenses found on digital
cameras come to the rescue again. Close focusing is achieved by moving the lens farther away from the sensor
(or film) and a 7.5mm lens doesn't have to be moved very far to produce an image of a tiny object that fills the
viewfinder.

The closer you get, the more important an easily viewed LCD display (that screen on the back of your camera)
becomes. You'll also want automatic focusing. Lower-cost cameras with non-zooming lenses may not have
focusing abilities at all; they provide sufficiently sharp focus at normal shooting distances (a few feet and
farther) and, possibly, at a particular close-up distance (typically 18 to 24 inches). More expensive cameras
have automatic focus that adjusts for the best setting at any distance. Higher-end cameras might also have
manual focusing that can let you "zero" in on a portion of your image by making everything else seem blurry.
Figure 2.21 shows an extreme close-up photo.

Figure 2.21. Get as close as you like with a digital camera that has macro capabilities.

Add-on Attachments

Photographers have been hanging stuff on the front of their lenses to create special effects for a hundred years
or more. These include filters to correct colors or provide odd looks, diffraction gratings and prisms to split an
image into pieces, pieces of glass with Vaseline smeared on them to provide a soft-focus effect, and dozens of

Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine 69

70 Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine

other devices. These range from close-up lenses to microscope attachments, to infrared filters that let you take
pictures beyond the visible spectrum. Add-on wide-angle and telephoto attachments are also available, along
with slide copy accessories and other goodies. If you're serious about photography, you'll want to explore
these options.

Make sure your camera's lens has a standard screw thread size (usually from 28mm to 55mm or larger) so you
can use standard accessories. Some cameras require special attachments for the front of the lens, which may
lock you into accessories from that particular vendor. Fortunately, enterprising third-parties are quick to create
adapters that work with the most popular digital models. A few notorious models have lens elements that
move forward through what would be the front of the lens, making attachment of any sort of filter rather
difficult. Check out your intended camera model carefully before buying.

The Myth of Resolution

True or false: You can never be too rich, too thin, or have too much resolution in your digital camera.

Bill Gates and most fashion models would probably agree with the first two points, but the third assertion is
open for discussion, even though most buyers of digital cameras seem obsessed with the number of pixels
they can capture. Can you actually have too much resolution?

I'd amend the statement to say something along the lines of, "buy and use as much actual resolution as you
really need for your photography, unless the extra pixels won't cost you much." The salient points are that,
first, you don't need to pay a huge extra amount for resolution that you won't really use, and, second,
resolution overkill can actually hamper your creativity and provide a productivity bottleneck. Someone who
could get along just fine with a medium resolution $400 camera would be crazy to pay $1,000 or more for a
much higher-resolution model if they won't be using that resolution now. After all, next year, when they might
actually need that much pixel-grabbing power, cameras that offer that much resolution will probably cost only
$400. In this case, waiting until you really need the resolution would save $200, and you'd end up with two
usable cameras!

Even if the pixels are available, you shouldn't always use every last bit of resolution in any case. Consider
these examples:

• Most of your photos are posted on the web in sizes that rarely exceed 600 x 400 pixels. You often
crop your photos, and want to start with a nice, sharp original before reducing it to the size you'll
display on your web page. A 4- or 5-megapixel camera will do a great job and provide enough
resolution for general photography and reasonably sized prints.
• You love sports photography. A digital camera with 6 megapixels will certainly let you grab some
great sports shots, and even give you enough resolution that you can enlarge portions of the image to
simulate having a longer telephoto lens than you really have. Yet, it's not always a good idea to take
sports pictures at the max res setting. When action is fast moving, you may lose some great shots
while you wait for a high-resolution photo to be stored so you can take the next one. That's why
cameras like the Nikon D2X actually use lower resolution (cropping the image from 12.4 megapixels
to 6.8) for its fastest 8 frames-per-second continuous shooting rate. In addition, the amount of buffer
memory built into your camera can be crucial. Some 6-megapixel cameras can take only one or two
pictures at a time. Others can fire off a half dozen or more before the buffer fills up. When rapid fire
or photo sequences are important, you may get better overall pictures by dialing back to a lower
resolution if you gain the ability to shoot faster and smarter.
• You're documenting your vacation, and want to snap off 100 photos a day. You don't have access to a
laptop, nor any other means of emptying your digital film cards on a regular basis. If you want to
shoot everything using your camera's top resolution using the RAW file format (more on that later in
this book), you'd better count on having one 1GB memory card for each day of your trip. Of course,
you can review your photos as you take them, or at the end of the day, and delete the real clunkers.

70 Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine

Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine 71
But even so, your costs for digital "film" can really add up, and you really only need that much
storage once or twice a year. Who says digital cameras are cheaper to operate than film cameras? The
answer may be to shoot tighter and scale back the resolution of most of your shots to a smaller size or
use a higher compression ratio that costs you a bit of sharpness. Can you really see the difference in a
5 x 7 print of you standing atop Mount Everest taken at the 8-megapixel setting from one taken at 6
megapixels?

Keep in mind that resolution is largely a myth, anyway. Pictures taken with a highquality 6-megapixel camera
can easily look better and sharper than those grabbed with a model touting 8 megapixels of resolution. How
so? Consider all these factors that can affect the quality of the finished image.

• True resolution. As mentioned earlier in this chapter, your 6-megapixel camera isn't really capturing 6
million pixels of information in the first place. If it uses a Bayer matrix sensor, it's grabbing a
maximum of 50 percent of the green pixels, and a maximum of 25 percent of the red and blue pixels.
The other pixels are created through interpolation, a scheme that has a high degree of accuracy
(because adjacent pixels are a very good indicator of what a particular pixel should be), but is far from
perfect.
• Shutter speed/camera motion/subject motion. Your subject might be moving. The photographer might
not know how to hold a camera steady and might be a little jittery. You may be taking a picture at a
long telephoto setting, which automatically magnifies camera or subject motion. The camera's shutter
speed may be too slow to freeze the subject while all this movement is going on. As a result, a
"high-resolution" photo may be less sharp than one taken at a lower resolution at a higher shutter
speed, with a steadier photographic hand or an unmoving subject. Something as simple as a tripod
might magically transform your medium-resolution camera into one that can thoroughly thrash the
results of a handheld high-res model.
• Lighting/contrast. An image of a higher-contrast subject, or one taken with higher-contrast lighting,
can look sharper than a low-contrast picture of similar subject matter.
• Focus. A sensor can only capture a sharp image if it's sharply focused. A poor autofocus system or
inept use of manual focus can reduce the sharpness of even the highest-resolution image.
• Optics. Even the highest-resolution sensor will be only as good as the lens used to capture the image.
Fortunately, lenses designed for digital cameras are capable of producing many times the resolution
that a typical sensor can resolve, so a stellar optic doesn't necessarily have much of an advantage over
a poor one from a resolution standpoint. However, lenses, particularly zoom lenses, can have other
problems. Perhaps you've left a big thumbprint on the front of the lens. Maybe you neglected to use a
lens hood, or the lens hood is poorly designed, so extraneous light enters the optical system and
reduces contrast and detail. A really cheap lens might not focus all three colors of light at the same
point, producing color fringing. A poor lens or one badly used can reduce the final resolution of an
image far more than the lack of a few million pixels.

Image resolution (the number of picture elements, or pixels your camera can capture) can determine (along
with the quality of your lens and sensor) how sharp your images will be. Resolution is measured by the
number of pixels wide by the number of pixels high that can be captured by your camera's sensor. The number
may not be strictly true, as some cameras "manufacture" pixels by a mathematical process called
interpolation, but it generally provides a good measure of a camera's relative sharpness. You can establish
how much resolution you require by estimating how many of your photos will fall into one of these
categories:

• Low-resolution requirements: Most pictures for web pages or online auctions; photos that won't be
cropped very much; pictures that won't be printed in large sizes. If all your photos are of this type,
you'll probably be able to get away with a camera with as little as 1600 x 1200 pixel resolution. In the
long run, though, if you're serious about photography, you'll probably want a camera with a little more
resolution muscle.
• Medium-resolution requirements: If you often need to trim out unwanted portions of your pictures or
will be making somewhat larger prints, you'll need a higher-resolution camera with resolution of 2048

Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine 71

72 Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine
x 1536 pixels as a bare minimum.
• High-resolution requirements: If you like to do lots of cropping or make prints that are 5 x 7 to 8 x 10
inches or larger, you'll need a high-resolution camera. Today, these are considered models with 6 to
14 megapixels or more. In the future, you can expect the number of pixels to increase and the prices
to come down, so that even the highest-resolution models will be easily affordable by serious digital
photographers.

You'll probably want a choice of resolutions within a given camera, so you can select the best resolution for
the job at hand. For example, if you're shooting a large batch of pictures for a web page or online auction,
you'll want to have a relatively low resolution, so you can take more pictures, more quickly, with a minimum
amount of resizing required in your image editor. You'll also want to be able to quickly switch to maximum
resolution to snap a picture you know you'll want to print out.

Your camera's storage format options can also have a bearing on sharpness. Digital cameras usually store
photos in a compressed, space-saving format known as JPEG (Joint Photographic Experts Group). JPEG
format achieves smaller file sizes by discarding some information that may not be needed in most cases. The
JPEG format has various "quality" levels. If sharpness is very important to you, look for a camera that lets you
choose the highest quality JPEG mode when you need it, or which has an optional mode for storing in a
higher-quality format such as TIFF (Tagged Image File Format).

One of the first things you'll want to do when you get a new digital camera is set it up on a tripod and take a
series of pictures at your camera's Standard, Fine, SuperFine, Ultrafine, and TIFF modes. Then compare the
shots to see just how big the difference is. With several cameras that I use, it's difficult to see any difference
between the default Fine setting, which yields relatively compact 3MB image files, and its RAW mode, which
creates files that are at least twice as large. We'll look at file formats in a little more detail in Chapter 4.

Storage Options

Few people select a digital camera based on the kind of storage it provides and, in any case, your storage is
usually very open-ended. Virtually all digital cameras have removable storage of some type. Those that don't
make you connect your camera to your computer from time to time to download existing pictures to make
room for more. In most cases, however, if you need to take more pictures in a session, just buy an additional
digital "film" card (usually called CompactFlash, Secure Digital, xD, Sony Memory Stick, or some other trade
name). It's unfortunate that vendors seem so intent on introducing more and more memory card formats,
because that makes it difficult to swap cards among different cameras and devices.

There are even differences between media that are otherwise compatible. For example, CompactFlash cards
come in both Type I and Type II varieties. The chief difference between them is that Type I cards are 3.3mm
thick, whereas Type II cards are 5.5mm thick (and thus can have higher capacities). Hitachi's Microdrives are
actually miniature hard disks in a CompactFlash Type II configuration. Not all digital cameras can accept both
Type I and Type II cards, and not all that are compatible with Type II memory cards work with the more
power-hungry Hitachi Microdrives.

Today, CompactFlash and SD Cards are the most common memory devices in use. CompactFlash has been
vying for the capacity championship, with cards holding 4 to 8GB. Secure Digital Card (SD Card) and the
similar MultiMediaCard (MMC) formats are making some in-roads. (You can use a MultiMediaCard in a
camera that accepts SD Card memory; the camera will write more quickly to the SD Card.) There is even a
miniSD card, about two-thirds the size of a regular SD Card. Some Fujifilm and Olympus cameras use the
tiny xD-Picture Card. If you were hoping that camera makers would standardize on a single digital film
format, we're definitely moving in the wrong direction! The good news is that as formats proliferate, the
prices for digital memory cards have plummeted.

Some kinds of memory cards claim to have faster writing speeds than others, even within the same format.

72 Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine

Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine 73
I've never found the speed of my digital film to be much of a constraint, but if you shoot many action photos,
sequences, or high-resolution (TIFF or RAW) pictures, you might want to compare write speeds before you
buy. A card that's been tested to write more quickly can come in handy when you don't have time to wait for
your photos to be written from your camera's buffer to the memory card. You can read about card speeds at
Rob Galbraith's web site at www.robgalbraith.com.

Exposure Controls

Although I mentioned exposure controls under the lens section earlier, exposure involves more than lens
settings, of course. Exposure is also determined by the amount of time the sensor is exposed to light (the
equivalent of a film camera's shutter speed) and the intensity of the light (which can vary greatly when you're
using an external source, such as an electronic flash unit). Digital cameras all have automatic exposure
features for both flash and non-flash photography, but some are more flexible than others. Here are some of
the options to look for:

• Programmed exposure. Digital cameras take advantage of their computer technology by offering a
variety of programmed exposure modes. In addition to standard automatic exposures, you'll find
program modes especially for action pictures, scenics, night photography, portraits, or other common
types of situations. These modes take into account the need for specific ranges of shutter speeds (as
with sports pictures) or exposure weightings (described next).
• Exposure weightings. A sophisticated digital camera doesn't simply look at how much light is passing
through the lens to calculate correct exposure. Instead, the viewing area is divided into segments and
individual segments can be given greater or lesser weight, depending on the shooting situation. For
example, readings may be center-weighted, on the assumption that the most important subject matter
will be in the center of the frame. Or, exposures can be calculated from a spot reading of a very small
section of the frame. Averaged readings may work best for evenly illuminated scenes. I'll explain
about various exposure modes in the next chapter.
• Plus/Minus or Over/Under exposure controls. With these, you can dial in a little more or a little less
exposure than the amount determined by your camera's built-in light measuring device.
• Aperture-preferred/Shutter-preferred exposure. With this option, you can set the lens opening you
prefer and the camera will choose the correct shutter speed. Or, you can select the shutter speed you
want, and the camera will choose an appropriate lens opening. As you'll learn later in this book, these
controls can be used effectively to ensure that the camera will select the aperture/shutter speed
combination that works best in low light or, perhaps, to stop action.
• Full manual control. With this option, you can set any shutter speed or aperture combination you like,
giving you complete control over the exposure of your photo. There are many times when you don't
want what the camera considers to be "perfect" exposure. Manual control lets you shoot photos that
are "too dark" or "too light" but have the artistic appearance you want.

With these features in mind, ask yourself the following questions:

Can your digital camera take low-light pictures without flash?

Low-light pictures call for an extra-sensitive sensor. Camera specs often provide the
equivalents to conventional film speeds, measured in ISO (International Standards
Organization) ratings such as ISO 100, ISO 200, and ISO 400. The higher the number, the
more sensitive the sensor. Many cameras let you vary the ISO rating, making your camera
more "sensitive" under particular situations. Later in this book I'll show you why changing the
sensitivity setting is sometimes a good idea, and why it is sometimes not a good idea. As you
select a camera, however, look for the stated ISO rating, and see if it can be changed by the
user.

Can your camera compensate for backlit or frontlit pictures?

Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine 73

74 Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine

Intermediate and advanced cameras may have a simple provision for departing from the
"best" exposure determined by the camera's sensor. For example, you might want to adjust the
exposure to compensate for subjects that are strongly backlit (that is, an unimportant
background is very bright in comparison to your subject matter) or frontlit (the background is
very dark), so the exposure is determined by your actual subject, rather than an overall
average of the scene. I'll provide some examples of backlit and frontlit pictures later in the
book.

Does your camera have various exposure modes fine-tuned for particular kinds of
picture-taking sessions, such as sports, portrait, and landscape photography?

If so, you can dial in one of these and improve the quality of your pictures effortlessly.

How is the light measured?

As I mentioned earlier, digital cameras may have a particular way of measuring light, or may
offer several different light-measuring schemes that you can select. For example, your camera
may have a "spot" meter that zeroes in on a particular, small area of the image and determines
the exposure from that, ignoring the rest of the picture. This feature can be handy when you
take many pictures in difficult lighting conditions and would like to specify which area of the
picture is used to determine exposure. Or, a camera might measure corners or other specific
areas of an image. For the most flexibility, you'll want a camera with several different
exposure modes. I'll show you how to use these later in the book.

Can exposure be set manually?

I mentioned earlier that cameras that allow manual setting of the lens f-stop might also let you
choose either shutter priority or aperture priority (you set one, the camera sets the other) or
full manual control over both aperture and shutter speed.

How flexible are the flash features?

Some cameras might have a fixed flash range so that you are limited to shooting only in the
range between 2 and 12 feet from your subject. Others have special settings for telephoto
pictures (in which you are likely to be much farther from your subject) or for wide-angle
shots (in which you are likely to be much closer). You'll also be able to choose whether your
flash fires automatically as required, flashes always (useful in some situations), or is always
off. With one of my digital cameras, these flash settings apply only when the flash has been
popped up from the camera body; you must remember to flip up the flash when it's needed.

It's also useful to be able to use an external flash unit not built into your camera, particularly
when you want to use multiple flash for sophisticated lighting, as with portraits. Some digital
cameras have a special connector for an auxiliary flash. Keep in mind that those cameras may
require that you use only a particular brand of flash, too. (If you don't, the electronic
triggering mechanisms may not match and you can "fry" your camera's flash circuitry!)

Viewfinders

Viewfinders have come a long way in the last 20 or 30 years in terms of the amount of information they
provide the photographer. Figure 2.22 shows the display found in a traditional film camera's viewfinder when
I started as a photographer, compared to the view today through a typical digital camera's viewfinder.

74 Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine

Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine 75
Figure 2.22. In ancient times, shutter speed, f-stop, and an exposure indicator were the only data displayed in the
viewfinder (top). Digital cameras provide a lot more information! (bottom)

Today, virtually all digital cameras have both an optical viewfinder or electronic viewfinder, which both can
be used to quickly frame an image, as well as an LCD display screen on the back of the camera for more
precise composition and picture review.

The only things you need to check when selecting a camera is to see how visible your camera's LCD display
is in bright daylight, whether it is large enough to view easily (most digital cameras use a standardized 1.8
inch LCD component), and the amount of power it consumes. The LCDs on some cameras consume so much
power that, if left on all the time, you may find yourself with dead batteries after only a dozen or so shots.
(Organic Light Emitting Diode (OLED) displays may help provide lower-power displays in the future.)
Active-matrix displays are among the brightest and most power efficient. Some cameras let you turn on the
LCD display only when it is required to compose a picture. One camera I use has a sensor that turns the
electronic viewfinder display on only when your eye is pressed against the viewing window. It can also be set
to automatically switch between the LCD and electronic viewfinder.

Most of the time, you'll be using your digital camera's optical or electronic viewfinders. The location can be
important. A window-type viewfinder (non-electronic, non-SLR) provides a slightly different view from what
the lens sees, which means part of the image you see may be clipped off when you're taking a closeup. Placing
the viewfinder as near as possible to the taking lens reduces the tendency to chop off the tops or sides of heads
or other subject matter. Many optical viewfinders have compensation (called parallax compensation) that
clearly shows the limits of your image. Remember, you can also use the LCD display when framing is
important. We'll look at these factors more in later chapters.

Of course, if you have a high-end single lens reflex (SLR) digital camera, you will view your subject through
the same lens used by the sensor, giving you a much more accurate preview.

Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine 75

76 Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine
If you wear glasses, you'll want to make sure your optical viewfinder has built-in diopter correction (like that
found in binoculars) that you can use to adjust the view for nearsightedness and farsightedness. With such an
adjustment, you may not need your glasses at all to see the viewfinder image clearly. If you must wear your
glasses while you shoot, make sure you can see the entire field of view. Sometimes a ridge or bezel around the
viewfinder may prevent someone wearing glasses from seeing the entire subject area.

Other Features

Once you've chosen your "must have" features for your digital camera, you can also work on those bonus
features that are nice to have, but not essential. Here's a list of some of the most common bonus features.

• Voice recording. Some digital cameras let you add a voice message to annotate your images with a
few seconds of sound. Vacation snapshooters will find this capability valuable for keeping track of
what photo was taken in what city (or foreign country). Photo hobbyists can record shooting
conditions and other information about how the picture was taken (thankfully, digital cameras can
record data like shutter speed and aperture used right in the digital file). Photojournalists can keep
track of the people in the photo ("left to right are. . ."). This is a handy feature.
• Video recording. Most non-SLR digital cameras let you record short video clips at low resolution,
usually at least 30 to 120 seconds worth of motion at 640 x 480 pixel resolution (or more). Some can
record continuously until your memory card fills up. This capability will never replace a camcorder,
but short movies can be interesting. If you want clips to put on a website, these digicam videos may
be exactly what you need.
• Video output. Many digital cameras have video outputs so you can view your pictures on a TV screen
without transferring them to a computer first. This is great for previews, and can turn your camera
into a portable slide projector! If you're shooting tabletop setups, model train layouts, portraits, or
other pictures with a relatively fixed camera position, using a TV as a monitor can be a great way to
fine-tune your compositions, or let your portrait subjects see how they look before you snap the
shutter. Video output is also handy for reviewing your vacation photos in your hotel room.
• Power options. The available power options a camera offers can be important. Some models use only
proprietary battery packs, which can cost $40 or more, and may not be easy to replace in a hurry if
your battery goes bad unexpectedly. Other models accept standard AA-sized batteries, so you can use
cheap alkaline cells, which you can pick up anywhere in a pinch. Alkalines won't last very long in a
power-hungry digital camera with flash, LCD display, and perhaps a mini hard disk all vying for
juice, but they'll work in an emergency. The ideal situation is to have a digital camera with
power-saving features (most can be set to power down after a minute or two and some switch on the
electronic viewfinder only when your eye is placed up to the eyepiece), and powerful nickel metal
hydride or lithium-ion batteries. Opt for a compact fast charger that can revitalize your cells in 15
minutes to an hour or less, as shown in Figure 2.23, and be sure to purchase an extra set (or two) of
batteries. Digital cameras also can use an AC adapter, which is often an optional accessory, and not
very practical, anyway, unless you're shooting near an outlet.

Figure 2.23. A compact, ultra-portable fast charger for your nickel-metal hydride batteries is a must-have
accessory.

76 Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine

Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine 77

Bonus features like these are seldom factors in choosing a camera, but all other things being equal, they are
gravy on the cake (to mix a metaphor).

You should, however, consider ease of use to be a feature. Some digital cameras have logical layouts, a
minimum of buttons and modes, and are very easy to learn. Place a premium on being able to access the most
commonly used features without wading through a series of menus. The most frequently accessed features
vary from person to person: You may use manual focus or exposure compensation frequently. Someone else
may live or die by their ability to adjust shutter speed on a whim.

For that reason, I recommend that you try out any digital camera you are considering buying before you
purchase it. You may have bought your DVD drive over the web, but a device like a digital camera, with so
many controls and features, is not something to buy through mail order, unless you've had a chance to borrow
the same or similar camera from a friend or colleague. Give it a real testdrive, using the typical features that
you will need. No matter how ideal the specifications may be, until a camera has passed your own ease-of-use
test, don't consider purchasing it.
< Day Day Up >
< Day Day Up >

Next Up
In this chapter you've learned just about all the nuts-and-bolts you need to understand how digital cameras
work. I also introduced you to the key controls available with most digital boxes. In the next chapter, we're
going to look at those controls a little more closely. Now that you know what they do, it's useful to understand
what they can do for you.
< Day Day Up >
< Day Day Up >

Chapter 3. Mastering Camera Controls

It's one of the unfortunate realities of complex mechanical or electronic devices, including digital cameras,
that, the more options and features and capabilities a gadget has, the more difficult it is to use. A toaster is
easy to use: insert the bread, dial in how light or dark you want it to be toasted, and push down the lever. Few
options, no bewildering array of controls, no problems.

Toasters are like point-and-shoot digital cameras, which adhere, for the most part, to George Eastman's goal in

Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine 77

78 Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine
1888 when he introduced the first handheld Kodak camera. Aiming to make the camera as convenient to use
as the pencil, he promised the world, "You press the button, we do the rest."

Of course, in those days "the rest" involved mailing your camera back to Kodak for processing and waiting
until the camera returned, loaded with fresh film, accompanied by a set of prints. Everything that happened
between the release of the shutter and the return of the film was quite literally out of the amateur
photographer's control.

Today, the digital camera puts all the control back into your hands in a most versatile way. You still need to
compose the photo, but you can allow the camera to set the focus, exposure, and even color balance and other
parameters for you automatically. Or, if you like, you can make these adjustments yourself. Once the picture
is taken, you can review it and decide whether to discard the photo, reshoot, or simply take another picture.
Serious photographers now have the choice of taking pictures in either "point-and-shoot" or "point-and-think"
mode.

The term "point and shoot" is often applied to the most basic cameras, because they ask nothing more of the
photographer than the ability to aim the camera and press the shutter release. Many of these cameras don't
even require remembering to remove the lens cap: The lens appears automatically from behind a sliding
protective door or flap as soon as you turn the power on. If you can find the power switch and shutter button, a
point-and-shoot camera will take care of everything else, including focus, exposure, and flash (if you need it)
automatically.

When I started in photography, the distinction between point-and-shoot cameras and more advanced amateur
and professional models was clear. The point-and-shoot cameras were automatic and offered few, if any
manual adjustments (other than focus, before autofocus became prevalent). All other cameras were fully
manual. The photographer had to focus, select a shutter speed, and specify a lens opening by matching a
needle with an indicator in the viewfinder (or by using a handheld light meter).

Today, even $5,000 professional cameras have point-and-shoot functionality. If you like, virtually every
digital camera, including the pricey dSLRs, can analyze your scene, determine the correct exposure from a
complex set of alternatives, set focus for the main subject of the photo, and snap off a picture or sequence for
you. One digital camera I use reportedly has a built-in database derived from more than 30,000 individual
photos. It sifts through information about all these previously analyzed images, finds one that most closely
matches the shot you've framed, and applies the appropriate settings. I like to imagine setting up to shoot the
Taj Mahal and having my camera decide, "Oh, here's another one of those Taj Mahal photos!" and use the
ideal settings for that classic spot without any thinking on my part.

Today, you don't even have to press the shutter release: An infrared remote control or a built-in self-timer can
select the decisive moment for you. Computer technology is so precise today that, in full automatic mode, you
can get excellent pictures without giving the mechanics of the photo a second thought.

Even so, there are times when you'll want to take total control of the process. Other times, you'll need to use
your knowledge of how your camera's automated features work to make sure your camera's brains aren't
fooled by an unusual situation.

Although every camera uses different buttons and menus to control key features, nearly every digital image
grabber includes some variation on the basic array of controls. This chapter provides an overview of the
controls a digital photographer must master, and includes descriptions of how these controls differ between
digital cameras and film cameras. I'm not going to explain how to operate your camera's controls. Your user's
manual is your best guide to the nuts-and-bolts. Instead, we're going to concentrate on how these controls can
affect your photographs, and what you can do to optimize their use.

78 Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine

Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine 79

Tip from the Pros

Don't get caught in an important picture-taking situation with no inkling of how to use a
seldom-accessed feature. Don't count on taking your camera's manual along and taking the time
to hunt through it when you're in a rush. Each time I get a new digital camera, I put together a
"cheat sheet" like the one shown in Figure 3.1, which lists all the functions I use most, and clear,
simple directions on how to use them. After a few days, I've mastered most of the controls, but
keep my cheat sheet handy as an aid to using the more obscure functions. If you're lucky, your
camera will be furnished with a ready-made tip sheet you can use right out of the box.

Figure 3.1. A "cheat sheet" can help you master your camera's controls.

[View full size image]

< Day Day Up >

< Day Day Up >

Taking Control
If digital cameras do such a good job selecting settings, why would you want to interfere? There are lots of
situations in which an experienced photographer can do a better job of selecting settings than even the most
sophisticated digital camera. Here are a few:

• You're looking for a special exposure effect, such as a silhouette. When faced with strong
backlighting, your camera may correctly expose your subject anyway, allowing the background to
wash out. By choosing your camera's Backlight scene mode, using EV settings (explained in the next
section) to dial in a little extra exposure, or manually set shutter speed and f-stop, you can adjust the
exposure to produce a true silhouette.

Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine 79

80 Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine
• You'd like to use a particular shutter speed to produce a certain look. Perhaps you've mounted your
camera on a tripod and want to shoot a mountain stream at a slow shutter speed to provide the popular
fluid blurry look in the water. Or, you want to use the absolute fastest shutter speed to freeze action.
• You want to isolate your subject using selective focus, making the main subject sharp while blurring
objects in front of or behind it. Selecting a combination of large f-stop, telephoto zoom setting, and
manual focus, you can do this even with digital cameras that are noted for their generous
depth-of-field.
• You need a special color effect, and therefore would like to manipulate the white balance of your
camera, or specify sepia or another color filter your camera offers.

You might not need to switch from full automatic mode to manual mode to take pictures in these situations.
Many cameras let you partially override their settings by pressing a button or turning a jog wheel. The most
important thing is to understand exactly what each control can do, and how it affects your photo.
< Day Day Up >
< Day Day Up >

Understanding Exposure
Correct exposure is not the most important aspect of taking a picture. How well you
frame or compose the image really makes or breaks a photograph. The exposure can be
a little off and the picture can still look good, but if the composition is awry, there's not
a lot you can do to save it. Fortunately, compositions are not chosen by the camera. In
most cases, however, exposure settings are. You can do a great deal to ensure that your
exposure settings mirror what you want to get out of your image.

As you recall from Chapter 2, exposure is defined as the amount of light striking the
sensor. Think of each photosite or pixel on the sensor as a little bucket that catches
photons of light as they pass through the lens. The photons must fill the bucket to a
particular point (called a threshold) before that pixel will register its part of the image.
Raising or lowering the threshold mark on the bucket decreases or increases the working
sensitivity of the sensor. It doesn't make any difference whether the photons fill the
bucket slowly or quickly, or whether they arrive in large streams or in a trickle. A pixel
won't register an image until the threshold point is reached.

Figure 3.2 shows a fanciful representation of those buckets. The yellow drops at top
represent sunlight, which contains red, green, and blue light, until all but one of those
hues are removed by the colored filter mosaic placed atop a standard CCD sensor. The
red, green, and blue photons continue past their respective filters to collect in the
"bucket." If the bucket is filled at least to the threshold point (shown as a gray band
around the bucket), that photosite registers that color. The amount of photons collected
past the threshold point represents the density of the image for that photosite for that
color. Once the bucket is completely filled, it can collect no more photons.

Figure 3.2. Photons (shown as drops) must fill the sensor's "buckets" to the threshold
mark for an image to register.

80 Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine

Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine 81

The camera's shutter speed determines the interval used to flood the buckets with
photons. A short shutter speed (such as 1/500th second) lets photons flow only for a
brief period of time. A longer shutter speed (such as 1/60th second) lets the photons
reach the sensor for a longer period. Figure 3.3 represents an exposure that is relatively
short, so that photons can collect in the bucket for only a brief period of time.

Figure 3.3. A short shutter speed lets photons reach the sensor for only a brief period of
time.

The lens's aperture size, or f-stop, controls how many photons are admitted at once. A
small f-stop (on a non-SLR digital camera, the smallest stop will be around f8; SLR
lenses can go as small as f22 to f45) restricts the number of photons. A larger f-stop
(such as f2.8) lets a larger number of the available photons through at once. Figure 3.4
shows how a smaller f-stop restricts the number of photons that can reach the bucket.

Figure 3.4. Choosing a smaller f-stop reduces the number of photons that can reach the
sensor, too.

Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine 81

82 Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine

Your sensor's photosite buckets can be filled quickly (with a short shutter speed and a
large lens opening) or slowly (with a longer shutter speed and a smaller lens opening).
Each faster shutter speed increment or f-stop lets in one-half the amount of light as the
previous setting, so you can produce exactly the same exposure by switching to a
smaller f-stop if you make the shutter speed twice as long (and vice versa).

These equivalent values are called Exposure Values, or EVs for short, and are consistent
for any particular ISO setting on your camera. For example, a value of EV14 might
represent 1/250th at f8 with a particular film. It would also represent all the other
combinations of shutter speed and f-stop that would produce the same equivalent
exposure, as shown in Table 3.1.

Table 3.1. Equivalent Exposures

Shutter
Shutter speed f-stop speed f-stop
1/30th second f22 1/500th f5.6
second
1/60th second f16 1/1,000th f4
second
1/125th second f11 1/2,000th f2.8
second
1/250th second f8 1/4,000th f2
second

Your digital camera might have EV values that you can set. It might also have an EV+ or EV- dial, which lets
you correct the automatic exposure by an amount you specify. For example, choosing EV+0.5 will add half an
EV to your exposure, which would be the same as either opening the aperture by half an f-stop or by making
the shutter speed 50 percent longer. (It's easy for a digital camera to deal with fractions of an f-stop or
fractional shutter speeds, because everything is done electronically.)

If you need to adjust your exposure manually or override your camera's settings to produce a darker or lighter
image, it's easy to do by adjusting the EV+/EV- dial. Most cameras will let you add plus or minus 2 or 3 EV
in either 1/2 or 1/3 increment steps. If you're making the correction manually using the shutter speed or
aperture controls, just remember:

• Opening the lens aperture one stop (to a smaller f-stop number, such as going from f8 to f5.6) doubles
the amount of light reaching the sensor.

82 Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine

Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine 83

• Closing the lens aperture one stop (to a larger f-stop number, such as going from f5.6 to f8) halves the
amount of light.
• Choosing a shorter shutter speed (from 1/250th to 1/500th second, for example) cuts the amount of
light reaching the sensor in half.
• Choosing a longer shutter speed (from 1/500th to 1/250th second) doubles the amount of light.
• Cutting the exposure in half with either aperture or shutter speed while doubling the exposure with the
other control keeps the exposure exactly the same.

When an Exposure Isn't

Because you can halve or double an exposure by changing either the f-stop or shutter speed, these equivalent
exposures are said to be reciprocal. It shouldn't make any difference which control you or your camera use to
change exposure; the result should be the same whether you choose a smaller f-stop or a shorter shutter speed
to reduce exposure (or opt for a larger f-stop and longer shutter speed to increase exposure). Unfortunately,
both the film and digital worlds have to contend with a phenomenon known as reciprocity failure. Film and
sensors react to very, very short and very, very long exposures in a non-linear way so that, say, an exposure of
60 seconds at f16 will not necessarily be exactly equal to an exposure of one second at f2. If you're
experimenting with long time exposures at night, say, to capture a dim city street scene, you might find that
you've seriously underexposed your image.

Reciprocity failure can happen at the other end of the time scale, too, with very brief exposures, although even
the 1/4,000th second speed of some cameras is not likely to produce the effect. However, some electronic
flash units can produce very brief exposures of 1/50,000th second or shorter in automatic mode at close
distances.

In either case, if you're using your camera's automatic exposure features, you should use the exposure
compensation control to allow extra exposure. Or, you can switch to manual mode and make additional
exposures for a longer period of time using slower shutter speeds, or using a larger f-stop.

How Exposure Is Calculated

Until you start thinking about it, calculating a correct exposure doesn't seem to be all that complicated. Just
measure the amount of light reaching the sensor and figure out what combination of shutter speed and f-stop is
required to allow exactly the optimal amount of light for the exposure.

Unfortunately, that sort of calculation won't work. It doesn't take into account the fact that subjects reflect
different amounts of light. Imagine, for a moment, that you're taking a photo that contains a white cat and a
dark gray cat. In the finished photo, you want the white cat to appear white and the dark gray cat to appear to
be dark gray. Yet, the white cat might reflect five times (or more) as much light as the gray cat. Any exposure
based on the white cat will cause the gray cat to appear to be much darker, almost black. Conversely, any
exposure based only on the gray cat will make the white cat completely washed out, with no detail
whatsoever. The proper exposure in this case is an average of the tones in the scene, a happy medium in which
both the white cat and gray cat are properly exposed.

Light-measuring devices achieve this average by assuming that all the objects being measured average a
standard value of 18 percent gray. The 18 percent figure was arrived at as a value that represents a gray tone
that's halfway between black and white as perceived by film and, later, digital sensors (although not
necessarily by human vision; there is still some controversy over this point). The assumption is an important
one, because the camera or light meter has no way of knowing whether it is pointed at an object that is highly
reflective, or one that doesn't reflect much light at all. Instead, calculations are made as if the object were
reflecting 18 percent gray. It's the job of the photographer or automatic exposure system to make adjustments
when that is not the case, using some sort of programming or compensation. Figure 3.5 shows a continuous

Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine 83

84 Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine

gray scale with the approximate 18 percent reflectance point marked.

Figure 3.5. A reflectance of 18 percent approximates a middle gray tone in most scenes.

The 18 Percent Myth

In practice, light meters for most digital cameras are not calibrated for exactly 18 percent
reflectance. Each camera company modifies the middle tone point a bit to produce the "best"
exposure for its particular equipment. Even so, it's useful to keep the (approximately) 18 percent
figure in mind when you're thinking about how cameras calculate exposures.

In most cases, your camera's light meter will do a good job of calculating the right exposure, especially if you
use the exposure tips in the next section. But if you want to double-check or feel that exposure is especially
critical, take the light reading off an object of known reflectance. Photographers sometimes carry around an
18 percent gray card (available from any camera store) and, for critical exposures, actually use that card,
placed in the subject area, to measure exposure.

Tip from the Pros

Don't have a gray card handy and want to check your exposure? Take a light reading from the
palm of a hand (yours or someone else's) held in the same light as your main subject. Then
increase the exposure by one f-stop (or use a shutter speed that is twice as long), because the
palm of a hand is about twice as reflective as a gray card. This trick works with just about any
palm, regardless of ethnic background or how much of a suntan your human gray card has (don't
try metering the back of a hand).

Bracketing

Bracketing is the practice of taking several photos using different exposures to ensure that at least one will be
optimal for your image. For example, you might take one picture at the "correct" exposure (as determined by
your camera's exposure meter), plus one with half as much exposure, and one with twice as much exposure
(change either the f-stop or shutter speed as appropriate). At least, that's how it was done in the old days
before cameras had as many automatic features as they do now. Today, many electronic cameras (both film
and digital) have a setting for automatic bracketing. The camera will snap off several exposures for you at
different settings.

84 Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine

Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine 85

Indeed, digital cameras can bracket parameters other than exposure, such as white balance, to improve your
chances of getting a photo that is fine-tuned for your specific light source.

< Day Day Up >

< Day Day Up >

Working with Autoexposure

Thanks to the tiny computers built into modern film and digital cameras, exposure can be determined
accurately in a variety of situations. Most cameras have multiple metering modes which measure light in any
of several different ways. This next section explains the most common modes and how they work.

Exposure Zones

Sophisticated electronic cameras divide the subject area into a few dozen different zones to more than 1,000
zones, and can measure the light for each separately. Then, your camera's programming can make decisions
about how the differing illumination in the zones affects your photo and calculate an exposure based on those
decisions. You can choose how the exposure is calculated yourself, too, if you understand how these zones
work. Here are the most common metering schemes. Keep in mind that the illustrations greatly simplify how
the zones look. In a real digital camera the zones aren't large, coarse blocks, but, rather, many different data
points segregated into specific areas.

• Averaging. In this mode, the camera's exposure meter figures the exposure based on the average of all
the illumination falling on the entire sensor. This scheme works best with scenes that have a mixture
of light and dark subjects. You might select the averaging mode when shooting photos that involve a
variety of subjects, and you feel that the other exposure modes aren't suitable. For example, if you're
taking pictures at an indoor soccer game, your main subjects might be scattered all over the frame, so
an exposure based on the average of the frame can work for you. (Actually, because the lighting
doesn't vary much, a manual exposure setting might be even better, but we'll explore that approach in
the chapter on action photography later in this book.) With the camera set for averaging exposure, the
entire subject area, shown in Figure 3.6, is used to calculate the exposure. (The bracket shown is not
used for exposure calculation.)

Figure 3.6. An averaged exposure reading takes into account the illumination of the entire scene.

Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine 85

86 Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine

• Center-weighting. In this mode, the exposure meter emphasizes a zone in the center of the frame to
calculate exposure on the theory that, for most pictures, the main subject will be located there.
Center-weighting works best for portraits, architectural photos, and other pictures in which the most
important subject is located in the middle of the frame. (No surprise there!) As the name suggests, the
light reading is weighted towards the central portion, but information is also used from the rest of the
frame. If your main subject is surrounded by very bright or very dark areas, the exposure might not be
exactly right. However, this scheme works well in most situations. In Figure 3.7, most of the exposure
would be calculated from the mountains and the lake, but the darker trees and foreground would also
be taken into account.

Figure 3.7. Center-weighting emphasizes the middle portion of the frame to calculate exposure.

• Corner-weighting. You won't find this as an option in any digital camera. Corner-weighting is
actually just a way of calculating exposure that your camera's matrix metering system might decide
on, using its database of picture types. The exposure meter places the emphasis on the corners of the
frame. One way of doing this is shown in Figure 3.8. If corner-weighted exposure were calculated for
the example photo, the trees and foreground would receive more exposure. This scheme works well
when there is a very bright or very dark object in the center of the frame.

Figure 3.8. Corner-weighting de-emphasizes the center of the frame when calculating exposure.

86 Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine

Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine 87

• Top- or bottom-weighting. Again, this kind of metering isn't a setting you can choose, but rather, a
weighting that might be assigned by your camera based on its exposure programming. These schemes
weight the top or bottom of the frame, or both. Bottom-weighting can help you ignore, say, a very
bright sky area that would fool the meter or cause underexposure. Top-weighting can be used when
you want to expose for an area in the upper part of the frame. Using both top- and bottom-weighting
lets you de-emphasize the middle of the frame. In the sample picture, shown in Figure 3.9, these
modes would measure the foreground or trees (or both) in calculating the main exposure.

Figure 3.9. Top- and bottom-weighted metering emphasizes the upper and lower edges of the frame.

• Matrix-metering. This is a sophisticated metering technique (also called evaluative metering) in which
many different zones of the image are metered separately. Then, the camera evaluates the results to
make an educated guess about what kind of picture you're taking, based on examination of thousands
of different real-world photos. Eastman Kodak Company developed this sort of exposure control for
its automated printing machines many years ago, when it found it was possible to determine whether a
photo was a portrait, landscape, or other type of picture simply from the exposure matrix. For
example, if the top sections of a picture are much lighter than the bottom portions, the algorithm can
assume that the scene is a landscape photo with lots of sky. Figure 3.10 is a greatly simplified
representation that shows typical zones that a matrix metering system might consider in calculating

Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine 87

88 Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine

exposure.

Figure 3.10. Matrix metering tries to guess what kind of photo you're taking by metering separate zones
and evaluating the results.

• Spot metering. This mode confines the reading to a limited area, indicated in the center of the
viewfinder. Some digital cameras let you move the meter spot to any location you like in the frame. If
you're lucky, the process will be simple enough to use easily. One camera I use switches to spot
metering when the Spot button is pressed; moving the spot to a different location is accomplished by
continuing to hold the Spot button while pressing the cursor keys. Spot metering is a great tool when
your subject is relatively small and surrounded by dark or light areas that would confuse any other
metering method. Figure 3.11 shows the spot metering zone of a typical digital camera.

Figure 3.11. Spot metering can be used to calculate exposure from a limited area of the frame.

88 Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine

Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine 89

Aperture Priority

Sometimes you want to use a particular lens opening to achieve a desired effect. Perhaps you'd like to use the
smallest f-stop possible to maximize depth-of-field in a close-up picture. Or, you might want to use a large
f-stop to throw everything except your main subject out of focus, as shown in Figure 3.12. In this shot, the
background, which did have some texture, is completely out of focus because of the shallow depth-of-field.

Figure 3.12. Choose your own aperture for maximum (or minimum) depth-of-field.

However, there's no need to switch to full manual exposure if all you want to do is specify a particular
aperture. Most digital cameras can be set for Aperture Priority mode. In that mode, you select the f-stop and
your camera's automatic exposure system will determine the correct shutter speed. This mode is a good
compromise between fully automatic and manual exposure when you really need to use a particular aperture.
It's fast to use, too, because you don't have to worry about selecting the shutter speed.

One pitfall to keep in mind is that you might select an f-stop that is too small or too large to allow an optimal
exposure with the available shutter speeds. For example, if you choose f2.8 as your aperture and the
illumination is quite bright (say, at the beach or in snow), even your camera's fastest shutter speed might not
be able to cut down the amount of light reaching the sensor to provide the right exposure. Or, if you select f8
in a dimly lit room, you might find yourself shooting with a very slow shutter speed that can cause blurring
from subject movement or camera shake. Aperture priority is best used by those with a bit of experience in
choosing settings.

Shutter Priority

Shutter priority is the inverse of aperture priority: You choose the shutter speed you'd like to use, and the
camera's metering system selects the appropriate f-stop. Perhaps you're shooting action photos and you want
to use the absolute fastest shutter speed available with your camera, as was the case for Figure 3.13. Or, you
might want to use a slow shutter speed to add some blur to an otherwise static photograph.

Figure 3.13. Choose your own shutter speed for maximum action-freezing capability.

Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine 89

90 Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine

Shutter priority mode gives you some control over how much action-freezing capability your digital camera
brings to bear in a particular situation. Keep in mind that your camera might have a more flexible program
mode (described in the next section) that does an even better job. You'll also encounter the same problem as
with aperture priority when you select a shutter speed that's too long or too short for correct exposure under
some conditions. I've shot outdoor soccer games on sunny Fall evenings and used shutter priority mode to
lock in a 1/1,000th second shutter speed, only to find my camera refused to shoot when the sun dipped behind
some trees and there was no longer enough light to shoot at that speed, even with the lens wide open.

Program Modes and Scene Modes

Many digital cameras have specific user-selectable exposure programs specifically designed for certain kinds
of picture-taking situations. These can do an even better job than semiautomatic modes like shutter- and
aperture-priority, and can even do as well as an experienced photographer selecting settings manually.

One common mode is called Program, and it selects the correct f-stop and shutter speed using a database of
picture information that tells it whether it's better to use a high shutter speed and wide-open aperture, or just
the reverse. In most digital cameras, Program mode still allows the photographer to dial in some changes (as
opposed to Auto mode, which locks you out and obstinately insists on making all the settings itself).

Other program modes are commonly called "scene" modes, because they are designed to work with particular
types of scenes, such as portraits, night shots, fireworks, landscapes, or other situations. I've used digital
cameras with as many as two dozen scene modes. For example, a digital camera I use has an Action program
setting. In that mode, it will try to use the highest shutter speed possible appropriate for the lighting
conditions. However (unlike shutter priority mode), if there simply isn't enough light, rather than prevent the
camera from taking a picture, it will drop down to the next slowest shutter speed. The process is much like the
one a veteran shooter will use to choose the optimal settings, but is much faster.

Your digital camera might have other program modes suitable for close-ups, telephoto shots, portraiture, night
portraiture, sunsets, and other common shooting situations.

90 Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine

Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine 91
Manual Exposure

Part of being an experienced photographer comes from knowing when to rely on your camera's automation,
when to go semiautomatic, and when to set exposure manually. With all the automated features built into
modern cameras, you should find that you'll rarely need to set an exposure manually. After all, built-in
bracketing can create several shots at different settings for you, or you can use shutter-or aperture-priority
when a particular shutter speed or f-stop is required.

Manual exposure can come in handy in some situations. You might be taking a silhouette photo and find that
none of the exposure modes or exposure correction features give you exactly the effect you want. Set the
exposure manually to use the exact shutter speed and f-stop you need. Or, you might be working in a studio
environment using multiple flash units. The additional flash are triggered by slave devices (gadgets that set off
the flash when they sense the light from another flash, or, perhaps from a radio or infrared remote control).
Your camera's exposure meter might not compensate for the extra illumination (although some do), so you
need to set the aperture manually.

Because you might not need to set exposure manually very often, you should make sure you understand how
it works. Some cameras force you to switch to full manual mode, or wend your way through menus to activate
manual exposure. I like my camera's procedure: Choose manual exposure, then set shutter speed or aperture
with a command dial next to the shutter release button while holding down either a shutter speed or f-stop
control button. Other cameras have separate command dials for shutter speed and aperture.

Manual exposure lets you apply special effects, such as the one shown in Figure 3.14. For that photo, I used a
slow shutter speed but still froze the action by panning the camera in the direction of the movement during the
exposure. Because the background is blurred, the emphasis is on the soccer players, who are relatively sharp.
You'll learn how to pan action photos later in this book.

Figure 3.14. Even slow shutter speeds work if you pan in the direction of the movement.

Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine 91

92 Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine
Locking Exposure

Another control to master is your camera's exposure lock control. As the subject matter seen through your
viewfinder changes, the correct exposure might change, too. That's fine and dandy in most cases, because you
want the camera to base its exposure on what's actually in the frame. Other times, however, you'll want to lock
the exposure at a certain point. For example, you're shooting a portrait of someone outdoors; the sky behind
her is very, very bright; the subject is located to one side of the frame; and you don't want a silhouette. Rather
than switch to another exposure mode for just that one picture, compose the photo so the main subject is in the
center of the picture. Then lock in the exposure (usually by pressing the shutter release button down partway).
Then, reframe the picture with the subject located as you please. The photo will be taken using the exposure
you locked in.

Some cameras have a spot exposure lock, too. Press the Spot button to switch to spot metering, keep holding
the button down to lock the exposure, then reframe to take the picture. Others can lock the exposure using any
metering mode. Using the exposure lock capabilities is generally a lot faster than switching to a special mode
or specifying which exposure zone(s) to use.
< Day Day Up >
< Day Day Up >

Manipulating Focus
Beginner photographers typically say that they want their photos to be "sharp and clear." That's especially true
for applications like online auctions, for which the image shown in Figure 3.15 was prepared. When you're
selling something on eBay, you want the entire widget to be reasonably sharp.

Figure 3.15. You probably want everything in your online auction photos to be in sharp focus.

However, experienced photographers know that a bit of blurriness used intelligently can turn an ordinary
photograph into one that's special a subject that appears to merge with its background. Selective focus,
choosing exactly what parts of the image are in sharp focus and which are not, is a powerful creative tool.
Blur can also make other portions of an image appear to be sharper, by comparison. Figure 3.16 shows some
flowers (at left) photographed with abundant depth-of-field, so the blooms merge with the background. At
right, the reduced depth-of-field makes the flowers stand out from their background.

Figure 3.16. In some cases, you'll want everything in your photo to be in sharp focus (left), while in other cases,
you'll want to bring the main subject into sharp focus and allow the background to blur.

92 Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine

Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine 93

Unfortunately, the tool of selective focus is not as readily accessible to digital photographers as to those using
film cameras, because the short focal lengths used for non-SLR digital camera lenses render virtually
everything in most photos razor sharp. Shorter focal lengths inherently have much more depth-of-field than
longer focal lengths, so that a 35mm (actual focal length) "telephoto" setting of your digital camera might
provide the same field of view as a 135mm telephoto on a film camera, but the depth-of-field produced is
closer to what the film photographer gets with a wide-angle lens.

Larger Sensors, Less Depth-of-Field

Digital SLRs, because they have larger sensors than their non-SLR cousins, must use lenses with
longer focal lengths, too. Where your compact digital camera may have a 10mm "normal" lens
(with a ton of depth-of-field), its dSLR counterpart might use a 35mm or even 50mm lens for a
normal field of view, with a lot less depth-of-field and more control over focus.

Depth-of-field is also reduced at wider lens openings, and here, too, the digital camera's characteristics work
against those who want to use selective focus. Most digital cameras don't boast a really large lens aperture,
such as f1.4 or f2.0. The largest opening might well be f2.8, so you can't always count on shooting wide open
to minimize depth-of-field. If you have your heart set on using selective focus and are not using a digital SLR,
you can try two approaches (or combine them).

• Use the longest telephoto setting your camera offers. A camera with a long zoom range might offer
the equivalent of 28mm to 200mm (with a film camera) that corresponds to true focal lengths of 7.2 to
50.8mm. That 50.8mm setting does have depth-of-field that is limited enough to allow selective focus,
especially at wider apertures.
• Get in close. Depth-of-field is limited at close distances, too. If your subject matter lends itself to
using your camera's macro capabilities, you might be able to reduce depth-of-field, as shown on the
right in Figure 3.16.

If you're shooting up close and want to maximize depth-of-field, you can do that too. Check out Figure 3.16,
which was taken with lots of bright light, with a small f-stop, and a wide-angle zoom position. You'll learn
more about close-up photography in Chapter 10.

Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine 93

94 Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine
Using Autofocus

As I mentioned in Chapter 2, digital cameras use various ways of determining correct focus automatically.
Most work quite well; some, such as laser-based systems, work better under certain circumstances (low light,
for example) than others. All have to be used intelligently.

Digital cameras often use a zone focusing scheme, similar to the zone metering offered by automatic exposure
systems, in which the frame is divided into segments. You might be able to choose autofocus based on the
center portion of the frame, or corners, as shown in Figure 3.17, which roughly represents the focusing zones
of a Nikon camera I use. Cameras like my Nikon let you choose whether focus is based on the center
autofocus area, or any of the other focus zones. In manual mode, that same camera allows you to select just
one of the five autofocus target areas, which can be useful when your subject matter is concentrated in one of
the corners of the frame.

Figure 3.17. Five or more "target" areas can be used to calculate the correct focus for an image.

Basic Focus Modes

In addition, most digital cameras have several automatic focusing modes to choose from. The most common
modes include:

• Continuous autofocus. In this mode, the camera continually focuses the image (you'll know because
you'll hear the autofocus motor constantly moving the elements of the lens) so you can frame and
reframe the image and count on the picture always being (more or less) in focus when you're ready to
take the picture. I say "more or less" because there is always a small amount of lag when you reframe
the image on an object that is closer or farther away than the previous view. Some find this constant
refocusing annoying. This mode can cause your camera's batteries to run down sooner, too, and can
slow you down as you constantly wait for the camera to refocus each time you adjust the image.
Continuous autofocus "locks" when you press the shutter release button down partway (or press a
focus lock button, if available).
• Single autofocus. In this mode, the autofocus feature is activated only when the shutter release button
is pressed partway. Once the image is sharp, focus is locked and you can continue to press the shutter
release button to take the photo. This mode is easier on batteries and causes fewer delays when you're
finally ready to take the photo. However, like continuous autofocus, this mode can contribute to a
significant delay between the time you begin to press the shutter release and when the picture is taken.

94 Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine

Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine 95

It's easy to miss that perfect expression or the peak action in a sports photo when using either type of
autofocus.
• Manual focus. With manual focus activated, your digital camera lets you set the focus yourself. There
are some advantages and disadvantages to this approach. While your batteries will last longer in
manual focus mode, it will take you longer to focus the camera for each photo, a process that can be
difficult given the generous depth-of-field digital cameras provide at most zoom and aperture settings.
On the one hand, the extra depth-of-field makes the need for precise focus less necessary, but, on the
other hand, when you want exact focus to ensure best results, you might find it difficult to achieve.

Tip from the Pros

You'll find it easier to manually focus at the longest zoom setting and widest lens opening,
because they provide the least amount of depth-of-field, making it simpler to zero in on exact
focus. Unfortunately, many lenses change focus slightly at different zoom settings (indeed,
so-called varifocal lenses require refocusing at every setting and aren't, strictly speaking, zoom
lenses at all). So, when you zoom in to focus and then zoom back out to a wider setting, your
manual focus might not be exactly right. If you're really having difficulty focusing, if your digital
camera allows manual focus, go ahead and zoom in and focus manually, but take notice of the
distance setting shown in the viewfinder (or other status display). Then, when you zoom back
out, you can make sure that the same distance is set at the new zoom setting. That should be
close enough to exact focus for most purposes.

Advanced Focus Parameters

To make things even more interesting, some digital cameras have other parameters to choose from. The
simplest of these are the focus ranges that can be set. These include:

• Autofocus. This range provides normal autofocus operation for the full automatic range of the camera,
typically infinity down to a foot or less. Some cameras provide autofocus at even closer distances; if
you'll be doing a lot of close-up work, you'll want to check this specification before you buy.
• Infinity range. This setting locks the focus setting for distant objects, such as landscape scenes or
buildings. The advantage of this range is that the camera's autofocus feature is disabled, so there is
less lag when you press the shutter release to take the picture.
• Macro/close-up range. This setting moves the lens elements so that the camera focuses much closer
than in autofocus mode, frequently to less than one inch. With some cameras, autofocus still functions
at these close distances, and you might be able to adjust the magnification of your image by zooming
in and out. Other cameras function only in manual focus mode when set to the macro position. One of
my cameras, for example, can be locked into macro mode at either the widest or longest zoom
settings. At the wide-angle macro mode, the field of view is fixed, but focus can be adjusted with a
focus ring around the lens. At the tele macro setting, the focus ring is still used, but the zoom ring can
also be adjusted to provide small changes in magnification.

Other types of focus parameters also come into play, depending on the kind of camera you're using. Here are
some modes to look for, all of which control the area or zone used to determine focus:

• Single area. With this mode, the camera focuses on the subject matter that is in the active focus area.
This works best with static subjects that won't be moving while you compose your image.
• Dynamic area. With this mode, the camera focuses on the subject in the active focus area, but if that
subject moves before the picture is taken, the camera automatically switches to the focus area now
occupied by the subject. This is a good mode when the subject may move, but is relatively static.

Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine 95

96 Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine

• Closest Object focus. With this mode, the camera automatically focuses on the subject that is closest
to the camera. If the subject moves, the camera shifts focus to that area. This mode is a good choice
only if your main subject is, in fact, the closest object to the camera.
• Face Priority focus. This is a novel focus mode introduced by Nikon. The camera actually looks for
faces in the frame and sets focus on the face that is closest to the camera.
• Predictive focus. If your subject is moving, predictive autofocus can set the focus distance to where
the camera guesses that the subject will be at the time the photo is taken. This is especially good when
your subject is approaching or retreating.
< Day Day Up >
< Day Day Up >

Sequencing
The first accessory I purchased when I worked as a sports photographer some time ago was a motor drive for
my Nikon SLR. It enabled me to snap off a series of shots in rapid succession, which came in very handy
when a fullback broke through the line and headed for the end zone. Even a seasoned action photographer can
miss the decisive instant when a crucial block is made, or a baseball superstar's bat shatters and pieces of cork
fly out. Sequence-shooting simplifies taking a series of pictures, either to ensure that one has more or less the
exact moment you want to capture or to capture a sequence that is interesting as a collection of successive
images.

Digital cameras provide "motor drive" capabilities that are, in some ways, better than what you get with film
cameras. For one thing, a motor-driven film camera can eat up film at an incredible pace, which is why many
of the high-end professional models are used with cassettes that hold hundreds of feet of film stock. At 3
frames per second, a short burst of a few seconds can burn up as much as half of an ordinary 36 exposure roll
of film. Digital cameras, in contrast, have reusable film, so if you waste a few dozen shots on non-decisive
moments you can erase them and shoot more.

The increased capacity of digital film cards gives you a generous number of frames to work with. A
5-megapixel camera that I sometimes use for sports photography can record almost 100 frames in the default
Fine mode (in this case a JPEG file) on a single 256MB CompactFlash card. Even at three or four frames per
second for short bursts, I can take quite a few pictures before it's time to change cards.

One drawback to shooting sequences with some digital cameras is that the number of frames you can take in a
row might be limited by the amount of buffer memory in your camera and the speed with which the camera
can write the images to the memory card. You might be able to snap off five or six pictures, then be forced to
wait a second or two before you can take more photos. That limitation can be frustrating when you realize
your first burst of images didn't capture the most important action and you watch the fullback scampering past
you while you stare helplessly at the flashing red light on your camera that indicates your previous photos are
still being written to the memory card.

Even so, a digital camera with any sequencing capabilities at all can come in very handy, as I discovered
recently at an amusement park. I was having trouble capturing my kids as they zoomed by on a chair swing
ride. I set the camera on its multiple-shot mode, and then pressed the shutter release when they came into
view, snapping off several pictures like those shown in Figure 3.18. It still took me several tries to get the
photos I wanted, because even at three frames per second many of the pictures captured "in-between"
moments when one or more kids were partially in or out of the frame.

Figure 3.18. You might need to take several sequences to capture the exact photos you want.

96 Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine

Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine 97

Many models have several different sequence or continuous advance modes. Here's a list of the most common
options:

• Single frame advance. This is the default mode of most digital cameras. A single picture is taken each
time the shutter release is pressed. With less expensive cameras that have little buffer memory built
in, you might actually have to wait until the picture is stored on the memory card before you can snap
off another one. Fortunately, most cameras, especially digital SLRs, are fast enough to let you take
one picture after another almost as quickly as you can press the button.
• Continuous advance. In this mode, if you press and hold the shutter release button, the camera will
take pictures in sequence for as long as the button is held (within limits). The number of pictures
taken per second, and the number of photos you can take in one burst are limited by the buffer
memory of your camera, which in turn is filled up more quickly at higher resolutions and lower
compression rates. Whether you're using automatic or manual focus can also affect your speed of
capture. In general, using manual focus and lower resolutions will let you capture more pictures, more
quickly. Continuous advance might allow grabbing photos at 2 to 3 pictures per second, with a limit
of around 7 to 20 photos before you must stop and wait for the burst to be stored on the memory card.
One camera I use will let you capture 42 lower-resolution pictures in a row at 1280 x 960 resolution,
or 84 really low resolution pictures in a row at 640 x 480.
• High-speed continuous. This mode is similar to continuous advance, but at a higher frame rate,
perhaps 3 to 4 frames per second, with the same kinds of limitations on the number of pictures in a
single burst. Figure 3.19 shows a short burst shot in this mode.

Figure 3.19. Short bursts can capture action sequences.

Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine 97

98 Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine

• Ultra high-speed continuous. In this mode, the camera sacrifices resolution for more frames per
second. One of my 5-megapixel cameras drops down to producing 1.3-megapixel images in ultra
high-speed mode, but can crank off a half dozen frames per second. If you're analyzing your golf
swing, or want to capture images at a high rate of speed, 1280 x 960 pixels should be plenty.
• Motion picture. Many non-SLR digital cameras offer a "movie" mode that grabs 30 seconds or more
of motion (and audio) and stores all the frames as a video file on your memory card. The resolution
might be only 640 x 480 pixels, but this mode is a handy way of capturing some film clips.
• Time-lapse/interval. This mode lets the camera take pictures at intervals you specify, creating either a
series of still images, say, of the setting sun, or a timelapse movie of a flower opening. For best
results, your camera should be locked down on a tripod, and, if the sequence will be a long one,
powered by an AC adapter.
• Bracketing. This mode also captures a sequence of pictures, but the intent is not to freeze moments in
time but, instead, to grab a series of pictures (usually three) at several different settings: a default
setting and a pair that adds or subtracts a little from the parameter being bracketed. For example, if
you choose exposure bracketing, the camera will grab one photo at the metered exposure, plus one
that gives more exposure and one that gives less exposure. You can set the bracket increment (for
example, +/ 0.5 EV or +/ 1.0 EV) before you shoot. If your camera is versatile, you might be able
to switch to shutter priority mode to activate bracketing using shutter speeds only, or to aperture

98 Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine

Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine 99
priority mode to bracket using apertures only.

Depending on your camera model, you might also be able to create bracketed sets of pictures that
provide more/less contrast, more/less color saturation, change white balance, or more/less of a
particular filter control. Generally, you can only bracket one factor at a time, but some advanced
cameras let you bracket several factors, and in the order you specify.
< Day Day Up >
< Day Day Up >

Other Kinds of Exposures

You might have even more exposure options available with your digital camera. Among your choices:

• Bulb/long exposure. Long exposures are anything longer than 1/8th second; many cameras can
produce exposures of several seconds automatically. When the exposure exceeds one full second, and
is created by holding down the shutter button manually, it becomes a bulb exposure (so called because
the photographer used an air bulb that was squeezed to hold the shutter open). In either case, you'll
want to have the camera mounted on a tripod, because hand-holding a camera for such a long
exposure will invariably produce blur from camera shake. Figure 3.20 shows a long exposure.
Traditionally, a bulb exposure is one that lasts as long as the shutter release button is pressed; when
you release the button, the exposure ends.

Figure 3.20. A longer than normal exposure with the camera on a tripod created this photo in which the
rock star is relatively sharp, but his fastmoving fingers are blurry.

Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine 99

100 Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine
• Time-exposure. This setting is used to produce even longer exposures, as the shutter remains open
even after the shutter button is released. You must press the button again (some cameras can also be
activated/deactivated using a cable or electronic release or even a remote control) to stop the
exposure. If the exposure is truly long, you'll want to activate your camera's noise reduction feature.
• Self-timer. With this option, the camera waits a few seconds before taking the picture, usually with a
flashing light that lets you know just before the exposure is made. Self-timers have several uses. The
most obvious is that a self-timed picture taken with the camera on a tripod or other support gives the
photographer enough time to rush into a photo, say, for a group shot or selfportrait. However, the
self-timer is a great way of triggering the camera for longer exposures when you don't want to risk
shaking it by pressing the shutter release. Forget to bring along your tripod, but still want to take a
close-up picture with a precise focus setting? Set your digital camera to the self-timer function, then
put the camera on any reasonably steady support, such as a fence post or a rock. When you're ready to
take the picture, press the shutter release. The camera might rock back and forth for a second or two,
but it will settle back to its original position before the self-timer activates the shutter.
• Remote control. Many digital cameras have an infrared remote control you can use to trip the shutter
without touching the camera. You may be able to choose between instant exposure or an exposure
after a second or two of delay. Some of these are set up so the infrared remote can be used only from
in front of the camera, which is bad if you want to trip the shutter from behind, but quite useful if you
want to get in the picture yourself and don't want to race against a speedy self-timer mechanism. Your
camera might also have a plug-in remote control or cable release that can be used to trigger the shutter
when you're near the camera (in front, behind, or to the side, for that matter).
< Day Day Up >
< Day Day Up >

Next Up
These first three chapters gave you most of what you need to know about your camera and its features, so
you're ready to jump in and begin snapping masterpieces using the tips in Part II. However, if you want to
know a little more about the file format choices your digital camera offers, hold off the photo frenzy a while
more and read Chapter 4, "Dealing with Digital Camera File Formats."
< Day Day Up >
< Day Day Up >

Chapter 4. Dealing with Digital Camera File Formats

In recent months, the confusion over which digital camera file format to use has been reduced in some ways,
and made more befuddling in others. Of the three possible formats JPEG, TIFF, and RAW TIFF has fallen
into disfavor for all but the high-end professional cameras, and RAW is now found only in the more
sophisticated digital models intended for photo enthusiasts. That leaves JPEG as the default (or only) format
choice for a larger number of shooters. That's the good news.

The confusion factor was ratcheted up another notch by Adobe's announcement of yet another RAW file
format, DNG (Digital Negative), that purports to allow a single format for all digital cameras for all vendors.
We'll see about that.

If only it were that simple! Even selection of the right JPEG setting can be needlessly complex. Vendors
complicate things by not calling various formats and options by the same names. For example, a file saved in
the highest quality JPEG format might be called Fine by one vendor, and Super Fine by another. Worse, Super
Fine might actually indicate a file saved in TIFF format by a third vendor. The lowest quality JPEG setting
might be called Good by one manufacturer and Basic by another. What's a poor digital photographer to do?

100 Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine

Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine 101
Of course, compared to the hundreds of film options in the conventional photographic world, things aren't so
bad for the digital picture taker after all. This chapter will help you sort out your digital file format
alternatives. You'll learn about JPEG and TIFF, as well as RAW file formats, and, if they're available for your
camera, when you should use each. You'll also find out a little about image compression and what it does to
your digital photos.
< Day Day Up >
< Day Day Up >

Why So Many Formats?

The gods who rule the imaging world must love different file formats, because they have created so many of
them. There are dozens of graphics formats supported by image editors like Photoshop that are so far off the
radar that simply mentioning them is an exercise in trivial pursuits. Who reading this book has used .IFF
(Amiga), .TGA (Targa), .PXR (Pixar), .PX1 (PixelPaint), .PIC (SoftImage), or .RLA (Wavefront) formats?

Of course, the main reason digital cameras offer more than one file format in the first place is to limit the size
of the file stored on your memory card. If a digital camera had unlimited memory capacity, and file transfers
from the camera to your computer were instantaneous, all images would probably be stored in RAW or TIFF
format, with RAW preferred when post processing of the image was likely, and TIFF gaining the nod for
convenience and ease of use and because not all applications can interpret the unprocessed information in
RAW files. (I'll explain the difference between RAW, TIFF, and JPEG later in this chapter.) Both RAW and
TIFF store the image as you took it, with no noticeable loss in quality.

JPEG exists because a more compact file format is needed that can store most of the information in a digital
image, but in a much smaller size. Unfortunately, JPEG provides smaller files by compressing the information
in a way that loses some information. JPEG is a viable alternative because it offers several different quality
levels. At the highest quality level you might not be able to tell the difference between the original TIFF file
and the JPEG version, even though the TIFF occupies, say, 14MB on your memory card, whereas the
high-quality JPEG takes up only 4MB of space. You've squeezed the image 3.5 times without losing much
visual information at all. If you don't mind losing some quality, you can use more aggressive compression
with JPEG to store 14 times as many images in the same space as one TIFF file.

RAW exists because sometimes we want to have access to all the information captured by the camera before
the camera's internal logic has processed it and converted the image to a standard file format. RAW doesn't
save space, nor does it provide intrinsic higher quality than, say, a TIFF version. Think of your camera's RAW
format as a photographic negative, ready to be converted by your camera or, at your option, by your
RAW-compatible image-editing/processing software.
< Day Day Up >
< Day Day Up >

Image Size, File Size, and File Compression

You can adjust the image size, file size, and image quality of your digital camera images. The guidebooks and
manuals don't always make it clear that these adjustments are three entirely different things. However, image
size affects file size and image quality, and image quality affects file size. File size, while it's dependent on
the other two, has no direct effect on image size or quality. No wonder it's confusing! It's a good idea to get
these three terms sorted out before we move on, so that we're all talking about exactly the same thing. Here's a
quick summary:

• Image size is the dimensions, in pixels, of the image you capture. For example, if you have a 5MP
camera, it might offer a choice of 2560 x 1920, 1600 x 1200, 1280 x 960, and 640 x 480 resolutions.
Each reduction in resolution reduces the size of the file stored on your memory card. A TIFF file at

Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine 101

102 Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine

2560 x 1920 pixels might occupy 4MB; a 1600 x 1200-pixel image, 1.7MB; a 1280 x 960-pixel
image, 1.3MB, and a 640 x 480-pixel image, less than 1MB.
• Image quality is the apparent resolution of the image after it's been compressed and then restored in
your image editor. The TIFF format can compress the image, somewhat, with no loss of image
quality, but JPEG compression does reduce the image quality for reasons that will become clear
shortly.
• File size is the actual space occupied on your memory card, hard disk, or other storage medium,
measured in megabytes. The size of the file depends on both the image size (resolution) and
quality/compression level. You can reduce the file size by reducing the image size or using a
lower-quality/higher-compression setting.

Keep the difference between image size, file size, and image quality in mind as we continue our discussion.

What's Image Compression?

The next thing to clear up is the idea of compression. Compression comes in two varieties: lossless
compression, like that provided with the RAW and TIFF formats, and lossy compression, like that afforded by
the JPEG format. Understanding a little about how compression works makes these terms a little more
understandable.

Images, like all other computer code, are stored as a series of binary numbers, which are the only values a
computer can handle. A string of 64 bits might (but probably wouldn't) look like this:

0000000000000011100000000000000001111110000000000000000000000001

Ordinarily, the computer would need 8 full bytes to store that string of 64 binary numbers. A lossless
compression scheme, like that used to squeeze a TIFF file, could instead record a value that would designate
how many times a particular value is repeated, so, instead of storing all 64 bits, a code that translates to "14
zeroes, followed by 3 ones, followed by 16 zeros, followed by 6 ones..." would be used. Moreover, as the
compression algorithm worked, it would notice that certain strings of numbers begin to repeat. Instead of
enumerating only the number of runs of ones and zeros, the code would indicate where to find a string of
numbers identical to the one that needed to be recorded next. The second time the line of numbers above
turned up, a short code representing where that line is stored in the file would be substituted. The larger the
file becomes, the fewer actual numbers the compression scheme has to record. More and more of the code
consists of pointers to strings of numbers. This method, called Huffman encoding, builds a frequency table of
the number strings in a file and assigns the shortest codes to the strings of numbers that occur most often.

Even though all the redundant numbers are eliminated from the file, the decompression algorithm can use the
information to reconstruct the original file precisely. Today, more advanced algorithms, such as the
Lempel-Ziv Welch (LZW) algorithm used to compress TIFF files, are very efficient.

LZW was originally developed by Israeli researchers Abraham Lempel and Jacob Ziv in 1977 and 1978. Their
work was further developed by a Unisys researcher named Terry Welch, who in 1984 published and patented
the LZW compression technique.

The Next Step in Compression

Although the compression scheme used with TIFF files works well, TIFF files can still be massive. As
transfer of image files over telecommunications lines became popular (this was even before the public
Internet), a consortium called the Joint Photographic Experts Group (JPEG) developed a compression scheme
particularly for continuous tone images that is efficient and still retains the most valuable image information.
JPEG uses three different algorithms: discrete cosine transformation (DCT), a quantization routine, and a

102 Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine

Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine 103
numeric compression method like Huffman encoding.

JPEG first divides an image into larger cells, say 8 x 8 pixels, and divides the image into a special color space
that separates the luminance values (brightness) from the chrominance (color) values. In that mode, the JPEG
algorithm can provide separate compression of each type of data. Because luminance is more important to our
eyes, more compression can be applied to the color values. The human eye finds it easier to detect small
changes in brightness than equally small changes in color.

Next, the algorithm performs a discrete cosine transformation on the information. This mathematical mumbo
jumbo simply analyzes the pixels in the 64-pixel cell and looks for similarities. Redundant pixels those that
have the same value as those around them are discarded.

Next, quantization occurs, which causes some of the pixels that are nearly white to be represented as all white.
Then the grayscale and color information is compressed by recording the differences in tone from one pixel to
the next, and the resulting string of numbers is encoded using a combination of math routines. In that way, an
8 x 8 block with 24 bits of information per pixel (192 bytes) can often be squeezed down to 10 to 13 or fewer
bytes. JPEG allows specifying various compression ratios, in which case larger amounts of information are
discarded to produce higher compression ratios.

Finally, the codes that remain are subjected to a numeric compression process, which can be similar to the
Huffman encoding described earlier. This final step is lossless, as all the information that is going to be
discarded from the image has already been shed.

Because it discards data, the JPEG algorithm is referred to as "lossy." This means that once an image has been
compressed and then decompressed, it will not be identical to the original image. In many cases, the
differences between the original and compressed version of the image are difficult to see.

Compressed JPEG images are squeezed down by a factor of between 5:1 and 15:1. The kinds of details in an
image affect the compression ratio. Large featureless areas such as areas of sky, blank walls, and so forth
compress much better than images with a lot of detail.

This kind of compression is particularly useful for files that will be viewed on web pages and sent as e-mail
files. It's also used to squeeze down digital camera files. However, more quality is lost every time the JPEG
file is compressed and saved again, so you won't want to keep editing your JPEG files. Instead, save the
original file as a TIFF file and edit that, reserving the original as just that, an original version you can return to
when necessary.
< Day Day Up >
< Day Day Up >

Key File Formats

This section will list each of the important file formats available for use both with digital cameras and image
editors, including a few that you should avoid when working with images. I'll discuss their advantages,
disadvantages, and the types of image compression used.

JPEG

JPEG is the most common format used by digital cameras to store images, as it was designed specifically to
reduce the file sizes of photographic-type images. JPEG allows dialing in a continuous range of
quality/compression factors. In image editors, you'll find this range shown as a quality spectrum from, say 0 to
10 or 0 to 15. Sometimes, editors let you choose from Low, Medium, or High quality. Those are just different
ways of telling the algorithm how much information to discard.

Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine 103

104 Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine
Digital cameras, on the other hand, usually lock you into a limited number of quality settings with names like
Standard, Fine, Extra Fine, or Super Fine, and don't tell you exactly which JPEG quality settings those
correspond to. The names for the quality settings aren't standardized, and a particular setting for one camera
doesn't necessarily correspond to the same quality level with another camera. For example, Super Fine might
be the highest lossy JPEG setting with one model and the lossless TIFF setting with another vendor's camera.

If you're concerned about image quality, you should probably use the best JPEG setting all the time, or
alternate between that and the RAW setting. Your choice might hinge on how much storage space you have.
When I'm photographing around the home where I have easy access to a computer, I use RAW. When I travel
away from home, I switch to JPEG if I think I'm going to be taking a lot of pictures. If quality isn't critical,
then use lower-quality JPEG settings with your camera. Figure 4.1 shows close-up views of two JPEG files,
one with mild compression and the other with extremely high JPEG compression.

Figure 4.1. Mild compression (left) doesn't reduce image quality by much, but heavier compression (right)
introduces visible artifacts.

JPEG 2000

JPEG 2000 is a relatively new file format, supported by Photoshop CS 2.0 and some other image editors, but
not universally supported by the applications that we'd find the most useful: web browsers. At this time, no
digital cameras produce files in this format. JPEG 2000 uses a compression scheme called wavelet
compression (for roughly 20 percent smaller files), which provides better image quality, but still discards
some information. JPEG 2000 files have extensions like .jpx, jpc, or .jp2.

JPEG 2000 offers the ability to download a lower resolution image first, so you can preview the image in your
web browser and decide whether to continue to download the page. Whereas conventional JPEG works only
with RGB images, this new version is compatible with RGB, L*a*b color, and CMYK (cyan, magenta,
yellow, black) color models. It can also include color profile information, as well as informational tags such as
the owner of the image. JPEG 2000 also offers a lossless compression mode, which reduces the file size by
roughly 50 percent, while not discarding any information.

JPEG 2000 has a very cool feature called Region of Interest, which you can use to designate the most
important parts of an image. When you've done that, image compression will be concentrated in other areas of
the photo, preserving more detail in your Region of Interest. This feature is very easy to use. In Photoshop,
just select the region you want to protect (Quick Mask mode works well) and use Selection > Save Selection

104 Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine

Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine 105

to store the selection as an alpha channel. Then when you use Save As and choose the JPEG 2000 format, the
dialog box that appears (shown in Figure 4.2) has an option for selecting which, if any, of the alpha channels
you've stored should be used as the ROI.

Figure 4.2. Choose any of the alpha channels in your image as a Region of Interest when you save in JPEG 2000
format.

GIF

GIF, or Graphics Interchange Format, was developed back in the online dark ages (1987 before the public
Internet) to exchange compressed graphics between different computer platforms. That's a bigger deal than
you might think. In those days it was tricky to create image files on one computer that could be readily viewed

Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine 105

106 Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine
on another computer, and with 300 to 1200 baud modems, even small image files could take many minutes to
upload or download. The online service CompuServe was the first big user of the GIF format.

The GIF format converts images into files with a maximum of 256 colors. Few video cards could display
more than 256 colors, anyway, in those days, so that sufficed. GIF achieves its small file size by first reducing
the colors available in an image to 1 to 256 different hues, then squeezing the file further by applying LZW
compression to the indexed color tables that remain. So, GIF can be considered both a lossy and lossless file
format. It loses picture information when the number of colors is reduced (but if the number of colors in an
image is already 256 hues or fewer, no colors are discarded), but the remaining information is preserved 100
percent.

GIF has some other features that are useful chiefly for web display, such as interlacing (which allows an
image to be displayed progressively as it downloads), transparency (which makes it possible for a GIF image
to show the page background in its transparent parts), and animation (several images embedded in one file and
shown consecutively, like an animated cartoon).

Because it can handle no more than 256 colors, GIF is a poor choice for digital camera images (which look
posterized when converted to 256 tones) and is best used for logos, dialog boxes, line art, charts, and other
graphics that don't involve continuous tones. Its compression scheme works great with images that have few
colors, producing files that can be even smaller than those afforded by JPEG. Figure 4.3 shows a full-color
image that has been reduced to 256 colors.

Figure 4.3. Full-color images look posterized when reduced to 256 colors.

PNG

The PNG (Portable Network Graphics) format was designed as a replacement for GIF, because the
compression algorithm used in GIF was patented by Unisys, and developers supporting the GIF format were
theoretically required to pay Unisys a royalty. The patent expired in June, 2003 in the United States, and in
Canada, Japan, and Europe in 2004, so royalties will be charged only in countries in which the patent has not
fizzled out (in other words, virtually nowhere).

That leaves PNG, a format that never saw much favor, even further in limbo than it was before. Even though
PNG has some advantages over GIF or even JPEG, it's unlikely to flourish in the future. PNG uses optimized
preprocessing filters that improve lossless compression efficiency, particularly in 24-bit images. Unlike GIF,
PNG can specify any combination of 256 colors for transparency, embed gamma values so the image displays

106 Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine

Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine 107

well on both Macs and PCs (which use different gamma settings), and beat both GIF and TIFF for
compressing images.

PCX

PCX is an early graphics file format established by Zsoft for its PC Paintbrush software. It supports 24-bit
color, and provides decent lossless file compression, but is now used only as a backup format. I sometimes
save files in PCX format when the recipient is having trouble reading my TIFF files. Unlike TIFF, PCX
doesn't have a wide variety of options and is thus more "standardized" and compatible with a wider variety of
software on Mac, PC, and Linux platforms.

No digital cameras use PCX, but most image-editing software supports it.

TIFF

TIFF, or Tagged-Image File Format, was designed in 1987 by Aldus (later acquired by Adobe along with
Aldus' flagship product PageMaker) to be a standard format for exchange of image files. It's become that, and
is even though it is supported by only a few digital cameras as a lossless file option. However, because TIFF
supports many different configurations, you might find that one application can't read a TIFF file created by
another. The name itself comes from the tags, or descriptors, that can be included in the header of the file,
listing the kinds of data in the image.

TIFF can store files in black/white, grayscale, 24-bit, or 48-bit color modes, and a variety of color models,
including RGB, L*a*b, and CMYK. If you've used Photoshop, you know that TIFF can store your levels and
selections (alpha channels) just like Photoshop's native PSD format. It uses a variety of compression schemes,
including no compression at all, Huffman encoding, LZW, and something called Pack Bits. Most applications
can read TIFF files stored in any of these compression formats.

PICT

PICT is a file format that was developed in 1984 by Apple Computer as the native format for Macintosh
graphics. PICT can include both bitmap images and vector (line-oriented) graphics. Although PICT is used
primarily to exchange graphics between Mac applications, many PC programs, such as Photoshop, support it.
Apple elected to replace PICT with PDF, beginning with Mac OS X.

PICT supports grayscale images as well as up to 24-bit color images. (It also can use 32-bit images, but the
extra 8 bits are used for selections as an alpha channel.) PICT uses a Huffman-like run-length encoding (RLE)
compression scheme.

PDF

PDF (Portable Document Format) is a format originally developed by Adobe to store PostScript files for
printing on PostScript printers. Its advantage is that it preserves the original layout, fonts, and appearance of
the file. PDF is often used with Adobe Reader or with browser plug-ins to display documents. I download
instruction manuals, IRS tax forms, and other documents in PDF format.

More recently, PDF has gained some favor in the pre-press environment as a way of prepping documents for
printing, and in the Macintosh world as a replacement for the PICT format. Because PDF files consist of
PostScript text instructions, they can be highly compressed using any lossless compression method. Later
versions of Photoshop and Photoshop Elements can save files in PDF format.

Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine 107

108 Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine

BMP

BMP was developed by Microsoft as a standard bitmap file format for computers running the Windows
operating system. The intent was to produce device-independent bitmaps (DIB) that Windows can display on
any type of device. BMP files can include color depths up to 24 bits.

RAW

As applied to digital cameras, RAW is not a standardized file format. RAW is a proprietary format unique to
each camera vendor, and, as such, requires special software written for each particular camera. Each RAW
format stores the original information captured by the camera, so you can process it externally to arrive at an
optimized image. You'll learn more about RAW in the next section.
< Day Day Up >
< Day Day Up >

JPEG, TIFF, and RAW

As we've seen, digital cameras produce files in three kinds of formats. JPEG files are the most efficient in
terms of use of space and can be stored in various quality levels that depend on the amount of compression
you elect to use. You can opt for tiny files that sacrifice detail or larger files that preserve most of the
information in your original image.

Some cameras can also save in TIFF format, which, although compressed, discards none of the information in
the final image file. However, both JPEG and TIFF files (and RAW files, too, technically) have been
processed by the camera before they are created. The settings you have made in your camera in terms of white
balance, color, sharpening, and so forth, are all applied to the image. You can make some adjustments to the
image later in an image editor, but you are always working with an image that has already been processed,
sometimes heavily.

The information captured at the moment of exposure can also be stored in a proprietary, native format
designed by your camera's manufacturer. These formats differ from camera to camera, but are called Camera
RAW, or just RAW for convenience. You might think of RAW as a generic designation rather than a specific
format, just as the trade name Heinz applies to all 57 varieties instead of just one.

A RAW file can also be likened to a digital camera's negative. It contains all the information, stored in 12-bit
or 16-bit channels (depending on your camera), with no compression, no sharpening, and no application of
any special filters or processing. In essence, a RAW file gives you access to the same information the camera
works with in producing a 24-bit JPEG or TIFF file. You can load the RAW file into a viewer or image editor
and then apply essentially the same changes there that you might have specified in your camera's
picture-taking options.

Of course, to complicate things in the guise of attempting to simplify them, Adobe has introduced a new
RAW format called DNG (for Digital Negative), which is offered as a common RAW format that should be
compatible with any camera or software. So far, vendors aren't breaking their necks to support it. Another
wrinkle is the decision by Nikon to encrypt the white balance data in its RAW files, making it more difficult
for utilities from third-party software vendors to interpret all the information in Nikon's NEF files.
Fortunately, it took only a few days for independent coders to report they'd "cracked" Nikon's encryption, so it
remains to be seen how Nikon's move will affect those who work with NEF RAW files.

Some RAW formats, such as those deployed by Nikon and Canon for their highend cameras, are actually
TIFF files with some proprietary extensions. That doesn't mean that an application that can read standard
TIFF files can interpret them, unfortunately. Usually, special software is required to manipulate RAW files. If

108 Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine

Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine 109
you're lucky, your camera vendor supplies a special RAW processing application that is easy to use and
powerful. For example, Nikon offers Nikon View to read and manipulate its .NEF files, and Canon and
Minolta both provide viewers for their RAW formats.

If you're not so lucky, you'll get a less capable utility, be asked to pay extra for it, or find that none at all is
available. Photoshop CS 2.0 now includes a Camera RAW plug-in (which was formerly an extra-cost option
with Photoshop 7) that works quite well. It can be used only with the particular digital cameras that Adobe has
elected to support. The list is long, and includes many popular cameras from Nikon, Canon, and Minolta.
You'll find that third parties also provide RAW decoders for specific camera models, such as YarcPlus and
BreezeBrowser for Canon, and Bibble for the Nikon line. The great freeware Windows utility IrfanView can
handle RAW files such as Canon's .CRW format. Mac users can work with programs like Lemke Software's
GraphicConverter.

Many digital photographers shoot nothing but RAW images, preferring to do all their image processing later
in their computer. Such photographers have several things in common: They're extremely fussy about their
images, they have a ton of memory cards and almost unlimited storage space, and they're willing to spend a
great deal of time working on their images. Be prepared to spend more time shooting the images, too, because
RAW files can take a bit longer to store on your film card than your average JPEG file. (TIFF files can take
even longer.)

For most of us, JPEG is fine most of the time. RAW is a good choice for exceptional photographs or
exceptional needs (or if you just want to get the highest quality).

The Myth of the Unprocessed Image

You'll often see RAW files referred to as unprocessed, both in this book and elsewhere. If you
want to get technical about it, though, RAW files are processed, too. We like to think of RAW
files as containing all the information that the sensor captured, before settings like white balance
have been applied. That's almost true. However, it's an unavoidable consequence of converting
captured analog information into digital format that the data captured by your sensor is, in fact,
processed by the camera's digital signal processing (DSP) chip before the image is stored on your
memory card. So, RAW files are processed, but less so than images saved as JPEG or TIFF files.
It's more accurate to say that RAW files consist of the processed, captured image without any of
the camera's settings applied. There's no way around it.

< Day Day Up >

< Day Day Up >

A Sampling of RAW Browsers

This section provides an overview of the range of RAW file viewers, so you can get a better idea
of the kinds of information available with particular applications. I'm going to include both
high-end and low-end RAW browsers so you can see just what is available and then move on to
Photoshop's Camera RAW plug-in.

Camera Vendor Solutions

You may prefer to use the RAW image processing software provided by your camera's
manufacturer. Most of these have all the features you need to apply settings to your RAW files as
they are imported, along with the ability to save the processed file in TIFF, JPEG, or other

Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine 109

110 Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine
format. Nikon and Canon offer two of the bestknown RAW converters.

Nikon Capture

Nikon Capture is a $99 RAW converter/editor application that works with JPEG, TIFF, or NEF
(Nikon's RAW format) files. You can make modifications to a RAW format file and then resave
it as a RAW file with adjustments, while retaining the original information in case you want to
revert to an earlier state or make additional changes later on. Nikon Capture is shown in Figure
4.4. If you don't want to pay extra, Nikon Picture Project can convert RAW files, and comes in
the box with your camera.

Figure 4.4. Nikon Capture 4 provides access to all options in a Nikon NEF (RAW) file.

[View full size image]

One handy feature is the ability to "defish" images taken with fish-eye lenses, producing a
non-distorted rectilinear image that no longer has the fish-eye qualities. Supported lenses include
the DX Nikkor 10.5mm fish-eye, which produces an image equivalent to a 16mm lens on a
35mm film camera. When such images are defished, they produce super-wide rectangular photos
with some loss of sharpness in the corners, but which are still quite usable. Nikon Capture gives
you direct control over curves, levels, brightness/contrast, color balance, unsharp masking,
optional color noise reduction, and exposure compensation.

Most settings are accessed by expanding the Tool Palette to produce controls like those shown in
Figure 4.5. These include the LCH Editor, which lets you make adjustments to lightness, chroma,
and hue separately. There's also an Image Dust Off feature: Take a dust reference image with
your camera, and Nikon Capture will remove dust spots from a batch of images.

Figure 4.5. Expandable palettes reveal hidden controls.

110 Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine

Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine 111

Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine 111

112 Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine

Batch processing lets you convert a whole folder of images using the same settings. A folder can
be set on "watch" status and Nikon Capture will process any new images dropped into the folder
as they arrive. Those who want to control their camera remotely can use the application's remote
capture feature to take pictures on cue, or on a regular schedule in timelapse mode.

Canon EOS File Viewer Utility/EOS Capture/Digital Photo Professional

Canon provides these software utilities for viewing/converting images taken with Canon cameras,
and for controlling the camera remotely. The File Viewer Utility is not highly regarded by Canon
users, who often opt for a third-party solution. Or, Digital Photo Professional is preferred for
those Canon dSLR cameras that are supported by it.

DPP, shown in Figure 4.6 offers much higher-speed processing of RAW images than was
available with the sluggardly File Viewer Utility (as much as six times faster). Canon says this
utility rivals third-party stand-alone and plug-in RAW converters in speed and features. It
supports both Canon's original .CRW format and the newer CR2 RAW format, along with TIFF,
Exif TIFF, and JPEG.

Figure 4.6. Canon's Digital Photo Professional offers a full array of conversion features.

[View full size image]

You can save settings that include multiple adjustments and apply them to other images and use
the clever comparison mode to compare your original and edited versions of an image either
side-by-side or within a single split image. The utility allows easy adjustment of color channels,
tone curves, exposure compensation, white balance, dynamic range, brightness, contrast, color
saturation, ICC Profile embedding, and assignment of monitor profiles. A new feature is the
ability to continue editing images while batches of previously adjusted RAW files are rendered
and saved in the background.

112 Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine

Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine 113
Other Proprietary RAW Converters

There isn't room in this chapter to provide even brief overviews of the similar software available
from the manufacturers of the other dSLRs. You'll find that Olympus, Pentax, Minolta, and other
vendors of digital SLRs provide similar programs with the same types of features. If your
particular camera's RAW converter doesn't do everything you like, you'll want to explore one of
the third-party solutions discussed next.

Note that most of the products with a price tag can be downloaded for 30-day free trials,
including the likes of Bibble and Capture One. The URLs for these downloads change frequently
(Phase One, for example, is based in Denmark, but makes its products available for download
through other distributors), so if you'd like to try one of these out, do a Google search for the
latest link.

Third-Party Solutions

You'll find that RAW file utilities are available from a wide range of suppliers and can cost you
nothing (in the case of IrfanView), or be included in the cost of other software (which is the case
with Photoshop). Or, you can pay $129 for a sophisticated program like Bibble Professional, or
as much as $500 for a top-of-the-line program like PhaseOne's Capture One Pro (C1 Pro).

IrfanView

At the low (free) end of the scale is IrfanView, a freeware program you can download at
www.irfanview.com. It can read many common RAW photo formats, like the Minolta format
shown in Figure 4.7. It's a quick way to view RAW files (just drag and drop to the IrfanView
window) and make fast changes to the unprocessed file. You can crop, rotate, or correct your
image, and do some cool things like swapping the colors around (red for blue, blue for green,
and so forth) to create false color pictures.

Figure 4.7. IrfanView is a freeware program that can read many RAW file formats.

Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine 113

114 Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine

The price is right, and IrfanView has some valuable capabilities if you're a Windows user. Mac
owners should try GraphicConverter, which costs $29.95 and is available from
www.lemkesoft.com.

Phase One Capture One Pro (C1 Pro)

If there is a Cadillac of RAW converters for Nikon and Canon digital SLR cameras, C1 Pro has
to be it. This premium-priced program does everything, does it well, and does it quickly. If you
can't justify the price tag of this professional-level software, there are "lite" versions for
consumer, serious amateur, and cash-challenged professionals called Capture One dSLR and
Capture One dSLR SE.

Aimed at photographers with high-volume needs (that would include school and portrait
photographers, as well as busy commercial photographers), C1 Pro (shown in Figure 4.8) is
available for both Windows and Mac OS X and supports a broad range of Nikon and Canon
digital cameras. Phase One is a leading supplier of megabucks digital camera backs for medium
and larger format cameras, so they really understand the needs of photographers.

114 Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine

Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine 115
Figure 4.8. Phase One's C1 Pro is fast and sophisticated.

[View full size image]

The latest features include individual noise reduction controls for each image, automatic levels
adjustment, a "quick develop" option that allows speedy conversion from RAW to TIFF or JPEG
formats, dual-image side-by-side views for comparison purposes, and helpful grids and guides
that can be superimposed over an image. Photographers concerned about copyright protection
will appreciate the ability to add watermarks to the output images.

Bibble Pro

One of my personal favorites among third-party RAW converters is Bibble Pro (shown in Figure
4.9), which just came out with a new version as I was writing this book. It supports one of the
broadest range of RAW file formats available, including NEF files from many Nikon Coolpix
models, plus Nikon D1, D1x/h, D2H, D2x, D100, D70, D70s; .CRW files from the Canon
C30/D60/10D/ 300D; .CR2 files from the Canon 1D MKII; .ORF files from the Olympus
E10/E20/E1/C5050/C5060; .DCR files from the Kodak 720x/760/14n; .RAF files from the Fuji
S2Pro; .PEF files from Pentax ISTD; .MRW files from the Minolta Maxxum; and .TIF from
Canon 1D/1DS.

Figure 4.9. Bibble Pro supports a broad range of RAW file formats.

[View full size image]

Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine 115

116 Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine

The utility supports lots of different platforms, too. It's available for Windows, Mac OS X, and,
believe it or not, Linux.

Bibble works fast because it offers instantaneous previews and real-time feedback as changes are
made. That's important when you have to convert many images in a short time. (Event
photographers will know what I am talking about!) Bibble's batch processing capabilities also let
you convert large numbers of files using settings you specify without further intervention.

Its customizable interface lets you organize and edit images quickly and then output them in a
variety of formats, including 16-bit TIFF and PNG. You can even create a web gallery from
within Bibble. I often find myself disliking the generic filenames applied to digital images by
cameras, so I really like Bibble's ability to rename batches of files using new names that you
specify.

Bibble is fully color managed, which means it can support all the popular color spaces (Adobe
sRGB and so forth) and use custom profiles generated by thirdparty color management software.
There are two editions of Bibble, a Pro version and a Lite version. Because the Pro version is
reasonably priced at $129, I don't really see the need to save $60 with the Lite edition, which
lacks the top-line's options for tethered shooting, embedding IPTC-compatible captions in
images, and use as a Photoshop plug-in (if you prefer not to use in stand-alone mode).

BreezeBrowser

BreezeBrowser, shown in Figure 4.10, has long been the RAW converter of choice for
Windows-using Canon dSLR owners who were dissatisfied with Canon's lame File Viewer
Utility. It works quickly, and has lots of options for converting CRW files to other formats. You
can choose to show highlights that will be blown out in your finished photo as flashing areas (so
they can be more easily identified and corrected), use histograms to correct tones, add color
profiles, auto rotate images, and adjust all those raw image parameters, such as white balance,

116 Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine

Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine 117
color space, saturation, contrast, sharpening, color tone, EV compensation, and other settings.
You can also control noise reduction (choosing from low, normal, or high reduction), evaluate
your changes in the live preview, and then save the file as a compressed JPEG, or as either an
8-bit or 16-bit TIFF file. BreezeBrowser can also create HTML web galleries directly from your
selection of images.

Figure 4.10. BreezeBrowser makes converting Canon RAW files a breeze.

[View full size image]

Manipulating RAW Files in Photoshop CS

The latest version of Photoshop includes a built-in RAW plug-in that is compatible with the
proprietary formats of a growing number of digital cameras, both new and old, including the
positively ancient image file from the Kodak DCS 460, right up to the latest, as shown in Figure
4.11.

Figure 4.11. The main Camera Raw window has a broad selection of parameters you can change.

[View full size image]

Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine 117

118 Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine

The list of supported cameras at the time this book was published is a long one, as shown in
Table 4.1.

Table 4.1. RAW Digital SLR Camera Formats Supported by Photoshop CS 2.0
Camera Vendor Models Supported
Canon EOS-1D,
EOS 1D
Mark II,
EOS-1Ds,
EOS-1Ds
Mark II,
EOS-10D,
EOS-20D,
EOS 300D,
EOS 350D
(Digital
Rebels),
EOS-D30,
EOS-D60
Nikon D1, D1H,
D1X, D2x,
D50, D70,
D70s,
D100, D2h,
D2hs, D200
Konica Minolta Maxxum
7D,
Maxxum
5D
Fujifilm FinePix S2
Pro, FinePix

118 Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine

Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine 119
S20 Pro,
FinePix S3
Pro
Olympus E-1, E-10,
E-20,
EVOLT
Leaf Valeo 6,
Valeo 11,
Valeo 22
Contax N Digital
Pentax * ist D, *ist
Ds, *ist Dl
Sigma SD9, SD10
Kodak DCS 14n,
DCS Pro
14nx, DCS
720x, DCS
760, DCS
Pro SLR /n,
DCS 460

To open a RAW image in Photoshop CS 2.0, just follow these steps:

1. Transfer the RAW images from your camera to your hard drive.

2. Choose Open from the File menu, or use Photoshop's File Browser.

3. Select a RAW image file. The Camera RAW plug-in will pop up, showing a preview of the image, like
the one shown in Figure 4.11.

4. Rotate the preview image using the Rotate Preview buttons.

5. Zoom in and out using the Zoom tool.

6. Adjust the RGB levels using the Histogram and RGB Levels facilities.

7. Make other adjustments (described in more detail below).

8. Click OK to load the image into Photoshop using the settings you've made.

Photoshop's Camera RAW plug-in lets you manipulate many of the settings you can control within your
camera. Here are some of the most common attributes you can change. This is an overview only. Check your
Photoshop HELP files for more detailed information on using these controls.

• Color Space. It's possible your digital camera lets you choose from among several different color
space profiles, such as Adobe RGB or sRGB. The RAW file will be saved by the camera using the
camera's native color space. You can change to another color space using the Space drop-down list
shown at lower left in Figure 4.11.
• Depth. Here you'll choose 8 bits or 16 bits per color channel. Photoshop CS now supports more
functions using 16-bit channels, so you might want to preserve the full depth of information available.

Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine 119

120 Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine
• Pixel Size. Usually, you'll choose to open the image at the same resolution it was recorded at. If you
plan to resample to a larger or smaller size, you might find that carrying out this step on the RAW file
yields better results because of the new algorithm incorporated in this version of the plug-in.
• Resolution. This is the resolution that will be used to print the image. You can change the printing
resolution to 300 or 600 pixels per inch (or some other value) to match your printer.
• White-balance. You can change this to a value such as Daylight, Cloudy, Shade, Tungsten,
Fluorescent, or Flash, or leave it at As Shot, which would be whatever white balance was set by your
camera (either automatically or manually). If you like, you can set a custom white balance using the
Temperature and Tint sliders.
• Exposure. This slider adjusts the overall brightness and darkness of the image. Watch the histogram
display at the top of the column change as you make this adjustment, as well as those for the four
sliders that follow.
• Shadows. This slider adjusts the shadows of your image. Adobe says this control is equivalent to
using the black point slider in the Photoshop Levels command.
• Brightness. This slider adjusts the brightness and darkness image, similarly to the Exposure slider,
except that the lightest and darkest areas are clipped off, based on your Exposure and Shadow
settings, as you move the control.
• Contrast. This control manipulates the contrast of the midtones of your image. Adobe recommends
using this control after setting the Exposure, Shadows, and Brightness.
• Saturation. Here you can manipulate the richness of the color, from zero saturation (gray, no color) at
the -100 setting to double the usual saturation at the +100 setting.

Additional controls are available on the Detail, Lens, and Calibrate tabs, shown in Figures 4.12, 4.13, and
4.14.

Figure 4.12. The Detail tab lets you adjust sharpness and noise attributes of your image.

120 Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine

Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine 121
Figure 4.13. The Lens tab has settings for technical lens corrections.

Figure 4.14. The Calibrate tab provides a way for calibrating the color corrections made in the Camera RAW
plug-in.

Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine 121

122 Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine

• Sharpness. This slider applies a type of unsharp masking using a sophisticated algorithm that takes
into account the camera you're using, the ISO rating you used, and other factors. If you're planning on
editing the image in Photoshop, Adobe recommends not applying sharpening to the RAW image.
• Luminance Smoothing/Color Noise Reduction. Both these sliders reduce the noise that often results
from using higher ISO ratings. Each control works with a different kind of noise. Luminance noise is
the noise caused by differences in brightness, while color noise results from variations in chroma.
• Lens Tab settings. These are technical adjustments you can use to compensate for weaknesses in your
lens' design. Most of us don't have the slightest idea what these are, and can safely ignore them.
• Calibrate Tab settings. These settings let you make calibrations in the way the Camera RAW plug-in
adjusts hues, saturation, or shadow tints. If you consistently find your images end up too red, blue, or
green, or have a color cast in the shadows, you can make an adjustment here.

< Day Day Up >

< Day Day Up >

Next Up
This concludes the nuts-and-bolts section of the book. Part II, which follows, consists of down-and-dirty,
technique-laden chapters that lead you through the ins and outs of the most popular types of digital shooting.
Chapter 5 concentrates on action photography, which, as you'll learn, is not limited to sports.
< Day Day Up >
< Day Day Up >

122 Part I: Your Lean, Mean Pixel Machine

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 123

Part II: Techniques Unlimited

In this section, the focus will be entirely on photography, looking at techniques you can use to
get great action photos, people pictures, close-ups, scenics, architectural shots, and travel
images. You'll learn pro tips that will separate your images from the pack. If you find that
most digital photography books offer more about digital technology and image editing than
they do about photography, you'll enjoy the chapters that follow.

< Day Day Up >

< Day Day Up >

Chapter 5. Action Photography

Lights! Camera! Action!

Those are the keys to exciting photography. And, given today's technology, you might not even need the
lights. A digital camera, some fast-moving action, and a bit of knowledge about how to take the best pictures
of moving subjects will launch you on the road to some of the most interesting photographs you've ever taken.
You've got the camera, the action is all around you, and this chapter provides the knowledge you need.

Action photography has never been easier with digital cameras. With a few vexing exceptions, even the
simplest digital cameras have continuous-shooting "burst" modes that let you snap off sequences of shots
quickly often two or three shots per second in clips of 5 to 10 images. More advanced digital cameras have
long zoom lenses (up to 12X) with the equivalent reach of 432mm telephotos on a 35mm film camera. At the
top end, digital SLRs provide even more action photography power, with even faster burst rates (as much as 8
frames per second) and virtually zero lag time between when you press the shutter release and when the photo
is taken.

Although when we think of action photography, we automatically think of sports, this kind of picture taking is
not limited to spectator sports, of course. You can grab some great shots at football or baseball games, soccer
and tennis matches, or even those semi-organized bouts of mayhem they call rugby and hockey, of course. But
you can also capture fast-moving subjects at amusement parks, the beach, or while mountain climbing. Action
photography is a great tool for capturing the excitement of participatory events, from skydiving to golf, and
non-events that involve moving objects, such as juggling or driving your favorite car around a tight mountain
curve. If it's in motion, you might well want to photograph it. Action photography, on any level, is not a
spectator sport.

My first full-time job that didn't involve tossing rolled-up newspapers on my neighbors' front porches was as a
sports photographer for a daily newspaper. I didn't officially become a writer until the paper's sports editor
began publishing the two- and three-page cutlines I was turning in with each photo, each written in inverted
pyramid style, complete with quotes from the coaches. Later, I photographed college sports while working as
a sports information director for a small upstate New York college. More recently, I've been taking a lot of
photographs of high school sports and professional baseball (the former for my kids' sports teams, and the
latter because I purely love baseball and photography). So, I've got a lot of advice to pass along to you in this
chapter.

Although the main focus of this chapter is on sports photography, most of the lessons here apply to taking
pictures of anything that won't sit still and pose for you.
< Day Day Up >
< Day Day Up >

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 123

124 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

The Two Keys to Great Action Shots

Yes, action photography requires a little technical knowledge. You'll need to understand how to select the
shutter speed that will freeze action when you want to, or choose a longer shutter speed to allow for some
creative blurring effects when you want to do that. But neither of those skills are the real keys to getting great
action pictures.

The two most important things you must master are

• Choosing the right subject. Know who to photograph, why they are important, what they might do
that's photo worthy, and where to stand to capture them. (As photojournalism immortal Robert Capa
once said, "If your pictures aren't good enough, you're not close enough.")
• Choosing the right moment. Snap a photo a fraction of a second too late (and that's easy to do with a
slow-responding digital camera) or too early, and you may capture the immortal instants that happen
just after or just before the decisive moment. There were lots of photographs of the Hindenberg as it
started its descent in Lakehurst, New Jersey on May 6, 1937, and quite a few of the charred rubble on
the ground afterwards, but none of them made the cover of a Led Zeppelin album.

In short, the two most important things about capturing an exciting action photograph are knowing what to
photograph, and when. If you stop to think about it, action is a continuous series of moments, each a little
different from the last, all leading up to the moment. It's the instant when a shooting guard releases the
basketball at the apex of a jump shot, and you know that it's going to sail over the arms of a defender and
swish through the net of the basket. Or, the moment might come from the look on a goalie's face as a soccer
ball sails past her outstretched hands into the goal. It might be the instant when the bat connects with a
baseball for the winning run, as shown in Figure 5.1. The moment might involve almost no motion at all, as
when a field goal kicker lowers his head in shame when he sees his boot is tumbling wide of the goalposts.
Capturing the right moment is important.

Figure 5.1. A decisive moment can be the instant the bat strikes the ball to send a game-winning home run over
the fence.

However, the heart of sports photography lies in capturing not only the right moment, but the right subject, in
the right circumstances. My first lesson as a fledging professional came when the newspaper's picture editor

124 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 125

rejected the shot I'd tentatively circled on my contact sheet. The shot was a thrilling moment, frozen in time.

"It's a great action picture," Danny, the photo editor, admitted, "but you've captured one of the scrubs making
a meaningless play after the game was already in the bag. His parents would love this picture, but the fans
would wonder why we published it. Even a so-so shot of a key player at the turning point in the third quarter
would have been better." Choosing the right subject goes hand-in-hand with choosing the right moment.

Tip from the Pros: Scouting Reports

If you want your action photo to have the most meaning, learn a little about the teams you'll be
photographing. Who are the star athletes, the players who will make the big plays? What are their
uniform numbers? Does the quarterback like to throw long, and to whom? Does the pitcher rarely
catch anyone stealing? If so, you may want to pay special attention to the action at first base. Is
that battered-looking player who just took to the ice the team's enforcer, so some teeth-chattering
body checking is in the offing? It may be worth your while to work up an informal scouting
report so you'll know what to look for.

The Decisive Moment is more than the title of a 1952 book by the father of photojournalism, Henri
Cartier-Bresson, an enduring master of exquisite timing who passed away in 2004. The crucial instant can be
seen in Robert Capa's chilling 1936 photograph of a Spanish Loyalist militiaman at the moment of his death,
or the Pulitzer Prize-winning photograph of a woman leaping to her death to escape a hotel fire in Atlanta in
1946. (If you want to talk about timing, the famous picture was taken by a Georgia Tech student, using his last
flashbulb.)

If you keep the moment and the subject in mind at all time, you're on your way to great action photos.
< Day Day Up >
< Day Day Up >

Digital Cameras and Shutter Lag

We might as well get the topic of shutter lag out of the way immediately. That awful gap between the time
when you press the shutter release on your camera and when the picture is actually taken is probably the
number one complaint photographers have about digital cameras. You know the sequence: You see a great
shot, put your camera's viewfinder to your eye, and press the shutter button.

Nothing happens. There's a lag of what seems to be several seconds before your camera takes the photo.
That's frustrating enough when you're shooting a portrait. When your subject is an action picture, that lag can
be fatal. Figure 5.2 at top shows what you saw, while the version at bottom shows the photo you ended up
with.

Figure 5.2. What you saw (top) may not be what you get (bottom) when shutter lag gets into the act.

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 125

126 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Unless you're using a digital SLR, this is a universal problem. Under normal shooting conditions, the lag is
rarely actually as long as a few seconds. I test a half-dozen cameras each month for CNet Networks, and
formal shutter lag evaluations are part of the process. The non-SLR cameras average 0.6 to 0.9 seconds in lag
time when shooting photos under high contrast lighting (which makes it easy for the camera's autofocus
system to lock in). Under more challenging low contrast illumination, the best of the breed average 0.9
seconds, most clock in at 1.9 seconds, and a few choke for as long as 2.5 seconds. Digital SLRs, by the way,
average 0.2 seconds or better (it's hard to measure shutter lag when it's almost non-existent), and so owners of
these cameras should experience negligible delay.

In action photography, this gap is sometimes referred to as an ohnosecond, which is the interval between the
time you press the shutter release, realize that the decisive moment has passed, and then your camera
belatedly takes a picture of nothing in particular. I've experienced delays so long that I've actually given up on
the photo because the action is over and snapped a picture of my feet. Not limited to action photography,
"shutter lag" is one of the most annoying things about digital photography. Fortunately, I have several full and
partial solutions for you.

First, it helps to understand why this happens. As you learned in Chapter 2, lots of things take place when you
press the shutter release on your digital camera. To review, here's the sequence of events.

1. When you first depress the shutter button partway, a digital camera set in programmed or
autoexposure mode probably locks in the correct exposure. Depending on the complexity of your
camera's exposure system, this may take a significant fraction of a second. You can minimize this by
pressing the shutter button halfway ahead of when you actually want to take the photo. You may have
to set your camera to a special mode that locks the exposure at this point. Some cameras have a
button, like the one shown in Figure 5.3, that locks exposure, focus, or both.

126 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 127
Figure 5.3. Your camera may have a special button to lock in exposure and focus.

2. Next, the autofocus system will seek the sharpest focus for the subject matter currently being framed.
If your camera has been set to Continuous Autofocus, it may have been focusing and refocusing all
the time you were framing the picture. If your camera has been set for Single Autofocus, it might have
waited until you pressed the shutter button to focus the image.
3. Press the shutter button the rest of the way, and the exposure is made. Some electronic and
mechanical things may be happening at this step. In the electronic realm, your sensor might be
drained of its current image so it can capture an image for the precise length of time determined by
the electronic shutter programming of your camera. Or, if your camera uses a mechanical shutter, that
device may open and close. Should you be using a digital SLR with a mirror used for viewing, the
mirror will fold up to allow the light to reach the sensor, instead. All this takes time, which ranges
from a lot (with a digital camera having a slow autofocus mechanism) to virtually no time at all (with
a digital SLR, which has a much faster autofocus system because it's not based on reading off the
sensor).
4. The captured image is stored in your camera's built-in buffer RAM (almost instantly), then transferred
to your digital film card (a bit more slowly, as you'll note from the flashing LED that marks the
progress).

Unless you compensate for shutter lag, you might end up with a photograph like the one shown in Figure 5.4.
I carefully composed a shot, waited until I could see my kids just entering the frame, and then pressed the
shutter release. Unfortunately, by the time the camera snapped the picture, one of them was already out of the
picture. All the stuff going on prior to exposure adds up to a delay significant enough to spoil many action
photos, and other types as well. It's easy to spoil a candid portrait when you say, "Smile!" and the subject
follows the smile with a frown when the picture isn't taken as expected.

Figure 5.4. The picture was snapped prior to the kids entering the frame, but this is the picture that resulted.

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 127

128 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Testing for Shutter Lag

Although the delay you experience when taking a photo may seem like an eternity, it may not be as long as
you think. There are several ways to test for the lag time, and I'm going to show you three of them. First, there
is an easy way to test just how much shutter lag you're really experiencing that you can do anywhere you can
find a clock. Just follow these steps.

1. Find a stopwatch (preferred) or an analog clock with a sweep second hand. A stopwatch will enable you
to time your shutter lag more precisely.

2. With your digital camera set on automatic focus/automatic exposure, frame the clock in the viewfinder.
There's no need to take a close-up photo. All you need is to be able to read the hands on the clock/watch.
(Indeed, a close-up may slow down the focus mechanism of your digital camera.)

3. Start the stopwatch or begin watching the second hand of the clock.

4. When the second hand reaches some benchmark point (such as the beginning of a minute), press the
shutter button and hold it down until the photo is taken.

5. Examine the picture, like the one shown at top in Figure 5.5. The time difference between when you
pressed the shutter button and the actual time imaged in the photograph is your shutter lag.

Figure 5.5. Photograph a clock, stopwatch, or computer timer to see just how bad your camera's shutter lag
is.

[View full size image]

128 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 129

Repeat each of these steps using various camera settings. Try the experiment both with and without flash. Set
exposure or focus manually. Use shutter priority and aperture priority modes. See what the difference is in
shutter lag during each of these modes, and use that information when taking your photos.

If you have an online connection and can test your camera while seated at your computer, there's a web page
created by Ed Schwartz that provides a shutter lag test. As of this writing the page can be found at
www.shooting-digital.com/columns/schwartz/shutter_release_test/default.asp. It's located at the web site of
Mikkel Aaland, author of some great books on digital photography and image editing. Thanks, Mikkel and
Ed!

A third method, which also involves a computer, is to use an on-screen stopwatch, like the Windows
application that can be found at www.xnotestopwatch.com. To use XNote Stopwatch, shown at the bottom of
Figure 5.5, you should mount your camera on a tripod and point it at your computer screen. Then, use both
hands to click the Start button on the utility at the same time you press the shutter release on your digital
camera. The quality of the picture doesn't matter, only the results, so don't worry about correct exposure or
even precise focus.

Here are some solutions for you:

• Go dSLR. This suggestion isn't entirely facetious. If you plan on taking many sports and action
photographs, the near-instant response of the average digital SLR might be worth a few extra dollars
to you, prompting the upgrade to a camera in this category. Most snapshooters don't want or need a
digital SLR, but for serious photographers, the reduction in shutter lag might be just the extra push
needed to justify the purchase of one.
• Anticipate. Press the shutter button a fraction of a second before the action peak. If you understand a
sport or activity well, you'll be able to predict a key play often enough to improve your odds of
capturing one in pixels.
• Shoot bursts. Use your camera's sequence mode to grab a series of photos, starting just prior to the big
moment, and ending after it has passed, as shown in Figure 5.6. This method has some drawbacks that
I'll discuss later.

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 129

130 Part II: Techniques Unlimited
Figure 5.6. Which shot is better the first or second? By shooting sequences, you can take your choice.

• Go manual. Use your digital camera's manual exposure and focus settings. Preset the exposure
(lighting doesn't change rapidly in most action situations) and set the focus distance to a point where
you anticipate the action will take place. With the automatic features turned off, you should find your
shutter lag problems dramatically reduced.
• Lock in. If you must use automatic mode, aim the camera at the point where you expect the action to
happen, partially depress the shutter button, and hold it until the big moment arrives. If your camera is
set to lock in exposure and focus when the button's partially depressed, pushing it down the rest of the
way should trigger the actual exposure without much further delay.
• Learn from goofs. Use the lulls between exciting moments to review the images you've shot so far.
Learn from your mistakes on-the-spot, and re-shoot, if you can, to correct your errors. After I
reviewed the roller-coaster photo shown in Figure 5.6, I realized that I was not capturing the faces of
the riders. So, I moved to a slightly higher vantage point and got the improved picture in Figure 5.7.

Figure 5.7. Taking a sequence of shots can improve your chances of capturing a big moment.

130 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 131

• Over-shoot. Take as many photos as possible. The more pictures you take, the better your chances of
overcoming shutter lag and ending up with a picture that truly captures the action.
• Watch your buffer. Be aware of the time it takes to offload images from your camera's internal
memory to your memory card. If your camera's memory is sparse, you may have to wait a few
seconds between shots or a series of shots before you can start shooting again. Good pictures can be
lost in the interim, so you might want to limit the number of pictures you take in one sequence if you
think you might want to shoot another photo during the time your camera is downloading to the
memory card. Many digital cameras provide a readout that shows how much room is left in the buffer.
With non-SLRs, this may be a bar on the rear-panel LCD that expands or contracts. Digital SLRs may
offer a buffer-frame counter in the viewfinder.
< Day Day Up >
< Day Day Up >

Your Action Arsenal

You don't need an expensive camera to take action photos. I once wrote an article for Petersen's PhotoGraphic
Magazine, which I illustrated with sports photos taken with both a $100 point-and-shoot amateur camera as
well as with a $2,000 professional SLR. When my results were reproduced in the magazine at a small size,
and subjected to halftone screening, it was difficult to tell which photos were taken with which camera.

Any digital camera can do the job, assuming you can work your way around the shutter lag problem described
earlier. That's not to say you won't need to compensate for other limitations, too. If your camera has a modest
zoom range, you might have to limit your photography to action that's close to the sidelines. Puny electronic
flashes have a limited range, so you won't be taking photos dozens of feet from the camera at night. Some
digital cameras offer shutter speeds as fast as 1/16,000th of a second; if yours can slice time into slivers no
thinner than 1/250th second, you'll have to use other techniques to freeze the action (or learn to use blur
creatively).

This section explains the key features to look for in a camera used for action photography. I explained most of
these features briefly in Chapter 2. Now it's time to see how they relate to capturing fast-moving subjects.
< Day Day Up >
< Day Day Up >

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 131

132 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Lens
Virtually all of the readers of this book will be using zoom lenses rather than fixed focal length lenses. Today,
all non-SLR digital cameras are furnished with a zoom lens, and even dSLRs with interchangeable lenses are
usually used with a zoom of some type. However, action images are one type of photography that does benefit
from the use of specialized lenses, so if you do have a digital SLR you can make the swap. For example, a
fixed focal length telephoto with a large maximum aperture can help you shoot in lower light levels. For
digital SLR sports photographers, an 85mm f1.8 lens or 400mm f2.8 lens can be a godsend. Fast wide
aperture prime lenses can be a lot cheaper than zoom lenses with the same speed, too, because they are
simpler to design.

The three things to consider about a lens used for action photography are the focal length, aperture, and
whether the camera uses optical or digital magnification.

Focal Length

Your best bet is a camera equipped with a zoom lens that lets you adjust your field of view as the action
moves around. I recommend a lens with at least a 3:1 zoom ratio, although the magnification doesn't tell you
everything. One 3X zoom might provide the equivalent range of a 32mm to 96mm lens on a film camera,
while another 3X zoom might offer the equivalent of 39mm to 117mm. The former would be great for
wide-angle sports, but have little in the way of telephoto reach, while the second would provide a little closer
view of action that's farther away.

So, in addition to zoom ratio, you should compare the effective focal length of your lens with that of a 35mm
camera, because the field of view provided by an actual focal length varies from camera to camera. A true
focal length of 25mm may be a telephoto setting on one digital camera, or a wide-angle setting on another,
depending on the size of the camera's sensor. (The smaller the sensor, the longer the effective magnification at
a particular focal length.)

All digital camera vendors supply this equivalency information. For example, one camera I use has a 7.2 to
50.8mm zoom lens; that provides roughly the same field of view as a 28mm to 200mm zoom lens on a 35mm
camera. You can see the difference in viewpoint between a wide-angle lens and a telephoto setting in Figures
5.8 and 5.9.

Figure 5.8. A wide-angle shot shows you the big picture.

132 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 133
Figure 5.9. A telephoto lets you zoom in on the action.

For most action photos, the longest zoom setting is more important than the shortest. Few sports require a
really wide-angle lens. Most of the time you can't get as close to the action as you'd like. Many benefit from
the equivalent of a 135mm to 150mm telephoto optic, particularly if you're unable to patrol the sidelines and
must shoot from the stands. Sports like basketball and volleyball do call for shorter focal lengths and wider
angles, because you may be literally on top of the action.

Those using some digital SLR cameras can benefit from using lenses designed for 35mm cameras with a
sensor that's smaller than the 24mm x 36mm film frame. Mounted on such cameras, the field of view of a lens
is cropped, so a 200mm tele actually produces the same field of view as a 320mm long lens (when used with
one particular digital camera with a 1.6X "multiplier" factor). Note that some Canon digital cameras (and the
now-discontinued Kodak dSLRs) have "full frame" sensors, and don't produce this magnification effect.

You should remember that the crop factor is not true magnification. Your lens still has the same focal length,
depth-of-field, and f-stops it would have if used on a full frame camera. That 200mm lens may look as if it
were a 320mm optic when you examine the photos, but it's really producing an image that has the edges
trimmed off, as shown in Figure 5.10.

Figure 5.10. Images produced by a lens designed for use with a full-frame camera will be cropped by a digital SLR
with a sensor that is smaller than 24 x 36mm.

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 133

134 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Owners of fixed-lens digital cameras aren't left out in the cold when it comes to longer or shorter effective
focal lengths. Many models can be fitted with attachments that provide telephoto or wide-angle effects. The
best avenue is to choose one of these accessories offered by the manufacturer of your camera; they are
designed specifically for your camera's lens and provide the best results. However, third-party vendors also
produce generic attachments that can be fitted to a variety of cameras. The cost savings can be significant: a
3X tele converter offered by a major camera manufacturer might cost $250, whereas a generic third-party
attachment (possibly with 6X to 8X magnification) can be purchased for $100 or so. The downside? The
off-brand accessories might not have the image quality you want.

Aperture

The maximum aperture of your lens can be important when shooting action in low-light situations. A "slow"
lens can limit the maximum shutter speed you can use, thus affecting your ability to freeze action. For
example, if your lens opens no wider than f8 (a common limitation for longer lenses and zoom settings), the
best you can do with your camera set to ISO 100 in full daylight is 1/500th second at F8. Your camera may
have 1/1000th or briefer setting, but you can't use it without increasing the ISO setting to 200 or higher, thus
increasing your chances of detail-robbing noise in your photos. If daylight is waning or you're shooting
indoors, an f8 lens may limit you to sluggish 1/250th or 1/125th second speeds.

This is one arena in which digital SLRs shine: They're likely to have lenses available with larger maximum
apertures, plus the capability of shooting at ISO settings higher than ISO 400 without appreciable noise. Many
dSLRs do a good job at ISO 800-1600 with only minimal noise.

A larger maximum aperture is better, assuming that the lens performs well wide open; an optic that is a bit
fuzzy at its maximum aperture is no bargain. Keep in mind that the maximum opening of some zoom lenses
varies, depending on the focal length setting. That is, a lens that rates an f4.5 aperture at the 28mm setting
may provide only the equivalent of f6.3 or slower when zoomed all the way to the telephoto position.

Lenses that retain the same effective f-stop throughout their zoom range are called constant aperture lenses. If
you're considering one for your dSLR, expect to pay more for this feature. For example, Nikon offers a
70mm-300mm f4.5/f5.6 telephoto zoom that can be purchased for less than $150. It also sells another zoom
with a more limited 80mm-200mm range, but which has some nice extra features, including internal focusing
(the length of the lens doesn't change as you focus), extra-low dispersion glass (which reduces aberrations

134 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 135
caused by the lens focusing different colors at slightly different points), and a nifty f2.8 constant aperture. All
that stuff is worth a bit more, wouldn't you say? How about $1619?

You might not be willing to pay that much to gain an extra f-stop or two, but pro photographers do it all the
time. That's because the use of larger maximum apertures lets you shoot in lower light, and helps in other
ways. For example, a large f-stop can improve action photos by isolating your subjects, particularly at longer
focal lengths. The reduced depth-of-field afforded by a lens with a wide-open aperture set at the maximum
zoom setting can be used creatively, if you're able to focus accurately enough to apply the depth-of-field that
remains to the subject. Figure 5.11 shows how reduced depth-of-field can emphasize a subject.

Figure 5.11. Use depth-of-field to concentrate attention on a subject.

Optical vs. Digital Zoom

I've always maintained that "digital zoom" is a solution in search of a problem. In the quest for longer zoom
ratios that can be posted in large letters on the outside of the box, camera manufacturers came up with an
amazing and essentially useless feature: the digital zoom. Digital zoom is a way of providing the illusion of a
longer focal length lens: Instead of the 135mm equivalent maximum optical setting your camera provides, the
field of view can be magically magnified by 2X (or more) giving you an ersatz 270mm lens. Maybe.

Digital zoom doesn't capture anymore information. Instead, it simply fills the photo frame with the pixels
captured in the center of the image, using interpolation to enlarge the pixels and provide a magnified image.
With some cameras, the results are terrible. You might get better results taking a straight shot and cropping in
Photoshop or another image editor, as you can see in Figures 5.12 and 5.13, which show a photo taken with
digital zoom and another that's a straight telephoto shot, both captured with the same camera. Other cameras
do a fairly good job of interpolation, so the digitally zoomed images are acceptable. I use digital zoom
occasionally. Your best bet is not to purchase a camera based on the reach of its digital zoom, and then to test
your camera thoroughly to see how well it performs in digital zoom mode before relying on this feature for
any important photos.

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 135

136 Part II: Techniques Unlimited
Figure 5.12. This photo was taken using digital zoom, and isn't very sharp compared to the next image.

Figure 5.13. This picture was taken with the same camera as a normal telephoto shot, then enlarged.

Digital SLRs generally don't have this feature, because they don't need it; you can simply change your lens for
one that's longer. You'll find digital zoom primarily on point-and-shoot and EVF-style cameras.

If you do use digital zoom, learn how it operates with your camera so you can apply it quickly. One way to
implement this feature is simply to allow the zoom control to extend past the optical zoom territory into the
realm of digital zoom. Usually, a bar showing the zoom level appears on the LCD on the back of the camera,
with a marking showing where optical zoom leaves off and digital zoom begins, as in Figure 5.14. Other
cameras use a magnification button on the back of the camera. Press it, and the lens zooms in, with either a
magnified view in the viewfinder or, perhaps, a cropped image showing how much of the original view is
being captured. The magnified view is preferred, because it allows you to evaluate your image at full size.

136 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 137
Figure 5.14. An indicator on LCD shows when you've entered digital zoom territory.

Exposure Controls

Exposure controls help determine whether your image has a pleasing tonal range, and whether there is
sufficient detail in both the highlights and shadows. (The quality and quantities of the light are other factors.)
Even the best action photograph can be ruined if it's not exposed properly. I'll show you what to look for in
exposure controls in this section.

Exposure Modes

Your digital camera probably offers a variety of exposure modes, and might even include one especially for
action photography. When choosing an exposure mode, keep in mind the shutter lag problems discussed
previously. Here are the most common exposure modes, and how they relate to action pictures.

• Full auto. The least expensive digital cameras might have only a basic full-auto exposure mode, while
more advanced models will offer this as an option. In either case, the camera's logic chooses both
shutter speed and aperture using simple rules. For example, the camera may shoot at f8 using
whatever shutter speed provides the correct exposure until the exposure becomes long enough to
encourage hand-held blurring (at, say 1/30th second). Then it will switch to a wider f-stop, as
necessary. This is not the best mode for action photography.
• Programmed auto. Most digital cameras have more sophisticated programming that takes into account
the shooting environment when deciding exposure settings. For example, if photographs are being
taken in dim light, the camera assumes that you're indoors; in bright light, that you're outdoors. Lens
openings and shutter speeds are selected based on typical shooting situations in these environments.
• Programmed selective/scene modes. Most digital cameras have selective programs, also called "scene
modes" you can choose for automatic exposure under specific conditions. The one you want to opt for
is the action/sports setting. In such cases, the camera will try to use the shortest shutter speed possible.
It might even automatically boost the ISO rating (if you've set ISO to Auto) or use other tricks to
optimize your exposure for fast-moving subjects. If you must use automatic exposure, this is your best
choice.
• Aperture priority. In this mode, you set the lens opening, and the camera automatically chooses a
shutter speed to suit. Use this if you want to select a specific f-stop, say to increase/decrease
depth-of-field. Because aperture priority offers little control over shutter speed, you probably won't
use it frequently for sports photos.

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 137

138 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

• Shutter priority. In this mode, you choose a preferred shutter speed, and the camera selects the lens
opening. That lets you select 1/500th or 1/1000th second or shorter to stop action, yet retain the
advantages (barring shutter lag) of automatic exposure. This is the mode to use if you're taking photos
under rapidly changing light conditions. I use it for outdoor sports on partly cloudy days in which a
playing field may alternate between bright sunlight and overcast within the space of a few minutes,
depending on how the clouds move. It's also a good choice for photos taken as the sun is setting,
because the camera automatically compensates for the decreasing illumination as the sun dips below
the horizon.
• Manual exposure. I end up using manual exposure for many of my action photographs. Indoors, the
illumination doesn't change much. Most sports arenas, gymnasiums, and other sites have strong
overhead illumination that allows taking pictures at 1/250th second at f2.8 using ISO 400 or 800
settings. I might also use flash indoors. Outside, I carefully watch the lighting and change exposure to
suit.

Monitoring Exposure

Your camera's built-in light meter might do the job for you, especially if it has a readout that shows exactly
how much over- or under-exposure you're working with at any given moment. Unfortunately, a low-end
digital camera might be equipped with nothing more than a red LED that blinks when the camera decides
there isn't enough light to take a picture. In the worst case, you'll be blocked from actually taking the picture.

Working on the theory that the photographer should know best whether the picture is worth taking or not, I
use only cameras that give me the freedom to goof in manual mode, should I want to intentionally take a
severely backlit photograph or exercise some other creative license. In manual exposure mode, I sometimes
use a handheld light meter and transfer the settings to my digital camera. I tend to use a handheld light meter
more than the average amateur photographer, a habit that extends back to my days when people paid me lots
of money to know exactly what lighting conditions I was shooting under. You won't find these in use much
anymore, because the exposure meters in digital cameras have gotten so good.

Handheld meters are available in several varieties, including "spot" meters that zero in on a specific point you
aim them at, and "incident" meters, which measure the light that falls on their sensors (usually a dome shape,
like that shown in Figure 5.15). Some are combination meters that offer both modes, and can work with
continuous lighting or electronic flash. The disadvantage of the incident meter, of course, is that it only works
when the light at the camera position is substantially the same as the light falling on the subject, assuming you
don't want to run out onto the field and measure from there.

Figure 5.15. A handheld light meter can come in handy at sports events to confirm the correct exposure.

138 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 139

Better cameras let you choose the area being monitored for correct exposure. For action photography, it's
handy to have a spot meter option that's easily accessible. With one of my digital cameras, all I need to do is
press the Spot button and hold it down to meter the light at any point I choose.

More sophisticated digital cameras may have various exposure modes, which I explained in some detail in
Chapter 2. To recap, you might be able to choose from:

• Evaluative matrix. The camera examines many different points within the scene and chooses an
exposure based on what the camera thinks the subject matter consists of. Some digital cameras have
more than 1,000 points in the matrix used to evaluate exposure. This is a good choice for action
photography of scenes that don't include extra bright or extra dark areas.
• Center weighted. Most of the emphasis is given to the center of the image. If your action will take
place mostly in the center of the frame, this mode can work.
• Spot metering. A small center area is used exclusively for calculating exposure. This may be your best
choice for night football, beach volleyball, or other sports in which your subjects are likely to be
surrounded by dark or light areas.

Focus Controls

Action photography is one field that can benefit from automatic focus, as long as the focus feature operates
quickly enough to avoid delaying the exposure. As described in the shutter lag section earlier, many cameras
take so long to focus that pictures can be lost while you wait for the camera to zero in on the sharpest point.

For that reason, you'll want to test your camera's automatic focus features carefully in real action photography
situations before attempting any crucial work. With players racing around your field of view at a furious pace,
the ability to allow your camera to determine the correct focus is a valuable capability. You have enough to
think about! Here are the kinds of focus options you may be able to choose from:

• Continuous autofocus. As you'd expect from its name, continuous autofocus sets your camera to
adjust focus all the time once you partially depress the shutter release. That's great for fast-moving
subjects, because an object moving quickly towards you or away from you can change its plane of
focus rapidly in a few seconds. Some cameras include predictive autofocus, in which the camera
estimates where the subject will be when you do press the shutter release all the way, in effect
focusing ahead of the actual movement. The main problem with continuous autofocus is that you may

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 139

140 Part II: Techniques Unlimited
end up with an out-of-focus picture if your subject is moving too fast for the camera's autofocus
system to keep up.
• Single autofocus. This mode sets focus once, locking it in until the shutter release is pressed all the
way, or you take your finger off the button. Single autofocus reduces your chances of getting an
out-of-focus picture; in fact, your camera may prevent you from taking a picture at all while it is
seeking the correct focus point. This is not your best choice for action photography, because you'll
sometimes prefer a slightly out-of-focus image taken right now versus a sharply focused image
captured whenever the camera got around to deciding what the best focus point was.
• Dynamic focus area. Because your dSLR has more than one focus sensor checking your frame, it may
shift among them as focus is calculated. With dynamic area autofocus, the camera may automatically
switch from using one sensor to a different sensor if it detects subject motion. In a mode called closest
subject, this dynamic mode may be selected based on what subject is nearest to the camera. Dynamic
focus area is good for action photography if your subject is likely to be either the closest object to the
camera or a subject that the camera is likely to zero in on.
• User selected focus area. You switch from one focus area to another using the cursor pad, as shown in
Figure 5.16. Autofocus systems frequently use the same general zones applied by the autoexposure
system, and use a single on-screen set of indicators to show them. The focus area in use will often be
indicated by a glowing red light, as you can see in the figure.

Figure 5.16. When you switch from one autofocus zone to another, the focus priority area will often be
indicated with a green or red glow.

• Focus override. Cameras and lenses may have an AF/M button you can use to switch between
autofocus and manual. Some let you use a mode that focuses automatically, but which can be
fine-tuned manually with no danger of grinding gears or gnashing teeth.
• Macro lock/lockout. Some cameras and lenses have a provision for locking out the closest or most
distant focus areas, so that focus can be achieved only within a narrower range. That can come in
handy when you're shooting sports, because the lens won't bother seeking close focus, which can be
time-consuming.
• Autofocus assist lamp. This is an optional feature that can improve autofocus operation in low light
situations. The light, which is most often either white or red, is rarely strong enough to be of much
help beyond a few feet, tends to be annoying to your human or animal subjects, and uses enough
power to drain your battery a bit. You'll probably want to turn this off when shooting action.

140 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 141

Action photography is particularly suited for automatic focus, because there is so much movement going on,
and so little time in which to make decisions. However, you should at least practice using manual focus,
because manual focus and automatic focus are each useful in specific situations:

• For reducing shutter lag. Avoid automatic focus if it introduces massive shutter lag problems to your
action photography experience. Use manual focus instead.
• To use auto prefocus. Use automatic focus if you're able to prefocus on a specific point by partially
depressing the shutter button. If your camera allows you to lock in focus, and then take a photograph
quickly by depressing the shutter button the rest of the way, autofocus may work for you.
• When grabbing very fast action. Experiment with automatic focus if the action changes quickly from
one point to another. You may not be able to focus manually fast enough. I've lost as many pictures to
poor focus as I have to shutter lag.
• To capture predictable action. Manual focus is a good choice when you know in advance where the
action will be taking place (for example, around the hoop at a basketball game) and can help your
camera operate more quickly than in autofocus mode.
• To maximize limited opportunities. Manual focus works when your shooting is limited by other
factors. At baseball games, for example, if I'm working with a camera with a limited zoom range, I
find that from my usual position by the first base dugout my only realistic subjects are the batter,
pitcher, and first base positions. I can prefocus on one of those spots and be ready for action at that
position.
• When there are depth-of-field considerations. Manual focus is best when you need to control your
depth-of-field. For example, you might want to shoot a photo of spectators watching a game. In that
case, you wouldn't mind if the game itself is a little out-of-focus. Your digital camera's autofocus
might focus on the playing field in the center of the image rather than the spectators at the edges of
the frame.
• When there's enough time to focus. Manual focus is practical only when you're able to accurately set
focus manually. Distance guesstimates work sometimes. I use this method at football games, where I
can use the yardline markers as a gauge, and at baseball games, because the distance between bases,
or from home plate to the pitcher's mound is a standard increment. If you're focusing using your
camera's viewfinder, remember that some viewfinders display sharp focus better than others, and that
your ability to focus visually may suffer when the illumination wanes.

Tip from the Pros: Focus Presets

Several of my digital cameras use a focus ring around the camera lens (as opposed to Plus and
Minus buttons or some other means of setting focus manually). If you're lucky enough to have a
focus ring available, you might be able to pre-mark the correct focus setting for specific playing
positions on the barrel of the lens (use a sharpened white grease pencil). Then, you can switch
(fairly) rapidly from one setting to another by aligning the mark with another reference mark on
your camera.

Electronic Flash

All of us photography cognoscenti have smiled at sports events when an amateur photographer high in the
stands attempted to snap a flash photograph of the game from 50 yards away. Everyone knows that a
point-and-shoot camera's built-in flash produces its best results from no more than 10-12 feet away from the
subject. Of course, I never mention this to the hapless amateurs, because they invariably reach into a pocket
and pull out an abominable photo (which they nevertheless find perfectly acceptable) taken at the previous
game under identical conditions. In virtually all cases, they lucked out and had used a film that was fast
enough to produce a picture under the available light, or their digital camera automatically shifted into fuzzy

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 141

142 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

high-ISO mode. The flash had little or nothing to do with the exposure.

Pros and Cons

Even so, we big-time photographers who understand electronic flash find some use for it, because there are
advantages as well as disadvantages to sports flash photography. The advantages are well-known:

• The brief duration of electronic flash can often freeze fast action even more effectively than your
camera's shortest shutter speed.
• Electronic flash can provide enough light to illuminate sports venues that are far too dim for good
available light photographs.
• Electronic flash works just fine in close confines, so it works indoors for basketball photos, or
outdoors for football pictures taken close to the sidelines.

Electronic flash also has some disadvantages, like these:

• Flash pictures often look like flash pictures, with very bright foregrounds and pitch-black
backgrounds. For a horrid example of this, I've resurrected my very first published photo, dating back
to my film days, as shown in Figure 5.17. It's an example of the traditional "basketball instead of a
head" shot that every sports photographer strives for, made to seem as if it were taken outdoors at
night thanks to the overpowering glare of an electronic flash. Such photos can look dated (and this
one is dated), because many sports pictures taken today in venues that are better lit, with faster films
and faster digital sensors have no such look. Or, you can use the effect artistically to isolate your main
subjects from the rest of the playing field.

Figure 5.17. You can never mistake a sports photo taken with flash for an existing light picture.

• Electronic flash can produce a "ghosting" effect, which occurs when the main exposure is made by
the flash, and a secondary, blurry exposure is produced when the available light is strong enough.
Some cameras won't synchronize with the electronic flash at particular shutter speeds, particularly if
your digital camera uses a mechanical shutter. Because the electronic flash exposure is over in as little

142 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 143

as 1/50,000th of a second, the flash needs to be triggered at a point when the entire sensor is exposed
to the light. For some cameras, that happens only when shutter speeds of 1/125th of a second or
slower are used. For faster shutter speeds, a smaller opening is passed vertically or horizontally in
front of the sensor, and only the portion exposed when the flash is triggered will show up in your
photo. The slower the shutter speed you must use to synch with your flash, the more likely you're to
get ghosting effects. Figure 5.18 shows a typical image with ghosting problems.

Figure 5.18. This picture is actually two exposures: one made by flash and one, a ghost image, that
resulted from the existing light.

• Some venues won't let you use flash. I've never had a problem at the high school, college, or pro
levels, but have been chastised sharply by the refs when attempting to use flash at middle school
basketball games. Although personally I feel that these young stars need to get used to playing under
the glare of electronic flash illumination, I always abide by the officials' rulings.
• Electronic flash eats up your camera's internal batteries quickly, and drains the cells in an external
flash unit almost as quickly. I recently photographed a football game and took along six sets of 2000
mAh Nickel Metal Hydride batteries for my camera and external flash unit. By the end of the game I
had a few hundred exposures and six sets of dead batteries.

Flash Sync and You

Your digital camera probably has several flash synchronization settings that can help you work with the
ghosting effect, either to reduce it or enhance it. Ghosting is such a common occurrence that photographers
can even use it as a special effect, producing a photo that combines a sharp photo with a trailing blurry ghost
that follows behind. All you need to do is use flash at an f-stop and shutter speed that will also allow a
conventional image.

Unfortunately, your digital camera may work against you. That happens when the flash is triggered at the end
of the exposure rather than at the beginning of it. You'll end up with a ghost image preceding the subject,
followed by a sharp flash image at the end of the exposure, when you want the reverse. Your digital camera
may have a setting to let it control exactly when the flash is fired. Set properly, the flash will fire immediately,
but your electronic/mechanical shutter will remain open long enough to produce the ghost image as the main
subject continues on its path.

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 143

144 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Here are the most common synchronization options found on digital cameras:

• Front-sync. In this mode, the flash fires at the beginning of the exposure. If the exposure is long
enough to allow an image to register by existing light as well as the flash, and if your subject is
moving, you'll end up with a streak that's in front of the subject, as if the subject were preceded by a
ghost. Usually, that's an undesirable effect.
• Rear-sync. In this mode, the flash doesn't fire until the end of the exposure, so the ghost image is
registered first, and terminates with a sharp image at your subject's end position, with the well-known
streak (like that which followed The Flash everywhere) trailing behind. That can be a bad thing or a
good thing, depending on whether you want the ghost image.
• Slow-sync. This mode sets your camera to use a slow shutter speed automatically, to record
background detail that the flash, used to expose a subject closer to the camera, fails to illuminate. This
mode can improve your flash images if you hold the camera steady and the subject is not moving. So,
slow-sync is best reserved for non-sports images, or photographs in which the subject is approaching
the camera. Otherwise, you can almost guarantee ghost images.

Tip from the Pros

High-speed sync is a luxury found on more expensive cameras, and it may even be
undocumented. You may be able to shoot action photos at higher than your camera's listed top
sync speed. A few cameras have a high-speed sync mode, and others may be fooled into
producing it. HS mode does allow you to shoot at higher shutter speeds (up to 1/8000th second or
more) using flash. The flash produces a longer burst of light, or a series of short bursts that
overlap enough to produce an even exposure over the full frame, even though only part of the
sensor is exposed at one time. The camera may be able to trigger this sequence automatically, or
you might be able to fool the flash into firing in this way. One common trick is to tape over all
the flash contacts on a camera's hot shoe except for the center contact. The flash responds by
firing off a longer burst at reduced power. High-speed sync generally works only very close to
the camera and is best suited for close-up action photography, rather than sports. You might try
this mode when experimenting with the individual project at the end of this chapter.

Compatibility

If you're using flash, consider working with a more powerful external flash unit that's compatible with your
digital camera. Such a flash may not be easy to find. Some digital cameras are able to use only dedicated flash
units made specifically for them. One reason for that is often that the triggering voltage of the vendor's own
flash units is low, and electronic flash that use higher voltages may fry the electronics. Another reason is that
only a dedicated flash unit might be compatible with the flash autoexposure mechanism of your camera.
Unless you want to set flash exposure manually, you'll be better off with the recommended units.

One of my favorite non-SLR digital cameras has a standard PC sync connector that's compatible with any
electronic flash I care to use. It works happily with my studio flash units, and is equally at home with the
"potato masher" flashgun I use at night football and soccer games when the field lighting isn't strong enough.

Tip from the Pros: Flash Power

The more powerful an external flash unit is, the more power it requires. Avoid units that have
only internal rechargeable batteries. You need a flash with replaceable battery packs, or which

144 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 145

can use standard AA, C, or D-sized rechargeable batteries. (In a pinch, you can even use alkaline
cells.) The best external flash units can use special external powerpacks, which can be built as
belt-packs that fasten around your waist, or auxiliary cases you carry around with a strap. Some
enterprising vendors make a "one size fits all" battery pack that can be used with several vendors'
flash units.

Don't bother with multiple flash units for sports. They're best suited for portraiture and other lighting-intensive
photo arenas. Pros relied on multiple flash units extensively before the fast color films and more sensitive
digital cameras of today became prevalent. I used to watch these folks spend hours suspending their
radio-controlled strobes from the rafters of sports arenas before an important event. Is all that work worth it
just to make the cover of Sports Illustrated? You should be able to get by with a single flash unit or no flash at
all.

Flash Exposure

Learn to use your digital camera's various flash exposure modes. You can usually control how the flash fires,
as well as the system used to measure the exposure. The most common exposure modes are these:

• TTL (through-the-lens) metering. With this type of exposure, the camera measures the flash
illumination that reaches the sensor and adjusts the exposure to suit. If you're photographing a subject
that reflects or absorbs a lot of light, the exposure setting may not be accurate. Some camera/flash
tandems use complex communication systems to convey information back and forth with
imperceptible pre-flashes. The camera tells the flash unit when to fire and, perhaps, what zoom setting
is being used with the camera's lens. The flash takes that information into account, and may respond
by telling the camera the exact color temperature that will be used during the ensuing exposure.
• Pre-flash metering. The camera fires a pre-flash and uses that information only to calculate exposure.
This is the best mode to use when your exposure is "non-standard" in some way, as when you put a
diffuser on the flash, a darkening filter on your lens, or use an external flash unit.
• Integrated metering. The camera triggers a pre-flash just before the exposure, measures the light that
reflects back, and then integrates that information with distance data supplied by your camera's focus
mechanism. The camera knows roughly how far away the subject is and how much light it reflects,
and can calculate a more accurate exposure from that.
• Manual control. In this mode, the flash fires at whatever power setting you specify for the flash (full
power, half power, and so forth) and you calculate the exposure yourself, using a flash meter or
various formulas using guide numbers (values that can be used to calculate exposure by dividing them
by the distance to the subject).

Electronic flash units have firing modes, too, in addition to exposure modes. The most common modes you'll
encounter are these (not all are available with every digital camera):

• Always flash. Any time you flip up the electronic flash on your camera, or connect an external flash,
the flash will fire as the exposure is made.
• Autoflash. The flash fires only when there isn't enough light for an exposure by available light.
• Fill flash/forced on. The flash fires in low light levels to provide the main source of illumination, and
in brighter conditions such as full sunlight or backlighting, to fill in dark shadows.
• Red-eye flash. A pre-flash fires before the main flash, contracting the pupils of your human or animal
subjects, and reducing the chance of red-eye effects, while annoying your victim.
• Rear sync. Controls whether the flash fires at the beginning or end of an exposure.
• Wireless/remote sync. In this mode, the camera triggers an external flash unit using a wireless sync
unit. As with all such remote controls, a selection of perhaps four or more channels are available so
you can choose one that's not in use by another nearby photographer who also happens to be using
wireless control. Unless you're covering a major event, you probably won't experience many conflicts

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 145

146 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

when using wireless control. Some remote control/slave flash setups trigger by optical means: The
camera's flash is detected and sets off the remote flash. You may be able to set the camera flash to low
power so the main illumination comes from the remote.

Tripods and Monopods for Action

A tripod, or its single-legged counterpart the monopod, supports your camera during exposures, providing a
steadying influence that is most apparent when shooting with long lenses or slow shutter speeds. By steadying
the camera, a tripod/monopod reduces the camera shake that can contribute to blurry photos.

I'd never use a tripod at all at any event at which I needed to move my shooting position frequently. Tripods
take up too much space and are clumsy to move about. To use one along the sidelines of any field game would
be insane, probably prohibited, and sure to incur the derision of your would-be colleagues. A tripod is most
useful when the camera must remain absolutely steady, such as for an exposure of more than 1/15th second. A
monopod doesn't provide quite as much support, but is sufficient for action photography. I saw plenty of
monopods at the last football game I covered, and more than a few chestpods, which brace against your chest
to steady the camera.

A monopod, like the one shown in Figure 5.19, sharply reduces camera shake, which can be obvious even at
shutter speeds as fast as 1/125th second (or even faster). A longer lens may be physically large enough to
cause some camera shake of its own, and even a modestly sized tele on a digital camera magnifies any camera
shake enough to provide more blurring than the movement of your subjects.

Figure 5.19. You can fasten the monopod to the tripod socket of your camera, or mount it directly to a longer lens
that includes its own tripod socket collar.

Tripods are most useful for sports like baseball, where the action happens in some predictable places, and
you're not forced to run around to chase it down.

146 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 147

Tip from the Pros: How Steady Are You?

If you think your hands are steady enough at faster shutter speeds, you might want to conduct a
simple test. You'll probably be surprised to discover that camera shake might be noticeable at
fairly brief shutter speeds. Even veteran photographers who pride themselves at being able to
squeeze off sharp photos at 1/30th or 1/15th second are surprised at the results of this test.

Although there are several ways to conduct the test, my favorite is to use a large piece of
aluminum foil, mounted vertically at eye-level and backlit. Poke some tiny holes in the
aluminum foil so that little pin-pricks of light are visible from the back illumination.

Then, position yourself 10 to 20 feet from the foil, rack your zoom lens out to its maximum
magnification, and fire off some shots at various shutter speeds. You might have to use your
camera's manual exposure or shutter preferred modes to select the speeds. For best results, focus
carefully on the foil. Then dump all the images from your camera to your computer and view
them in your image editor. If your hand is steady, each pin-prick will appear to be round and
sharp in the image. As you reduce the shutter speed, you'll probably notice that the pin circles
become elongated in the vertical, horizontal, or diagonal directions, depending on the bias of
your shakiness. At worst, you may notice little wavering trails of light that show you're not
merely shaking a bit, but positively quivering, as you can see in Figure 5.20.

Figure 5.20. Backlit test pattern photographed at 1/1000th second (upper left); 1/30th second (upper
right); 1/4 second (lower left); and 1 second (lower right).

After you've reviewed the results, either practice hand-holding your camera more steadily, switch
to a higher shutter speed, or get yourself a tripod/monopod camera support.

Your Digital Film

I covered most of what you need to know about digital film in Chapter 2, but the topic deserves a revisit,
because action photography poses some special demands. There are two key things about this kind of picture
taking that affects your choice of memory card:

• You'll probably be using your digital camera's burst mode, or "motor drive" capabilities more heavily
when shooting action pictures. Even a short sequence can eat up six or eight exposures. At that rate,

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 147

148 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

you can run through your average digital film card in a few minutes. You'll need lots of film cards.
• Even if you're firing off single frames, it's common to take one picture after another. As I mentioned
before, the number of sequential photos you can take is limited both by the amount of internal RAM
your digital camera has, as well as how quickly it can be offloaded to your film card. In practice, the
transfer speed of a digital memory card rarely makes much difference, but action photography is one
of those exceptions. You don't want to wait for endless seconds as your previous pictures are
transferred, particularly when new action is unfolding in front of you. If you do a great deal of action
photography, you'll want to find and purchase memory cards with the fastest transfer speeds. Speeds
can range from 1MB to 20MB per second (depending on how the manufacturer measures transfer
speed) or even much higher.

Tip from the Pros

One of the reasons pros buy large flash cards is not necessarily because they want to squeeze
every last picture they can onto one card. When you're on a shoot, it's important to a.) not have to
change "film" very often and b.) not have to swap out memory cards right in the middle of an
important moment. A professional photographer may actually switch cards when there are
dozens of shots left, simply to avoid the inevitable changeover coming at the worst possible time,
say, when a team is on the march towards the end zone. It's better to have five 4GB Compact
Flash cards each 80 percent full, than to have four full cards and a fifth that never got used
because the winning touchdown was scored while you were swapping memory.

When I photographed a professional baseball game last summer, I took along both a Kodak 14-megapixel pro
camera, as well as a more consumer-oriented 5MP Minolta model. The Kodak camera had a 1GB
Hitachi/IBM mini hard disk, and the Minolta was outfitted with an array of CompactFlash cards in sizes from
64 to 256MB. I barely made it through the game! If you can't afford to buy more memory cards than you
possibly can use, here are some tips for stretching your available removable storage as far as it will go.

• Choose compact file formats. I routinely use either my digital camera's RAW format, or the
high-resolution TIFF format for everyday photography, because storage space isn't an issue and
maximum sharpness is. As you learned in Chapter 4, modest JPEG compression can squeeze down
photos to a fraction of their TIFF equivalents without really costing you too much in sharpness. Use
JPEG when you can, and select a compression/quality ratio that's compatible with your image quality
expectations.
• Reduce your resolution. Do you really need to shoot at 4500 x 3000 pixels? Switch to a lower
resolution and you can store many times more images in the same storage space. Perhaps the solution
is as simple as moving closer so the full image can be used instead of a cropped version of a higher
resolution version. Some digital cameras automatically switch to a lower resolution mode anyway
when you're using high-speed sequence modes.
• Use sequence mode only when you really feel you need to, and reduce the number of in-between
photos that you didn't really want.
• Review your shots after taking them (you'll want to do that to correct your mistakes on future shots,
anyway) and press the Quick Erase button to remove the real dogs. Even if you're an above-average
shooter, you might discover that half your original photos are clunkers that don't deserve to be saved,
anyway. Deleting them now saves space on your film card for better photos later.
• Investigate carrying along one of those portable hard drives that can transfer your pictures from the
film card, freeing the space on the card. What else do you have to do during halftime? There's an
adapter for the Apple iPod that lets you transfer pictures from a memory card onto the iPod's hard
disk.
< Day Day Up >
< Day Day Up >

148 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 149

Taking a Position
One of the keys to taking great action photos is getting a favorable vantage point. Some locations just lend
themselves to better viewpoints and improved photographic opportunities. Gain access to the pit at an auto
race, and you'll not only get incredible photos of cars on the track, but you'll be able to capture the excitement
of the crew servicing a dusty, steaming hot vehicle that pauses just long enough for a picture or two before
peeling back out to the competition. (This assumes you know how to stay out of the way of the professionals!)

Of course, at professional sports events you probably won't have much choice about where you position
yourself unless you have press credentials. College games are big business, too, so you may run into
restrictions there as well. (An amateur photographer doesn't have a prayer of getting down on the field at a
Big 10 football game.) However, once you lower your expectations a notch, you'll be amazed at how easy it is
to gain a prime location (again, remembering to stay out of the way of the press photographers who are
covering the event professionally). I've taken pictures at women's professional fast-pitch softball games,
grabbed next-to-dugout seats at AA-class minor league baseball contests, shot lower-division college football,
basketball, and soccer, and the whole range of high school sports with nary a problem.

The following sections offer some sports-specific tips for gaining position.

Tip from the Pros: Getting Credentials

Forget about the Super Bowl or the World Series. But if you want a prime location at a second-
or third-tier event, you might find a temporary press pass is easier to obtain than you thought.
I've had good luck calling ahead to the organization's PR representative or talking to a college's
sports information director or, at smaller schools, the athletic director's secretary. It helps that I
worked in PR, and was a college sports information director, but you might be successful even
without those slim credentials. Perhaps your local newspaper doesn't cover a particular sport and
would be willing to take you on as an unpaid stringer.

Or, show up early, find the right person, and ask for permission to take pictures upclose and
intimate. You just might get a temporary press pass. I shamefully admit to gaining admittance to
several contests where I had no rightful place by the simple expedient of stringing three battered
Nikon cameras around my neck and looking like I belonged.

Are You Ready for Some Football?

Football games are a lot of fun to shoot, but they're typically full of fans who are eager to beat you up if you
obscure their view. In smaller stadiums, the impatient folks are likely to be close enough to do some damage,
too. Your best bet is to keep moving, which is a good idea anyway because there is no telling when a
200-pound receiver might head for the sidelines after a catch in order to stop the clock.

My recommendation for football is to get down on the sidelines and take your pictures 10 to 20 yards from the
line of scrimmage. It doesn't really matter if you're in front of the line of scrimmage or behind it. You can get
great pictures of a quarterback dropping back for a pass, as in Figure 5.21, handing off, or taking a tumble into
the turf when he's sacked. Or, downfield, you can grab some shots of a fingertip reception, or, if you're lucky,
a back breaking through for a long run. Move to the end zones when appropriate, to catch the fullback bulling
over from the one-yard line, or the kicker lining up for a field goal.

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 149

150 Part II: Techniques Unlimited
Figure 5.21. The sidelines are the best place to capture exciting football action.

Soccer to Me

Soccer is a lot like football, at least photographically. The fans are less belligerent too, except in Europe or at
elementary/middle schools. As with football, you can follow the action up and down the sidelines, or position
yourself behind the goal. At that end of the field you'll be concentrating on one team's fullbacks and goalie
and the other team's wings and strikers. If the game is a bit one-sided, you may even find yourself spending
most of your time in a single position, then changing to the other end of the field after halftime. Well-played
soccer can range all over the field, but a really dominant team may spend most of the game on offense. The
most exciting action typically takes place around the goal, as you can see in Figure 5.22.

Figure 5.22. A lot of soccer action is clustered around the goal.

150 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 151

Take Me out to the Ball Game

It's fun to watch a baseball game from behind home plate, but that's not always the best place to shoot, unless
the pitcher is a personal friend of yours. The netting typically used as a backstop can diffuse your photos a bit
(although with a long lens the barrier will largely be out of focus). A better position is to find a niche at the
ends of the dugouts. I prefer the first base side, because much of the action takes place at home plate, at first
base, or in right field. From that position you can swivel quickly to grab a shot of a runner sliding home, show
the pitcher winding up (or eyeing the runner on first), or snap a picture of a steal at second base.

On the first base side, right-handed pitchers will have their backs to you as they wind up, but will be more
visible during/after their delivery. With southpaws, the situation is reversed. Figure 5.23 shows a pitcher
trying to pick off a runner at first base.

Figure 5.23. Keep your eye on the pitcher and grab a shot of him trying to pick off the runner on first base.

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 151

152 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

You can also get interesting pictures from the upper stands at a professional baseball game, if you're willing to
settle for human interest shots of the fans, or have a really, really long telephoto lens.

Nothing but Net

You won't spend a lot of time racing up and down the sidelines at a basketball game. While lots of interesting
things can happen in the backcourt (particularly on defense), most of the attention focuses on a single spot, the
basket. So, the best locations are clustered behind or next to the backboard, or from the sides near the
baselines, as shown in Figure 5.24.

Figure 5.24. Either the basket or sidelines are the best locations to capture basketball action

152 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 153

The biggest challenge of shooting basketball is avoiding clichéd photographs of guys and gals with their arms
up in the air. Remain at eye-level. Most high angles make your photographs resemble screen shots from an
NBA-themed video game, while low angles can give you photographs that are 90% legs, given the height of
most basketball players. If you're stuck in the stands, look for a seat in the second or third row. However, if
you're blessed with a long lens, feel free to move up high and shoot down on the rim of the hoop. All the
players will be looking up at the hoop and will stretch their arms towards you. You can get great pictures from
a high angle if you've got a lens that can capture the action.

Goony Golf

Golf is probably the most unsports-like of sports this side of bowling. In what other sport are the athletes
almost totally surrounded by a gallery of spectators, yet insist on absolute silence from the thronging
multitudes as they work? My earliest golf photography involved following Arnold Palmer around the course
at Firestone Country Club in Akron, trying to capture human interest shots while not riling Arnie's Army. My
best picture was of a woman struck by one of Palmer's shots. She remained in place, frozen, afraid to move
and ruin his lie.

For certain, you should disable your digital camera's phony shutter click sound, and hunt down and destroy
any autofocus or autoexposure beeps. Don't even think about shooting a picture during a golfer's swing. My
Minolta camera plays a cheerful musical chime when switched on that has earned me sharp glances from time
to time. Tip: If you can't disable your camera's "boot" sounds, configure the camera so the automatic shutoff
doesn't occur for 30 minutes or so, minimizing the number of times you'll need to turn it on. At the same time,
turn the LCD preview off to increase your battery life. Your power will be taxed by leaving the camera on for
30 minutes at a time, and the LCD is the big juice glutton.

Cameras with a swiveling lens (like my Nikon CoolPix) are great for stealth photography at golf matches,
because you can hold the camera at waist level (or lower, as in Figure 5.25) and innocently glance down at the
LCD display to frame your photograph.

Figure 5.25. Don't take pictures during a golfer's swing, but a cordial duffer may let you take a picture as he or
she lines up for a putt.

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 153

154 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Other Sports

Apply a little common sense and you can find the right position for every sport imaginable, from lacrosse to
curling. Here are some quick tips for a few of the more popular activities (which does not include lacrosse or
curling).

• Hockey can look good from a high vantage point, because an elevated view lets you shoot over the
glass, and the action contrasts well with the ice.
• Skating. Although figure skating also takes place on the ice, you'll find low angles and upclose
perspectives work best. For ice racing, try to position yourself to catch the skaters going around a turn
when they're at their most dramatic.
• Professional Wrestling. Unless you have a ringside seat and are prepared to dodge flying chairs,
wrestling is often best photographed from a high, hockey-like perspective.
• Gymnastics. Look for shots of the athlete approaching a jump or particularly difficult maneuver, or
perhaps attempting a challenging move on the parallel bars or rings.
• Swimming. With the athletes immersed in water most of the time, the best position is either from one
side or another so you can shoot several swimmers across the lanes, or head on as they approach the
finish or a turn.
• Track and field events are all different, and all exciting. You might want to be under the bar at the
pole vault; right in the path of a long jumper (but a few yards behind the sand pit and out of the
jumper's field of vision); next to the starting blocks of the 100-meter dash; and not even in the same
Zip code as a discus hurler. Exactly how close you can be and where you will be allowed to stand will
depend on the nature of the event and the level of the competition. (For example, at middle school
events you may be able to get quite close to the action as long as you assure the officials that you're
not a parent.)
• Motor sports. If you're up to the task, try photographing automobile racing, in which the vehicles can
move at 100 miles per hour when they're slowing down to pull into the pit! Or, try motorcycle racing,
in which adults recklessly propel their bodies around in close proximity to each other and hot metal at
frightening speeds amid clouds of dust and dirt. Your only hope is to capture these machines as
they're coming straight at you, or as they round a turn.
• Horse racing. If you've tried motor sports, photographing horse racing will seem calm. The same
advice goes, however: Photograph the animals head on or making a turn for the most exciting photos.
• Skiing. For a long course, the finish line may be your only option. Stay near a warm place so you can
keep your camera and sensor at a decent temperature. Or tuck the camera inside your coat. Watch out
for condensation when a warm camera meets cold humid air suddenly.
< Day Day Up >
< Day Day Up >

Here's the Drill

Now you know the basics. It's time to set up some real-life scenarios and see just how you'd tackle them with
a digital camera. This section will take you through a few typical action photography assignments.

Preparation and Setup

Before you go out on the shoot, it's a good idea to make sure you're well-prepared. You'll never get good
pictures of any type if you don't do the right prep and setup beforehand, but action photography is particularly
unforgiving. If you goof, forget an important accessory, or neglect to take care of a crucial detail you probably
won't be able to go home and get what you need, nor find a substitute. So, following a checklist like this is a

154 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 155
good idea:

• Three of everything. If you're working professionally, an excuse like "My camera/flash/batteries

didn't work" won't fly. Amateurs working a once-in-a-lifetime (or once-in-a-season) event won't want
their style cramped by an equipment failure, either. That's why I try to own at least three or four of
every important piece of equipment, and take at least two of them along on every shooting expedition.
In my case, that includes having a backup digital camera, but that might not be practical for you.
However, you'll want to include extra sets of batteries, more digital film than you think you'll need,
and maybe a backup flash unit. If you have problems with one item, just switch to your alternate and
you're back in business.
• Charge your batteries. Nickel Metal Hydride batteries can be recharged at any time without causing
any detrimental side-effects, so you'll want to give all your batteries a fresh jolt just before embarking
on any important photo journey. Your camera battery should be freshly charged. Have a spare battery
if you think you might be taking more pictures than your original set will handle. Remember that flash
pictures take more juice.
• Erase or format your film. It's not enough to have memory cards. Your cards must have room on them
for new pictures. Take some time to copy any pictures you want to keep to your computer, erase your
card, or, perhaps reformat it so it's fresh and ready to use.
• Learn your controls. If you don't use a particular feature regularly, now is the time to check yourself
out and make sure you remember how to use it. How do you set your camera for continuous
sequences? Can you switch to shutter priority exposure mode quickly? I created a little cheat sheet I
tuck in my camera bag, and can look up the most obscure feature in a few seconds, on location.
• Make your basic camera settings now. Don't wait until you're ready to begin taking pictures to set
your camera's ISO rating, exposure mode, or focusing method. You can make changes later, but it's
best to start off with all your basic settings locked in and ready to go.
• Clean and protect your equipment. Few good pictures (other than soft-focus portraits) can be taken
with a dirty lens. Carefully clean your lens. If it's going to rain or snow, put a skylight filter on the
lens. You can wipe the filter off quickly, and if it should become scratched, throw it away and install a
new one. If necessary, make a "raincoat" for your camera out of a resealable sandwich bag with a hole
cut in it for the lens to stick out of.

What ISO Speed Should I Use?

The lowest ISO speed your camera offers usually provides the best quality overall, but may not have enough
sensitivity to allow a useful range of shutter speeds and f-stops. Of course, as you increase the ISO rating of
your digital camera, your pictures will begin to display noise, as you can see in Figure 5.26. You should use
the lowest ISO setting that will let you shoot at the shutter speeds you want to use.

Figure 5.26. Higher ISO ratings produce more noise, which shows up as multicolored grain in your photographs.

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 155

156 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Although digital ISO ratings don't exactly correspond to film ISO speeds, they are close enough that you can
use them to estimate what setting to use. In bright sunlight, the reciprocal of an ISO rating will usually equal
the shutter speed called for at an f-stop of f16. The numbers are rounded to the nearest traditional shutter
speed to make the calculation easier. So, at f16, you can use a shutter speed of 1/100th-1/125th second at ISO
100; 1/200-1/250th second with an ISO rating of 200; 1/400-1/500th second at ISO 400; and perhaps up to
1/1000th second at ISO 800.

Use this rule of thumb to help you determine which ISO rating is appropriate. If you're shooting racing cars
going 200 mph across the frame, you might want a shutter speed of 1/1000th second. If you can live with an
f-stop of f8, that means you'll need to use an ISO rating of 200. (ISO 200 translates to 1/250th second at f16,
which is the exposure equivalent of 1/1000th second at f8. This is the sort of translation photographers can do
in their head without thinking.)

Of course, in bright sunlight, such as on the beach or in the snow, you can cut the ISO rating in half to get the
same exposure. ISO 200 will get you 1/1000th second at f11 on a ski slope, for example.

Instead, use this rule of thumb to estimate how much action-stopping power you have in a particular situation.
For example, if the sun is truly bright, you might want to set your camera's shutter speed to 1/2000th second
(if it's available), either manually or through the camera's shutter priority mode, and let the autoexposure
system choose the correct aperture. The faster the shutter speed you want to use, the higher the ISO rating
you'll need to use.

In darker surroundings, such as indoors, or at night, the ISO rating will be correspondingly higher so you can
use a particular shutter speed. However, you can expect to use the higher end of your digital camera's
sensitivity scale. Unless the non-daylight location is remarkably bright, you'll probably always be using ISO
400 or higher for action photography. Over the years, I've discovered you can usually expect enough light to
shoot at 1/125th second at f2.8 with an ISO setting of 400, and 1/250th second at f2.8 with an ISO setting for
800. In modern facilities, you'll probably encounter quite a bit more light than that, but even twice as much
illumination is no picnic when you can use only 1/500th second at an f-stop like f2.8 with a noisy ISO rating
like 800. Many digital cameras don't even offer an f-stop as large as f2.8. One of my favorite digital cameras
has a maximum aperture of f2.6 to f5.1, depending on the zoom setting used.

156 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 157
What Exposure Do I Use?

Whether you're specifying the shutter speed and letting the camera determine the exposure, or making settings
completely manually, you can't always simply set the shortest possible shutter speed and then forget about it.
There are some other factors to take into account:

• You'll need a smaller f-stop (the larger numbers) with longer lenses/greater zoom settings, to provide
adequate depth-of-field.
• Digital cameras offer more depth-of-field at a given magnification, so you don't have to be afraid of
what is considered a wide lens opening in the film camera world: f5.6 may be entirely usable even at a
telephoto setting.
• Digital camera images can get dramatically noisy at higher ISO ratings, such as ISO 800, so you
might want to choose the highest rating only when you want to use the very fastest shutter speeds and
the smallest possible lens opening.
• Bright sunlight can change significantly when a cloud moves in front of the sun. You can quickly lose
half your available light. Your camera's autoexposure system can compensate, of course, but you may
not like the results. You can end up with a lens opening that's too wide, or your camera may refuse to
take a picture at all. When that happens, choose a slower shutter speed or, as a last resort, bump your
camera's ISO rating up a notch.

Planning Your Shot

If you've taken my advice on where to position yourself, you'll still need to plan your shot before you shoot.
Try to anticipate the action as much as you can. What's coming next? It may be a serve, a shot on goal, some
sidelines action, an impending dunk, or some other bit of action. Sports moves so rapidly that you can spend
an entire event constantly chasing the current hot action, and miss it every time. Don't waste time constantly
zooming in and out. Rather than trying to constantly reframe your picture as the event unfolds around you, it's
often best to point your lens at the approximate point where the action you hope for will take place. Plan for a
particular kind of shot and then wait for it. If you're at a football game and it's third down with 22 yards to go,
choose a receiver near you and follow him on his route. If you're lucky, a pass will come his way and you'll
get a great shot. With only a few yards to go, plan for a running play, like the one shown in Figure 5.27.

Figure 5.27. Watch for a hole your runner can burst through.

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 157

158 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

At a tennis match, look for a smash to a far corner when a hapless opponent has been lured too close to the
net. If your hockey team is on the attack, watch for a cross-rink pass to an open man who has a shot at the
goal. Prefocus on the spot, watch your participants both inside and outside the frame (I tend to peer through
the viewfinder with one eye and keep the other eye open to take in the big picture), and be ready to snap.

Freezing the Action

Freezing a fast-moving subject in its tracks seems to be the primary goal of action photographers. However, a
moment frozen in time may not be the best or most interesting way to capture your subject. Frequently, a little
motion blur adds to the feeling of motion, as in Figure 5.28, in which the blurriness of the softball player's arm
and back leg help convey the action.

Figure 5.28. The blur of the pitcher's arm and leg add to the feeling of motion.

In fact, including a little blur in your pictures is more difficult and challenging than simply stopping your
subjects in their tracks. Some of the best action pictures combine blur with sharpness to create a powerful
effect. Now that you understand that, I'll explain a little about how to freeze and semi-freeze the action.

The first thing to understand is that motion looks different to the camera, depending on the direction, speed,
and distance of the subject. You can use this information as you plan your image. Here are the basics:

• Motion that's parallel to the plane of the sensor (that is, across the width or height of an image in a
horizontal, vertical, or diagonal direction) appears to move the fastest and will cause the most blur.
So, an automobile passing in front of your camera at 200 mph is likely to be blurry, no matter how
short your shutter speed.
• Motion coming toward the camera appears to move much slower, and will cause a much lesser
amount of blur. That same race car headed directly toward you can be successfully photographed at a
much longer shutter speed.
• Motion coming toward the camera on a slant (perhaps a runner dashing from the upper left
background of your frame to the lower right foreground) will display blur somewhere between the

158 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 159
two extremes.
• Subjects that are closer to the camera blur more easily than subjects that are farther away, even though
they're moving at the same speed. That's because the motion across the camera frame is more rapid
with a subject that is closer to the camera.
• Blur is relative to the camera's motion, so if you pan the camera to follow a fast moving object, the
amount of blur of the object you're following will be less than if the camera remained stationary and
the object darted across the frame.
• There are two different kinds of blur to contend with: subject motion and camera motion. The former
happens because your subject is moving faster than the selected shutter speed can stop. The latter
occurs when the camera isn't held steady during an exposure. With panning, described next, you may
get both kinds of blur in one photo.

Stopping Action with Panning

The term panning derives from the motion picture industry, from a camera swiveling motion used to follow
action as it progresses from one side of the frame to the other. (You can also "pan" vertically [technically, it's
called tilting], of course, as when the camera follows the take-off of a rocket into space; it's just that horizontal
panning is more common than tilting.)

So, a marathon runner is racing across your field of view. If she's close enough and moving fast enough, even
your highest shutter speed may not be able to stop the action. So, instead, you move the camera in the same
direction that the runner is moving. Her apparent speed is much slower, relative to the camera, so a given
shutter speed will be able to freeze the action more readily. Blur from subject motion is reduced. Yet, the
background will display more blur, due to camera motion. Your photograph may have a tack sharp runner
surrounded by a blurry background. That's probably a more exciting and dramatic photograph.

Panning can be done with a handheld camera, or with a camera mounted on a tripod that has a swiveling
panorama (pan) head. The more you practice panning, the better you'll get at following the action. You might
find that if your panning speed closely matches the subject's actual speed, a shutter speed as slow as 1/60th to
1/125th second can produce surprisingly sharp images. Use of a lower shutter speed causes the background to
appear more blurry, too.

To pan effectively, you should try to move smoothly in the direction of the subject's movement. If your
movement is jerky, or you don't pan in a motion that's parallel to the subject's motion, you'll get more
blurriness than you anticipate or want. Take a step back, if you can. The farther the subject is from the camera,
the longer you'll have to make your pan movement, improving potential sharpness.

Panning is a very cool effect because of the sharpness of the subject, the blurriness of the background, and
some interesting side effects that can result. For example, parts of the subject not moving in the direction of
the overall pan will be blurry, so your marathon runner's body may be sharp, but her pumping arms and legs
will blur in an interesting way.

Panning is interesting even when you don't use it to totally stop the action. Figure 5.29 shows a baseball
player crossing first base, captured using a 1/30th second shutter speed and panning to create a more
interesting semi-blurred look.

Figure 5.29. Panning doesn't eliminate the blur, but it creates a more dynamic-looking photo.

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 159

160 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Freezing Action Head On

Another way to stop action is to photograph the subject as it heads towards or away from you. A runner who
is dashing towards the camera can be effectively frozen at 1/250th or 1/125th second, but would appear
hopelessly blurred when crossing the frame (if you're not panning). Head-on shots can be interesting, too, so
you might want to use this angle even if you're not trying to boost your effective shutter speed. Figure 5.30
was exposed under the stadium lights at a paltry 1/250th second, but because everyone in the shot is running
towards the camera, the action is effectively frozen.

Figure 5.30. Everybody is headed towards the camera, so even 1/250th of a second shutter speed can stop the
action.

Freezing Action with Your Shutter

A third way to stop motion is to use the tiny time slice your shutter can nip off. A fast shutter speed can stop
action effectively, no matter what the direction of the motion. The trick is to select the shutter speed you really
need. A speed that is too high can rob you of a little sharpness because you've had to open the lens aperture a
bit to compensate, or use a higher ISO rating that introduces noise. There are no real rules of thumb for

160 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 161
selecting the "minimum" fastest shutter speed. As you've seen, action stopping depends on how fast the
subject is moving, its distance from the camera, its direction, and whether you're panning or not.

Many cameras include shutter speeds that, in practice, you really can't use. The highest practical speed tops
out at around 1/2,000th second. With a fast lens and a higher ISO rating, you might be able to work with
1/4,000th second under bright illumination. Yet, there are digital cameras available that offer shutter speeds as
brief as 1/16,000th of a second. So, the bottom line is usually that, to freeze action with your shutter speed
alone, you'll probably be using a speed from 1/500th second to 1/2,000th second, depending on the
illumination and what your camera offers. The only time I've really used any faster shutter speed was once
when I tried 1/2,500th second while handholding a 500mm lens.

A shutter speed that's fast enough can freeze even the fastest-moving objects, such as the boat in the flume
ride shown in Figure 5.31 (which is a reminder that action shots don't have to involve sports).

Figure 5.31. A fast enough shutter speed can freeze things that seem a blur to our eyes, such as droplets of
falling water.

Freezing Action with Electronic Flash

Electronic flash units, originally called "strobes" or "speedlights," are more than a great accessory for artificial
illumination. The duration of an electronic flash is extremely brief, and if the flash provides the bulk of the
illumination for a photograph, some great action stopping results. One of the earliest applications of electronic
flash was by Dr. Harold Edgerton at MIT, who perfected the use of stroboscopic lights in both
ultra-high-speed motion and still (stop-motion) photography capable of revealing bullets in flight, light bulbs
shattering, and other phenomena.

Some flash units have a duration of 1/50,000th second or less, which is very brief, indeed. One way of
controlling an automated flash unit is to vary the duration of the flash by using only part of the stored energy
that's accumulated in the unit's capacitors.

If the subject is relatively far away, the entire charge is fed to the flash tube, producing the longest and most
intense amount of illumination. If the subject is relatively close, only part of the charge is required for the

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 161

162 Part II: Techniques Unlimited
photograph, and only that much is supplied to the flash tube, producing an even briefer flash. Yet, even the
longest flash exposure is likely to be shorter than your camera's shutter speed, so electronic flash is an
excellent tool for stopping action.

The chief problem with electronic flash is that, like all illumination, it obeys that pesky inverse-square law.
Light diminishes relative to the inverse of the square of the distance. So, if you're photographing a subject
that's 12 feet away, you'll need four times as much light when the subject is twice as far away at 24 feet, not
twice as much. Worse, if an athlete in your photograph is 12 feet away when you snap a picture, anything in
the background 24 feet away will receive only one quarter as much light, giving you a dark background.

That generally means that a digital camera's built-in electronic flash is probably not powerful enough to
illuminate anything two-dozen feet from the camera. You might be able to use your camera's flash at a
basketball game, but not at a football game where the distances are much greater. A more powerful external
flash unit, like the ones discussed earlier in this chapter, might be called for.

Figure 5.32 is a flash picture all the way (see the reflection off the runner's eyeballs?), but the electronic flash
has frozen the action crisply.

Figure 5.32. Electronic flash stops fast-moving subjects in their tracks, even if the linebackers can't.

Freezing Peak Action

The final method for freezing fast motion is simple: Wait for the motion to stop. Some kinds of action include
a peak moment when motion stops for an instant before resuming again. That's your cue to snap a picture.
Even a relatively slow shutter speed can stop action during one of these peak moments or pauses.

162 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 163
The end of a batter's swing, a quarterback cocking his arm to throw a pass, a tennis player pausing before
bringing a racket down in a smash. These are all peak moments you can freeze easily. Other peaks are trickier
to catch, such as the moment when a basketball player reaches the apex of a leap before unleashing a jump
shot. If you time your photograph for that split second before the shooter starts to come down, you can freeze
the action easily.

Non-sports action sequences also have peak moments. An amusement park ride might pause for as long as a
second between hair-raising swings. Your child leaping about on a trampoline reaches the top of a jump (just
like the ski jumper shown in Figure 5.33) and can be captured in mid-flight. A bird in flight, like the stork in
Figure 5.34, flaps its wings furiously to gain altitude, then stretches out to glide leisurely for minutes at a time.
If you study the motion of your action subjects, you'll often be able to predict when these peak moments will
occur.

Figure 5.33. At the top of his arc, this summertime ski jumper pauses for a moment, and can be captured with
ease.

Figure 5.34. A stork's wings are motionless as it glides silently through the air, so freezing this moment is easy.

< Day Day Up >

< Day Day Up >

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 163

164 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Shooting Sequences
Whether you call it sequence shooting, burst mode, continuous advance, or "motor
drive" mode, the ability to take multiple shots of fast-moving action is a valuable
capability found in an increasing number of digital cameras. On the plus side, ripping off
five or ten shots as the action unfolds can increase your chances of catching the peak
moment(s) in one or more of them. Unfortunately, you can also end up with the best shot
of all occurring between frames. Sequence shooting is a valuable tool, but it's not a
panacea.

Back when I was shooting sports professionally, a motor drive for my Nikon was the
first accessory I purchased after a 400mm lens. Digital "motor drives" are way cooler
than the mechanical variety. The biggest problem with motor transport on a conventional
camera was that, at, say, three frames per second, you could eat up an entire 36 exposure
roll of film with fewer than a half dozen action sequences. Remember, film can't be
erased and re-used if you point the camera and shoot a busted play. For the big time pros
traveling around the world to cover a major sports event, film is likely to be the least
expensive part of the cost equation, so special camera backs that could hold 33 or more
feet of film and expose hundreds of images in one shoot became common.

Digital cameras bring sequence photography to the rest of us. There's no need to buy an
expensive camera, special film back, or burn up hundreds of feet of film. Action
sequences can be captured digitally, and if a particular sequence doesn't bear
photographic fruit, it can be erased and the memory card re-used.

Sequence photography is no substitute for good timing, however. Once you've solved
the shutter lag problem, so your camera cooperates by exposing a photograph reasonably
soon after you press the shutter button, you'll find your best photographs come from
your instincts. Clicking off a picture at exactly the right moment will almost always
yield better results than blindly capturing a series of frames at random. Use your
camera's sequence mode as a supplement to your customary techniques, to grab a few
pictures you might not have gotten otherwise, or to create sequences that are interesting
in themselves, as shown in Figure 5.35.

Figure 5.35. The best sequence shots are those in which the series itself tells a story.

164 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 165
You can see from the changing background that this series wasn't a simple motordrive
sequence of images taken a split-second apart. Instead, I used the digital camera's
multi-shot capabilities to take a series of photos as the athlete rounded the bases. Each of
these photos was probably taken a few seconds apart, much more closely spaced than I'd
have been able to shoot if I'd elected to whack the shutter button individually for each
picture. Instead, I elected to let the camera take full-frame shots at a two-per-second rate
while I panned and zoomed to follow the runner's progress. Each image tells something
about the play, and you can almost see the excitement build on the player's face as he
rounds third and heads for home.

Selecting Sequence Modes

Your digital camera probably has five or six "drive" modes, not all of which are useful
for action photography. Some are better suited for special applications like time-lapse
photography or making mini-movies, but here's a list of the most common modes:

• Single frame advance. In this mode, you can take one picture each time the
shutter release is pressed. Your camera probably has enough internal buffer
memory that you can take another picture immediately, even if the camera has
not offloaded the picture you've just taken to the film card. If not, you'll have to
wait until the blinking light (or other indicator) stops to shoot the next picture.
• Continuous advance. The camera continues to take photographs, one after
another, for as long as you hold down the shutter button. Depending on your
camera, the effective frame rate may be anywhere from one frame per second or
slower to two or more frames per second. The number of frames you can take
may be limited by the amount of internal memory your camera has, and
certainly will be limited by the number of available exposures on your memory
card. When the internal memory is full, you'll have to stop taking continuous
shots and wait until some room opens up. This is the mode I used for Figure
5.36.

Figure 5.36. A sequence photo like this one has a lot more excitement than any
single frame of the set taken alone.

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 165

166 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

• High-speed continuous advance. The camera takes pictures continuously as you

hold down the shutter release, at a frame rate from 3 to 5 frames per second or
more. As with ordinary continuous advance, once your camera's buffer memory
is full, your sequence is over until some of the images are offloaded to your
memory card.
• Ultra high-speed continuous advance. This mode usually supplies your camera's
fastest frame rate, from 5 to 7 or more frames per second. Usually, the camera
must use a reduced image size in this mode that's smaller than the maximum
size your camera can produce. For example, you might have to shoot at 1600 x
1200 or 1280 x 960 pixel resolution in this extra-fast mode. Even the lofty
Nikon D2X digital SLR must crop the image down to "only" 3216 x 2136
resolution (6.8 megapixels) from its maximum 4288 x 2848 resolution (12.4
megapixels) to achieve 8 frames per second.
• Multi-shot. A few cameras can produce a quick blast of 16 tiny pictures on a
single frame. Such images might be okay for analyzing your golf stroke, but
may be too small for other applications.
• Mini-movie. Most non-dSLR digital cameras have the ability to shoot short
video clips (typically 20-30 seconds) at 320 x 200 to 640 x 480 resolution (or
higher). You can use the movies as is, or save and edit individual frames.
• Time lapse/interval. Although this is a sequence mode, it operates over a period
that can extend for many, many seconds, and is best used for taking pictures of
slow-moving events, such as the opening of a flower.
• Bracketing. In this mode, your camera takes several pictures in sequence, but
uses different settings for each picture, improving your chances of getting one
shot that has a better combination of settings. The most common bracketing
procedure is to make several pictures at different exposures, with some
underexposed and some overexposed (based on the meter reading). Many digital
cameras can bracket other features, such as color correction, color saturation,

166 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 167
contrast, white balance, or special filters.

Of all the sequence modes, I prefer the basic continuous mode, and frequently trigger the
sequence just before I expect some action to take place, as shown in Figure 5.36. This
technique is still a hit-or-miss procedure, because a lot can happen between frames. It's
very likely that you'll still miss the decisive moment, but I had that happen to me when I
was using a three-frames-per-second motor drive, too. As with all sports photography,
the more pictures you take, the more you increase your odds of getting some great ones.

Shooting Sequences

Each particular sequence mode has its own advantages and disadvantages. The more
frames you capture per second, the quicker your digital film will fill up with images, so
high frame rates must be balanced with how much storage space you have available. In
addition, the resolution and compression ratio of the image may affect how quickly you
can shoot and how many images may be captured in a sequence.

For example, with a typical 5MP camera like my Minolta, the number of photographs
that can be taken in a single burst looks like the results in Table 5.1.

Table 5.1. Compression Ratio Size (in pixels)

2560 1600 1280 640
x x x x
1920 1200 960 480
RAW 5 0 0 0
Super Fine 3 3 3 3
Extra Fine 7 12 15 33
Fine 10 19 27 61
Standard 17 29 42 84

As you can see, bursts might be limited to as few as 3 to 5 in the uncompressed TIFF (Super Fine) and RAW
modes, while you can get as many as 84 images if you use 640 x 480 resolution and high compression
(Standard). I usually use full resolution and Extra Fine compression, because seven pictures in one burst is
usually plenty for my sequences.

Your camera's ultra high-speed mode provides more frames per second, but might provide an automatic
reduction in resolution. For example, some cameras switch to 1600 x 1200 or 1280 x 960 resolution for extra
high frame rates, which can range from 7 to 10 fps or more. You probably won't be able to use RAW or
uncompressed TIFF formats in this mode.

Another limitation of sequence shooting is that you won't be able to use your electronic flash in most cases. A
flash must be specially designed for rapid-fire to work in this mode. Even then, you'll be limited to close-ups,
because such flash operate on the principle that because close-up photos don't require the full charge of the
flash, several briefer exposures are possible at faster intervals.

Once you've set up your camera, shooting sequences is relatively painless. Set focus and exposure as
described earlier in this chapter. Frame your subject, and when the action that you want to capture begins,
press the shutter release and hold it down. Usually you'll have to follow the subject by panning the camera,
which can be tricky if your viewfinder doesn't provide a steady image to watch during the sequence. After
you've finished shooting, review your sequence with an eye towards improving your shots on the next take.

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 167

168 Part II: Techniques Unlimited
Testing Your Camera's Sequence Capabilities

You might want to measure exactly how many frames your digital camera can shoot using its continuous
advance feature. That XNote Stopwatch utility I mentioned earlier in this chapter is a perfect tool for
measuring frame rates, both for individual, continuous shots, and in burst mode. You can test your camera
using various file formats and compression ratios to see which is most suitable for your action photography.
Follow the steps for the two methodologies that follow, and record your results.

To Measure Maximum Individual Shot Rate

To measure how quickly you can take individual photos, follow these steps:

1. Set your digital camera for minimal shutter lag using the recommendations from earlier in this chapter.

2. Load the stopwatch software, and start it running. The actual time setting when you begin shooting
doesn't matter, so let it operate.

3. Focus the camera on the stopwatch on your computer screen.

4. Press the shutter release to take a picture of the stopwatch.

5. Keep pressing the shutter button to take multiple pictures.

6. Load all the photos into your computer and examine them in your image editor.

7. Subtract the stopwatch time shown in each shot from the one in the previous shot to determine the
interval between shots.

8. Average the intervals to arrive at the number of shots you can take individually.

To Measure Continuous Sequences

You can also accurately measure the true frame rate of your camera when set in automatic continuous picture
taking mode. Just follow these steps, and repeat at each image size your camera offers for sequence
photography:

1. Set your digital camera to minimize shutter lag, as before.

2. Set the camera to shoot continuously when you hold down the shutter release.

3. Load the stopwatch software and focus your camera on the stopwatch image on the screen.

4. Start the stopwatch timer and press the shutter release at the same time.

5. Hold down the shutter release to take as many frames as possible.

6. Load the pictures you've taken into an image editor and calculate the elapsed time for the entire sequence.

168 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 169

7. Tabulate your results to learn the length of time you can cover with a single sequence of images, and the
approximate number of frames per second. For instance, if your camera takes 14 images in 1.8 seconds
before the internal memory fills, you'll know you can capture about 2 seconds worth of action at a rate of
roughly 7.7 frames per second.

< Day Day Up >

< Day Day Up >

Project for Individual Study: Stop a Bullet

If you're at all serious about photography, you've seen and, perhaps, studied those stroboscopic pictures of
bullets stopped in mid-air, light bulbs captured in the act of breaking, or droplets of water frozen as they erupt
from a bowl, as you can see in Figure 5.37. Your project for this chapter is to explore the world of high-speed
motion stopping. Your digital camera and a little ingenuity may be all you need. I'll give you some tips to get
started in this section.

Figure 5.37. Frozen droplets like these call for very, very fast shutter speeds or the action-stopping capabilities of
electronic flash.

Strobe photography takes advantage of the very brief exposure times afforded by electronic flashes. As I
mentioned earlier in this chapter, the closer an automatic flash is to the subject, the shorter its exposure is
likely to be. You might be amazed at the range of fast-moving objects that can be captured by a single
exposure. Here are the key ingredients of your project:

• A tripod-mounted digital camera capable of long or time exposures, and which accepts an external
flash unit.
• A darkened room, so that the only exposure comes from the flash itself, not any ambient illumination.
• A dark background. A piece of common black felt fabric should work fine.
• An electronic flashgun with user-settable power levels and a removable flash cord. Some flash units
can be adjusted from full power down to 1/64th power or less. A flash with less power and a briefer

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 169

170 Part II: Techniques Unlimited
flash duration would be preferred over a heavy-duty flash unit that's hard to scale down for close-up
photos, and which has a longer flash duration.
• Optionally, a second electronic flash equipped with a slave unit so it can be triggered by the main
flash, and also with low power/brief duration options.
• A subject to photograph. Some prefer hummingbirds, others like to break balloons or light bulbs, or
capture coronas of liquid droplets arising from a smooth surface. Choosing an ingenious subject is
part of your assignment. Use your imagination.
• If you're planning to destroy something for your photographic art, you'll need a triggering device that
can set off the flash at the moment of destruction. I'll give you some hints on how to construct one.

The Basic Steps (Oversimplified to the Extreme)

Once you've assembled all the components, you'll need to plan your photograph carefully. The following is a
checklist of how you might take such a high-speed photograph.

1. Set up your camera in a room that can be darkened, facing the black background. You're going to use a
time exposure to make the picture, so you don't want any existing light to spoil the image.

2. Put the digital camera on a tripod, facing the dark background.

3. Place your subject between the camera and the background.

4. Arrange your electronic flash unit (or two) so they are on one or both sides of the camera, facing the
subject. The second flash can also be used from the side to provide more interesting illumination. In fact,
you can use one flash as a main light and one as a fill light, if you like. See Chapter 6 for instructions on
this kind of lighting.

5. Set the electronic flash for its briefest exposure.

6. Set the camera's aperture so the image will be properly exposed by the flash. You might have to calculate
the correct f-stop through a little experimentation.

7. Darken the room. You should have planned the next few steps so you can handle them in the dark.

8. Open the shutter of the digital camera for the time exposure.

9. At the right moment (more on that in a moment!) trigger the flash.

10. After the exposure, close the shutter of your camera and turn the room lights back on. You're done!

Indeed, the whole process seems fairly easy, except for Step 9. How in the heck is that managed? My list
above is a little like providing a recipe for broiled unicorn, and listing Step 1 as "find a unicorn."

The Hard Part

I didn't mean to throw you by making everything seem easy up until Step 9. In practice, triggering the flash at
the right moment is the real killer roadblock of high-speed photography. Sophisticated triggering mechanisms
have been built, using sound, light, or other things to set off the flash. I'm assuming you don't have a degree in
electrical engineering and want to try something similar.

170 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 171
For some types of phenomena, you may be able to trigger the flash manually, simply by pressing the Open
Flash button on your electronic flash. If the movement is something that just happens to be very fast, but is
consistent in its motion, you can trigger the flash at any time. Say you wanted to freeze the blades of an
electric fan, or stop the wings of a hummingbird; it would be fairly simple to do. Just wait until the fan or
hummingbird is positioned in front of your camera lens, and trigger the flash manually. Of course, convincing
a hummingbird to hover just where you want it to is about as difficult as finding a unicorn, so your subject
matter is likely to be something else.

More frequently, you'll want the flash to go off in synchronization with some other event. If you're inventive,
you can come up with a solution. I'll give you some hints. Electronic flash units are triggered by closing a
circuit. Usually that circuit is inside your digital camera. In the case of slave units, the circuit can be closed by
a sensing mechanism that detects light (from another flash) or a radio signal. In any case, a switch is closed
and the flash goes off. You can create the switch yourself.

Understand that the high voltage of the flash itself is separated from the electronic circuit that triggers that
voltage, so you won't be in any danger of electrocuting yourself, as long as you don't open your flash unit and
start fooling around inside. The standard maximum triggering voltage for electronic flash is 24V, although
many flash units use a lower voltage, and some digital cameras are able to handle only those lower voltages
(which is why some cameras can't use just any flashgun).

All you need to do is build a switch that can be activated by the event you want to use to trigger the flash. If
you have a flash unit that has a detachable cord, it's likely that the cord is a standard one that can be purchased
at a camera store. That's good, because I'm going to suggest you cut off the end of the cord to gain access to
the two wires inside. Separate the wires and connect them to two pieces of metal (even aluminum foil works).
Then, arrange the metal terminals so that the event you want to photograph causes them to come into contact,
completing the circuit, and triggering your flash at the right instant.

For example, you could tape the two terminals to the outside of a light bulb, slightly separated. Strike the bulb
at the point of the terminals with a hammer, and just as the hammer breaks the bulb, the two contacts are
forced together triggering the flash. You can place your switch under an object, so another object striking it
makes the contact. Some experimenters have shot a bullet through their makeshift switch so the force of the
impact closes the circuit. (I can't recommend experimenting with bullets; the experiment might work just as
well with a paint gun or ping-pong gun.) I'll leave the design and construction of your switch up to you.
Would a squirt-gun work? Can you build a mercury switch so when an object is tilted suddenly the flash is
triggered?

There are dozens of different ways to set off your flash. This can be an interesting individual project, indeed. I
hope you have fun with it.
< Day Day Up >
< Day Day Up >

Next Up
Now that you've tackled moving subjects, it's time to master that most difficult of photographic endeavors:
people pictures. Whether you're shooting candid photos of friends and loved ones, formal portraits, group
pictures, or publicity photos of your organization, you'll find everything you need in the next chapter.
< Day Day Up >
< Day Day Up >

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 171

172 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Chapter 6. People Photography

Some digital photographers specialize in one kind of picture or another, such as landscapes, sports, or
close-ups. But everyone who uses a camera enjoys taking pictures of people, even if their main efforts are
concentrated elsewhere. Unless you're a hermit, you love to photograph your friends, family, colleagues, and
even perfect strangers. Human beings are the most fascinating subjects of all.

The person you photograph today may look completely different tomorrow, or might even adopt several
different looks in a single afternoon with a quick change of clothing or hairstyle. Change the environment and
surroundings, and you can change the way you capture your subject's personality. Modify the lighting, and a
person can be pictured as sinister, powerful, or glamorous. It's your choice.

Photographs such as the lively celebrity photography of Richard Avedon, or Yousuf Karsh's powerful portrait
of Winston Churchill are some of the greatest images ever captured. The value we place on photographs we
take of each other can be measured by the number of people who say the one object they'd grab on their way
out of a burning home would be the family photo album. After all, photographs of our friends and family are a
way of documenting our personal histories, and the best way we have of preserving memories. The fact that
there are so many different categories of people-oriented pictures, from fashion photography to portraiture,
demonstrates the depth of this particular photographic field.

Each individual brand of people picture deserves an entire book of its own. You'll find lots of good books on
family photography, group portraiture, wedding photography, photojournalism, or figure photography. Most
of the digital photography books you see try to cram little snippets of information about a broad range of these
categories into a single chapter or two. I'm going to take a different approach. This chapter will concentrate on
just one variety of people picture, the individual portrait, and will cover it in a bit more depth. I'm going to
give you some guidelines on lighting that are glossed over by most other books. What you learn here about
posing and lighting applies broadly to other kinds of photography, so my goal is to get you interested enough
that you try some other types, whether you opt for weddings or Little League team photos.
< Day Day Up >
< Day Day Up >

Home Studio or Nature's Studio?

For many years, most portraits were created in a studio of some sort. This custom pre-dates photography by a
handful of centuries, because, unless you were royalty and were able to do exactly as you pleased, it was more
common to venture to the artist's studio, where the lighting, background, props, and other elements could be
easily controlled. That soft and flattering "north light" used to illuminate portraits could be best guaranteed by
painting in a space designed for that purpose.

Studio portrait sittings remained the norm after the invention of photography, because photos often took
minutes to create. Traveling photographers sometimes carried along tents that could be used as portable
darkrooms or studios. Even after more portable cameras and faster films and lenses freed photographers to
capture documentary images and insightful candid pictures anywhere, portraits were still most often confined
to studio settings.

The social unrest and anti-establishment feelings of the late '60s and early '70s placed a new premium on
natural, less formal photography that emphasized realism. Suddenly, "candid" wedding photography was
sought-after. Professional photographers became eager to set up lights in your living room to create family
portraits in your own habitat. Before long, what was labeled as "environmental" portraiture became common,
posed photographs with scenic backgrounds, such as the one shown in Figure 6.1. Enterprising pros either set
up "natural" settings in their own studio backyards or compiled a list of parks, seashores, and other sites that
could be used for these informal portraits.

172 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 173
Figure 6.1. Portraits needn't be confined to the studio.

The most interesting part of the whole phenomenon was that this new kind of portraiture didn't change much,
except the setting for the photograph. Consumers didn't want quick-and-dirty snapshots. They expected their
professional photographers to provide them with well-posed portraits, using flattering lighting, attractive
backgrounds, and the other qualities they came to expect from formal studio portraiture. What consumers
wanted was a studio portrait taken in a less formal setting, with casual dress and less rigid posing.
Environmental and home portraits still had to incorporate the professional's skills, even if they needn't be
taken in a studio.

While the portraiture industry hasn't come full circle, an updated version of time-honored portrait
photographic techniques has returned to favor, and studio work commands the respect it traditionally has had.
Portraits are still taken outdoors, but many are captured indoors in the studio. There may be more props, more
latitude in dress, and variety in poses now, as anyone who's seen the kind of pictures high school seniors covet
for their yearbooks knows. So, as a digital photographer, you'll probably find yourself taking people pictures
in both kinds of settings. It's helpful to be comfortable with both.

Studio portraits are usually more formal. With a professional-looking backdrop or a "serious" background
such as those omnipresent shelves of professional journals you see in so many executive portraits, a studio
portrait can have a formal or official appearance. Even the crazy Mylar backgrounds and wacky props they're
using for high school portraits these days retain a sense of "this is a professional portrait" in the finished
product.

Location portraits, on the other hand, end up having a casual air no matter how hard you try to formalize
them. The most carefully staged photo of the Speaker of the House posed on the steps of the U.S. Capitol will
still look less formal than a relaxed portrait of the same legislator seated in a studio with only the American
flag in the background.

My feeling is that you should master both studio and location portraiture. You'll want a studio-style picture for
a newspaper head shot or for mounting over the mantel, but will probably prefer an environmental picture to
hang above the couch in the family room or use for your holiday greeting cards. It's great to have an option.

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 173

174 Part II: Techniques Unlimited
It's probably best to learn studio work first, because all the lighting and posing techniques you learn for your
home studio can be applied elsewhere, as you can see in Figure 6.2. You may be using reflectors rather than
flash units for your portraits out in the park, but the principles of putting light to work for you are the same.
The following section will get you started working in your own home studio.

Figure 6.2. The same flattering lighting techniques learned in the studio can be applied outdoors, too.

< Day Day Up >

< Day Day Up >

Setting Up Your Studio

Any convenient indoors space can be transformed into a mini-studio, as you'll discover in Chapter 10, "Macro
Photography." A key difference is that close-up photos usually involve small subjects, taken from a few
inches away, and, much of the time, use much simpler lighting arrangements. People pictures require more
room than photographs of your ceramic collection, and few homes have space that can be devoted to studio
use on a full-time basis. Two of my last three homes had large semi-finished attic space that I was able to
commandeer as a studio. When I had an office addition built for my current residence, I had the choice of
having a crawl space underneath or a full basement. I opted for a basement room with high ceilings, so I
ended up with a 24 x 16-foot multipurpose room that can be used as a studio, darkroom, and storage space.
The darkroom has fallen into disuse since I went completely digital, but the studio and storage space continue
to battle for the remaining square footage.

Those of you with newer homes sans attic, or who live in parts of the country where basements are not
common, probably don't have an extra room for a studio. Even so, I'll bet you have space that can be pressed
into service from time to time. A garage makes a good location, especially if you live in warmer climes or are
willing to confine your studio work to warmer weather. Some garages can be heated efficiently for year round
use, too. Just back your vehicle out of the garage and you have space to shoot. I know several part-time
professional photographers who work exclusively from rooms that were originally the garage. Their studios
don't much resemble a garage today, but that's how they started off.

Of course, a garage studio is impractical in California, and a few other places where the denizens pay more for
living space than the rest of us make. Generally, such space is used permanently for storage, practice space for
your kid's band, or maybe even as living quarters. In big cities like New York, many people don't even own
cars, let alone garages. Try suggesting to someone who dwells in a studio apartment in the Big Apple that,
say, 200 square feet should be set aside for a home studio.

174 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 175
If space is limited, see if enough space can be cleared in your family room, living room, or other indoor
location to set up a few lights, a background, and perhaps a tripod on a temporary basis. You want a place that
can be used without disrupting family activities (which is why even the largest kitchen is probably a poor
choice) and where you can set up and tear down your studio as quickly as possible. You'll use your home
studio more often if it isn't a pain to use.
< Day Day Up >
< Day Day Up >

What You Need

Much of the gear you need for home portraits is the same as what I'm going to outline in Chapter 10, too. The
next section will list the basic items you need to have on hand. There's enough overlap that if you're
well-equipped for macro photography, you've got most of what you need for individual portraits, too.

Your Portrait Camera

There are a few special requirements for a digital camera that will be used for portraiture. Here's a list of the
key things to look for in a digital camera that are ideal for portraiture.

• Lots of megapixels. Portraiture is one type of photography that places a premium on resolution. Even
if you plan on making prints no larger than 5 x 7 inches, you'll find a 5 to 8 megapixel (or more)
camera useful, because those extra pixels come in handy when you start retouching your portraits to
make your subjects look their best. I think you'll find it hard to resist making 8 x 10 and larger prints
of your best efforts, too, so you'll be glad you sprung for a few million more megapixels when you
bought your camera.
• A modest zoom lens (at least). Digital cameras with no zoom lens (generally only the lowest of the
low-end models) or which have only a 2:1 zoom may not be your best choice for shooting portraits.
That's because for the most flattering head-and-shoulders pictures you'll want a lens that has a zoom
setting in the 80mm to 105mm (35mm camera equivalent) range. Shorter focal lengths often produce
a kind of distortion, with facial features that are closer to the camera (such as noses) appearing much
larger in proportion than features that are farther away from the camera (such as ears), as you can see
in Figure 6.3. By the time you zoom in to the 135mm to 200mm (or longer) telephoto settings, the
reverse effect happens: The camera's perspective tends to flatten and widen the face, bringing nose
and ears into the same plane. The 80 to 105mm settings are just about perfect.

Figure 6.3. The wide-angle setting (left) emphasizes subject matter (such as a nose) that is closer to the
camera. A more natural look comes from a telephoto setting (right).

• Some way to use multiple flash units. If you want the most control over your lighting, you'll want to
use several light sources. Electronic flash is often the best option, so your digital camera should have

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 175

176 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

a way of triggering one or more external flash units that are used separate from the camera. You may
be able to connect extra flash units with a standard PC connector (the PC is said to stand for
Prontor-Compur, two early shutter manufacturers, not "personal computer"), a hot shoe connector that
can accommodate either an external flash or an adapter you can plug an external flash into. Some
more advanced digital cameras, particularly digital SLRs, might be able to work with flash triggered
wirelessly.
• Filter thread. Although not an essential feature, having a camera with a thread that will accept
screw-on filters and other accessories can be very useful. There are some offbeat things you can do
with filters, such as put petroleum jelly on the edges of a skylight filter to provide blurry edges, that
are a lot harder to duplicate in Photoshop than you might think.

If your camera meets these minimum specifications, you're all set.

Backgrounds

Backgrounds are an important consideration for more formal portraits. You can get great casual pictures with
the gang posed on the couch in the living room, and, in fact, you should try some of the lighting techniques
discussed later in this chapter in that sort of an environment. Good lighting can elevate the family room
portrait well above the snapshot category. However, if you want a true studio portrait, you're going to have to
arrange for a more formal background. Luckily, that's easy to do.

Tip from the Pros: How Wide is a Yard of Cloth?

If you answered "36 inches," you lose and don't get to advance to Final Jeopardy. A yard of cloth
is 36 inches long, but the width of the bolt can vary. Some are as narrow as 18 inches. Other
types of cloth come in 45 inch or larger widths. I've had great luck with the velour cloth
backdrops I mention from time to time in this book. For portraiture, the key is to purchase cloth
that is wide enough and long enough to allow posing one or more people full-length. Find a bolt
that is 54 to 60 inches wide. Purchase a piece that is a lot longer than you think you need. Six
yards isn't too much when you want to stretch the cloth up to the ceiling, then drape it down on
the floor. Make sure your fabric is easily washable, because it will get soiled from people
walking on it. Buy as many different colors as you can afford.

Seamless paper, available in 9- and 12-foot widths and around 36 feet long, is another good choice. As I
mention in Chapter 10, you can also get half-rolls for close-ups. A paper backdrop can be easily damaged,
becoming wrinkled with handling and dirty as people walk on it. When a piece becomes soiled, you just rip it
off and roll off some more. If you can, avoid using seamless paper on thick carpets. They don't provide
enough support for the paper, so it rips more easily. A wood floor may be a better choice.

You've probably admired those abstract backgrounds with, perhaps, a cloud effect, or stippled blotches of
paint, like the one shown in Figure 6.4. Painted backdrop canvases are available for big bucks from
professional photography supply houses, but you can easily make your own, as I did.

Figure 6.4. Dabbing with a sponge and paint on a piece of canvas can create a workable backdrop for portraits.

176 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 177

While professional photographers won't blink an eye at purchasing backdrops they can use repeatedly, most
don't hesitate to create their own props and backgrounds to give their photography a customized, personal
flavor.

When my studio was in operation professionally, I used the reverse side of 4 x 8 sheets of paneling to create
dozens of backgrounds for individual portraits. Of course, I had a permanent studio to store them in. You're
probably better off using sheets of awning canvas. The secret is to use a sponge to paint them with colors.
You'll be surprised at the results, even if you're not the artistic type. Start painting using lighter colors in the
center and work your way toward the edges with darker pigments. The sponge will give the surface an arty
splotchy effect that will look great, especially when it's out of focus. Browns and earth colors are
recommended for men; brighter colors, especially blues, work well for women and children. Remember, if
you make any mistakes or don't like your initial results, you can always paint over them.

Visible Means of Support

The same kind of supports you will be collecting for close-up photography in Chapter 10 will serve you in
good stead for people pictures, too. You'll need stands for your background, lighting, and camera, although
there are many portrait situations in which you'll want to dispense with a tripod (such as when you're taking
photos by electronic flash). Unlike macro photographs, portraits are often taken from a variety of angles and
distances.

Whether you're using cloth backdrops, seamless paper, or another background, you'll need some sort of
framework to support it. I prefer sturdy light stands for lightweight backgrounds, and ceiling supports for
heavier paper rolls. You may not be able or willing to nail anything to your ceiling (this is one instance when
having a basement or attic is great), but you can still build some sort of easily disassembled framework to
hold your backdrop.

Tip from the Pros: Right of Springs

You can purchase spring-loaded vertical supports that fit tightly between your floor and ceiling,
but can be released and stored when not in use. These work well with sturdy ceilings, or those
with overhead beams. You can try making your own: cut a 2 x 4 a few inches shorter than your
ceiling height. Pad one end of the 2 x 4 so it won't damage your ceiling, then put the end that
rests on the floor in a coffee can with a spring mechanism of your choice. Press the 2 x 4 down to
get enough slack to slide it in place, then release to allow your spring to hold it firmly in a
vertical position. The spring must be strong enough to resist the downward pull of your backdrop

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 177

178 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

material.

Light stands make good supports, and are a once-in-a-lifetime investment. Unless you manage to lose one,
they'll last forever. You'll need to add clamps or other fasteners to fix your lights and, perhaps, umbrellas to
the stands.

A tripod is not essential for people photography, particularly if you're using motion-stopping electronic flash,
and in many cases a tripod can be detrimental. You'll want to be able to roam around a little to get various
angles, move in and out to change from full-length or three-quarters portrait to close-up. For Figure 6.5, my
niece Sabrina wouldn't sit still for a formal portrait, but because my camera wasn't mounted on a tripod, I was
able to move around to the side and catch her as she looked back at me.

Figure 6.5. Electronic flash and a handheld camera lead to spontaneous poses.

The only time you'll really need a tripod for portraits is when you need to lock down the camera to get a
precise composition, or when you're working with relatively low light levels and need the tripod to steady the
camera. For example, you might be shooting a series of head shots for your company and would like each
photo to be taken from the exact same distance and angle. Or, you may be taking pictures using diffused
window light or with household lamps as your illumination. In both cases a tripod can be useful as a camera
support.

Make Light Work for You

Lighting is one of the most important tools for creative portraiture. The way you arrange your illumination can
have a dramatic effect on the mood of a photo. Lighting can focus interest on your subject. You can even use
lighting techniques to improve the looks of a subject with less-than-perfect features. You'll find that portrait
lighting is a great deal more complex than the lighting you might use for many other types of subjects.
Close-ups need to be lit carefully, and your scenic and architectural pictures will look better if the illumination
is just so. For sports photography, much of the time you won't even have much control over the kind of light
you use. Portraiture, on the other hand, looks best when the lighting is carefully crafted.

178 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 179
As a result, while very good portraits can be taken with just one light source, you'll find that mastering
multiple light sources opens new creative avenues. But note that I said multiple light sources. You don't have
to encumber your home or office studio with dozens of different lighting fixtures. Often, a skylight, window,
or reflector can serve as an effective light source. Outdoors, you may work with the light from the sun,
supplemented by reflectors or electronic flash. You'll learn how to use these light sources later in this chapter.

Here are your choices:

Existing Light

The existing light indoors or outdoors can be perfect for good people pictures. Rembrandt reportedly cut a
trapdoor in the ceiling of his studio and used that to illuminate many of his portraits. If you have a room with
a skylight, you may find that suitable for portraits at certain times of day. Some memorable pictures have been
taken using only the soft light that suffuses from a window. Indeed, you'll find references to "north light" (a
window orientation that produces diffuse light from dawn to dusk) throughout painting and photographic
literature.

Just because the lighting is already there doesn't mean you can't modify it to your advantage. You can lower
the blinds part way to reduce or soften window light. You can use reflectors to bounce light around in
interesting ways.

Electronic Flash

Electronic flash is often the best choice for indoor portraiture. The short duration of flash captures a moment
in a fraction of a second, without danger of blur from a slow shutter speed. The high intensity of flash means
you can use small f-stops if you want, so all of your subject will be in sharp focus. Flash can be reduced in
intensity, as well, giving you the option of using selective focus, too. Flash can be harsh and direct, or soft and
diffuse.

The chief problem with electronic flash is that it is difficult to preview how flash illumination will appear in
the final picture. Fortunately, there are ways to overcome this limitation, as I'll show you later in this section.
A second problem is that many digital cameras don't have a connector that lets you plug in an external flash,
as I mentioned earlier.

Electronic flash comes in many forms, from the built-in flash on your digital camera to external
battery-powered units to "studio" flash that operate from AC power or large battery packs. Unless you're
moving into portraiture in a big way, you don't need studio flash units. If you do decide to make the
investment, there are some surprisingly economical AC-powered studio flash setups for serious amateurs and
pros on a budget. A single-unit (flash head and power supply in one module) "monolite" can cost less than
$200.

You certainly should investigate external battery-powered flashes that are compatible with your digital
camera. Many digital cameras cannot use electronic flash intended for film cameras, because conventional
flash units use a voltage to trigger the flash (through a switch in the camera) that is too high, and likely to fry
the electronics of a digital model. Digital cameras may also work only with dedicated external flash units that
integrate with the camera's exposure system. Unless you have such a dedicated flash, you'll want a digital
camera that has manual exposure settings that can be used with any external flash unit.

Some add-on flash units have a built-in device called a slave sensor that triggers the flash when the sensor
detects another unit firing. These can be safely used with any camera, as they have no direct connection to the
camera. You can also purchase detectors that attach to any flash unit, turning it into a slave flash.

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 179

180 Part II: Techniques Unlimited
If you're using an external flash, make sure you turn off your digital camera's internal flash unit, especially if
you don't want it to trigger a slave unit. Some digital camera models require you to have the internal flash
flipped up, even if disabled, to activate the external flash connector. Check your camera's instruction manual
carefully to see exactly what you need to do to use an external flash unit.

If you use your electronic flash on stands, you may be able to rig an incandescent light along each side to give
you some indication of what your lighting looks like. These "modeling" lights work especially well if your
electronic flash is pointed at a reflector such as an umbrella. That's because the softening effect of the
umbrella reduces the variation in illumination that results when the flash and incandescent lamp aren't in
precisely the same position.

The ability to see the exact light you're going to get can be very important. For Figure 6.6, I carefully
manipulated the lights so the model's hat fell into shadow, and most of the right side of her face was in
shadow as well, except for the dangling earring. You can't achieve lighting effects like this on a hit or miss
guesstimate basis.

Figure 6.6. Careful lighting can produce effects like this, in which the earring stands out sharply from the
shadows.

Incandescent Lights

You'll find that incandescent lights are inexpensive, easy to set up, and make it simple to preview your
lighting effects. You never have to worry about what your lighting will look like if you use incandescent
lamps.

Unfortunately, lamps are not as intense as flash and may not provide enough illumination for good handheld
exposures at short shutter speeds. Or, if the lamps are intense enough, they may be too hot to pose under for
long periods of time. In addition, incandescent lamps are much redder than the illumination provided by
daylight or electronic flash, so you may have to change your camera's whitebalance control to compensate.
(Many digital models have automatic white-balance control, but it's not foolproof.)

180 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 181
While you can use just about any light, you might want to investigate incandescent lamps made especially for
photography, available from your local camera shop or online photo retailer. They aren't overly expensive,
and are easier to buy hardware for, such as mounting clamps, umbrella adapters, and so forth.

Gadgets

There are dozens of different gadgets and accessories associated with portraiture. The best news is that you
can make many of them yourself, so you don't have to pay a lot of money to spice up your portrait-shooting
arsenal. Here are some versatile gadgets you might want to consider.

Flat Reflectors

Reflectors bounce some of the illumination from other light sources onto your subject, serving as a low-cost
secondary light source in their own right. Large sheets of foamboard (which you can stand up and lean against
things at the proper angle), poster board, Mylar sheets, or anything that reflects light can be used.

Soft Boxes

Soft boxes are similar in concept to photographic tents, which I discuss in Chapter 10. Both operate by using
diffuse white material, such as cloth, to create a soft lighting effect. A tent is a white, usually cubical box that
fits around the subject (usually for close-ups) and diffuses any light you apply to the outside. A soft box
operates in a similar way, except it fits around the light source. Soft boxes can simulate window light and
create a diffuse, flattering illumination suitable for photography of women, children, teens, and any adult men
who aren't tenacious about preserving those craggy furrows they think of as facial character lines. A kind of
mini soft box can be purchased for electronic flash units that are normally used on the camera, to diffuse the
light. There's no reason why one of these units, shown in Figure 6.7, can't be used with an offcamera flash,
too.

Figure 6.7. Flash diffusers are a sort of mini soft box.

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 181

182 Part II: Techniques Unlimited
Gobos and Cookies

Gobos and cookies are the opposite of a reflector. They can be a black drape or sheet placed between a light
source and the subject to block some light, and are handy when you have an unwanted light source, such as a
window, that's spoiling the effect you want. These items are actually more of a tool for video and cinema
photographers and for stage productions, because they can include cutouts that let some light through to
produce an interesting combination of light and shadows, such as window frames, trees, or logos. However,
still photographers should know about them and use them when appropriate.

Barndoors/Snoots

These are devices that limit where the light from a flash or lamp goes. A barndoor has two or four hinged
flaps you can move into or out of the path of the light. Subtle adjustments can be made to "feather" the light
on your subject. Snoots are conical devices that focus the light down to a narrow spot. They are excellent for
creating a light that illuminates a small area, such as the hair of the subject.

You can easily make your own barndoors or snoots out of cardboard or tin (which is a better choice for
accessories used near hot incandescent lamps). Spray paint them with black heat-resistant barbeque grill paint.
Or, use purchased units, like those shown in Figure 6.8.

Figure 6.8. Barndoors and snoots let you direct the light carefully.

Umbrellas

A good set of umbrellas is the best investment you can make for portrait photography. Umbrellas soften the
light in ways you can control and use for artistic effect. You can bounce light off an umbrella onto your
subject, or, in the case of translucent white umbrellas, shine your illumination through the fabric for an
especially diffuse effect. In either mode, a soft-white umbrella provides very diffuse illumination, but you can
also purchase umbrellas with opaque shiny silver or gold interiors that provide a broad light source that still
has snap and contrast. Umbrellas produced for professional photographers are compatible with various
lighting clamp systems that make them easy to set up and manipulate.

182 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 183

Tip from the Pros: Going For the Gold

Gold umbrellas, in particular, are prized for the warm illumination they provide. They are used
extensively for fashion and glamour photography because of the flattering skin tones their light
produces. Silver umbrellas have more contrast and snap than soft-white models. The edges of the
illumination provided by silver umbrellas are more sharply defined, so you can angle the
umbrella to "feather" the light on your subject (placing strong light on some parts, while fading
to less light on others).

However, you can also use ordinary umbrellas of the type people take out into the rain. I found a source
selling white umbrellas that collapse down to less than a foot in length for about $5 each. I really liked these
when I was a traveling photojournalist who was unable to travel light (two or three cameras, five or six lenses,
and two electronic flash units were my minimum kit), but tried to trim weight where ever I could. I picked up
a dozen and found I could hold the umbrella and flash unit in my left hand and shoot with the camera held in
my right hand. You can jury-rig clamps to hold them to light stands or other supports. Collapsible umbrellas
usually have small diameters and must be used relatively close to get a soft, wrap-around lighting effect.
Larger sizes are needed to provide illumination from greater distances (say, 10 to 12 feet).
< Day Day Up >
< Day Day Up >

Portrait Lighting Basics

Lighting is the palette you'll be using to paint your photographic portraits. The next two sections will
introduce you to some basic techniques, using some diagrams I've put together that will help you set up
professional-looking lighting on your first try. However, you don't need to stick to the setups I'm going to
describe anymore than you'd want to paint using only one shade each of red, blue, green, yellow, orange, or
other colors. Once you understand how various types of lighting affect your portrait, you'll want to expand on
the basic techniques to achieve special looks of your own devising. This section covers some basics.

The Nature of Light

The character of the light you use is just as important as the direction it comes from. As a photographer, you
probably already know that light can be hard and harsh, or soft and gentle. Neither end of the spectrum is
"good" or "bad." Each type of light, and all the gradations in between, has its own advantages and
disadvantages.

A spotlight or a lamp in a reflector, or an electronic flash pointed directly at a subject is highly directional and
produces a hard effect. Hard light is harsh because all the light comes from a relatively small source. This
kind of light can be good if you want to emphasize the texture of a subject, and are looking for as much detail
and sharpness as possible. In fact, many kinds of photographic projection and optical gear take advantage of
point-source lighting to maximize sharpness. A photographic enlarger, for example, may be equipped with
such a source to get the sharpest possible image from a piece of film. Of course, the point-source light
emphasizes any scratches or dust on the film, so the technique works best with originals that are virtually
perfect from a physical standpoint.

Most portrait subjects benefit from a softer light, like that used in Figure 6.9. You can soften this light in
many ways, using umbrellas, diffusers, and other techniques. It's even possible to add a little softness in
Photoshop, as I did with this particular photo.

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 183

184 Part II: Techniques Unlimited
Figure 6.9. Soft illumination works best for many subjects, including women.

Direct versus Soft

As I've noted, direct light is not as good a choice for portraiture. People rarely look their best under a direct
light, because even a baby's skin is subject to imperfections that we don't see under home illumination (which
is deliberately designed to be non-harsh). Only in direct sunlight are we likely to look our worst. Figure 6.10
shows how a direct light focuses a sharp beam on a human subject.

Figure 6.10. A direct light forms a sharp beam of high-contrast light on your subject.

Most portraits are made using softer illumination, such as that produced by bouncing light off an umbrella. As
the light strikes the umbrella (or other soft reflector), the light scatters. It bounces back towards the subject
and appears to come from a much larger source the umbrella itself rather than the bulb or flash unit that
produced it. Figure 6.11 shows a much softer beam of light bounced onto the subject from an umbrella. Of

184 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 185

course, the light is bouncing in all directions and spreading out, but my illustration shows just the cone of light
falling on the subject. The blunt "apex" of this cone gets smaller the farther away you move the light, and
larger the closer it gets.

Figure 6.11. Bouncing light from an umbrella produces a much softer light source.

But you probably already guessed by now that the distance of the light source from the subject also has a
bearing on the quality of light. In Figure 6.11, the umbrella is fairly far from the subject, so the light source
seems to come from a relatively small area, even though it's bouncing off an umbrella. The effect is less harsh
than direct light, of course, but still not as good as we can achieve.

For Figure 6.12, I moved the umbrella in much closer to the subject, making the blunt end larger. The
apparent source of the light is now much broader, relatively, and correspondingly softer. You'll need to keep
this characteristic in mind as you set up your lights for portraiture. If you need to move a light back farther
from the subject, you'll also need to take into account the changing nature of the light. A larger umbrella may
help keep the lighting soft and gentle. Or, you simply might want to have slightly "edgier" lighting for your
subject. As long as you are aware of the effect, you can control it.

Figure 6.12. Moving the light in closer provides an even broader, softer effect.

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 185

186 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Balancing Light

As you'll see in the next section, you'll often be using multiple illumination sources to light your portraits. It's
important to understand some of the principles that go into balancing light from several different sources in a
single photograph. Here are some tenets to work by:

The Inverse Square Law

Moving a light source twice as far away reduces the light by 4x (not 2x). In photographic terms, that translates
into two f-stops, not one f-stop, to compensate. For example, a light source placed 8 feet from your subject
will provide onequarter as much illumination as the same source located just 4 feet from the subject. After
moving the light twice as far away, you'd have to open up two f-stops to keep the same exposure, as shown in
Figure 6.13.

Figure 6.13. Moving a light source twice as far away cuts its effective illumination by four times (two f-stops).

You can make the inverse square law work for you. If you find a source is too strong, either by itself or
relative to other light sources you're using, simply moving it twice as far away will reduce its strength to
one-quarter its previous value. Or, should you need more light, you can gain two f-stops by moving a light
source twice as close. (Keep in mind that the softness of the light is affected by the movement, too.)

There are times when you won't want to adjust the light intensity entirely by moving the light because, as
you've learned, the farther a light source is from the subject, the "harder" it becomes. In those cases, you'll
want to change the actual intensity of the light. This can be done by using a lower power setting on your flash,
switching from, say, a highly reflective aluminum umbrella to a soft white umbrella, or by other means.

Using Ratios

When lighting a subject, the most common way to balance light is to use ratios, which are easy to calculate by
measuring the exposure of each light source alone (either with your camera's exposure meter or using an
external flash meter). Once you have the light calculated for each source alone, you can figure the lighting
ratio.

186 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 187

For example, suppose that the main light for a portrait provides enough illumination that you would use an
f-stop of f11. The supplementary light you'll be using is less intense, is bounced into a more diffuse reflector,
or is farther away (or any combination of these) and produces an exposure, all by itself, of f5.6. That translates
into two f-stops' difference or, putting it another way, one light source is 4 times as intense as the other. You
can express this absolute relationship as the ratio 4:1. Because the main light is used to illuminate the
highlight portion of your image, while the secondary light is used to fill in the dark, shadow areas left by the
main light, this ratio tells us a lot about the lighting contrast for the scene. (I'll explain more about main and
fill lights shortly.)

In practice, a 4:1 lighting ratio (or higher) is quite dramatic and can leave you with fairly dark shadows to
contrast with your highlights. For portraiture, you probably will want to use 3:1 or 2:1 lighting ratios for a
softer look that lets the shadows define the shape of your subject without cloaking parts in inky blackness.

If you use incandescent lighting or electronic flash equipped with modeling lights, you will rarely calculate
lighting ratios while you shoot. Instead, you'll base your lighting setups on how the subject looks, making
your shadows lighter or darker depending on the effect you want. If you use electronic flash without a
modeling light, or flash with modeling lights that aren't proportional to the light emitted by the flash, you can
calculate lighting ratios. If you do need to know the lighting ratio, it's easy to figure by measuring the
exposure separately for each light and multiplying the number of f-stops difference by two. A two-stop
difference means a 4:1 lighting ratio; two-and-a-half stops difference adds up to a 5:1 lighting ratio; three
stops is 6:1 and so forth.

Figure 6.14 shows an example of 4:1, 3:1, and 2:1 lighting ratios.

Figure 6.14. Left: a 4:1 lighting ratio; middle: a 3:1 lighting ratio; right: a 2:1 lighting ratio.

< Day Day Up >

< Day Day Up >

Using Multiple Light Sources

As I warned you in the previous section, the best portrait lighting involves at least two, and often three or
more light sources. The light sources don't always have to be incandescent lights or electronic flash. Figure
6.15, for example, was shot using window light (from the rear), light bounced from a flat reflector you can see
at the right side of the image, and from another reflector at camera position (which you can't see). This section
will introduce you to each type of light source and the terminology used to describe it.

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 187

188 Part II: Techniques Unlimited
Figure 6.15. Only window light and reflectors were used for this bridal portrait.

Main Light

The main light, or key light, is the primary light source used to illuminate a portrait. It may, in fact, be the
only light you use, or you may augment it with other light sources. The main light is most often placed in
front of the subject and on one side of the camera or the other. Some kinds of lighting call for the main light to
be placed relatively high, above the subject's eye-level, or lower at eye-level. You usually won't put a main
light lower than that, unless you're looking for a monster/crypt-keeper effect.

Placed to the side, the main light becomes a sidelight that illuminates one side or the profile of a subject who
is facing the light. Placed behind the subject, the main light can produce a silhouette effect if no other lights
are used, or a backlit effect if additional lighting is used to illuminate the subject from the front. I'll show you
how to create lighting effects using the main light shortly.

You'll usually position the main light at roughly a 45-degree angle from the axis of the camera and subject.
The main light should be placed a little higher than the subject's head the exact elevation determined by the
type of lighting setup you're using. One thing to watch out for is the presence or absence of catch lights in the
subject's eyes. You want one catch light in each eye, which gives the eye a slight sparkle. If you imagine the
pupils of the eyes to be a clock face, you want the catch lights placed at either the 11 o'clock or 1 o'clock
position. You might have to raise or lower the main light to get the catch light exactly right.

You most definitely do not want two catch lights (because you're using both main and fill lights) or no catch
light at all. If you have two catch lights, the eyes will look extra sparkly, but strange. With no catch light, the
eyes will have a dead look to them, as in Figure 6.16. For this example, I used the same photo so you could
see the difference (removing one, then both of the original catch lights), but you won't normally get identical
shots with different catch light effects in them. Sometimes you can retouch out an extra catch light, or add one
with Photoshop, but the best practice is to place them correctly in the first place.

188 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 189
Figure 6.16. Two catch lights (left), or no catch light at all (middle) look bad. One catch light (right) looks great.

Fill Light

The fill light is usually the second-most powerful light used to illuminate a portrait. Fill light lightens the
shadows cast by the main light. Fill lights are usually positioned on the opposite side of the camera from the
main light.

The relationship between the main light and fill light determines, in part, the contrast of a scene, as you
learned in the section on calculating lighting ratios. If the main and fill are almost equal, the picture will be
relatively low in contrast. If the main light is much more powerful than the fill light, the shadows will be
somewhat darker and the image will have higher contrast. Fill lights are most often placed at the camera
position so they will fill the shadows that the camera "sees" from the main light. Figure 6.17 shows a main
light and fill light in a typical lighting setup. I'll show you the effects of using main and fill lights in the
sections that follow.

Figure 6.17. Main and fill lights complement each other.

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 189

190 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Background Light

A light illuminating the background is another common light source used in portraits. Background lights are
low power lights that provide depth or separation in your image. Place the background light low on a short
light stand about halfway between your subject and the background, so that the subject hides the actual light
from view. This light can also provide interesting lighting effects on the background when used with colored
gels or cookies. You can even turn the background light towards the back of the subject, producing a halo or
back light effect.

Hair Light

A hair light is usually a small light directed at the hair of the subject to provide an attractive highlight. Often,
a snoot or barndoor is used to keep the hair light from spilling down on the subject's face. A hair light must be
controlled carefully so it doesn't form an overexposed hot spot on the subject's head. A low-power light like
the background light, the hair light also provides separation from the background, which can be very
important if your subject has dark hair and is posed against a dark background. Place the hair light in a high
position shining down on the subject's head, then move it forward until the light spills over slightly onto the
subject's face. At that point, tilt the light back again until it is no longer illuminating the subject's face.

For Figure 6.18, I used a background light on the tiger-striped background as well as a touch of a hair light on
the back of the young man's head to provide separation between his head and the background. I didn't overdo
either one, because I wanted the focus of the picture to be on his face.

Figure 6.18. Both a hair light and background light were used here to provide separation from the background.

< Day Day Up >

< Day Day Up >

190 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 191

Lighting Techniques
Although I'll describe each of the most common lighting techniques, you'll want to set up some lights and see
for yourself exactly how they work.

Short Lighting

Short lighting and broad lighting (discussed next) are two different sides of the same coin. Together, they are
sometimes referred to as "three-quarter lighting," because in both cases the face is turned to one side so that
three quarters of the face is turned toward the camera, and one quarter of the face is turned away from the
camera.

Short lighting, also called narrow lighting, is produced when the main light illuminates the side of the face
turned away from the camera, as shown in the bird'seye view in Figure 6.19. Because three-quarters of the
face is in some degree of shadow and only the "short" portion is illuminated, this type of lighting tends to
emphasize facial contours. It's an excellent technique for highlighting those with "interesting" faces. It also
tends to make faces look narrower, because the "fat" side of the face is shadowed, so those with plump or
round faces will look better with short lighting. Use a weak fill light for men to create a masculine look.

Figure 6.19. With short lighting, the main light source comes from the side of the face directed away from the
camera.

This is a very common lighting technique that can be used with men and women, as well as children.

In Figure 6.20, our subject is looking over the photographer's right shoulder. The main light is at the right side
of the setup, and the fill light is at the photographer's left. Because the fill light is about twice as far from the
subject as the main light, if both lights are of the same power, the fill light will automatically be only
onequarter as intense as the main light (thanks to the inverse-square law). If the shadows are too dark, move
the fill light closer, or move the main light back slightly.

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 191

192 Part II: Techniques Unlimited
Figure 6.20. A typical portrait illuminated using short lighting looks like this.

Broad Lighting

In many ways, broad lighting, the other three-quarter lighting technique, is the opposite of short lighting. The
main light illuminates the side of the face turned toward the camera. Because most of the face is flooded with
soft light (assuming you're using an umbrella or other diffuse light source, as you should), it deemphasizes
facial textures (teenagers may love this effect) and widens narrow or thin faces. Figure 6.21 is the lighting
diagram used to produce the image shown in Figure 6.22, which pictures the same subject as above, but with
broad lighting instead. Broad lighting may not be the best setup for this teenager, because she has a broad
face, but styling her hair so it covers both sides of her face reduces the effect. That let me use broad lighting
and its feature-flattering soft light.

Figure 6.21. This diagram shows how the lights are arranged for a typical broad lighting setup. Remember, you
can also use a mirror image of this arrangement.

192 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 193
Figure 6.22. A portrait made using broad lighting de-emphasizes facial textures.

Butterfly Lighting

Butterfly lighting was one of the original "glamour" lighting effects. The main light is placed directly in front
of the face above eye-level and casts a shadow underneath the nose. This is a great lighting technique to use
for women, because it accentuates the eyes and eyelashes, and emphasizes any hollowness in the cheeks,
sometimes giving your model attractive cheekbones where none exist. Butterfly lighting de-emphasizes lines
around the eyes, any wrinkles in the forehead, and unflattering shadows around the mouth. Women love this
technique, for obvious reasons. Butterfly lighting also tends to emphasize the ears, making it a bad choice for
men and women whose hairstyle features pulling the hair back and behind the ears.

Butterfly lighting is easy to achieve. Just place the main light at the camera position, and raise it high enough
above eye-level to produce a shadow under the nose of the subject. Don't raise the light so high the shadow
extends down to his or her mouth. The exact position will vary from person to person. If a subject has a short
nose, raise the light to lengthen the shadow and increase the apparent length of the nose. If your victim has a
long nose, or is smiling broadly (which reduces the distance between the bottom of the nose and the upper
lip), lower the light to shorten the shadow.

You can use a fill light if you want, also placed close to the camera, but lower than the main light, and set at a
much lower intensity, to reduce the inkiness of the shadows. Figure 6.23 is the diagram for applying butterfly
lighting (without a fill light), while Figure 6.24 shows the final result. Notice that the ears aren't a problem
with this portrait, because they are hidden behind the model's hair. Because this young woman has blonde
hair, I've toned back on the use of hair light in all the photos.

Figure 6.23. This diagram shows the basic arrangement for butterfly lighting.

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 193

194 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Figure 6.24. Butterfly lighting is a great glamour lighting setup.

Rembrandt Lighting

Rembrandt lighting is another flattering lighting technique that is better for men. It's a combination of short
lighting (which you'll recall is good for men) and butterfly lighting (which you'll recall is glamorous, and
therefore good for ugly men). The main light is placed high and favoring the side of the face turned away
from the camera, as shown in Figure 6.25. The side of the face turned towards the camera will be partially in
shadow, typically with a roughly triangular patch of light under the eye on the side of the face that is closest to
the camera. For Rembrandt lighting, place the light facing the side of the face turned away from the camera,
just as you did with short lighting, but move the light up above eye-level. If you do this, the side of the face
closest to the camera will be in shadow. Move the light a little more towards the camera to reduce the amount
of shadow, and produce a more blended, subtle triangle effect, as shown in Figure 6.26. Eliminate or reduce
the strength of the fill light for a dramatic effect, or soften the shadows further with fill light.

194 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 195
Figure 6.25. Arrange your main light high when working with a Rembrandt lighting effect.

Figure 6.26. Rembrandt lighting lends an Old Masters' touch to portraiture.

Side Lighting

Side lighting is illumination that comes primarily directly from one side, and is good for profile photos. Side
lighting comes primarily directly from one side of the camera. You can use it for profiles or for "half-face"
effects like the Fab Four on the much copied/parodied cover of Meet the Beatles/With the Beatles. The
amount of fill light determines how dramatic this effect is. You can place the main light slightly behind the
subject to minimize the amount of light that spills over onto the side of the face that's toward the camera.
Figure 6.27 shows you how to set up lights for side lighting, and Figure 6.28 shows the results. Note that a
subject with long hair that covers the cheeks may have most of their face obscured when sidelit in this way.
Either comb the hair back or go for the mysterious look that my model requested in this case.

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 195

196 Part II: Techniques Unlimited
Figure 6.27. Side lighting is applied with most of the light coming from one side.

Figure 6.28. Side lighting can create dramatic profile photos.

Backlighting

With a backlit photo, most of the illumination comes from behind the subject and doesn't really light the
subject as much as it defines its edges. Use additional fill light to provide for detail in the subject's front. You
can use the background light for backlighting, and put your main and fill lights to work in a subordinate roll
by reducing their intensity. Or, you can use the main light as the backlight, as shown in Figure 6.29 (place it
below or above the camera's field of view), and fill in the shadows with your fill light. Figure 6.30 shows the
final results. I didn't go for the wildly overlit, backlit glamour look in this case because the teenager in the
photo is only 14 years old, and not quite ready for femme fatale-dom.

Figure 6.29. Use your main light or background light to backlight your subject.

196 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 197

Figure 6.30. Backlighting helps define the edges of a portrait subject.

< Day Day Up >

< Day Day Up >

Outdoor Lighting
You can apply virtually all the techniques you learned in the studio to your outdoors portraits. Once you've
mastered short lighting, broad lighting, butterfly lighting, and the rest of the basic setups, you can use them
outdoors by being flexible enough to work with the less controllable lighting you find there.

For example, you might have to position your subject to take advantage of the position of the sun as a "main"
light, and use reflectors to create your fill. A search for some shady spot might be required to provide a soft
enough light source. The sun might end up as your hair light. Figure 6.31 shows an outdoor portrait lit entirely
with available light, using reflectors to fill in the shadows.

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 197

198 Part II: Techniques Unlimited
Figure 6.31. Using sunlight, reflectors, and other aids, you can duplicate good studio lighting, such as this
portrait, outdoors.

< Day Day Up >

< Day Day Up >

Posing and Shooting

Posing is another topic that's worth a book or two of its own. I'm going to provide a list of quick tips you can
use in this section, but your best bet is to experiment with different poses and find some that you like. Work
with those poses at first, try some variations, and add more poses as you become comfortable. Just keep in
mind that your goal is not to use your subject as a mannequin that you can bend and twist any way you like.
It's better to let the subject assume a pose that he or she is comfortable with. Then, you can make slight
adjustments that reposition awkward limbs or produce better facial expressions.

Tip from the Pros: Choosing Poses

There are an infinite number of good poses, but you're interested in starting with just a few. Your
best bet is to clip photos from magazines with poses that you like, or purchase a posing guide
with hundreds or thousands of different poses included. After you've worked with these canned
poses for a while, you'll be more comfortable working with your subject for poses on your own.

The important thing is that your victim(s) must be relaxed and comfortable. The days when portrait subjects
had to be immobilized in head braces for their daguerreotypes are long past. Don't make them stand for
anything other than a full-length portrait. Stools make a great seat because they discourage slouching. An
individual can sit tall in a stool, alert and ready to take your direction. Because they have no backs, stools
won't intrude upon your picture, either. But don't be afraid to use other kinds of resting places, or from
incorporating them into the photo.

If you're photographing an individual, you can try different poses as you work. For group pictures, you'll
probably want to try and arrange everyone in a pleasing way and take several sets of pictures with each pose

198 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 199

before moving on. Use basic compositional rules to arrange your subjects. For example, in Figure 6.32, the
three "gangsters' "faces are arranged in the upper third of the frame. Although all three heads are roughly on
the same level, they actually form a curving line pointing to the upper-right corner, in the same direction the
Tommy-gun held by the Big Boss is pointed. As a rule of thumb, if you're shooting photos of your subjects
from the waist up, position the camera at chest- or eye-level.

Figure 6.32. To avoid having all the heads in a "lineup" at exactly the same level, vary the positions slightly, as in
this example.

When shooting individuals, you can vary the camera's viewpoint slightly to portray your subject in a more
flattering way. For example, raise the camera slightly above eye-level if you want to elongate a nose or
narrow a chin, broaden a "weak" forehead, or de-emphasize a prominent jaw line. If your subject has a wide
forehead, long nose, or weak chin, lower the camera a little. If you encounter someone with a strong jaw and
long nose, however, you're in a heap of trouble.

Nobody's perfect, and a portrait is a bad time to discover exactly where an individual's imperfections lie. Here
are some general tips to keep in mind to minimize defects:

• The eyes are the most important component of any portrait, as they will always be the center of
attention. They must be sharp and lively, even if you're going for a softer look in the rest of the
portrait.
• The edges of hands are more attractive than the backs or palms of hands. The bottoms of feet are
downright ugly, but you can sometimes get away with side views if the feet are young enough and
there are other things to look at in the photo.
• Bald heads are pretty cool these days, but if your subject is sensitive about a bare pate, elevate your
victim's chin and lower your camera slightly.
• For long, large, or angular noses, try having your subject face directly into the camera.
• To minimize prominent ears, try shooting your subject in profile, or use short lighting so the ear
nearest the camera is in shadow.
• If you want to minimize wrinkles or facial defects such as scars or a bad complexion, use softer, more
diffuse lighting; take a step backwards and photograph your subject from the waist up to reduce the
relative size of the face; keep the main light at eye-level so it doesn't cast shadows; consider using a
diffusing filter (or add diffusion later in your image editor).

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 199

200 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

• If your subject is wearing glasses, be wary of reflections off the glass. Have him or her raise or lower
his chin slightly, and make sure your flash is bouncing off the face at an angle, rather than straight on.
• Diffusion is a great way to add a soft, romantic look to a portrait. You can purchase diffusion filters,
or make your own by smearing a little petroleum jelly around the edges of the plain glass skylight
filter. Or, you can add diffusion within your image editor, as was done with Figure 6.33.

Figure 6.33. Diffusion is a great technique, and you can apply it during the exposure or later, in your
image editor, as was done here.

You'll want to take lots of photos to capture various expressions and angles. Keep talking with your subject,
and not just to provide them with instructions on where to place their arms and legs, or tilt their head. Mention
how great they're doing; tell them how much they are going to like these photos.

Over time you'll develop a breezy line of patter that keeps your models relaxed. When working with amateurs,
I use some funny stock phrases like, "Oh, I see you've done this before," or "Sorry, but we have to keep doing
this until I get it right." You don't have to be that corny, but you'll soon collect a stockpile of jokes and phrases
that will put your subjects at ease.

Tip from the Pros: Eyes Wide Shut

People may blink during a flash exposure, and you'll end up with a photo showing their eyelids
instead of their eyes. The problem is particularly troublesome when shooting groups: The more
people in the picture, the better the odds one of them will have her eyes closed. While you can
review each shot on your LCD, a faster way is simply to ask your subjects to watch for the flash
and then tell you whether it was red or white after the picture was taken. If the flash was red, they
viewed it through closed eyelids and that particular picture, at least, is no good.

< Day Day Up >

< Day Day Up >

200 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 201

Project for Individual Study: Learn to Retouch

If you'll be taking many portraits, one thing you'll want to learn for sure is how to retouch your pictures
digitally. Few people are so great looking that their photographs can be used as is with no modification. Do
you really think Sharon Stone or Keanu Reeves look like that when they get up in the morning? Unless your
subjects have Hollywood make-up artists at their beck and call, it's likely you'll need to optimize some of their
physical features when you take the photos (perhaps using the lighting techniques described in this chapter),
or do some work on their images later on.

Retouching photographs in Photoshop or another image editor is a lot of fun, not too difficult, and is certainly
easier than when I started in photography and retouching artists were just that: artisan specialists skilled with
brush and knife, who knew a bit of photographic chemistry that came in handy when bleaching or restoring
colors.

The finished portrait shown earlier in this chapter didn't look like that originally. I performed quite a bit of fix
up on the image, as you can see in the annotated version shown in Figure 6.34. It was actually quite common
in the good old days to take a proof print and mark it up with a grease pencil, much like the representation in
the figure. Today, we can mark up a digital copy and then go to work.

Figure 6.34. This original image has lots of things that need fixing.

Some things are easy to fix. In Figure 6.35, you can see the double catch lights in the young man's eyes. If you
look closely, you can make out the shape of the photographic umbrellas used to expose the picture. Removing
the extra catch lights was relatively easy. Lightening the hair, improving the complexion, and making the
teeth whiter were a bit more work. You can find everything you need to know about retouching in my book
Digital Retouching and Compositing: Photographers' Guide, available from Thomson Course Technology.

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 201

202 Part II: Techniques Unlimited
Figure 6.35. Some of the fixes are simple, such as removing the extra catch lights in the eyes.

If you'd like to get started, here's a list of the skills you'll need to sharpen:

• Using selection tools. Making selections is the best way to confine your corrections only to the parts
of the image you actually want to modify. Image editors have a variety of selection tools that allow
you to draw selections, select pixels based on their color or brightness, or even to "paint" a selection
with a brush tool.
• Working with layers. Layers allow you to place different parts of the image on separate overlays so
you can work with them individually. Need to correct the color of the eyes? It might be easiest to
copy those features to a layer, make the changes you need, and then merge the eyes back when you're
finished. With layers you can create several different versions of a change, make them visible or
invisible, and use only the one you want.
• Sizing, cropping, and changing orientation. Many photos can be improved by resizing, cropping out
extraneous material, or performing some rotation on all or part of the image.
• Mastering painting/cloning tools. Paint over bad complexions, replace part of a portrait with texture
taken from elsewhere in the picture, and make other modifications using the painting and cloning
tools.
• Adjusting with tonal controls. These allow you to change the brightness and contrast of an image,
improving attributes you might not have been able to capture perfectly when the original photograph
was taken.
• Applying blurring and sharpening. Blurring can de-emphasize parts of a picture, or make sharp
portions appear even sharper. Sharpening tools also emphasize parts of an image, and can improve the
contrast and apparent resolution of an image when you're not satisfied with the results you got in the
original photograph.
• Correcting color. Automatic or even manual white-balance controls aren't perfect. Sometimes you
need to adjust color in an image editor. Other times you might want to intentionally create an odd-ball
color effect for artistic reasons. You'll often find this easier to do in an image editor than in your
camera.
< Day Day Up >
< Day Day Up >

Next Up
Now that you've started down the road to proficiency with the most difficult of all subjects, let's take a stab at
one of the easiest: Mother Nature. In the next chapter, you're going to learn how to capture scenic photos that
you'll want to display on your wall and share with your friends. Whether you're surrounded by nature's beauty,
or only go to visit it on vacations, you'll find the tips and techniques I've got for you to be quite useful.
< Day Day Up >

202 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 203
< Day Day Up >

Chapter 7. Scenic Photography

One of the cool things about photography is that so many of the most interesting creative avenues run parallel
to each other, crisscross, or even meander down the same path from time to time. Scenic photography can
include human-made structures, such as the charming old barns often found in rural landscapes. Architectural
photography isn't limited to urban settings, and can often include the scenery that is part of the building's
structure. Travel photography might include a bit of both urban architecture and the landscapes found outside
the cities but with the "not local" perspective that is essential to the travel experience.

Despite the overlap, each of these three types of photography have some unique aspects, so I'm going to
discuss scenic, architectural, and travel photography in separate chapters. You shouldn't be reluctant to apply
what you learn in any of these to one of the others.

I've put scenic photography first because it is as old as photography itself. The first known permanent
photograph, taken in 1826 by French chemist Nicéphore Niépce, is a view of the courtyard outside his
laboratory. Because early photographs required exposures that were extremely long (Niépce's scenic required
an eight-hour time exposure in full daylight), stationary subjects like trees and mountains were perfect
pictorial fodder. When early photographers weren't strapping our ancestors into chairs for painfully tedious
portraits, they were creating scenic photographs.

Of course, we've come a long way since then, both in the way photographs are taken, and the esteem in which
they are held. That first photograph was made using a pewter plate coated with asphalt, and when Niépce
submitted the "heliograph" to England's King George IV and the Royal Society, it was rejected. Today, the
same photo could be exposed onto a solid-state sensor in 1 1/16,000th of a second (the fastest shutter speed on
the latest digital cameras), and photographs are more highly valued. For example, a signed 16 x 20 print of
Ansel Adams' "Monolith, Face of Half Dome" will set you back $37,000 at the Ansel Adams Gallery
(www.anseladams.com, if you'd rather have the photograph than a new SUV).

This chapter focuses on several different varieties of scenics and offers some tips for getting some interesting
shots of landscapes, sunsets/sunrises, fireworks, and other types of scenic images.
< Day Day Up >
< Day Day Up >

What You Need

Scenic photography isn't particularly equipment- or gadget-intensive. Your digital camera and its standard
zoom lens will be fine in most cases, as long as your lens has a sufficiently wide focal length to take in
expansive vistas. There are a few optional extras that you might want to consider, and I'll describe them in this
section.

Your Scenic Camera

Scenic photos look gorgeous in large prints, and you might want to use your best shots from your travels as
part of the décor of your home or office. Indeed, you'll find that avid photographers will have more scenic
photos on display than just about any other type, even family portraits. That's probably because it's easier for
everyone in the family to agree that a landscape photo looks good than to reach a consensus on those photos
of Mom seated at the piano.

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 203

204 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Because landscape photos are printed in such large sizes, scenic photography is one digital pursuit that puts a
premium on megapixels. The higher your camera's resolution, the better. You can take some good scenic
photos with that old 3-megapixel camera you have, but don't count on making prints much larger than 8 x 10
inches with the kind of detail you'll want to see. A 5- to 8-megapixel (or better) digital camera will provide the
resolution you need to make 16 x 20 or even 20 x 30-inch prints.

If you're planning to include night photography in your scenic repertoire, particularly if you're going after
fireworks pictures (discussed later in this chapter), you'll want a digital camera that can capture long
exposures at boosted ISO ratings without introducing excessive noise into the picture. Some cameras have
special noise reduction features that are able to separate actual image detail from random noise by comparing
two separate photographs and then, in effect, deleting anything that doesn't look like picture information.

You'll want lots of memory cards for storing your images, too. By definition, when you're out shooting scenic
photographs, you're often not near a computer (unless you tote a laptop along in your gadget bag), so those
high-resolution 8-megapixel images will fill up your memory cards much quicker than you might expect.
Carry plenty with you, and if your sojourn involves a lengthy, computerless vacation, think about a portable
hard drive or some other means of offloading images from your digital film cards.

A main concern when selecting a camera for scenic photography will be the lens. A wide zoom range,
extending from a true wide-angle perspective to a decent telephoto setting gives you the flexibility you need
to photograph wide-open spaces or focus in on a distant mountain. As you'll discover in Chapter 8,
"Architectural Photography," many digital cameras do poorly from a wide-angle standpoint. Their zooms may
have no better than a 35mm equivalent 35-39mm view at the wide-angle range, which is barely enough to be
considered wide angle at all. You may be delighted to find your digital camera provides the equivalent of a
28mm lens, but film camera veterans are unlikely to be satisfied with anything longer than 24mm.

The situation doesn't brighten much for those owning digital SLRs with removable lenses, particularly if their
dSLR's sensor is smaller than the 24 x 36mm film frame. The lens "cropping" factor inherent in these cameras
happily makes telephoto lenses seem to be even longer, but conversely can instantly transform a 24mm wide
angle into a 38mm "normal" lens at a typical 1.6X crop factor. Some professional digital cameras have
full-frame sensors and don't suffer from this bonus/penalty "magnification" factor. It's really a crop factor, but
the temptation to think of it as a magnification factor is irresistible. Cropping implies removing something
(which is what happens), while magnification hints at getting something for nothing. If your digital camera is
not an SLR, you can turn to add-on devices like the .75X accessory shown in Figure 7.1.

Figure 7.1. An add-on wide-angle attachment can be useful for your scenic panoramas.

Similar accessories are available to increase the focal length of your digital camera lens should you need a
longer telephoto. Expect to pay $75 to $100 for these accessories, or even more if they come from companies

204 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 205

like Nikon or Canon for their non-SLR cameras.

Choice of focal length is important when shooting scenics, because it's not always practical to drive a few
miles closer to a mountain, and it may be impossible to back up any further for a wider view (thanks to a cliff,
forest, ocean, or other impediment at your back). Telephotos can bring distant subjects closer, and
deemphasize things in the foreground that you don't want in the picture. Wide angles, in contrast, make distant
objects look as if they are farther away while emphasizing the foreground. If you have a field full of flowers,
like those in Figure 7.2, you'll want a wide-angle view.

Figure 7.2. To emphasize the foreground, use a wide-angle zoom setting.

Lens Accessories

I've already mentioned add-on telephoto and wide-angle lens converters. Another kind of lens accessory you
might want to consider is filters not the kind that pop up inside your image editing program, but the kind that
fit onto the front of your lens. Usually made of glass and mounted in a threaded metal ring, filters can be used
to provide a variety of scene corrections or special effects. Among them:

• Color correction filters. These filters have color casts of their own which compensate for changing
lighting conditions. They provide a warming effect that's helpful to brighten bleak snow scenes, or
cool the excessively warm colors of early dusk. Your digital camera's built-in automatic or manually
set white balance controls take care of most of these situations, but you might want the stronger
correction that an accessory filter can give you at times. In addition, some cameras have internal
settings that correspond to additional filtration in colors like red, blue, green, yellow, or orange.
• Gradient color filters. These provide an interesting special effect as they blend one color filter with
another. For example, a common version blends a warm orange color on one half of the filter with a
blue tone on the other. You can use them to give the sky portion of your image one tone, while
applying a second tone to the foreground. You've seen this effect in advertising photography; now
you can apply it yourself to get results like Figure 7.3.

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 205

206 Part II: Techniques Unlimited
Figure 7.3. Gradient filters can add two or more color effects to a single scene.

• Attenuating filters. These come in many varieties, including prism filters, star filters, and other filter
types that warp and transform your image, for effects like those shown in Figure 7.4.

Figure 7.4. Prism filters break up your image into interesting shapes.

206 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 207

If you're serious about filters, you're probably already familiar with the versatile Cokin system, created by
French professional photographer Jean Coquin. You'll find more information about the scores of different
Cokin filters at www.cokin.com.

Tripods

Tripods let you compose your photo carefully, or even, if you use your camera's self-timer, get into the picture
yourself. They let you shoot sharper pictures in low-light levels, particularly at night, and are useful for
panoramas, which I'll discuss shortly. You'll find more about tripods in Chapter 10, "Macro Photography."

Flash

You'll only need electronic flash for your scenic photographs under a limited number of conditions. One of
these is when you want to illuminate a subject in the foreground while still capturing a dramatic sunset in the
background. Or, you might want to "paint with light" (discussed in more detail in Chapter 8, "Architectural
Photography") to illuminate a large outdoor subject. You'll find more about flash in Chapter 5, "Action
Photography."
< Day Day Up >
< Day Day Up >

Landscapes
If you think landscapes aren't hard-wired into our thinking, the next time you print a photograph, check out
the name applied to the "wide" orientation in your printer's Setup dialog box. You may be printing an abstract
image, a photo of a football game, or even a group portrait, but the name applied to a picture or document
that's wider than it is tall is landscape. Scenics have been a favorite subject for artists throughout history, from
Da Vinci to Dali to Daguerre. In fact, you have to go back to the cave paintings of Lascaux to find artists who
overwhelmingly preferred things like cattle to Mother Nature.

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 207

208 Part II: Techniques Unlimited
Seven Simple Rules for Composing Your Landscapes

Landscape photos, in particular, are an opportunity for you to create thoughtful and interesting compositions.
Those mountains aren't going anywhere. You're free to move around a bit to get the best angle, and, unless
you're including people in your pictures for scale, you don't have to worry about an impatient subject. If you
can't pull all the elements of a scenic photograph together to create a pleasing composition, you're not trying
hard enough.

In one sense, good composition is the most important aspect of landscape photography. Certainly an action
photo or a portrait needs to be composed well for maximum effect, but if you've captured a once-in-a-lifetime
moment in an important sports contest, no one is going to complain because the football needed to be a little
more to the left. And, to be honest, do you really care about how well a close-up photo of Angelina Jolie or
Brad Pitt is composed? Yet, mountains are everywhere, seashores look pretty much alike the world around,
and nice-looking amber waves of grain are not especially distinctive. How you arrange the elements in
photographs of these subjects can make all the difference.

There are eight simple rules for composing photos effectively. I'll review each of them in this section. In brief,
they are as follows:

• Simplicity. This is the art of reducing your picture only to the elements that are needed to illustrate
your idea. By avoiding extraneous subject matter, you can eliminate confusion and draw attention to
the most important part of your picture.
• Choosing a center. Always have one main subject that captures the eye.
• The rule of thirds. Placing interesting objects at a position located about onethird from the top,
bottom, or either side of your picture makes your images more interesting than ones that place the
center of attention dead center (as most amateurs tend to do).
• Lines. Objects in your pictures can be arranged in straight or curving lines that lead the eye to the
center of interest, often in appealing ways.
• Balance. We enjoy looking at photographs that are evenly balanced with interesting objects on both
sides, rather than everything located on one side or another and nothing at all on the other side.
• Framing. In this sense, framing is not the boundaries of your picture but, rather, elements in a
photograph that tend to create a frame-within-the-frame to highlight the center of interest.
• Fusion/separation. When creating photographs, it's important to ensure that two unrelated objects
don't merge in a way you didn't intend, as in the classic example of the tree growing out of the top of
someone's head.
• Color and texture. The hues, contrasts between light and dark, and textures of an image can become
an important part of the composition, too. The eye can be attracted to bright colors, lulled by muted
tones, and excited by vivid contrasts.

Simplicity

Let nothing intrude into your photograph that doesn't belong there, and your viewer will automatically focus
on the information you intended to convey. In scenics, extraneous subject matter can include busy
backgrounds, utility wires, ugly buildings, or even stray people who interfere with the natural setting.

You probably won't have much choice in your background. The clouds, mountains, or ocean off in the
distance aren't going to change their colors or move to suit you. However, you can make a background work
for you by shooting on a day with a cloudless sky (if a plain-blue background suits your composition) or one
with abundant fluffy clouds, if that's what you're looking for.

Crop out unimportant objects by moving closer, stepping back, or using your zoom lens. Remember that a
wide-angle look emphasizes the foreground, adds sky area in outdoor pictures, and increases the feeling of
depth and space. Moving closer adds a feeling of intimacy while emphasizing the texture and details of your

208 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 209
subject. A step back might be a good move for a scenic photo; a step forward might be a good move for a
scenic that includes a person.

Remember that with a digital camera, careful cropping when you take the picture means less trimming in your
photo editor, and less resolution lost to unnecessary enlargement. Finally, when eliminating "unimportant"
aspects of a subject, make sure you truly don't need the portion you're cropping. For example, if you're
cropping part of a boulder, make sure the part that remains is recognizable as a boulder and not a lumpy glob
that viewers will waste time trying to identify. And cutting off the heads of mountains can be just as bad as
cutting off a person's head in a portrait!

Figure 7.5 is a photograph that could be considered too cluttered to be a scenic picture at all. It's actually a
good photograph when considered from another angle, but the houses, powerlines, and the distracting boat at
the left side of the photograph, takes it out of the scenic category. Figure 7.6 is a similar photo taken a few
minutes later, farther down the canal (you can see the original boat and barge under the bridge at the right side
of the picture). A simple change of position has simplified the photo and transformed it into a pleasing scenic.
The power lines are still showing, but they can be removed easily in Photoshop or another image editor.

Figure 7.5. Scenic photos generally aren't quite so populated with human-made clutter.

Figure 7.6. Simply moving a few yards down the canal yields a much better shot.

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 209

210 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Front and Center

Next, you should decide on a single center of interest, which, despite the name, needn't be in the center of
your photo. Nor does it need to be located up front. No matter where your center of interest is located, a
viewer's eye shouldn't have to wander through your picture trying to locate something to focus on. You can
have several centers of interest to add richness and encourage exploration of your image, but there should be
only one main center that immediately attracts the eye. Think of Da Vinci's Last Supper, and apply the
technique used in that masterpiece to your scenic photography. There are four groups of Apostles that each
form their own little tableaux, but the main focus is always on the gentleman seated at the center of the table.
The same is true of scenic photos. One huge mountain with some subsidiary crests makes a much better
starting point than a bunch of similarly sized peaks with no clear "winner."

The center of interest should be the most eye-catching object in the photograph; it may be the largest, the
brightest, or most unusual item within your frame. Shoot a picture of a beautiful waterfall, but with a pink
elephant in the picture, and the pachyderm is likely to get all of the attention. Replace the waterfall with some
spewing lava, and the elephant may become secondary. Gaudy colors, bright objects, large masses, and
unusual or unique subjects all fight for our attention, even if they are located in the background in a
presumably secondary position. Your desired center of attention should have one of these eye-catching
attributes, or, at least, shouldn't be competing with subject matter that does.

Avoid having more than one center of attention. You can certainly include other interesting things in your
photograph, but they should be subordinate to the main subject. A person can be posed in your scenic
photograph to provide scale, but if the person is dangling by a tree branch over a precipice, viewers may never
notice the Grand Canyon in the background.

In most cases, the center of interest should not be placed in the exact center of the photograph. Instead, place
it to one side of the center, as shown in Figure 7.7. We'll look at subject placement in a little more depth later
in this chapter.

210 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 211
Figure 7.7. The center of interest need not be in the center of the photograph.

Landscape Portraits

The orientation you select for your picture affects your composition in many different ways, whether your
landscape uses a landscape (horizontal) layout or a portrait (vertical) orientation. Beginners often shoot
everything with the camera held horizontally. If you shoot a tall building in that mode, you'll end up with a lot
of wasted image area at either side. Trees, tall mountains shot from the base, and images with tall creatures
(such as giraffes) all look best in vertical mode.

Recognize that many landscapes call for a horizontal orientation, and use that bias as a creative tool by
deliberately looking for scenic pictures that fit in the less-used vertical composition. Some photos even lend
themselves to a square format (in which case you'll probably shoot a horizontal picture and crop the sides).

Figures 7.8-7.10 illustrate the kind of subject matter that can be captured in all three modes. Figure 7.8 looks
best when composed horizontally, while Figure 7.9 is a natural vertical composition. Figure 7.10 fits naturally
into a square format. Even though squares can be somewhat static, the curve of the tree and its roots gives this
photo a more graceful look.

Figure 7.8. Some scenes look best in a horizontal format, even if they contain vertical lines like the trees in this
picture.

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 211

212 Part II: Techniques Unlimited
Figure 7.9. Other photos are obviously vertically oriented.

Figure 7.10. Take care when composing square pictures to avoid a static look. The tree in this picture adds
graceful movement to the shot.

Rule of Thirds

You'll see the idea of dividing your images into thirds referred to as the rule of thirds quite a bit, and this is
one case in which I'm not obsessive about avoiding hard-and-fast rules. It really is a good idea to arrange your
pictures using this guideline much of the time, and when you depart from it, it's a great idea to know exactly
why.

Earlier, I mentioned that placing subject matter off-center is usually a good idea. Things that are centered in
the frame tend to look fixed and static, while objects located to one side or the other imply movement,
because they have somewhere in the frame to go, so to speak.

212 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 213

The rule of thirds works like this: Use your imagination to divide your picture area with two horizontal lines
and two vertical lines, each placed one-third of the distance from the borders of the image, as shown in Figure
7.11. The intersections of these imaginary lines represent four different points where you might want to place
your center of interest. The point you choose depends on your subject matter and how you want it portrayed.
Secondary objects placed at any of the other three points will also be arranged in a pleasing way.

Figure 7.11. The rule of thirds is a good starting place for creating a pleasing composition.

Horizons, for example, are often best located at the upper third of the picture, unless you want to emphasize
the sky by having it occupy the entire upper two-thirds of the image. Tall subjects may look best if they are
assigned to the right or left thirds of a vertical composition. Figure 7.11 shows a scene arranged into thirds.
Notice how the horizon behind the chapel is roughly a third of the way up from the bottom, while the treetops
are a third of the way down from the top, and the chapel itself is at one of the intersections of the imaginary
lines.

One important thing to consider is that if your subject includes a person, an animal, a vehicle, or anything else
with a definable "front end," it should be arranged in a horizontal composition so that the front is facing into
the picture. If not, your viewer will wonder what your subject is looking at, or where the animal is going, and
may not give your intended subject the attention you intended. Add some extra space in front of potentially
fast-moving objects so it doesn't appear as if the thing is just about to dash from view.

Oddly enough, it's not important to include this extra space in vertical compositions for anything that doesn't
move. A tree can butt right up to the top of an image with no problems. We don't expect the object to be
moving, therefore we don't feel the need for a lot of space above it. If your scenic was taken at Cape Kennedy
and a booster rocket intrudes, it would be best positioned a bit lower in the frame.

Using Lines

Viewers find an image more enjoyable if there is an easy path for their eyes to follow to the center of interest.
Strong vertical lines lead the eye up and down through an image. Robust horizontal lines cast our eyes from
side to side. Repetitive lines form interesting patterns. Diagonal lines, like those shown in Figure 7.12,
conduct our gaze along a gentler path, and curved lines are the most pleasing of all. Lines in your photograph

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 213

214 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

can be obvious, such as fences or the horizon, or more subtle, like a skyline or the curve of a flamingo's neck.

Figure 7.12. The diagonal lines lead the eye from the ruins down to the sea, connecting the two.

As you compose your images, you'll want to look for natural lines in your subject matter and take advantage
of them. You can move around, change your viewpoint, or even relocate cooperative subjects somewhat to
create the lines that will enhance your photos.

Lines can be arranged into simple geometric shapes to create better compositions. Figure 7.13 shows an image
with a variety of lines. The strongest line is the curve of the road, which leads our gaze through the picture.
The road's broad swathe is crossed by the shadows of the trees. The vertical lines of the trees themselves lead
our eyes toward the top of the photo. This is the sort of picture that engages the viewer's attention, luring them
into spending more than a few seconds exploring everything it contains.

Figure 7.13. The curved lines of the road interact with the horizontal shadows and the vertical lines of the trees.

214 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 215

Balance

Balance is the arrangement of shapes, colors, brightness, and darkness so they complement each other, giving
the photograph an even, rather than lopsided, look. Balance can be equal, or symmetrical, with equivalent
subject matter on each side of the image, or asymmetrical, with a larger, brighter, or more colorful object on
one side balanced by a smaller, less bright, or less colorful object on the other.

Figure 7.14 shows an image at top that on first glance has a balance of sorts. The light tones of the castle
image at the far right are more or less offset by the darker foliage on the left side. However, because the castle
is clearly intended to be the center of interest for this photo, the more you look at it, the more you get the
feeling the picture is a bit lopsided.

Figure 7.14. Top: The large light and dark masses on the right and left sides of the picture don't really balance
each other as they should. Middle: Cropping less tightly provides a better balanced picture with converging lines
that draw our eyes to the castle. Bottom: Removing the tree branches improves the picture even further.

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 215

216 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

By taking a step back, we can include more of the road and wall leading to the castle, and a bit more of the
structure on the right side, as shown in the middle version. This cropping does several things. It balances the
picture, while moving the center of interest closer to one of the "golden" intersections defined by the rule of
thirds. The walls and road provide converging lines that attract our eye to the castle.

Even so, there's still something wrong with this picture. The tree branches at the right side aren't connected to
anything. They appear to be growing out of the side of the picture frame. We can crop most of them out and
improve the balance of the image even further, as you can see in the bottom version.

Framing

Framing is a technique of using objects in the foreground to create an imaginary picture frame around the
subject. A frame concentrates our gaze on the center of interest that it contains, plus adds a three-dimensional
feeling. A frame can also be used to give you additional information about the subject, such as its
surroundings or environment.

You'll need to use your creativity to look around to find areas that can be used to frame your subject.
Windows, doorways, trees, surrounding buildings, and arches are obvious frames. Figure 7.15 shows a classic
"environmental" frame, with the tree branches in the foreground framing the upper-half of the photo. A
different example can be seen in Figure 7.16, in which the walkway of a centuries-old covered bridge is used
to frame the river.

Figure 7.15. Trees are a classic prop used to construct frames for scenic photographs.

216 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 217

Figure 7.16. The walkway of the covered bridge frames the river.

Frames don't even have to be perfect or complete geometric shapes. Figure 7.17 shows how the bridge (above)
and the walkway (below) provide a perfect frame for the seagull. Generally, your frame should be in the
foreground, but with a bit of ingenuity you can get away with using a background object, such as the bridge,
as a framing device.

Figure 7.17. Frames can be subtle, such as the bridge and walkway that frame this seagull.

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 217

218 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Fusion/Separation

Our vision is three-dimensional, but photographs are inherently flat, even though we do our best to give them
a semblance of depth. So, while that tree didn't seem obtrusive to the eye, in your final picture, it looks like it's
growing out of the roof of that barn in your otherwise carefully composed scenic photograph. Or, you cut off
the top of part of an object, and now it appears to be attached directly to the top of the picture.

You always need to examine your subject through the viewfinder carefully to make sure you haven't fused
two objects that shouldn't be merged, and that you have provided a comfortable amount of separation between
them. When you encounter this problem, correct it by changing your viewpoint, moving your subject, or by
using selective focus to blur that objectionable background.

Figure 7.18 is a good example of an undesired fusion. The scene from the edge of this lake actually looked
interesting in real life, with the fallen tree extending out into the water towards the distant shore. (Take my
word on this.) Unfortunately, the slight telephoto lens setting I had to use to capture the image from my
vantage point compressed the near and distant subject matter together, making a big mess. You can't really tell
how far the fallen tree and the opposite shore are from each other, and the details blend together. A slightly
higher view would have been better, clearly putting the foreground tree into the foreground and opening up
some clear water between it and the far shore, but that viewpoint wasn't physically possible in this case.

Figure 7.18. Watch your compositions so that individual objects don't merge or fuse together.

218 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 219

Your best defense for side-stepping fusion problems of this sort is to be aware that it can happen, and to
recognize and avoid mergers as you compose your images.

Color and Texture

Color, texture, and contrasts are an important part of the composition in Figure 7.17. The warm late-afternoon
sunlight echoes the rich wood tones of the posts, like the one the seagull is resting on, and the posts
themselves provide a sharply contrasting element that attracts the eye and leads it through the picture in a
diagonal direction moving from the lower-left center to the upper right. There's further contrast in the blues of
the canal water, which has a soft texture.

When shooting in color, the hues in the photo are an important part of the composition. Texture and contrasts
in tones can be effective in both color and black-and-white photos.
< Day Day Up >
< Day Day Up >

Key Types of Scenics

This section will provide you with a little advice on how to shoot the most common type of scenic
photographs, including mountain scenery, sunsets, sea and water scenes, panoramas, and fireworks. All of
them are easy to picture, but there are a few tricks you'll want to pick up to get the best shots.

Mountains

Although I label this category "Mountains," this kind of scenic photography really encompasses any broad
expanses of nature unencumbered by large numbers of buildings. The same concepts apply whether you're in
Idaho or Iowa.

Your main decision is a choice of lens or zoom setting. A wide-angle setting makes distant objects appear to
be farther away, emphasizing the foreground of your photo. A longer telephoto setting brings far-away objects
like mountains closer, but compresses everything in the foreground. For Figure 7.19, I settled on a focal
length that's roughly in the middle, about 80mm, giving equal emphasis to the olive groves that dot the

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 219

220 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

foothills of this mountain range.

Figure 7.19. Choose your zoom setting to emphasize the foreground or background, or neither.

A useful tool for photographing distant objects is a skylight or haze filter, which filters out some of the blue
light that cloaks mountains and other objects located far from the camera. A haze filter was used to grab the
photo shown in Figure 7.20. If you compare it with Figure 7.19, you can see that the most distant peaks are a
bit more distinct.

Figure 7.20. A haze filter can cut through the blue mist that cloaks distant objects.

Mountain scenes lend themselves to panorama photographs, which I'll explain in a separate section.

Sunsets and Sunrises

Sunsets and sunrises are popular subjects because they're beautiful, colorful, and their images often look as if
a lot of thought went into them, even if you just point the camera and fire away. Some photographers

220 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 221
specialize in them. Although photographically they are almost identical, I prefer sunsets to sunrises for a
couple technical reasons. First, I am not usually awake in time to see a sunrise, although I sometimes catch
one when I go to bed late after an all-night session browsing the Internet. Second, at the latitude where I live,
for much of the year, it's a lot warmer at sundown than at sunrise, and I don't particularly like cold weather.
Finally, it's more difficult to scout out your location for a sunrise shot than it is for a sunset shot. Sunset
follows a period of lightness (called "daytime"). You can spend hours looking for just the right spot and use
the waning daylight to decide exactly where to stand to capture the sunset as the sun dips below the horizon.
Dawn, in sharp contrast, occurs after a really dark period, and you may have difficulty planning your shot in
the relatively short interval just before sunrise.

Here are some tips for shooting photos of sunsets (or sunrises):

• If your camera has an automatic white balance control that can be overridden, see if you have a
Sunset/Sunrise white balance setting as well as a Sunset/Sunrise programmed exposure mode. The
former will let you avoid having the desired warm tones of the sunset neutralized by the white balance
control, and the latter can allow you to get a correct exposure despite the backlighting provided by the
sun. With sunset photos, you generally want a dark, silhouette effect punctuated by the bright orb of
the sun.
• Don't stare at the sun, even through the viewfinder. I usually compose my sunset photos with the sun
slightly out of the frame, then recompose just before taking the photo.
• Avoid splitting your photo in half with the horizon in the middle. Your picture will be more
interesting if the horizon is about one-third up from the bottom (to emphasize the sky) or one-third
down from the top (to emphasize the foreground). Remember the rule of thirds.
• Sunsets don't have to be composed horizontally! Vertically oriented shots, like the one shown in
Figure 7.21, can be interesting. In that photo, I broke several "rules" by using vertical orientation for a
"landscape" photo, and didn't wait until the last moment to shoot. True sunset was actually about 30
minutes away when the picture was taken. I deliberately underexposed the photo to create a sunset
image.

Figure 7.21. Break some rules: shoot vertical sunset shots and don't wait until the sun reaches the
horizon.

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 221

222 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

• Filters such as star filters, gradients, or other add-ons can enhance your sunset pictures. Figure 7.21 is
actually a straight shot, with the star effect occurring naturally. However, if I'd used a star filter, I
could have picked up additional star-like reflections in the water and other highlights. Try it yourself.
• Take advantage of the sun's backlighting to get some good silhouettes, whether the silhouette is a tree
or two (as in my example), a church spire, or some other subject matter.
• If you have a person or other object in the near foreground that you don't want in silhouette, try a few
shots with your camera's flash turned on. The mixed lighting effect can be dramatic.
• Plan carefully and work fast. Once the sun starts to set, you might have only a few minutes to shoot
your pictures, so be ready, have your camera settings locked in, and take many pictures. If some prove
to be duds, you can always erase them.
• Make sure your lens is focused at infinity. Sunsets can fool the autofocus mechanisms of some
cameras. Use manual focus if you must.
• Exposures can be longer than you might have expected when the sun dips behind the trees or below
the horizon, so have a tripod handy.

Sea and Water Scenes

Whether you're at the ocean, by a lake, alongside a river, beneath a waterfall, or following the towpath of a
canal, water makes for some great scenic photography, not only for the beauty of the water itself, but for the
reflections and the excitement when the water is moving. Your images might take a languid approach, like
that of Figure 7.22, or mix in a bit of kinetic energy from the ocean or a roiling stream or river, like that
pictured in Figure 7.23.

Figure 7.22. Water scenes can be calm and cool. . .

Figure 7.23. . . .or water scenes can portray movement.

222 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 223

Here are a few tips for photographing water:

• Watch your exposures at the ocean. The bright sand can fool the exposure meter of your camera,
giving you underexposed pictures. Review your first few shots on the LCD and dial in some EV
corrections if necessary.
• Incorporate the reflections in the water into your photographs. Many of the scenic photos in this
chapter use water and reflections to good effect. Figure 7.24 is yet another one. The light bouncing off
the surface of the water has a special look and you'll find the reflections add interest to your image.

Figure 7.24. Use reflections to enhance your photograph of water.

• Use a tripod and long exposures to capture waterfalls and streams. The water will blur, giving you the
next best thing to laminar flow in a photograph. The tripod keeps the rest of the image rock solid and
sharp. You might have to use a neutral density filter to achieve a long enough exposure in daylight, so
streams and waterfalls in open shade are better than those in full sunlight.

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 223

224 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Tip from the Pros: Multi-Colors

One of my favorite water effects for film cameras involves long exposures and a special gadget
that's easy to make. I haven't tried this with a digital camera yet, but plan to do so for a future
book. You can get a head start with this tip. All you need is a tripod, a neutral density filter with
an 8X or 16X or more exposure factor, a stream or waterfall illuminated so you can make an
exposure of about a second with your camera's lowest ISO setting, and a tri-color filter gadget.
The "gadget," known to old-timers as the Harris Shutter, is a frame that fits in front of your lens
in lens-hood fashion and has a slot at the top or bottom. Take a strip of cardboard and place
pieces of red, green, and blue gelatin filter material (available from any camera store) in suitable
holes in the cardboard. Begin with the opaque portion of the cardboard covering the lens, as
shown in Figure 7.25. With the camera on the tripod, open the shutter and then drop the
cardboard so a time exposure is made consecutively through the red, green, and blue filters, until
the lens is blocked again by the upper opaque tab.

Figure 7.25. This gadget, called the Harris Shutter after its inventor, Kodak whiz Bob Harris, can
produce multicolored moving water effects

Stationary subject matter (everything but the moving water) will be portrayed normally by the
equal red, green, and blue exposures. However, because the water was moving, individual
rivulets will be exposed by a different filter, producing a remarkable rainbow effect. You can get
an image like the one shown in Figure 7.26.

Figure 7.26. The Harris Shutter provides effects like this one.

224 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 225

Panoramas

Panoramas are another cool effect that gives you wide-screen views of very broad subjects. There are several
ways to shoot panoramas. The simplest way is to simply crop the top and bottom of an ordinary photo so you
end up with a panoramic shot like the one extracted from the full-frame picture in Figure 7.27.

Figure 7.27. Crop a full-frame photo to produce a panorama.

You'll get even better results if you plan ahead and shoot your original image so that no important image
information appears in the upper and lower portions. By planning ahead of time, you can crop your image as
shown in Figure 7.28, and get a more natural-looking panorama.

Figure 7.28. Plan ahead for the most natural-looking cropped panorama photo.

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 225

226 Part II: Techniques Unlimited
Another way to shoot a panorama is to stitch together several individual photos. I'll show you some examples
of that kind of panorama in Chapter 9 when I demonstrate some travel photography tricks. Your digital
camera might have a panorama mode, like that found in several Pentax Optio models. The most common
mode doesn't actually shoot a panorama for you. You take the first picture and the camera shows you the edge
of that picture in the LCD viewfinder, so you can use the semi-transparent review version to line up your
second or third shot in the panorama series. Then, the individual pictures are stitched together using an image
editor. Photoshop CS 2.0 and Photoshop Elements have a panorama-stitching feature, but you can accomplish
the same thing with utilities like ACDSee (or an equivalent program for Macs).

When shooting panoramas, you might find it useful to use a tripod so you can smoothly pan from one shot to
the next overlapping picture. Strictly speaking, the pivot point should be under the center of the lens, rather
than the usual tripod socket location on the digital camera, but you should still be able to stitch together your
photos even if you don't take the picture series absolutely correctly from a technical standpoint.

Fireworks

Fireworks are fun to shoot, and it's easy to get spectacular results. Figures 7.29 and 7.30 show some fireworks
I grabbed last Fourth of July. My big complaint is that I didn't get to see the fireworks! I was so busy fiddling
with my digital camera and the tripod and trying to push the shutter release at exactly the right time that I
really saw only glimpses of the show, and only then through the viewfinder of my camera. You can do better
if you follow these tips:

• You must use a tripod. Fireworks exposures usually require a second or two to make, and nobody can
handhold a camera for that long. Set up the tripod and point the camera at the part of the sky where
you expect the fireworks to unfold, and be ready to trip the shutter.
• Watch as the skyrockets shoot up in the sky; you can usually time the start of the exposure for the
moment just before they reach the top of their arc. With the camera set on time exposure, trip the
shutter using a remove release (or a steady finger) and let the shutter remain open for all or part of the
burst. Usually an exposure of 1 to 4 seconds works.
• Review your shots and adjust your f-stop so you won't overexpose the image. Washed-out fireworks
are the pits. At ISO 100, you'll be working with an f-stop of about f/5.6 to f/11.
• Expect some noise in your photos. Most digital cameras produce noise during long exposures,
especially if you boost the ISO rating to 200 or 400.
• Take along a penlight so you can check your camera settings and make manual adjustments. It's going
to be dark!
• Try leaving your shutter open for several sets of displays. Cover the lens with your hand between
displays to capture several in one exposure.

Figure 7.29. Leave the shutter open for as long as four seconds to combine several bursts into one shot.

226 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 227

Figure 7.30. Be careful not to overexpose your fireworks scenes.

Tip from the Pros: Do it Yourself Noise Reduction

Newer cameras sometimes have noise-reduction features that combine a blank shot with an
actual exposure and then calculate the noise from the blank shot. You can do something similar
in Photoshop by taking a blank frame with the lens cap on at the same exposure you use for the
fireworks. Then combine this blank frame with an actual fireworks frame and merge the two
layers using the Difference mode.

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 227

228 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Snow Scenes

Photographing in snow is a lot like photographing at the beach: You have to watch out for glare and
overexposures. Otherwise, snow scenics can be captured much like other landscape-type photographs. There
are a few things to watch out for however. One of them is cold. Batteries of all types put out less juice in cold
temperatures, and those in your digital camera are no exception. Keep your camera warm if you want it to
perform as you expect.

Also, watch out for condensation on the camera, particularly on the lens, which can occur when you bring
your cold camera into a warmer, humid environment, even if only for a few moments. (Perhaps you're
ducking in and out of the shelter of a car between shots, as I often do in colder climes.) Then, when you go
back out in the cold, you've got a moist camera in your hands. If your camera uses an optical viewfinder
instead of an electronic viewfinder or SLR system, you may not notice water drops on your lens until it's too
late. Consider using a skylight filter that you can clean off with a soft cloth as necessary. These filters are
tougher than the glass of your lens and cheaper to replace if they get scratched.

Figure 7.31 shows a typical snowy scene. It took me a long time to get back into the swing of shooting winter
scenes. After living for a few years in Rochester, NY (which has nine months of winter and three months of
bad skiing), I moved elsewhere specifically to reduce my opportunities for photographing in snow. Now I've
grown to love them again.

Figure 7.31. Be careful to avoid underexposure under the bright conditions found in snow scenes.

< Day Day Up >

< Day Day Up >

Project for Individual Study: Infrared Photography

The special project for this chapter is one that can easily turn into a mania. If you have a digital camera that
can handle it, infrared (IR) photography can be a lot of fun. By photographing an image primarily using the
infrared light that bounces off your subject matter, you end up with eerie monochrome photographs featuring
white foliage and dark skies, like the image shown in Figure 7.32. Because everyday objects reflect infrared in
proportions that differ sharply than that of visible light, the tonal relationships are wildly unexpected.

228 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 229
Figure 7.32. Infrared photography produces weird black-and-white landscape photos.

Scenic photos lend themselves to the IR treatment for a number of reasons. People photographed by infrared
light often look pale and ghastly. Landscapes, on the other hand, take on an other-worldly look that's
fascinating. You'll need to do some work and buy some add-ons to get started with infrared photography, but
this section should get you started in the right direction.

What You Need

To shoot infrared photos, you need several things. One of them is a digital camera that can capture pictures by
infrared illumination, as well as a filter that blocks virtually all light except for near infrared (NIR)
illumination.

The sensors found in digital cameras generally are very sensitive to infrared light in the range of 700-1200
nanometers, which is a good thing if you want to take infrared pictures, and not so good if you don't want
infrared illumination to spoil your non-infrared photographs. Accordingly, many digital cameras now include
a filter or "hot mirror" that specifically blocks IR light from the sensor. Some enterprising souls have opened
their cameras and removed the filter so they could take IR photographs, replacing it with a piece of glass to
preserve the camera's autofocus capabilities.

Other cameras remove the filter for you. For example, Sony digital cameras with NightShot capabilities move
the IR filter when in NightShot mode, allowing the sensor to record both visible and IR light (this gives the
camera the ability to take pictures in lower illumination at night, which is the purpose of NightShot).
However, if you use Sony's NightShot capabilities in non-night situations, you may need to use a neutral
density filter to cut the light levels down to what the NightShot expects, as this feature generally operates only
with a wide-open lens and low shutter speeds. (After all, it thinks it's taking a picture at night!) Sony
deliberately disabled the NightShot feature for daylight photography for a simple reason: the bad publicity

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 229

230 Part II: Techniques Unlimited
that resulted when certain photographers discovered that clothing is relatively transparent to IR in bright
sunlight. (X-Ray Spex, indeed!)

This solution is complicated by the fact that many neutral density filters are transparent to IR light; they're not
much better than a piece of clear glass in this situation! You might have better luck using a green or blue filter
instead of an ND filter to cut down the light.

Many digital cameras have no IR-blocking filter or hot mirror at all, or have filters that block only part of the
IR light, so you might be able to take infrared photos with your camera without needing to dismantle it and
remove the IR filter manually. An easy way to check for IR capability is to photograph your television remote
control. Point the remote at your camera, depress a button on the remote, and take a picture. If your camera
can register IR light, a bright spot will appear on the photograph of the remote at the point where the IR light
is emitted.

You'll also need an IR filter to block the visible light from your sensor. Find a Wratten #87 filter to fit your
digital camera. You can also use a Wratten 87C, Hoya R72 (#87B), or try #88A and #89B filters. A simpatico
camera store may let you try out several filters to see which one works best with your camera. These filters
aren't necessarily cheap, easily costing $60 to $100, depending on the diameter. Some can be purchased for
less than $30, however.

Taking IR Photos

Once you're equipped, you have to learn to contend with the quirks and limitations of IR photography. These
include:

• Light loss. The IR filter blocks the visible illumination, leaving you with an unknown amount of
infrared light to expose by. Typically, you'll lose 5 to 7 f-stops, and will have to boost your exposure
by that much to compensate. A tripod and long exposures, even outdoors, may be in your future.
• Difficulty metering. Exposure systems are set up to work with visible illumination. The amount of IR
reflected by various subjects differs wildly, so two scenes that look similar visually can call for quite
different exposures under IR.
• Difficulty seeing. Because the visual light is eliminated, you'll be in a heap of trouble trying to view
an infrared scene through a digital SLR. The LCD view may be a little weird, too. If you have an
optical viewing system, you're all set.
• Focus problems. Infrared light doesn't focus at the same point as visible light, so your autofocus
system might or might not work properly. You may have to experiment to determine how to best
focus your camera for infrared photos. If you're shooting landscapes, setting the lens to the infinity
setting probably will work (even though infrared infinity is at a different point than visible light
infinity).
• Spotty images. Some removable lenses include an anti-IR coating that produces central bright spots in
IR images. A few Canon lenses fall into this category. Test your lens for this problem before blaming
the artifacts on your filter or sensor.
• Color mode. Even though your pictures will be, for the most part, black and white, or, rather,
monochrome (usually magenta tones or a color scheme described as "brick and cyan"), you still need
to use your camera's color photography mode.

You'll find lots more information on the Internet about digital infrared photography, including the latest
listings of which cameras do or do not work well in this mode. If you ever tire of conventional scenic
photography, trying out digital IR can respark your interest and give you a whole new viewpoint.
< Day Day Up >
< Day Day Up >

230 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 231

Next Up
The next chapter, on architectural photography, shares many aspects with this one. Both kinds of photography
depend on similar kinds of photographic techniques, and both may have scenic elements. A chief difference
between them is that architectural photos generally contain structures of some sort, and structures present
some challenges of their own. We'll look at those challenges next.
< Day Day Up >
< Day Day Up >

Chapter 8. Architectural Photography

Don't confuse architectural photography with Architectural Photography. The formal kind is a highly
specialized art with complex rules and guidelines and the intent of producing immaculate shots fit to grace the
covers of Architectural Digest or House Beautiful. Professional practitioners of the serious variety work for
clients that include architectural firms, city planners, housing developers, or designers. They work with
medium- or large-format cameras with sophisticated swings and tilts that can bring all the converging lines of
a typical building into their proper perspective. Although it's hard work, Architectural Photography is
rewarding.

The kind of architectural photography you and I might do can be equally rewarding, if a little less stress-filled
and requiring less in the way of specialized equipment. The digital camera you already have is easily capable
of capturing some great pictures of architecture if you learn the ropes and know a few tricks. That's what I'll
be providing you in this chapter.

As I mentioned in the last chapter, you can apply a lot of what you learn here to scenic and landscape
photographs that happen to include buildings of some sort, as well as to travel photographs (which I'll cover in
the next chapter). We're all one big happy photographic family when it comes to this trio of photographic
endeavors.
< Day Day Up >
< Day Day Up >

What You Need

The equipment used for architectural photography is similar to that required for scenic photography, with a
few differences. This section will explain the key requirements. There are a few optional add-ons you'll be
interested in, too.

Your Architectural Camera and Lens

Just as with scenic photos, architectural subjects lend themselves to large prints, so you'll want to pack as
many megapixels into your images as possible. Unless your photos are destined for web pages, a 3MP camera
is probably the minimum if you're working with an older camera, and you'll be better served with a newer 5-
to 8-megapixel model if you want to make large prints.

Some of the most dramatic architectural photos are taken at night, so you'll want a camera capable of long
time exposures without excessive noise. A time exposure setting, useful for the infamous "painting with light"
technique (described later) is another important capability.

However, the most important consideration of all is your lens. You'll need a wide-angle lens and, up to a
point, the wider the better. There are several reasons for needing a wide lens or zoom setting:

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 231

232 Part II: Techniques Unlimited
• For interior shots, you'll need a wide setting to capture most rooms or spaces. Unless you're shooting
inside a domed stadium, cathedral, or other large open space, you'll find yourself with your back to
the wall sooner or later. A wide-angle lens helps you picture more of a room in one image.
• Exterior photos often require a wide-angle setting for the same reason. The structure you're shooting
is surrounded by other buildings, and you can back up only so far. A wide-angle is required to grab an
image from the best (or only available) vantage point.
• Wide angles help you include foreground details, such as landscaping, that are frequently an
important part of an architectural shot.

Unfortunately, most non-SLR digital cameras don't provide much in the way of a wide-angle view. As I've
already described several times in this book, the main problem is that the sensors are so small and the true
focal length of the zoom lens is so short (frequently 7mm or shorter) that it's difficult to make a lens that's
much wider. (Once you dip below a 5mm focal length, diminishing returns make a lens with a 4mm, 3mm,
2mm, or 1mm focal length a little ridiculous.) The 35mm equivalent of your digital camera's widest setting
may be 37 to 39mm at worst, and no better than 28mm at best. Wide-angle attachments, like the one shown in
Chapter 7 can help a little, but, like all lens add-ons, they rob you of a little resolution while introducing
distortions and other image defects of their own.

As vendors create cameras with larger sensors, including so-called "full-frame" sensors measuring 24 x 36mm
(the same as the 35mm film frame), wider lenses will become more common to digicam users. A digital SLR
with a full-frame sensor can mount 24mm to 18mm true wide angles, as well as fish-eye effect lenses and
other width expanders. Other digital SLRs have slightly smaller sensors that produce the "crop factor" of 1.6X
to 1.3X (as well as other values), which has the effect of "multiplying" the focal length of wide-angle lenses
so they aren't really wide any more. The 4/3 (or Four-Thirds) system pioneered by Kodak and Olympus may
eventually provide more flexibility in lens choice for digital cameras, because the 4:3 aspect ratio can be used
to design cameras (like the latest Olympus models) from the ground up so that sensor and lenses work
together efficiently.

A lens with a wide f-stop is also desirable for nighttime and interior photos. Even if you want to use the
smallest f-stop possible to increase depth-of-field, there will be times when you want to shoot wide open in
very dim conditions. A "wide-open" setting of f2 is to be much preferred over one that's a paltry f3.5 to f4.8.

The final thing to watch out for is lens distortion. Some digital camera lenses produce lines that are slightly
curved when they are supposed to be straight. For most types of photography, you might not even notice this
distortion. Unfortunately, architectural design often depends on straight lines, even in structures that have
curves, and any warps introduced by your lens stick out like a sore thumb. Figure 8.1 shows an image of an
abandoned railway building taken with a lens that has, nominally, no distortion at all. Figure 8.2 displays
typical lens distortion effects, exaggerated so you can see them clearly. At left, the photo shows barrel
distortion (often found in wide-angle lenses), in which the straight lines are bowed outward toward the edges
of the photo. At right, you can see pincushioning (generally found in telephoto lenses), with lines that curve
inward toward the center.

Figure 8.1. This is a normal shot, with little or no distortion.

232 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 233

Figure 8.2. At left, the photo shows barrel distortion; at right, you can see the effects of pincushion distortion.

Unless you're photographing barrels or pincushions, neither condition is desirable. Your lens may have one of
these defects, although probably not dramatically, which would make it less than ideal for architectural
photography. Test your lens by photographing a grid (such as a piece of graph paper) and then looking to see
if the vertical and/or horizontal lines bow in or out. Andromeda makes a Photoshop-compatible plug-in called
LensDoc that not only can correct for both kinds of distortion, but has built-in corrections for the tested
distortion already found in some common Canon, Nikon, and Olympus digital camera lenses.

Photoshop CS 2.0 has a new Lens Correction filter that also can fix both types of distortion, plus has features
for fixing color fringing (chromatic aberration), as well as vignetting (darkening in the corners). Figure 8.3
shows an image with a slight amount of barrel distortion, and a version corrected by the Photoshop filter can

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 233

234 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

be seen in Figure 8.4.

Figure 8.3. Slight barrel distortion caused by a wide-angle lens can be fixed in the Photoshop Lens Correction
filter.

[View full size image]

Figure 8.4. The corrected version looks like this.

[View full size image]

234 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 235
Working with Tripods

A tripod is helpful for many kinds of architectural photographs. Certainly, indoor photos will often be taken
using long exposures under the natural lighting present in the room or space, so a tripod is essential for
holding the camera steady. Outdoors, a tripod makes a steady base for the camera so you can compose your
shot carefully, and is also useful for making panoramic exposures. If you photograph a building at night,
you'll want a tripod to hold the camera for exposures that can take a second or two. The same kind of tripod
you use for scenic photography, sports, or other imaging can be used for architectural work.
< Day Day Up >
< Day Day Up >

Solving Architectural Photography Problems

I'm not going to run through different types of architectural photography in this chapter because, for the
non-professional shooter, there isn't a lot of difference between them. Taking construction progress photos,
real-estate listing pictures, or shots intended for architectural firms all share a surprising number of
characteristics when you examine their requirements closely.

What does differ are the problems you'll encounter. In fact, architectural photography is challenging precisely
because each photograph you take is likely to involve several classical problems that are tricky to overcome
the first time you encounter them. This section discusses some of the most common situations you're likely to
run into, and offers advice on how to handle them.

Getting Permission

Your first challenge might be to discover whether you're allowed to shoot a picture of a particular subject in
the first place. The good news is that most of the time you don't need permission to photograph the outside of
a building or structure, especially those edifices that, on some level, exist expressly as a photographic
opportunity. So, you don't have to ask if you can photograph the Pyramids of Egypt, the Eiffel Tower, or the
Chrysler Building in New York City. The Pyramids are historical monuments; la Tour Eiffel has come to
symbolize The City of Lights (and all of France); and the architecture of the Chrysler Building was
deliberately designed to call attention to the success of the automotive company.

Groups of buildings, such as city skylines like the one shown in Figure 8.5, require no permission. Nor do you
usually need permission to photograph ordinary office buildings or even private homes, as long as they are on
what is called "permanent public display" and can be photographed from public places. If you have to make a
photograph while standing on private property, you may need the permission of the property owner. Interior
photos of non-public buildings may require permission, as well. Shooting photographs inside public buildings
can be restricted, or there may be some limitations on whether you can use a tripod or electronic flash.

Figure 8.5. City skylines can be photographed and used any way you want.

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 235

236 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Museums may limit flash photography. Towns may prohibit use of tripods in the public buildings or parks.
Security forces at many manufacturing plants will offer to take custody of your cameras while you're on site.
Secure facilities such as federal buildings, military installations, financial institutions, or airports may have
guards who will automatically be suspicious of anyone attempting to take pictures. I was innocently taking
family photographs of my kids at Heathrow Airport in London awhile back, when I was approached by a
British policeman who informed me in the most apologetic way that what I was doing was prohibited. I'm
glad I didn't try to whip out a tripod and set up for a more formal shot!

Use of the photographs you create is another matter entirely. Private and editorial use, as in books like this
one, generally requires no special permission. However, if you want to use a photograph of someone's home
in an advertisement or other marketing application, you'll want to get the owner's permission.

Choosing Your Shot

Like scenic photos, architectural photographs require a bit of planning so you'll be standing in the right spot,
with the right lighting, at the right time. If you're just passing through, you might want to walk around the site
and choose the best location on the spot. If you're aiming for a more formal image, you might scout the area,
take a few test shots, and then come back at a time you select. For example, a building in a busy city might be
best photographed on a Sunday morning when automobile and foot traffic is light. A Spanish castle might
look best at sunset, from a particular angle.

Explore all the angles, try to visualize the lighting at different times of day, and look for the best location for
your picture. Decide whether you want an overall view, or would prefer to capture just one façade. Do you
want to emphasize the lines of the building, or the texture of its components? Your ruminations may reward
you with an unusual photograph of a familiar architectural landmark. In the next chapter, you'll see a photo I
took at a national monument in Spain. I've seen hundreds of different photographs of the overall scene at the
Valle de los Caidos (Valley of the Fallen), but not one from the angle I chose.

Use light and shade to give the structure a three-dimensional look, as in Figure 8.6, which shows a classic '50s
style drive-in sign. Avoid long lenses, which compress all the details together and produce a decidedly 2D
appearance.

236 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 237
Figure 8.6. Light and shade add a third dimension to photographs.

Perspective Control

Most non-architectural photographs are taken head-on, with the camera held level and pointed directly at the
subject. The back of the camera is roughly parallel to the plane of the subject. The lines of the subject itself
are generally at right angles or parallel to the ground. So, key elements of the subject, top to bottom, and side
to side, are roughly the same distance from the camera's digital sensor. This perspective gives you an
undistorted viewpoint.

The problems start as soon as you tilt the camera up or down to photograph a tall building or other vertical
structure. Tilting the camera lets you take in the top of the structure, but the subject appears to be falling back,
as you can see in Figure 8.7. (The same thing happens when you angle the camera to either side to grab a
picture of a receding object, such as a stone wall, but the results aren't as apparent or, usually, as
objectionable.)

Figure 8.7. Tilting the camera to take in the top of a structure causes the subject to appear to be falling
backwards.

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 237

238 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

The most obvious solution to step backwards far enough to take the picture with a longer lens or zoom setting
while keeping the camera level, isn't always available. You may find yourself with your back up against an
adjacent building, or standing on the edge of a cliff. The cathedral shown in Figure 8.7 happens to face a large
plaza, and it is possible to back up 10 or 20 yards and take the picture from a more distant vantage point.
Unfortunately, decorative trees planted in the plaza intervene, obstructing the view. You'll find many natural
obstacles of this sort, making your architectural photography more complicated.

Switch to a wide-angle setting and you'll get more of your subject in the frame, but the top of the structure
probably still won't be in view, as you can see in Figure 8.8. You can see from the illustration that the back of
the camera is parallel to the plane of the monument. There's no distortion, but both the top and bottom of the
monument are clipped off.

Figure 8.8. When the camera back is parallel to the plane of the subject, the top and bottom of the monument are
clipped off.

238 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 239

If you then tilt the camera to include the entire subject, you get the distorted photo shown in Figure 8.9. As in
Figure 8.7, the subject appears to be falling back, and the base appears proportionately larger than the top,
because it's somewhat closer to the camera. You can see from the illustration that the camera back/sensor and
subject are no longer parallel.

Figure 8.9. When the camera is tilted to take in the top of the monument, a distorted view results.

The traditional workaround to this dilemma is one that's generally available only to those who do a great deal
of architectural photography. The solution for 35mm photographers is to use something called a perspective

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 239

240 Part II: Techniques Unlimited
control lens, an expensive accessory which lets you raise and lower the view of the lens (or move it from side
to side; perspective control can involve wide subjects as well as tall) while keeping the camera back in the
same plane as your subject. I happen to own one of these quirky lenses and haven't found it particularly
useful. The amount of raising and lowering that can be applied isn't really enough for most situations.

A more sophisticated (and expensive) solution requires a professional camera called a view camera, a device
that uses 4 x 5 inch (or larger) film, and has lens and film holders that can be adjusted to any desired
combination of angles. Such cameras are capable of compensating for any reasonable amount of perspective
distortion, but their use requires training and practice. Moreover, those who can't afford such gadgets, or who
own digital cameras without interchangeable lenses, appear to be left out in the cold.

Fortunately, there are several solutions available. One can be applied on-site, if you're very, very lucky. Look
around and locate a viewpoint that's about half the height of the structure you want to photograph. It might be
a neighboring building or a bluff overlooking the site, or some other elevation. Ideally, there should be no
trees or other undesirable subject matter to interfere with your shot. Then, shoot the picture from that position,
using the widest lens setting you have available. You should be able to keep the back of the camera parallel
with the structure, and both the top and base of the building will be roughly the same distance away from the
camera. You'll get a much more natural-looking picture.

Another solution is hidden in your digital darkroom. You can use Photoshop to make some reasonable
adjustments to the perspective of an image. Often, the manipulations are enough to fully or partially correct
for perspective distortion. Photoshop's built-in tools, such as the Lens Correction filter are enough, but there
are some specialized plug-ins, such as Andromeda's Perspective filter, shown in Figure 8.10, which some find
a little easier to use.

Figure 8.10. Andromeda's Perspective plug-in can help you correct perspective distortion.

[View full size image]

However, in the long run I think you'll be happier if you take the time to learn to use Photoshop's more
sophisticated Lens Correction filter. Let me take you through a recent project I worked on. I actually applied

240 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 241
many different Photoshop tools to this image, and perspective correction was only one of them. I'll show you
some of the key steps in the process so you can note the dramatic difference.

This picture shows the kind of problems you can encounter. I spotted a rural church while driving down a
country road, but discovered that the best, least-distorted viewpoint was from a position at the edge of the
street. Unfortunately, utility poles and power lines intruded on the picture. When I got closer so the offending
wires were behind me, I was actually too close to take a photo with the 28mm (equivalent) lens I had with me.
Even if I tilted the camera back, I couldn't get the whole structure in a single photo.

So, I decided to take a shot to record the site, and then come back. My grab shot is shown in Figure 8.11. At
that distance, I still had to tilt the camera up a little, so the picture was a bit distorted (as well as tilted).

Figure 8.11. This shot was taken simply to record the place and time in case I wanted to come back and
photograph this church properly.

Back at my computer, I discovered I really liked the lighting. The photo was taken at dusk and the church was
illuminated by low lighting from the horizon, and off to the left. I decided to play around a little. I used
Photoshop's Clone Stamp and Healing Brush to remove the ugly wires that crisscrossed the building, no small
task on its own. Then, I put some clouds in the sky and rotated the image so the church was more or less
upright in the frame. I cropped tightly to create the version you see in Figure 8.12.

Figure 8.12. After a bit of Photoshop manipulation, the image has lost its wires and gained a cloudy
background but still appears to tilt.

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 241

242 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Unfortunately, the converging lines gave the image that "falling back" appearance. So, I used Photoshop's
Lens Correction filter to straighten out the vertical lines, as you can see in Figure 8.13. I was able to visually
correct most of the tilt, using the vertical perspective slider at the lower right corner of the dialog box. The
corrected image, shown in Figure 8.14, looks much less "tilty" and a bit more realistic. You can see in Figure
8.15 how closely the vertical and horizontal guidelines conform to the actual lines of the corrected church.

Figure 8.13. Photoshop's Lens Correction filter can correct the bad tilt.

[View full size image]

242 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 243
Figure 8.14. The final image looks much more realistic.

Figure 8.15. You can see how the guidelines correspond more closely to the actual lines of the structure.

Contending with Distracting Elements

I was able to photograph the rural church by getting a little closer to the structure and correcting the inevitable
perspective distortion in Photoshop. In other cases, you won't be able to get close enough, because the
distracting elements themselves abut your subject or are part of it. Figure 8.16 illustrates the problems you can
run into.

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 243

244 Part II: Techniques Unlimited
Figure 8.16. Air conditioners, shadows, an ugly sign, and power lines are only a few of the distracting elements in
this photo.

I wanted to photograph the school building for publication in its yearbook. Unfortunately, there were a lot of
distracting elements, including two trees smack in front of the building, an ugly sign, some fencing, a plethora
of utility lines, and even unsightly air conditioners perched in the windows. If you look closely at the original
photo, you'll see a cola can on the lawn, shadows of trees, utility poles, and even the photographer himself
intruding on the picture. This is one of those cases when there's not a lot you can do onsite, and you must rely
on your image editor to repair the damage.

Here's what I did to capture the final image:

• First, I carefully chose the day and time for the photograph to minimize potential problems. I waited
until early Fall, when the two trees in front of the school had already shed their leaves, yet there was
plenty of foliage on the other trees in the picture. I had the lawn raked and mowed so no trace of the
leaves remained. Then, I selected a late afternoon time when the shadows on the building itself would
be flattering and dramatic.
• I took the photograph shown in Figure 8.17, ignoring the shadows cast on the lawn. I knew I would be
fixing them later in Photoshop. Note that because of the distance I was able to stand from the school,
there is very little perspective distortion.

Figure 8.17. Crop out most of the distracting subject matter.

244 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 245

• In my image editor, I cropped most of the distracting subject matter out of the photograph, as you can
see in Figure 8.17.
• I copied sections from one part of the picture and pasted them over other parts that I didn't want. This
surgery included putting a new window over the most distracting air conditioner at the upper left of
the photo and copying part of the left end of the building to eliminate the fence and storage shed.
• Using the Clone/Rubber Stamp tool, I erased shadows, the ugly sign, and many of the utility lines
extending to the building. The finished photo is shown in Figure 8.18.

Figure 8.18. The finished photo looks a lot cleaner and more attractive.

If you want to learn more about mending and enhancing photos using Photoshop, I recommend my book
Digital Retouching and Compositing: Photographers' Guide, published by Thomson Course Technology. It's
full of projects like this one, with easy solutions to many digital photography problems.

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 245

246 Part II: Techniques Unlimited
Solving Interior Lighting Problems

Shooting indoors is one of the most difficult kinds of architectural photography you can face. Unless the
interior is huge, your widest wide-angle setting may not provide enough of a view, and there certainly is no
way you can back off further (although I've sometimes resorted to stepping outside and shooting through an
open window). In addition, the lighting is likely to be problematic, presenting one or more of the following
predicaments:

• Insufficient light. The illumination is so dim you're forced to make a long exposure with the camera
mounted on a tripod.
• Uneven illumination. The light may be strong in one area of the interior and dim in another, making it
difficult to evenly expose the entire image.
• Harsh illumination. Glaring lighting can give an image excessive contrast.
• Mixed illumination. You may have daylight streaming in the windows, mixing its blue light with the
orangish incandescent illumination of the room.
• Off-color illumination. The light in the interior may be distributed evenly, diffuse and pleasant and
entirely the wrong color, thanks to fluorescent lighting or, worse, colored illumination. Your digital
camera's white-balance controls might or might not be able to correct for this problem.

Insufficient illumination can sometimes be countered by using a tripod-mounted camera and a long exposure.
If the light is evenly distributed and otherwise pleasing, a longer exposure may do the trick, as long as your
camera isn't subject to excessive noise during long time exposures (or, if it is, you can correct the noise in
your camera or image editor). Sometimes using a lower ISO setting helps reduce noise, although at the cost of
even longer exposures. Many public buildings don't allow tripods, but you might be able to get special
permission to shoot at a certain time.

Uneven and harsh illumination can be fixed by additional lighting, softening existing light, or, perhaps by
using reflectors to spread the illumination around. Figure 8.19 shows the interior of the world's most
successful unknown digital photography author's office, illuminated entirely by the light from a pair of
windows. I softened the light by closing the blinds, used a couple large white reflectors at the camera position
to spread a little light to the foreground, then decided to allow the windows themselves to become
overexposed. The only reason I was able to get back far enough (this office measures only 24 x 16 feet) was
that I stood in the next room and shot through the open doorway.

Figure 8.19. The windows that provide the illumination were allowed to be overexposed so that detail could be
preserved in the rest of the photograph.

246 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 247
If you encounter mixed illumination and don't want to use it as a special effect, your best bet is to settle on one
source or another and stick with that. If you want to use the blue daylight coming through a window, you'll
have to dim the room's incandescent illumination and, perhaps, substitute soft, diffuse electronic flash (say,
bounced off a piece of white cardboard). Or, cut the room lights entirely and use reflectors, as was done for
the photograph in Figure 8.20.

Figure 8.20. Solve mixed lighting problems by eliminating one of the light sources. In this case, window
illumination was used instead of the room's incandescent lighting.

This room in a converted castle tower in Villalba, Spain, had walls that were five feet thick. The light
streaming in from the open window was used to illuminate the whole room. I let the furniture and other
foreground details go dark in order to preserve the Medieval mood of this photograph.

Tip from the Pros: Custom White Balance

Off-color illumination is best fixed by using your camera's custom white-balance controls. Many
digital cameras have a custom setting. All you need to do is point the camera at something that
should appear to be white and create the custom setting from that. You'll find that most of the
time this will fix off-color lighting conditions. Some specific kinds of fluorescent lights can be
corrected using a fluorescent filter (such as an FL-D), available from your photo retailer. Another
remedy is to include a neutral gray card in the shot (or a similar one) and use that to make color
corrections in Photoshop.

At times, it's better not to fool around with the lighting at all and let the existing lighting set a mood, as is the
case with Figure 8.21. The picture was exposed for the medium shadows, and the arches and furniture given
over to a little washing out to provide a glowing, sunlit look to the image.

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 247

248 Part II: Techniques Unlimited
Figure 8.21. Sometimes it's best to set the mood using the existing lighting, with no extra lighting or
modifications.

Weather or Not

Weather can be your friend or foe, depending on the situation and the kind of photograph you're trying to take.
For example, a blanket of snow, like the one shown in Figure 8.22, can disguise many faults, such as an
unkempt lawn, or roof in need of repair (both of which apply to this particular home). A picture like this can
grace a holiday card or be used as an illustration for a real estate ad.

Figure 8.22. Snowy weather needn't deter you from photographing architecture. The snow can add to your
composition.

248 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 249

When shooting in snow, make sure you use your camera's snow/beach exposure setting to avoid seriously
underexposing the picture. Or, use your manual spot metering exposure option to expose for important
shadow detail, like the front of the home in Figure 8.22. Because nobody expects to see much detail in snow
anyway, in this case it was okay to overexpose the snow in the foreground in order to keep the detail in the
home.

Rainy weather with a dull, lifeless sky can kill a photograph unless you figure a way to incorporate slick
streets and reflections into the picture. You also might have problems setting up and taking a photograph in
inclement weather. That doesn't mean, of course, that you need perfect weather for your photos. Bright,
mid-day sunlight is often too harsh, so I often opt for late afternoon or early evenings. Slight overcast can
soften the light and provide more even illumination, too.

If you must shoot at mid-day, try to make those shadows work for you. In Figure 8.23, the dramatic shadows
accentuate the shape of the lighthouse and help reinforce the strong, vibrant colors of the photo (accentuated
by slightly underexposing everything except the white of the lighthouse itself).

Figure 8.23. Strong shadows can help your picture if you make them part of the composition.

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 249

250 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

At times, your best bet for coping with changing weather conditions is simply to come back another time. On
your next visit, the weather might be better; there may be clouds in the sky, and the foliage may even be a bit
more attractive. The next two pictures show the same barn photographed on different days at different times. I
like both pictures, but there are some significant differences between them.

Figure 8.24 shows the barn nestled among the trees that surround it. The trees serve to frame the structure, and
their rich colors complement the weathered siding of the barn. Because this shot was taken early in the season
(notice the logs piled next to the barn that aren't there in the next photo), the foliage is an exciting mixture of
greens, yellows, oranges, and reds. The sky also shows some wisps of clouds. Figure 8.25 was taken from a
slightly different angle and focuses on the barn itself. It was taken later in the Fall, when the leaves had fully
changed their colors. The colors are brilliant, and it makes a post-card perfect shot. You might prefer this one,
or the other shot, but it's exciting to have two to choose from.

Figure 8.24. This version shows the barn nestled among the trees that surround it. Taken earlier in the season,
the leaves haven't completely changed their colors.

250 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 251
Figure 8.25. This photo emphasizes the barn. The trees have changed colors, and some leaves have already
fallen on the ground.

Humor and Drama

Because architectural photographs concentrate on static buildings and other structures, you might find that a
little humor or drama can improve the quality of your photograph. Look for some incongruous element, such
as a street sign that makes an unintentionally ironic statement about the building or a juxtaposition of several
shapes that cause an unusual arrangement.

Figure 8.26 provides a little humor and perhaps some social commentary, as two clusters of birds white
seagulls and dark gray pigeons all cluster for warmth on the roof of a building during a slight winter thaw.
The unexpected sight of dozens of avian refugees on the roof, all lined up by species, gives a lighter touch to
the photograph.

Figure 8.26. A little humor can brighten a mundane photograph.

More dramatic is Figure 8.27, which uses the vivid colors of a sunset to add some interest to a mundane shot

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 251

252 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

of some suburban backyards. Many sunsets are worthy of being photographic subjects in their own right (as
you'll recall from the last chapter), but you can also use them to enhance other subject matter.

Figure 8.27. A little drama doesn't hurt, either.

Documentation

Construction photography is one type of architectural imaging that presents a special problem. You not only
need to find the best angle (or angles) to shoot your subject matter, you need to be able to use that position
repeatedly, at intervals ranging from a few days to a few weeks. If you want to document the construction of a
building, you'll need to do your planning up front. You'll have to find a position that will remain accessible
throughout the construction and mark it so you can set up at that spot in the future. Another structure that isn't
going anywhere is a good choice, particularly if you can get permission to mark the position with tape or
paint. Set up your tripod, mark the position of each leg, adjust the height of the tripod post, and record the
angle of the camera. Note the zoom position you used, too. Then, when you return, you can take another photo
from virtually the same position.

Perhaps your goal is not to document the entire construction process. When I built the addition that became
my office, the construction crew got a late start in October and hadn't finished when an early Winter hit, so
they planned to hold off finishing the work until Spring. I took the picture shown in Figure 8.28 to document
what needed to be done (which included painting of the deck railings). Then, when the structure was finished,
I took additional photos that showed places that had been missed, such as the painting that needed done above
the steps in Figure 8.29. Because I had everything photographed, it was easy to show the contractor what was
required.

Figure 8.28. Document your construction project to show what needs to be done.

252 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 253

Figure 8.29. Take a photo of the finished project to demonstrate that it's been completed satisfactorily.

Your construction photographs can come in handy for insurance purposes, too. I cobbled together the
playground shown in Figure 8.30 without using any plans or formal designs, so when one of the trees in the
background fell during a windstorm and reduced it to kindling and cracked plastic, the picture came in handy
in helping the insurance company come up with an estimate of the replacement cost. If disaster strikes, you
might be glad you went around the interior and exterior of your home documenting each room and part of the
structure.

Figure 8.30. This construction photo came in handy when the playground was destroyed by a falling tree.

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 253

254 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

< Day Day Up >

< Day Day Up >

Project for Individual Study: Painting with Light

I think you'll find this project a lot of fun, because there are lots of different effects you can achieve. Painting
with light is just that: using a light source to daub illumination over a dark subject during a time exposure.
You can use this technique to provide good lighting for architectural subjects that are too large or too dark
even for a long exposure with your camera mounted on a tripod.

Here's a quick description of how to paint with light:

1. Choose a subject that has insufficient illumination, or which is illuminated unevenly. If possible,
select an environment that has few, if any, strong lights pointed directly at the camera. External
security lights on the building, for example, should be doused if they're pointing toward the lens.
Some light sources, such as city lights in the background, won't hurt anything and may even add
interest. For the photo shown in Figure 8.31, I didn't have any choice; the lights illuminating the
county courthouse weren't under my control. My main problem was that the lights illuminated only
the middle portion of the building. The two ends were rather dimly lit. It helped that there was no
breeze, too, so the flags in the photo weren't blurred during the long exposure.

Figure 8.31. Painting with light can evenly illuminate a photo that would otherwise be murky in spots.

254 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 255

2. I mounted my camera on a tripod and composed the photograph.

3. After some tests, I set the aperture of the lens so it was appropriate for a two-minute time exposure.
Make sure your camera has this capability! In my case, the maximum preset time exposure my
camera allows is 30 seconds, so I had to use the camera's infrared remote control, which allows
clicking once to open the shutter, which then remains open until you click the remote control a second
time. (This is called a "bulb" exposure in photo parlance.) You may have to experiment with the right
f-stop, but you'll want a fairly long exposure in order to give you time to do your painting. Ten to 20
seconds to a minute or two is the exposure to shoot for. I used two minutes. Setting your camera to a
lower ISO rating (ISO 64 to 100) will let you use longer exposures but, of course, will reduce the
amount of exposure from your external flash units.
4. When everything was set, I started the time exposure.
5. Then, I had an assistant move into the scene. Because the light from the building's main illumination
was relatively bright, my helper had to move quickly and keep moving. Otherwise, his body would
have been imaged in the photo just from the available light. You'll find that with a two-minute time
exposure, a rapidly moving person won't register at all as long as you keep spill light from your
electronic flash from hitting the person.
6. Keeping the photo "painter's" body between the camera and external electronic flash, I had the
assistant trip the flash to expose the left part of the building for several flashes, then race over to the
other side to add another flash to the right side. If you try this, move around and expose other parts
with additional flash exposures. Because your camera's lens is open, it will register each of these
exposures.

Tip from the Pros: Handling Mixed Colors

Because part of the exposure was made from the existing illumination, which is
considerably warmer in color than the illumination from the electronic flash, I had to use
a special orange filter over the flash head. You can buy these ready-made for some
electronic flash units, or you can make one of your own using orange filter material. If
you can find a filter equivalent to a Wratten #85B filter, you're all set. If you can reduce
the ambient illumination so it doesn't contribute to the exposure at all, you won't need the
orange filter. Or, you can even go for an interesting mixed-light effect with both the
bluish flash and orange-tinted incandescent lighting in the same image.

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 255

256 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

7. When the painting is finished, I closed the shutter, ending the time exposure.
8. Check your results on your camera's LCD screen and repeat the process, making appropriate changes
to improve your photo. You might want to use a longer exposure, more flashes, or work harder to
keep yourself from showing up in the picture.

There are many variations on this theme. Here are a few to play with:

• Alternate flashes using multi-colored gels over your unit, painting your building with a rainbow of
different colored lights.
• Paint only part of the structure, allowing the rest to remain in shadow. This is a good way of
disguising the less-photogenic portions of a building.
• Instead of an electronic flash pointed away from the camera, use a flashlight pointed towards the
camera, and "write" with it. Small beams, such as those provided by penlights, work best. Trace the
outline of a portion of the building, draw a human figure, or create any other kind of light writing you
want.
< Day Day Up >
< Day Day Up >

Next Up
The next chapter will explore travel photography, which combines some of the aspects of landscape and
architectural photography, while including some special challenges of its own.
< Day Day Up >
< Day Day Up >

Chapter 9. Travel Photography

Travel photography is a great way to practice your digital photography skills. Vacations are a good time to
investigate this type of photography. You're relaxed. You're out to have fun. You definitely have your digital
camera along with you to document the sights and sites that you've paid thousands of dollars to visit. When
you get home, all you'll have will be the souvenirs you picked up, your memories, and the photographs that
help you preserve those memories.

I've already noted that travel photography is an interesting blend of landscape and architectural photography,
with some portraiture mixed in if you choose to picture people along with places. These opportunities can
alternate in different ways, too. Even if you're on a whirlwind 14-city tour of Europe, you'll find that between
each of those cities are scenes created by Mother Nature that deserve your artistic attention. If you can, take
the time to stop and photograph them. Then, when you reach the next city, be prepared to photograph the
monuments, towers, cathedrals, and other interesting aspects of urban life. This chapter provides a broad
overview of some of the things to keep in mind as you venture forth on your traveling photo expedition. This
is a short chapter, because most of what you need to know was covered in Chapters 7 and 8.
< Day Day Up >
< Day Day Up >

What You Need

Travel photography is no more equipment- or gadget-intensive than scenic or architectural photography. If
anything, it is less so, because of the need to travel light. Fortunately, you can take some great pictures with
only basic equipment.

256 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 257

The photo shown in Figure 9.1 required only a normal lens, careful exposure, and a bit of luck to get such a
beautiful cloud-filled sky. There are a few extras to consider, and I'll describe them in the next section.

Figure 9.1. You can get great travel photos using basic digital equipment.

Keeping It Light

Experienced travelers will tell you one thing: Travel light, because once you leave home, everything you take
will have to be carried with you everywhere you go. You'll want to take everything you absolutely need, but
nothing else. I didn't always believe this, especially when venturing some place I'd never been before, eager to
capture every possible detail with every possible piece of equipment I owned. After half a dozen trips to
Europe, I actually was daring enough to go carrying a single camera body with just a 35mm f2 and 105mm
f2.5 lens. Those two optics and some fast footwork let me take just about every photo I wanted to take.
Thinking back, I've very glad that my camera didn't malfunction during the trip, because that would have
really put a damper on my photography.

As it happens, I'm planning another trip to Europe to take place two months after I finish writing this book.
This time, I'm also taking just two lenses, but those lenses happen to be a 12mm-24mm wide-angle zoom and
a 28mm-200mm zoom. I may weaken and pack along a compact 50mm f1.8 lens, too, but so far I'm planning
on just a pair of zooms. The lenses will be mounted on a pair of digital SLR cameras, which will mean I'll be
ready for just about any shot at any time, and won't need to remove a lens and invite dust onto my sensors
during the trip.

Of course, I'll need to take a battery charger, and am planning on getting a supercompact carbon fiber tripod to
replace my sturdy studio tripod during the trip. Then there are memory cards, maybe a remote control to
trigger the camera or self-timer... Perhaps I need a gradient filter like the one used for Figure 9.2. Am I really
traveling light?

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 257

258 Part II: Techniques Unlimited
Figure 9.2. Even the filters you take, such as the gradient filter used here, should be carefully considered when
you want to travel light.

The lesson here is that every piece of equipment must justify being packed for your trip, based on exactly how
much you can comfortably carry. At one extreme, there is a trip taken by motor home or a roomy vehicle with
enough space to hold everything you want to carry. At the other extreme are hiking or bicycle journeys when
every ounce must be carried on your back or saddlebags the whole way. In the middle are trips by plane, bus,
or other transport that require you to schlep everything into each hotel, then out again when you move on. No
matter how you travel, you won't want to take along some gadget or accessory that you never really use.

Your Travel Gear

The digital camera you already have should work great. If your main camera is a dSLR or is otherwise bulky,
you might want to consider taking along a compact digital camera as backup. You can always lend it to
another member of your party to use when you're busy, as that will keep it near at hand when you need it. A
backup camera is also convenient to have, say, when you're going out to dinner and don't want to be totally
camera-free, but don't care to take along your main gear, either.

If you want specific camera and lens recommendations, see Chapters 7 and 8. The same equipment that works
for scenic and landscape photography or for architectural photography will function just as well in a travel
context. There are a couple things that take on increasing importance for travel photography, however.

Wither Your Digital Film?

Your memory cards are rarely a limitation when shooting close to home. Most of us own enough cards to
shoot all the pictures we care to until we get a chance to download them to our computers. Unless I am
immersed in a major project, I rarely shoot more than 400 pictures in a single day and can fit all those photos
on a few 1GB memory cards. The picture changes dramatically once you leave home with no chance to return
to your personal computer for a few days or a few weeks. You'll find your memory cards fill up faster than
Yankee Stadium on Bat Day. So, what do you do? Here are a few possibilities:

• Take a laptop. If you have a laptop computer and want to lug it around on a trip, you can tote it with
you and download your photos to its hard drive at the end of a shooting session. I don't know about
you, but I sit in front of a computer all day, and when I travel for fun, the last thing I want to carry
with me is a computer. If you are insane enough to want to take the computer anyway, it makes a

258 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 259
sensible choice for moving your photos from your camera. Newer laptop computers have DVD and
CD burners, so you can make multiple copies of your shots and maybe mail them home so that you'll
still have your pictures even if your laptop's hard drive crashes, you lose it, or it's stolen.
• Take a portable storage device. A lightweight, battery-operated stand-alone storage device might be
easier to carry with you than a laptop. Your best choice might be a portable DVD/CD burner (for the
reasons outlined above), but hard-drive based portable storage devices can work, too. If you already
own a 20GB to 60GB Apple iPod, you can buy a card reader that plugs right in. Of course, hard-drive
storage devices can crash, too, so this solution isn't perfect.
• Visit a cyber café. It's difficult to find a city of any size that doesn't have a cyber café nearby. You can
leave your own computer at home and log onto one at the café to read your e-mail (if you must) or
upload your photos (if you're smart). Just remember to take along your camera's USB cable or a USB
card reader so you can link your camera or memory card to the café's computer. There are a couple
drawbacks to this option. Although cafés are everywhere, there is no guarantee you can find one when
you absolutely must have one. Nor can you guarantee that the establishment will have a fast,
broadband connection. You might have a dial-up connection that's great for e-mail, but not so great
for sending multi-megabyte picture files. Finally, these outlets generally charge by the minute or hour,
so uploading all your photos might prove expensive.
• Take lots of memory cards. This is actually the solution I am leaning towards for my own upcoming
trip. I already own one 4GB memory card and four 1GB cards. Those are enough for 1,300 photos
right there if I choose to shoot in RAW format. I could boost that to 2,200 pictures if I switched to the
best JPEG format. I'm planning to be gone for about a week. If I purchased just one more 4GB card (I
paid about $200 for the last one I bought), I could average 280 photos a day, every day of my trip.
That's the equivalent of eight 36-exposure rolls of 35mm film, and considerably more than I've shot
on previous trips. If, after two or three days I see I am likely to fill up my memory cards, I can switch
to JPEG and almost double my number of remaining shots while not really losing much quality.

What Else to Take?

Other than your camera, lenses (if you have a dSLR), memory cards, and, possibly, a tripod or monopod, what
else do you need to take? Here are some bare minimums:

• Battery charger with adapters. Unless your camera takes easily found batteries, such as AA cells
(which is actually an advantage in some respects), you'll need to take along your charger and, if you're
traveling outside your home country, an adapter that will let you plug your charger into local
electrical outlets. Most newer chargers are the universal type that work with both 110 and 220 volts,
but their plugs might not fit the sockets overseas. If your adapter is not a universal type, you'll need a
current converter, as well.
• Plastic bags. Take plastic bags with you everywhere, even when you're not planning to shoot photos.
You can buy foods or snacks, dump the packaging, and carry your equipment around in the plastic
bags. The bags can protect your equipment from humid climes or help you separate exposed from
unexposed memory cards. (Write EXPOSED on one of the clear bags.) A gallonsized clear bag makes
a good raincoat for your camera. Cut a hole in it and you can take pictures even if it's wet outside.
• Camera bag. I happen to own a large LowePro bag that holds two camera bodies and six or seven
lenses, plus all the filters and other accessories I need. I usually take everything with me when I am
traveling close to home, because you never know when you might need that infrared filter. On longer
trips when I am traveling lighter, the large bag stays at home and I use one of several smaller bags,
each sized to take only the equipment that is going with me. All I care about are a few resizable
compartments so I can stow each item individually, without needing separate cases for them, or
worrying that they will dent each other as I move around. A sturdy strap, the ability to open the bag
quickly, and surefire protection from the elements are also important. It doesn't matter whether your
bag is a backpack, belt pack, chest bag, or shoulder bag. Use what feels comfortable to you.
• Other stuff. I usually find room in even the smallest bag for a cleaning cloth, an ear syringe for
blowing dust off the camera or sensor, one of those plastic rain ponchos that fold down to the size of a
pack of playing cards (I got mine on The Maid of the Mist), and maybe a roll of gaffer tape. You

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 259

260 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

never know when you might need to tape something down or up, or otherwise require gaffing.
< Day Day Up >
< Day Day Up >

Tips for Getting Great Travel Pictures

While most of what you learned in Chapters 7 and 8 apply to travel photography, here are some additional
things to keep in mind as you rove about, camera in hand. If you follow these guidelines, you can come home
with some great pictures.

Shoot Details

Sometimes, the best way to picture a building or other memorable sight is to capture individual snippets of its
design. Indeed, parts of some buildings or monuments may be more interesting than the structure as a whole.
Doorways, entrances, roofs, and decorations all make interesting photographs. Best of all, you can often use a
telephoto or normal lens to capture details, avoiding the problems of perspective distortion (discussed in
Chapter 7) entirely.

A case in point is the huge 500 foot stone cross that tops the underground cathedral, which the (still-dead)
Generalissimo Francisco Franco had carved into the side of a mountain at the Valley of the Fallen outside
Madrid. The cross is huge and can be seen from 30 miles away, so photographing it is not much of a problem,
if you're satisfied with a mundane photograph like Figure 9.3.

Figure 9.3. This important monument to Fascist theatricality can be easily photographed in the traditional way.

If you look closely at the photograph, you can see the enormous stone sculptures of heroic figures clustered
around the base of the cross, representing the four Evangelists. To get a better representation of the colossal
sculptures (each more than 50 feet high), I ascended to the peak of the mountain and captured the photo of St.
Matthew, shown in Figure 9.4. The perspective is all wrong: The feet look much larger than the head, for
example. But, in this case, the distortion just serves to emphasize exactly how huge the sculpture really is. It
seems to recede off into the distance as the huge stone figure rises toward the heavens.

260 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 261
Figure 9.4. Oddly enough, distortion isn't objectionable in this unusual perspective of a colossal sculpture.

In other situations, a detail may tell a little story about the structure you're photographing. Figure 9.5 shows
the wall of a ruined castle. The gaping holes and crumbling stones weave a tale of assaults, sieges, and
Medieval warfare, even if the destruction happens to have been caused by natural erosion rather than combat.
Cobblestones worn by the incessant pounding of human feet, weathered siding on an old barn, or even the
shiny perfection of a slick new glass office tower can express ideas better than any caption.

Figure 9.5. The ruins of a Medieval castle are best captured in details, like this section of wall.

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 261

262 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Travel Landscapes

Scenic photography is sometimes problematic in a travel environment, because there is sometimes a need to
meet your schedule and get on to the next city. If traveling by car, you might pull over, gawk at an impressive
lake or mountain vista, then hurry to get back into the car and move on after taking a few pictures. You
certainly don't have the time to maneuver to the perfect position, or to stick around until sunset so you can
capture the waning light of day. When day wanes, you need to be checked into your hotel room! Travel with a
tour group in a bus is likely to be even more hurried.

So, you'll have to make a special effort to stop and smell the roses or, at least, take their photo. You may never
pass this way again, so take the time to scope out your scenic view, find the best angle, and shoot it first. That
way, if you're forced to move on you'll at least have a good basic shot. Then, take the remaining time to look
for new angles and approaches. Use a wide-angle to emphasize the foreground, or a telephoto to pull in a
distant scene. Take several photos that you can stitch together (as described in Chapter 7) to get an image like
the view of Toledo, Spain, shown in Figure 9.6.

Figure 9.6. Panoramas are a great way of capturing a broad view of an area.

Photographing People

People can be among the most interesting subjects of your travel photographs, especially if you've traveled to
a foreign land where clothing, cultures, or even the packaging of common products that people use, like soda
or candy bars, can be different from what we are used to. Your photographs of people can evoke the lifestyles,
working environment, and cultural influences, or simply catch people in the act of being themselves, as shown
in Figure 9.7.

Figure 9.7. Don't forget to capture people, too, during your travels.

262 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 263

There are a few things to keep in mind when photographing people during your travels.

• Don't gawk. I once watched a group of camera-toting foreign visitors in a California supermarket
giggling and snapping picture after picture of an American woman doing her shopping while wearing
a full set of immense hair curlers. The tourists thought she was very amusing, but the poor woman
was rightly annoyed. She was out about her business and was not an exhibit on display for the
enjoyment of travelers from another country where, apparently, curlers are not so casually worn
outside the home. As exotic as the folks from a country where you are a guest may appear to you, they
aren't circus performers, and you should treat them with respect.
• Ask permission. In the same vein, it's good to ask permission to shoot, even if you only nod your head
in the person's direction before taking the picture to see if they smile or glower. That approach works
even when there is a language barrier, because photography and taking pictures is a universal
language. Once you've gotten the okay, suggest, even if only by gesture, that your subject resume
their normal activities so your photos will look natural.
• Offer thanks after shooting. Let them know how much you appreciate the favor. If your subject is
interested, you can show him or her the results of your shooting on your camera's LCD. You can offer
to mail a print or e-mail the photo, if appropriate.
• Be aware of taboos and legal restrictions. Some cultures frown on photographic images of people.
Photographing women (or even a man asking a woman for permission to shoot) can cause problems.
You may get into trouble photographing soldiers, military installations, airports, or even some public
buildings. Try to learn about these restrictions in advance, if you can.
< Day Day Up >
< Day Day Up >

Next Up
The last chapter in this book deals with close-up photography, which is another whole world unto itself. You'll
learn how to get up close and personal with inanimate objects as well as tiny living things, including flowers.
Close-up work is something you can do any time of the year, and which can bring an interesting new
perspective to your photography.
< Day Day Up >
< Day Day Up >

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 263

264 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Chapter 10. Macro Photography

Although there are dedicated photographers who specialize in the scenic, architectural, and travel photography
discussed in the last three chapters, all three of those types of picture taking are also popular with dabblers
who dip their toes into those creative waters from time to time. However, macro, or close-up, photography
tends to become a way of life for anyone who tries it seriously.

Part of the reason is that to get the very best macro photos you might have to make an investment in a gadget
or two. That's especially true if you're working with a digital SLR. Most non-SLR digital models can focus
down to an inch or so with no additional equipment, but to get that close with a dSLR you'll often need a
special lens or a screw-on close-up attachment, and may find the need (real or imagined) for other accessories.
Once you've got the right gear, macro photography tends to become an infectious pursuit, and the only way to
scratch the itch is to take more macro photos.

Every type of photography presents its own challenges and unique rewards, and macro, or close-up,
photography is no exception. Some types of close-up pictures involve inanimate objects that will remain
stolidly in front of your camera for hours while you arrange lighting and choose the perfect angle. Other
macro photographs picture flighty living creatures that can scarcely be coaxed to remain in the frame long
enough for an exposure or two. You can take leisurely close-up pictures indoors in a mini-studio of your
devising, or take your work outdoors and suffer the vagaries of the environment. Macro photographs can
picture the familiar in new ways, or result in images that are abstract and thought-provoking.

In short, if you're jaded by portraiture, no longer turned on by taking scenic photographs, and have had
enough of action photography for a while, macro photography is a whole new ballgame. The rules are easy to
learn, and you probably already have all the skills you need to knock one out of the metaphorical park.
Getting up-close and personal can spark your creative energies and prove to be a rewarding outlet.

This chapter should provide you with everything you need to know to get great close-up pictures.
< Day Day Up >
< Day Day Up >

Made for Each Other

If it seems as if shutter lag and other features of digital cameras were designed to make action photography
difficult, the reverse is true for the macro photographic realm. Many features built into every digital camera
make these image grabbers ideal for taking close-up pictures. If you've been doing macro photography with
film cameras, a few sessions with a digital camera will convince you that digital technology is exactly what
you've been waiting for.

For example, non-SLR digital cameras have an LCD display that makes it easy to frame your photo precisely,
as shown in Figure 10.1. Conventional film cameras of the non-SLR variety do a very poor job of showing
you what the image will look like at close distances. Cutting off the tops of subjects, unwanted trimming at
the sides, and other blunders are common. Yet, even the least expensive digital point-and-shoot camera can
show you virtually the same image that will be captured, using the color LCD screen on the back of the
camera. That's important for framing the image, but equally useful when it comes to lighting your subject. Of
course, digital SLRs don't provide this kind of image preview; you have to frame and focus the image using
the SLR viewfinder instead.

264 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 265
Figure 10.1. This camera has both a back-panel LCD and an internal electronic viewfinder (EVF), making it perfect
for close-up photography.

Focusing a close-up image can be tricky with a traditional non-SLR camera, too. It's easier to focus with the
display of a digital camera (assuming you can shield the LCD screen from extraneous light and can see it
clearly) if you need to, but the autofocus mechanisms of these cameras generally do a good job of locking
focus in for you. Moreover, non-SLR digital cameras have much more depth-of-field at a particular
magnification, so you'll find that more of your subject is in focus. The majority of digital cameras have
close-focusing capabilities, too, whereas many film cameras are able to focus no closer than a foot or two.

When film cameras ruled, it was common for professional photographers to shoot instant photographs of any
sort of complicated studio setup (close-up or otherwise) to confirm that the lighting, composition, and other
factors were perfect. After all, by the time the film was processed, the close-up setup might have been torn
down to make room for a different photo shoot. Reproducing a setup is expensive and time-consuming. Your
digital camera is better than a Polaroid-style instant camera, because you can review the exact photograph that
was taken, moments after the exposure. You can keep taking pictures until you're satisfied that you have the
precise image you were looking for.

Most digital cameras focus a lot closer than their non-SLR film camera counterparts, making them much more
suitable for close-ups. Digital camera lenses are more compact, which means that engineering close-focus
capabilities is a lot easier for the designer.

Macro photography is convenient. You don't have to jump into your car or travel by plane to photograph
something that's out of the ordinary. That weird crystal saltshaker you found at a garage sale might be a
perfect subject when you zoom in close to capture its angles and texture.

Close-up photographs can work hand-in-hand with your other hobbies, too. Coin and stamp collections are
such obvious subjects I'm almost ashamed to mention them. What about those works of art you painted on
single grains of rice? A close-up photograph may be the only way to appreciate them. Do you work with
ephemeral subjects, like flowers that bloom only for a short time, or study the intricacies of spider webs? A
digital photo can live on long after your original subject no longer exists. If model train layouts are your thing,
close-up photos can bring them to life. You might be surprised at how much macro photography can add to
your favorite avocation.
< Day Day Up >
< Day Day Up >

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 265

266 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Close-ups Up Close
Whether you call it macro photography or close-up photography, the meaning is the same: taking photographs
of objects, usually from 12 inches or less (frequently much less). Macro photography is not microphotography
(that's the production of little tiny photos, such as microfilm images), nor is it photomicrography (taking
pictures through a microscope). Macro photography is nothing more than up-close pictures of everyday things
caught in the act of being themselves. Because the intimate viewpoint is unique, the results can be fascinating.

There are several ways to achieve a close-up view with a digital camera. One way is to step back from a
subject and zoom in with a long lens to provide a tight view using the telephoto/zoom's magnification.
Another way is to get in very, very close and use proximity as a way of getting the look you want. A
combination of the two methods is also possible, if you have a telephoto lens/zoom setting that allows you to
focus close, too. There are several important considerations to deal with in close-up photography, and I'll
address all of them in this chapter.

Magnification

The newcomer to macro photography invariably wants to know "how close can I get?" That's a logical
question. If you're used to taking pictures of subjects that are located from six feet to infinity, the desire to get
close, preferably as close as possible, takes on special significance. However, if you think about it, the
distance between your lens and the subject isn't the most important thing. You want a bigger view of your
subject, so the size of the subject on your sensor (or film) is the key factor. Instead of focusing on distance,
think magnification.

It's easy to see why, through a simple thought experiment. You don't even have to whip out your camera.
Imagine taking a photograph of a coin from your coin collection from 8 inches away, with your camera set to
its widest zoom setting, say, the equivalent of a 35mm lens. Now, move the camera back so it's 12 inches
away from the coin, but zoom in to your camera's maximum telephoto setting, say, 200mm. (Not all cameras
can focus close at all zoom settings, but, fortunately, this is a thought experiment.) Which photograph will
have the larger image? Which will be a more satisfactory close-up of your coin?

Figure 10.2 shows an aloe vera plant photographed from about 2 feet away using the equivalent of a 28mm
wide-angle lens. For Figure 10.3, I moved back to about 5 ½ feet and shot at the 80mm zoom setting. Note
that the magnification of each image is exactly the same (at least, in terms of the flowerpot), even though one
photo was taken at a distance that's nearly three times as far.

Figure 10.2. This photo was taken using a 28mm zoom setting from about 2 feet away.

266 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 267

Figure 10.3. This picture was taken using the 80mm zoom setting from 5 ½ feet away.

There are other differences in the photos, which I'll point out in the Perspective section.

In macro photography, it's not how close you can focus, but the final size, or magnification, of the image that
is important. A lens that focuses very close only at the wide-angle setting will not produce the same results as
one that focused close at both wide-angle and telephoto settings. Indeed, there are situations in which you'd
want to use one or the other, because both wide-angle and telephoto settings can produce distortions in your
final image, depending on the subject matter and how close you are to it. (You'll find a recap on perspective
distortion later in this chapter.)

Because final image size depends on the lens setting and distance to the subject, magnification is the most
useful way of expressing how an image is captured with macro photography. If your magnification is 1 times,
the object will appear the same size on the sensor (or film) as it does in real life.

At 2 times magnification, it will be twice as big, and at .5 times, the subject will be half life-size and will
occupy only half the width or height it did in the life-size version. These magnifications are most commonly
referred to as ratios: 1 times is 1:1, 2 times is 2:1, .5 times is 1:2, and so forth. As you work with close-up
photography, you'll find using magnifications more useful than focusing distances.

Perspective

Another important factor in macro photography is the perspective of the camera. Earlier in this section, I
mentioned that close-up pictures could be taken from a relative distance (even if that distance is only a few
feet away) with a telephoto lens or long zoom setting. The same magnification can also be achieved by
moving in close with a shorter lens. The same apparent perspective distortion that results from using a
wide-angle lens close to a subject and the distance compression effects of a telephoto, apply to macro
photography (see Chapter 6 for more on these effects).

So, if you have a choice of tele/wide-angle modes for macro photography, you'll want to choose your method
carefully. Relatively flat subjects without a great deal of depth and those that can't be approached closely can
be successfully photographed using a telephoto/macro setting. Subjects with a moderate amount of depth can
be captured in wide-angle mode. If you find that a wide setting tends to introduce distortion, settle for a focal
length somewhere in between wide and telephoto.

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 267

268 Part II: Techniques Unlimited
The most important types of subjects affected by perspective concerns are tabletop setups such as architectural
models and model railroad layouts. Use the right perspective, and your model may look like a full-scale
subject. With the wrong perspective, the model looks exactly like what it is, a tiny mock-up.

You can see the difference perspective makes by comparing Figures 10.2 and Figure 10.3 above. Objects that
are closer to the camera appear proportionately larger in the wide-angle shot, compared to the version shot
with the longer zoom setting. It's most noticeable if you compare the stool seat the plant is resting on. In
Figure 10.2, the stool seat looks larger and "wider," whereas in Figure 10.3, the seat is more compressed
(which is what telephoto lenses do). For a given magnification, you'll want to choose the focal length of your
lens carefully to provide the kind of perspective that you're looking for.

Lighting

Lighting is an important aspect of all types of photography, of course, but it becomes more difficult when
dealing with close-up subjects. Here are some of the challenges involved:

• The camera may be so close to the subject that there isn't room to light the front of the subject.
• Your camera's built-in flash is probably aimed "over" the subject and either won't illuminate it at all
or will only partially illuminate it.
• Built-in flash may be too powerful for close-up photos, or be unable to reduce power enough to
compensate for the close distance.

• Your camera's lens itself may cast a shadow on the subject.

• Your light source may be visible in the frame, or cause glare, as you can see in Figure 10.4. I was
trying for a backlit approach that would silhouette the needle while transilluminating the translucent
thread. But all I got was a photo with glare in it.

Figure 10.4. If you're not careful, your light source can intrude into the photo, or cause glare.

There is a variety of solutions to these lighting problems, and I'll address them as we move along. Special
lighting gear, such as ringlights that fit around the lens, or light-softening setups such as lighting "tents" can
help.

Depth-of-Field

The depth of sharp focus with three-dimensional subjects can be a critical component in macro photography.
You'll find that depth-of-field is significantly reduced when you're focusing close. Although the relatively
short focal length of the lenses attached to many digital cameras provides extra depth-of-field at a given

268 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 269
magnification, it still might not be enough. You'll need to learn to use smaller apertures and other techniques
to increase the amount of sharp subject matter, if you have problems like those shown in Figures 10.5 and
Figure 10.6. If you focus on the cup in front, the jug in the background might be out of focus. Focus on the
jug, and the cup might be out of focus.

Figure 10.5. Focusing on the cup brings it into sharp focus, but makes the jug appear blurry.

Figure 10.6. At a wide-open aperture, focusing on the background means that only the jug is in focus.

Composition

Good composition is as important with macro photography as with any other type of picture taking. The
challenge is to achieve a pleasing composition when even small changes in camera position can drastically
modify the arrangement of your subjects. If you're taking pictures of inanimate objects, you might be able to
arrange the subjects any way you like. If you're attempting to capture a ladybug or other living creature, you
might not have that luxury.
< Day Day Up >
< Day Day Up >

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 269

270 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

What You Need

Close-up photography can be equipment-intensive if you want to get fancy, although in most cases you can
get by with the basic capabilities of your digital camera. Once you become immersed in macro photography,
however, you'll probably want to add a few accessories. This section will tell you exactly what you need to
have to shoot good close-ups.

Your Camera

You'll need a digital camera with close-focusing capabilities, and a way to frame your images accurately.
Fortunately, those two features are common to just about every digital camera made. Even low-end fixed
focus digital cameras with no zoom may have a "macro" setting for close-up pictures, because designing a
non-SLR digital camera to shoot close is a real no-brainer.

The minimum distance your camera can focus will vary with the focal length and other physical properties of
the lens. One way close focus is achieved is to move the lens farther away from the sensor. A 7mm (actual
focal length) digital camera lens moved 14mm from the sensor can focus at half the distance of the same lens
at 7mm from the sensor. Because the actual focal length of most digital camera lenses is so short, it's
relatively easy to design a camera that can move the lens a moderate distance from the sensor, achieving a
relatively close minimum focus distance.

Cameras with larger sensors (and therefore longer focal length lenses for a particular magnification) require
greater distances between the center of the lens and the sensor. This is particularly true with digital SLRs.
Fortunately, these cameras can be equipped with extension tubes and other aids (discussed later) that provide
the necessary distance.

The second requirement is a viewfinder that lets you compose your image accurately. Digital cameras that use
an optical viewfinder actually provide a slightly different view of the subject than the one the sensor sees. If
the optical "window" is directly above the taking lens, you'll see more at the top of the frame at close
distances than the sensor sees. If the window is to one side, you'll see more of that side than the lens. Should
the viewing window be placed both above and to one side, your actual image will be "clipped" in two
directions. This viewing phenomenon is called parallax error.

You won't have this problem if you have a digital SLR that allows viewing through the same lens used to take
the picture, or if your camera is equipped with an electronic viewfinder, an internal LCD that displays the
image from the camera's sensor. Nor will you have parallax problems viewing the image on the LCD display
on the back of the camera. Some find the camera-back LCD clumsy to use and difficult to view in bright light
(unless you use an add-on light shield), but when composing a close-up image, it's preferable to relying on an
optical viewfinder alone.

Some digital cameras have a composite video out connector that allows displaying the sensor's image on a TV
screen or monitor (use the yellow composite video in connector of your TV/monitor). This option may be the
best of all for non-SLR users for at-home shooting, as it is big and bright and easy to focus.

Tip from the Pros: Image Stabilization Rocks (or Not)

Image stabilization is one very cool feature for macro photography and is found on an increasing
number of digital cameras. When IS is activated, the camera or lens makes adjustments to
counter camera shake by moving lens elements or the sensor itself. Which method is used
depends on which digital camera you have. Canon, Nikon, Panasonic, and others use optical
image stabilization, while Minolta builds the technology right into the camera. Most

270 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 271

photographers think of image stabilization only in terms of how it allows them to shoot at a
slower shutter speed in low light without the need of a tripod. Or, they might consider anti-shake
technology a help when using a long telephoto lens at lower than what would be considered the
minimum shutter speed. Yet, one of the best applications of image stabilization is for close-ups.
With IS activated, you can shoot many macro photos without a tripod and avoid the effects of
camera shake, which is magnified at close-up distances. You might be able to get sharp photos at
1/125th second that would otherwise require 1/500th second without stabilization.

Close-up Lenses

Close-up lenses come in two types. One kind is an actual lens designed for close-up photography and is used
with cameras that have removable optics. However, these lenses, like the one shown in Figure 10.7, are
usually referred to as macro lenses. When we talk about close-up lenses, we're usually talking about screw-on,
filter-like accessories that attach to the front of your camera's prime lens, such as the one shown in Figure
10.8.

Figure 10.7. Macro lenses for digital SLRs are designed specifically for closeup photography.

Figure 10.8. A close-up lens can bring you even closer than your camera's minimum focusing distance.

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 271

272 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

These add-ons are useful when you want to get even closer than your camera's design allows. Many digital
cameras focus down to an inch or less. That's usually as close as you'll want to go, because if you get much
closer than that, a three-dimensional object will be very difficult to light. There simply wouldn't be enough
room between the lens and subject to allow decent lighting. An exception would be if you were photographing
a transparent or translucent item, such as a transparency, but in most cases, being able to focus a few inches
away is close enough.

However, some vendors have a looser definition of close focusing, so you might happen to own a digital
camera that allows getting no closer than a foot or two. Or, perhaps you own a fixed focus digital camera that
offers acceptable sharpness for everything from a few feet to infinity. You, too, can take close-up pictures if
you know the secret. You might have to choose your camera's macro setting, then set focus distance manually
using a dial, but you'll still be able to take close-ups.

Tip from the Pros: A Cap Strap Ruler

Is your lens cap tethered to your camera by a chain or strap to keep it from getting lost? Consider
putting markings on the strap with nail polish so you can use it as an impromptu measuring tape
when you need to gauge small distances manually.

Close-up lenses, like the one shown in Figure 10.8, are generally labeled with their relative "strength" or
magnification using a measure of optical strength called "diopter." A lens labeled "No. 1" would be a
relatively mild close-up attachment; those labeled "No. 2" or "No. 3" would be relatively stronger. Close-up
lenses are commonly available in magnifications from +1 diopter to +10 diopters.

The actual way close-up magnification is calculated is entirely too complicated for the average photographer
(unless formulas like Magnification at Infinity=Camera Focal Length/(1000/diopter strength) are your cup of
tea) and not particularly useful. That's because the close focusing distance varies with the focal length of the
lens and its unenhanced close focusing capabilities.

However, as a rule of thumb, if your lens normally focuses to one meter (39.37 inches; a little more than three
feet), a +1 diopter will let you focus down to one-half meter (about 20 inches); a +2 diopter to one-third meter
(around 13 inches); a +3 diopter to one-quarter meter (about 9.8 inches); and so forth. A +10 diopter will take
you all the way down to about 2 inches and that's with the lens focused at infinity. If your digital camera's
lens normally focuses closer than one meter, you'll be able to narrow the gap between you and your subject
even more.

272 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 273
In the real world, the practical solution is to purchase several close-up lenses (they cost roughly $20 each and
can often be purchased in a set) so you'll have the right one for any particular photographic chore. You can
combine several close-up lenses to get even closer (using, say, a +2 lens with a +3 lens to end up with +5), but
avoid using more than two close-up lenses together. The toll on your sharpness will be too great with all those
layers of glass. Plus, three lenses can easily be thick enough to vignette the corners of your image.

Bellows and Extension Tubes

Those who own digital SLRs have all manner of accessories they can purchase to focus even closer. These all
function by moving the lens farther away from the sensor, allowing you to reduce the distance between the
subject and the lens. Bellows, like the one shown in Figure 10.9, are accordion-like attachments that move
along a sliding rail to vary the distance between lens and camera continuously over a particular range.
Extension tubes are fixed-length tubes with a male lens mount on one end (to fasten to your camera) and a
female lens mount on the other (to accept your camera lens). They provide a fixed amount of magnification
but are commonly available in several different thicknesses.

Figure 10.9. Digital SLRs can be equipped with sophisticated bellows attachments like this one.

These extenders can produce sharper results than you get with close-up lenses, particularly when used with
specialized macro lenses.

The downside is that these attachments are expensive (as much as $100 or more) and reduce the light reaching
your sensor by a factor of 2X to 4X or more (depending on the amount of extension). You'll probably have to
make exposure readings in manual mode, too, unless you purchase a highend extension tube set that couples
to your camera's metering system. Unless you're taking a great many close-up photos, you probably don't need
them.

Figure 10.10. Extension tubes are more portable, but provide a limited combination of extension distances.

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 273

274 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Tip from the Pros: Extension On the Cheap

Extension tubes and bellows attachments for digital SLRs can be expensive. I paid $160 for tubes
for my dSLR, because I wanted the newest kind that retains the autofocus and autoexposure
capabilities of my macro lens. Bellows attachments can cost $300 or more. If you want to save a
little money on these accessories, see if you can't pick up older non-automatic tubes intended for
film cameras that use the same lens mount as your digital camera. An older bellows might be
suitable for your new camera, too. Because close-up photography of non-living things usually
proceeds at a slow and thoughtful pace, the need to focus and calculate exposure manually is not
much of a disadvantage. (I was planning on shooting skittish tree frogs and needed the extra
speed.) Manual extension tubes can be purchased for a fraction of the cost of automatic tubes,
and you can probably find a used bellows on eBay or at your local camera dealer. I have to
mount an extension tube between my old bellows and the camera to allow the bellows to clear
the digital camera's overhang, but that's a small price to pay.

Supporting Players

Although it's possible to shoot close-up photographs on the fly, macro photography is really easiest and most
effective when done carefully, with deliberation and a lot of forethought. That usually means you'll want to
place your camera on a tripod so it stays put while you're arranging your subject matter, and doesn't jiggle
during the exposure. If you're using auxiliary light sources, or a background of some sort, you'll want to have
supports for them, too.

Tripods

A good tripod is almost essential. It not only frees you from needing to have three or four different hands, but
it makes it easier to focus and frame an image through a digital camera's LCD screen. A tripod is also a
consistent and repeatable support, so if you're taking photographs of your model train collection, the camera
can remain the same distance from your rolling stock picture to picture and session to session.

You'll quickly discover that not just any tripod is suitable for close-up photography. Some models are little
better than camera stands and the worst of them wobble more than you do. Digital cameras are so small (many
weighing only a few ounces) that you might be tempted to go with an equally petite tripod. Don't succumb to
the temptation! Although you might not need a heavy-duty studio tripod like the one I use, you still need
something that's rigid enough not to sway while you compose your image, and heavy enough to remain
rock-solid during a long exposure. There are smaller tripods available that don't flex under tiny amounts of
pressure and resist swaying with every gust of wind or other minor environmental shakes.

274 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 275
Camera supports come in a variety of sizes and shapes, from single-leg unipods or monopods best suited for
sports photography to tiny tabletop tripods and fullsized studio units. A small, but solid tripod is a good
choice if size alone makes the difference between whether you'll carry the tripod with you or not. A tabletop
tripod or clamp-style camera mount is generally best used in the same way as that first aid kit in your trunk:
You hope you never need to use it, but carry it with you everywhere, just in case.

Here are some things to look for in a tripod used for close-up photography:

• Legs that adjust easily so you can change the height of the tripod quickly. You'll need to make some
altitude adjustments while taking pictures, of course. However, you'll find that you frequently need to
set up a tripod on uneven surfaces, from stairs (indoors) to a sloping hill (outdoors). Legs that adjust
quickly make it easy to set each leg at a different appropriate length or angle for a steady mount on a
less-than-flat surface.
• Sure-grip "feet." Rubberized feet at the end of each leg are good for gripping slippery surfaces. Some
tripods have feet that can be adjusted to use spiky tips that can dig into dirt, grass, or other iffy
surfaces.
• An adjustable center column. You'll need one that's long enough to let you move the camera up or
down by a foot or two without the need to adjust the legs.
• A center column that's reversible. This feature comes in handy when you need to point the camera
directly down at the floor for some close-ups.
• A tilt and swing head that flips in horizontal and vertical directions, or a ball head that swivels in all
directions so you can quickly change the camera angle. With some professional tripods, the tilt and
ball heads are a component that's purchased separately.
• Cross-bracing that holds the legs of a light-weight tripod rigid even when extended fully. Sturdier
tripods, like the one shown in Figure 10.11, might not need any cross-bracing.
• Locks that let you tightly fix the legs, center column, and tilt head at precisely the position you want.

Figure 10.11. A sturdy tripod can last you a lifetime.

• If you're taking your tripod out in the field, you might want an extra light model that can be toted
around conveniently, but which doesn't sacrifice rigidity. Tripods built of carbon fiber or carbon fiber
and magnesium typically weigh one-third less than aluminum models, yet are just as sturdy.

If you take pictures of small, flat objects (such as stamps, coins, photographs, or needlepoint), you might want
to consider a special kind of camera support called a copystand. These are simple stands with a flat copyboard
and a vertical (or slanted) column on which you fasten the camera. The camera can be slid up or down the
column to adjust the camera-subject distance. A slanted column is best, because it ensures that the camera
remains centered over a larger subject area as you move the camera up. Copystands provide a much more

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 275

276 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

convenient working angle for this type of photography, particularly if your digital camera allows swiveling
the lens and viewfinder in different directions.

Tip from the Pros: Don't Carry That Weight

When you're shooting in the field, take along one of those mesh bags that oranges come in. You
can fill it up on-site with rocks, tie it to the center support of your tripod, and use it to add extra
hill-hugging weight to a light-weight camera support.

Other Supports

If you're shooting indoors, you'll want supports for your background and lighting equipment, if you plan to
use them. Like a tripod, these are all once-in-a-lifetime expenditures. Go ahead and splurge, because tripods
and stands are not the sort of equipment that quickly becomes outmoded by advancing technology. I'm still
using the same light stands and tripod I purchased while in college, and amortized over the time that's elapsed
since, they've cost me roughly $10 a year. Of course, that doesn't mean you need to spend a fortune. You can
even make some of the supports yourself.

Light stands, for example, are basically simple telescoping aluminum tripod-like affairs, like the one shown in
Figure 10.12 that can hold any auxiliary lighting you plan to use, whether it's incandescent or electronic. You
can buy 7-foot light stands, but I sprung for the 9-foot tall variety because they have a larger, steadier base and
a little extra height so they can be used as a background support.

Figure 10.12. Light stands can support backgrounds, lighting equipment, and other things.

Background supports themselves can be light stands or something you make yourself, depending on what kind
of background you're using. Cloth backgrounds are light in weight and can be supported by just about
anything you care to set up, including duct tape applied to nearby furniture. (I've taped backgrounds to the
bookcases and fireplaces from time to time.) If you're tearing down your "studio" often, you might want to use
light stands. You can set one stand on either side of your shooting area, place a wood dowel between them as
a horizontal support, and drape your cloth over that.

Paper rolls are more challenging, because they can weigh 20 to 30 pounds each. Good-quality light stands
may be able to support them if you use a metal pipe or thick wood closet pole as your horizontal support. Or,

276 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 277
build something out of 2 x 4 lumber if you're handy. When I've had a permanent studio, I usually nailed
multiple homemade supports to the ceiling rafters so I could have five or six rolls of paper in different colors
all hung at the same time.
< Day Day Up >
< Day Day Up >

Lighting Equipment
As I mentioned earlier, the lighting used for close-ups can make the difference between a successful picture
and a so-so effort. You can choose from the existing light (modified with reflectors if need be), electronic
flash units (or incandescent illumination such as photoflood lights), high intensity lamps, or other auxiliary
lighting. If you want to be pedantic, you can also shoot close-ups with light emitted by the subject itself, so if
you have some lighted candles or lightning bugs to capture, knock yourself out.

Working with Existing Light

The existing light that already illuminates your subject may be the most realistic and easy to use option for
close-up photos, as long as you're prepared to manipulate the light a bit to achieve the best effect. That's
particularly true when you're shooting on location or outdoors. Making the most of the existing light means
not having to set up special light sources or possibly locating a source of electrical power (not always an
option outdoors).

Available light can be contrasty, providing enough illumination for the highlights of your subject, but with not
enough light to open up the shadows. It might also be too dim overall, or too bright. You can usually fix these
failings with a variety of reflectors and light blockers. You can buy these tools if you like, but it's often just as
easy to make your own in the exact shape and size that you need. As a bonus, you can use reflectors and light
attenuating accessories with your electronic flash units, too.

The next sections detail some recommended tools and what you can do with them.

White Cardboard

The best and most versatile light tool is a piece of white posterboard. It's cheap, disposable, and you can do
dozens of things with it. Here are a few ideas on using white cardboard:

• Fold it up into quarters to make it more compact. Having a few creases won't hinder your cardboard's
utility as a reflector in the least. You can unfold only as much as you need for your photograph.
• Use white shades, but mix in some colors. Most of the time you'll want a neutral white board, but you
can carry orange and light-blue versions to warm up or cool down the shadows of your picture. You
might find, for example, that the highlights of an object are illuminated by diffuse sunlight, but the
shadows are filled in by reflections off a bluish object. An orange reflector can balance the color
quickly.
• Use the cardboard to block light, too. While you'll generally use the cardboard to reflect light onto
your subject, you'll find you can use it to block direct sunlight and create soft shadows where none
existed before.
• Cut holes in the cardboard for special effects. Motion-picture lighting often uses "cookies" to create
special lighting shapes and effects. What? You thought those shadows on the wall were cast by real
Venetian blinds? Use your imagination and cut some holes in your cardboard to create a halo around
your subject or some other effect. Move the cardboard closer to the subject to make the highlight
harder, and farther away to soften it.

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 277

278 Part II: Techniques Unlimited
Foamboard

Foamboard can make a great soft-light reflector, especially when you're shooting in your home studio. Those
ultra-light boards of plastic foam sandwiched between paper or plastic sheets are commonly used to mount
photos or to construct exhibits. They make great reflectors, too, especially if you need larger sizes that are
rigid but also light in weight. They don't fold easily and are probably more useful for portraits and group
pictures, but if you have a small hunk of foamboard, keep it handy.

Aluminum Foil

Aluminum foil provides a bright, contrasty reflection that can sharpen up soft lighting (if that's what you
need). Tape aluminum foil to a piece of white cardboard (use the reverse side of your main cardboard reflector
if you want). If you need lighting with a little less snap, just reverse the cardboard to expose the nonaluminum
side. Be sure to crinkle the aluminum foil so it will reflect the light evenly; you don't want shiny hot spots.

Mylar Sheets

Those space blankets can do more than keep you warm at your campsite or in an emergency. They can be
used as a handy high-contrast reflector yet still fold up and fit in a pocket of your gadget bag. Every
photographer should get two: one for the emergency kit in the trunk of your car and another for photographic
purposes.

Umbrellas

Photographic umbrellas used in the studio, available in white, gold, or silver surfaces, are compact enough to
carry with you on outside close-up shooting expeditions. However, I favor white purse-sized rain umbrellas,
like the one shown in Figure 10.13, that telescope down to six or eight inches in length, yet unfold to a
respectable size. You can use these as a reflector to bounce light onto your subject or as a translucent diffuser
to soften the light that passes through them (perfect for use in bright sunlight when you can't find any open
shade). And if it rains, you won't get wet!

Figure 10.13. Purse- or pocket-sized umbrellas are perfect for macro shooting in the field.

Tents

If you're photographing a very shiny object, a light tent may be the best tool to even out your lighting.
Photographic tents are usually made of a translucent material and are placed right over the object you're

278 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 279
photographing. I'll show you how to make your own later in this chapter.

Black Cardboard or Cloth

Sometimes you need to block light from a glaring source to produce softer illumination. A sheet of black
poster board works, although even black board reflects some light. For extra light absorption, consider a small
piece of black velour. If you're trying to take photos of seashells in their natural habitat, a black cloth will
help.

Electronic Flash

The electronic flash built into your digital camera may work fine for quick and dirty pictures, but usually it
will provide illumination that is too bright, too harsh, and might not cover your subject completely. This is
because built-in flash are typically "aimed" to light subjects that are at least a few feet away from the camera.
It's more difficult to visualize how electronic flash illumination will look in the finished picture. While
available light provides an automatic "preview," with electronic flash, what you get may be a total surprise.
On the plus side, the short duration of electronic flash will freeze any moving subject this side of a
hummingbird.

Electronic flash is most applicable to macro work indoors, especially if you plan to work with several lights
and set them up on stands. Outdoors, you might be limited to one or two battery-operated flash units. Here are
your choices for electronic flash used for close-up photography:

• Built-in flash. This is the flash unit built into your digital camera. You'll find that in extreme
close-ups, the light it produces will look unnatural and may not illuminate your subject evenly. You
probably can't aim the built-in flash in any meaningful way, and you may find that the lens casts a
shadow on your close-up subject.
• External flash units. Many digital cameras have a connector for attaching an external flash unit. These
can be inexpensive flash units designed for conventional film cameras or more elaborate (and more
costly) devices with modeling lights, which are extra incandescent lamps that mimic the light that will
be emitted by the flash.
• Slave flash. These are electronic flash units with light-detecting circuitry that automatically trigger
them when another flash goes off. You can also purchase add-on slave detectors that set off any flash.
Slaves are useful when you want to use two or more electronic flash. Keep in mind that you may need
to disable your main flash's preflash feature to avoid tripping the slave too early.
• Ringlights. These are specialized electronic flash units made especially for close-up photography.
They have circular tubes that fit around the outside of a camera lens, providing very even lighting for
close-ups. Ringlights are generally a professional tool used by those who take many close-ups,
particularly with interchangeable lens cameras. If you can afford an SLR digital camera, and do
enough close-up work to justify a ringlight, they make a great accessory.

Tip from the Pros: Reflectors

If you're forced to use your camera's built-in flash, you still may be able to achieve acceptable
lighting. Try placing a reflector or two just outside the picture area at the back and sides of the
subject. A piece of white cardboard or even a handkerchief might be enough. The reflector
bounces light from the camera's flash back onto the subject, providing a more even, softer light
than you'd get with the main flash alone, as you can see in Figure 10.14.

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 279

280 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Figure 10.14. No special lights required for this shot. The camera's built-in flash and some white
reflectors did the trick

Incandescent Lights

Good old-fashioned incandescent lights are usually your best tool for lighting indoor close-ups of things that
don't hop around or wiggle. While not as intense as electronic flash, that's not usually a problem with your
camera locked down on a tripod and with longer exposures. Most of the close-up illustrations in this chapter
were taken with incandescent lighting. Their main advantage is that you see exactly what your lighting effect
will be (indeed, studio flash units usually have an incandescent light, too, not for illumination but as a
"modeling light").

Incandescent lights are cheap, too, so you can use several to achieve the exact lighting effect you want. The
most important thing to remember when using them is to set your white balance manually, or make sure your
camera's automatic white-balance control is turned on. These lights are much more reddish than daylight or
electronic flash.

Any gooseneck high-intensity lamp or table lamp, like the one shown in Figure 10.15, that you can twist and
turn to adjust its angle will work great as illumination for close-up pictures. Other types of lamps can also be
used, but will be less flexible, so to speak, when it comes to positioning. Highintensity bulbs may have too
much contrast, especially for shiny objects. You can use reflectors to soften their light, or investigate
adjustable neck lamps that can use conventional "soft-white" light bulbs. Watch out for the heat generated by
your incandescent lamps! They are a poor choice for photographing ice sculptures or chocolate candies but a
good choice for illuminating burgers and fries you want to be toasty warm after the shoot is over.

Figure 10.15. An ordinary desk lamp can be used for close-up photography.

280 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 281

< Day Day Up >

< Day Day Up >

Background Information
For most kinds of close-up pictures, the background you use is very important. In all cases, the background
should complement the main subject and not distract the viewer's attention from it, just as with any carefully
composed photograph.

For models, insects, or other subjects that have a distinctive environment, you might want to create a
background that pictures or simulates that environment realistically. The best way to do that is to actually use
the true environment in your photo, which may be possible if you're shooting on location. You'll probably
want to clean up the surroundings a bit, removing stray rocks and twigs from a floral photograph, for example.
Trim dead leaves or foliage with cuts and tears. Your goal should be to preserve the natural background
without having it look unattractive or cluttered.

Other types of pictures call for plain backgrounds with no detail at all, so the viewer's attention is totally
focused on your subject matter. Seamless white backgrounds, black backdrops, or backgrounds with a small
amount of texture might be what you're looking for. Just remember that an unobtrusive background does not
have to be a black hole of nothingness (or white hole, for that matter). Something as simple as a soft shadow
on the background can bring your subject to three-dimensional life and keep it from appearing to be a flat
cutout.

For close-up photography in a studio, backgrounds should generally be plain, so they won't detract from the
object being photographed. One popular type of background is the so-called seamless backdrop, which
combines the surface that the subject rests on and the vertical background behind it, with a smooth, often
invisible transition between them. Seamless backgrounds are extremely flexible, because you can go for the
"seamless" look or use lighting to provide different amounts of illumination on the foreground and
background, producing a degree of separation that is still smooth and non-distracting.

The next sections will detail some types of backgrounds you might want to work with.

Cloth

Buying a few yards of cloth in plain colors can be the smartest investment you make for macro photography.
There are so many things you can do with cloth. It can be stretched and curved to form a seamless backdrop or
draped artfully to give an image a more classical look. You can use a light color that complements the color of
your subject or a black velour fabric that soaks up every drop of extraneous light, forming a true dropout
background.

I buy velour cloth in widths of about 54 inches and lengths up to eight or nine feet so they can be used for
objects of any size, or even for portraits. Velour fabric is doubly useful because you can work with the fuzzy
velour side or flip it over and use the smooth reverse side that has a little bit of shine. You can add folds and
wrinkles or drape the cloth over objects to create an abstract background "stage" for your subject. Eventually,
your cloth will become soiled, and you can just toss it in the laundry.

Cloth is so cheap that you can purchase lengths in a variety of colors, from muted pastels to brighter hues. If
you only buy a few pieces of cloth, go with blues and browns that go well with many different subjects. Get a
black drape as well. Once you've accumulated a collection of plain colors, add a few patterned cloth pieces.
Cloth with small red and white checks can be useful when you want a "country" or "diner" look. Striped
patterns can be useful, but plaids and other strong patterns tend to overpower your close-up subject. In Figure

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 281

282 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

10.16, I wanted to emphasize the diagonal lines in the jug, so I experimented with some equally strong lines in
the serape I used as a background.

Figure 10.16. Use patterned backgrounds with caution to avoid overpowering your subject.

Seamless Paper

Seamless paper has long been a key tool of professional photographers, but it didn't really become famous to
the public at large until those shenanigans on the seamless backdrops in the mid-'60s cult film Blowup. I used
them to photograph models when I taught photo posing at an agency, managed to squeeze an entire rock
group onto a 12-foot wide swathe of brown paper, and struggled to make a truck clutch look as "glamorous"
as the client specified on a dark paper background. Seamless paper is just as useful for close-up photography,
albeit on a smaller scale.

You can buy rolls of seamless paper at most camera stores that cater to professional photographers. The big
problem is that the most easily obtainable paper rolls are a bit large for close-up work. While some narrower
rolls may be available, the standard sizes are 9 feet and 12 feet wide. Even a 9-foot by 36-foot roll (which
costs about $40) is a little unwieldy for a mini-studio. You can sometimes find 53-inch x 12-yard half rolls
that are a better size for macro photography.

However, you can make your own half rolls. A few minutes with a hacksaw will earn you a couple 4 ½ foot
rolls that are more easily wrestled into submission. The paper eventually gets soiled or torn (it will last longer
when used for close-up photography because you won't have people walking all over it) so getting two
narrower rolls for the price of one is good economy. If you're not planning to use the paper for portraits or
other types of photography, a better choice may be to split the cost with a friend who also needs narrower
seamless rolls. That way, you can each have a roll of a particular color and double the number of colors you
have in stock.

One of the very cool things about seamless paper is that you can change its very character based on how you
light it. Pour a lot of light on the background, and it takes on a lighter appearance. Less light on the
background, and it appears to be darker. A single roll of medium gray paper can appear to be any shade, from
light gray to almost black, depending on how you light it. Extend the seamless paper a few feet back from
your subject before curling it upwards, and you can light the paper to provide a gradient-tone
background very light by your subject and gradually fading to a much darker shade in the back. You can

282 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 283

achieve some of these effects with cloth, but the smooth texture of seamless paper makes for smooth light
transitions, too.

I originally took the image shown in Figure 10.17 to use with another chapter as an illustration of the addon
wide-angle lenses that are available for digital cameras like the HP Photosmart model pictured. I spent so
much time adjusting the lights so that both the camera and lens were illuminated properly that I decided to use
it as an example for this macro photography chapter instead. For this shot, the seamless paper extended about
four feet behind the camera, and I feathered the lights so that the vertical portion of the paper was barely lit.
This is a typical effect you'll find in many product-type photographs, but you can use it to make your
porcelain figurine collection look more glamorous, too.

Figure 10.17. A seamless background is used in many product photos.

Poster Board

That poster board you purchased as a reflector can also double as a seamless background. Posterboard is not
quite as good as rolls of seamless paper, because the sheets aren't really large enough if your close-ups will
involve anything that's more than a few inches on a side. You'll find that the background or foreground (or
both) aren't large enough to let you choose different angles (nothing beats a long roll of paper that's 4 feet
wide or more in such cases). Posterboard is also more difficult to manage: it's rigid and may not stay where
you want it without taping or propping up. However, posterboard is cheap, cheap, cheap, so you can have lots
of colors.
< Day Day Up >
< Day Day Up >

Getting Down to Business

I've told you just about everything you need to know to prepare for shooting close-up photographs. This
section will concentrate on the steps you need to follow to make your macro dreams a reality. Most of this
information applies broadly to just about any kind of close-up photography, but as we go along, I'll offer tips
on getting the best results in specific kinds of situations.

The first thing to do is to choose a venue. If you want to photograph small animals, flowers, or small
geological formations (I think of them as "rocks"), you'll need to go out into the field and tote your gear with
you. Be prepared with tripod, reflectors, and any other ancillary equipment you might need. In some cases,
that might include a trowel or shovel you can use to rearrange the landscape to your liking, perhaps a cage or
jar to temporarily house a subject that might otherwise hop away, or sturdy gloves to let you clear away the

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 283

284 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

underbrush.

Other kinds of close-up work, particularly hobby photography, will probably take place in your own home or
in a makeshift home studio, so you won't need to worry about remembering to take all your gear with you.
Instead, you'll need to find a place where you can work undisturbed, such as a kitchen table or the shelves that
showcase your pewter soldier collection.

As I mentioned earlier, many inanimate objects may look much better when removed from their habitat and
photographed against a plain background. A simple background is less distracting and concentrates interest on
your intended subject. A simple background is repeatable, too. I photograph my wife's collection of Lladró
porcelain on the same backdrop using similar lighting every time, so the resulting pictures look like they were
photographed at the same time, as you can see in Figure 10.18, even though months may have elapsed. It can
be difficult to achieve the same consistency on location, where lighting and backgrounds can vary much more.

Figure 10.18. Use a consistent setup and you can get repeatable results over time.

Setting Up Your Subject and Background

The first step is to arrange your subject and its background. If you're shooting in a mini-studio, set up the
background on a table or other surface with enough space in front of the setup to let you get close with your
camera and tripod (if you're using a tripod). Arrange your subject at the angle you want, making sure it won't
tip over or move unexpectedly. Bits of modeling clay can be used to fix many items to the shooting surface
(remember that some kinds of clay may contain oils that will stain cloth or paper). Sometimes I prop up items
with bits of wood placed so they won't show up in the photo. Figure 10.19 shows an inexpensive clamp that
can be used to hold objects being photographed.

Figure 10.19. This 33-cent clamp makes a good holder for keeping an object steady while you zoom in.

284 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 285

If you're shooting on location, police the area and remove any dead branches, leaves, rocks, extraneous fauna,
or anything else you don't want to appear in your photo. Now is the time to simplify your background. Look
closely for dirt that can be cleaned away to improve your photo.

Setting Up Your Camera

If you're using a tripod, adjust the length of the legs so they provide most of the elevation you need. The
center pole should be used to fine-tune the height of the camera; if you set the legs too short and have to crank
the center column way up, the tripod will be top-heavy and less stable. Arrange the tripod and camera so you
can use the tripod's swivel head to get the angles you want. If you have trouble getting close enough because
the tripod's legs get in the way, don't be afraid to reverse the center pole and shoot down on your subject (if
your tripod has that feature).

Setting Up Your Lights

If you're shooting in a mini-studio, you'll probably want to use at least two lights to illuminate your subject
from both sides. Shine the lights directly onto your subject, or bounce the light off a reflector like those
described earlier in this chapter. Make sure there is some light on the background to separate your subject
from its surroundings.

You may have to get creative with lighting on location. If you're not using external lights, take advantage of
reflectors, (to bounce additional light into the shadows) and light-blocking objects (to create softer shadows
from direct sunlight or illumination). As you light your scene, remember that depth-of-field is always limited
when taking close-ups, so anything you can do to increase the amount of light available will make it possible
to shoot at a smaller aperture, which in turn increases depth-of-field. Figure 10.20 shows a close-up of a
dandelion taken with the lens wide open, while Figure 10.21 is the same shot with the aperture stopped down
to increase depth-of-field. To get that smaller f-stop, you can increase the amount of light falling on the
subject, or use a slower shutter speed. Going the additional light route can be especially helpful if you're
shooting without a tripod and can't really lengthen the shutter speed any more.

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 285

286 Part II: Techniques Unlimited
Figure 10.20. With the lens wide open, only the closest portion of the dandelion is in focus.

Figure 10.21. If you're stopping down the lens to a smaller aperture, the depth-offield increases.

If you happen to be using your camera's built-in flash, lack of light will rarely be a problem. In fact, you may
find yourself with too much light even at your lens's smallest f-stop, and end up with a washed-out picture.
Here are several possible solutions:

• Step back a little and use a tighter zoom setting to produce the same size image. The flash will be that
much farther from your subject and less likely to wash out the picture. Remember that electronic flash
obeys the inversesquare law: A light source that is 12 inches away from your subject produces only
one-quarter as much illumination as it does when it's six inches away.
• Use your camera's exposure value (EV) control to deliberately "under" expose the picture, thus
fooling your image grabber's automatic exposure mechanism.
• Consider covering your flash with a layer or two of tissue paper or other neutral translucent covering.
You'll cut down on the light and soften it a bit at the same time. (Just don't shoot many shots in a row
with the flash covered; it can overheat the flash tube.)

Watch for glare reflecting off shiny objects. If you're not using a tent (discussed at the end of this chapter),
you may have to arrange your lights carefully to prevent reflections from ruining your shot.

286 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 287
Setting Up Your Shot

Choose an appropriate zoom setting (focal length) for your picture. Some digital cameras offer close focusing
only at particular focal lengths (that is, they focus closely at medium to telephoto settings, but not at the
wide-angle setting), so your choices may be limited. Remember that wide-angle settings can add apparent
distortion to your image, making things that are closer to the lens appear much larger than they normally look.
This effect is most pronounced with close-ups. A normal or short telephoto zoom setting may produce a more
natural look.

Frame your picture to exclude extraneous subject matter. Get in tight to produce a photo that will require a
minimum of enlargement and will be as sharp as possible. Close-up pictures are often an exception to the rule
about arranging your subjects off-center. Many good macro photos have the main subject smack in the middle
of the frame or evenly distributed throughout the frame, as shown in Figure 10.22.

Figure 10.22. Although that's not the only way to compose a close-up, macro photos often have the main subject
centered or evenly distributed within the photo.

Make sure your camera has been set to close-up or macro mode (usually represented by a flower icon on your
status display LCD).

Focus very carefully. Some cameras allow switching autofocus to a center-oriented mode. Use that if your
subject matter is indeed in the middle of the picture. Switch to manual focus if your camera offers it. You
might want to use aperture priority mode, if available, and select the smallest f-stop available to increase the
depth-of-field. And keep in mind what you learned about how depth-of-field is arranged: Two-thirds is
allocated to the area in front of the plane of sharpest focus, and only one-third is allocated to the area behind
it.

Check to make sure the back of the camera (where the sensor is located) is parallel to the plane in which your
main subject lies. That's the plane you'll be focusing on, and where the maximum amount of sharpness lies. If
the camera is tilted in relation to the plane of the main subject, only part of the subject will be in sharp focus.
Unless you're shooting for a special effect, you want as much sharpness as you can get. In Figure 10.23, the
strawberries and knife are all located in relatively the same plane so that all of them are in sharp focus.

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 287

288 Part II: Techniques Unlimited
Figure 10.23. All the subjects are in roughly the same plane, so all are in focus.

Watch your camera's focus indicator, which may be an LED light near the viewfinder that glows green (or
some other color) when the image is in focus.

Use your camera's LCD display to evaluate your framing, composition, and focus. The optical viewfinder of
your digital camera won't show you exactly what you are going to get and may indeed cut off part of the
picture area.

Smile!

The big moment has arrived. It's time to take your first close-up. Here are some last-second tips for you.

• Your digital camera may have several automatic focus lock methods. My own camera, for example,
can be set to continuous autofocus (changing focus at all times up until the moment of exposure) or to
"lock" at a particular focus when the shutter release is partially depressed. If you're taking photos
without a tripod, you may want to use continuous autofocus to compensate for slight movements you
make as you frame the photo. Locking focus at a particular point is best when you are confident that
the focus you have when you press the shutter release is the focus you want for the final picture.
• If your subject is inanimate and you're using a tripod, consider using your digital camera's self-timer
to trip the shutter after a delay of a few seconds. Even if you press the shutter release carefully, you
might shake the camera a little. Under incandescent illumination with a small f-stop, your camera will
probably be using a slow shutter speed that is susceptible to blurring with even a little camera shake.
The self-timer will let the camera and tripod come to rest.
• Some digital cameras also have a socket for a remote shutter release. These can also let you keep your
hands off the camera when taking a picture and have the added advantage of tripping the shutter at the
exact moment you want (just before the frog takes off, for example), rather than after a delay of
indeterminate length.
• Wait a few seconds after you hear the camera's shutter click (whether real or simulated) before doing
anything, until you are sure your camera is not making a lengthy exposure or time exposure. That
click might have been the shutter opening, and the camera might still be capturing the picture.
• Review your photo immediately on your camera's LCD display (or that big TV you set up) to check
for unwanted reflections (especially those produced by flash) and other problems.

288 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 289

Tip from the Pros: Avoiding Parallax Errors

There will be times when you simply must use your camera's optical viewfinder to take a
close-up photo. Perhaps you're outdoors and the sunlight washes out your camera's LCD screen.
Or, maybe you're taking a grab shot on the spur of the moment: It's either bring the camera to
your eye and snap or lose the picture entirely. Some photos don't require deep thought and
planning before you take them, too. Most of the close-ups I take for eBay auctions are of the
quick-and-dirty variety, using my camera's optical viewfinder.

In all these situations, you need to keep possible parallax errors in mind. Parallax causes
problems because what you see through the optical viewfinder is not the same as what is seen by
the camera's sensor through the taking lens. At differences of more than a few feet, this
difference is minor, but as your subject gets closer to the camera, the variance becomes
significant. At distances of a foot or less, a quarter to a third or more of what you think you see
through the viewfinder isn't shown in the actual picture.

The amount of image area affected is determined by the distance between the taking lens and the viewfinder,
as well as the distance to your subject. If the viewfinder is directly above the camera's lens, you'll lose a little
of what appears at the top of the viewfinder in your actual photo. If the viewfinder is off to the left, some of
the left of your image may be cut off. With many digital cameras, the viewfinder window is both above and to
the left of the taking lens, affording the opportunity of accidentally cropping your photo in two directions at
once. The default danger zones apply only when your camera is being held horizontally; if you're taking a
vertical photo, the area subject to parallax errors migrates along with your viewfinder.

More expensive cameras might have some compensation built into the optical viewfinder; it might tilt slightly
to compensate for parallax error. At the very low end, it's more common, though, to simply place guidelines in
the viewfinder that show where the "safe" area is, and expect the photographer to keep the subject matter lined
up properly. If you keep in mind that the correction marks in the viewfinder are only an approximation of
what your camera really sees, you can usually avoid the worst parallax transgressions. Adjust on the safe side
by including a little extra area around your main subject and you'll do fine.

Also remember that your camera's built-in electronic flash suffers from parallax error, too. At very close
distances, the flash will probably not illuminate the lower part of your subject. I am often able to fix this by
placing a small white card out of the picture area but located to bounce some of the flash illumination down
onto the subject.
< Day Day Up >
< Day Day Up >

Close-ups for Online Auctions

Judging from the flood of questions I've received from readers wanting to know how to take pictures for their
eBay auctions, this brand of close-up photography has to be one of the fastest-growing segments of the macro
universe. My whole family has the auction bug, too, so I've been called on to solve photographic problems for
them a few hundred times also. Most of the time the solutions are easy (until I was recently asked to
photograph a totally transparent plastic two-piece "ghost" candy mold in a realistic and exciting way), so I'll
pass along some tips here.

The most common question I receive about auction photography is what resolution is required for good
product close-ups. My stock answer is that because your auction pictures are unlikely to be displayed at
anything larger than about 600 x 400 pixels, it's tempting to consider buying a relatively low-resolution digital
camera for eBay close-ups. That's false economy for a number of reasons:

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 289

290 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

• If you start with a 3MP or better image, you can crop it mercilessly and still end up with a good 600 x
400-pixel close-up picture. Indeed, capturing a larger image means you don't even have to get as close
to your subject as you would with a lower-resolution camera, as you can see in Figure 10.24, which
was taken with a 3MP camera and then cropped and reduced in size for display on eBay. Even the
low-resolution version you see here is good enough for the web.

Figure 10.24. Taken with a 3-megapixel camera, these images were cropped and reduced in size for web
page display.

• Higher-resolution photos can be edited more easily in Photoshop or another image editor. Even with
my astounding photographic skills, I usually find it necessary to retouch images a bit (or a lot) before
posting them in auctions.
• I've discovered that many of the people who have no interest in a digital camera other than as a tool
for grabbing images for eBay soon discover just how much fun digital photography is. That's when
they wish they'd sprung for a better camera with some extra features that are suitable for
general-purpose photography.

Although this is a digital photography book, I should mention that for some kinds of auction close-ups, a
scanner is actually a better tool than a digital camera. If you're selling flat items such as old magazines,
stamps, coins, books, or similar goods, a scanner can be a fast and efficient way of grabbing macro views.
Figure 10.25 shows a coin captured with a digital camera (at left) and with a scanner (at right). The scanner
version took much less time to capture.

Figure 10.25. The digital camera version (left) took a lot longer to create than the scanned version (right).

290 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 291

When I sold off some of my surplus Robert A. Heinlein science-fiction collection, I did lay out some of the
materials on a seamless background and took a digital photo of the lot. However, with some of the rarer stuff,
such as 1950s first editions, the condition of the covers was very important. So, I scanned each book
individually, created a small thumbnail image that could be displayed on the auction page, and added an
HTML link to a full-sized digital image that showed every flaw and crease in the cover. The scanner proved to
be a better tool for that sort of image. You'll find more about scanning in my book Mastering Digital Scanning
with Slides, Film and Transparencies, published by Thomson Course Technology.

Here are some other tips for shooting close-ups for online auctions:

• Find a permanent nook or cranny in your home that you can set up as a semipermanent home studio
for your close-ups. Family members constantly, and without warning, approach me with cake pans or
candy molds or other items they want captured right now. A small corner supplied with a few lights
and a plain cloth background can be used repeatedly with little fuss.
• Be prepared to include some common object in the photo, such as a ruler, to show the scale of the
object. That helps avoid questions from potential bidders (who may not read the auction description
carefully) who want to know if your two-piece Dia de los Muertos skull candy mold is two inches or
four inches wide. For Figure 10.26, I included a laptop computer in the photo for scale, even though
the computer wasn't being sold along with the widget.

Figure 10.26. Include another object in the photo, if necessary, to show its relative size.

• Husband your time. I've spent 20 minutes photographing an item that might bring $100 in an eBay
auction and considered it time well-spent. I've also spent that much time shooting a commodity item
that sells for $8.95, because I had 100 of the little devils to peddle and would re-use the photograph
over and over. However, it's not smart to spend a lot of time on a one-of-a-kind object that won't bring
big bucks. If it's a $5 item, I hand my kids a spare digital camera and tell them to photograph it
themselves on the living room rug.
• Watch those colors. Buyers can be miffed if the item they purchase isn't quite the color they expected.
While there's nothing you can do to calibrate their monitor to match your own, you can still take care
in setting white balance and color correcting your final image to make it as accurate as possible.

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 291

292 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

• Optimize your depth-of-field. Selective focus may be cool artistically, but when you're shooting a
close-up of an item for eBay, you'll want it to have as much overall sharpness as possible.
• Let your photo tell a story and/or provide as much information as possible. One of the gadgets I sell is
a cable that plugs into the S-Video socket of a laptop computer and converts the output to the
composite signal required by older TVs (www.svideo-rca.com). I used to get e-mails from potential
bidders asking whether the S-Video cable had 4 pins or 7 pins, and just what the other end of the
cable looked like. I contrived the illustration shown in Figure 10.27, which does a pretty good job of
answering both questions.

Figure 10.27. Let your photograph provide as much information about the item as possible.

• Eliminate extraneous information. I shot Figure 10.27 against a seamless white background, then
boosted the brightness of the background in Photoshop so it dropped out completely, leaving the
"floating" image you see. Because the eBay web pages have a white background, my image blends
cleanly in with its surroundings, so there is no distracting border.
< Day Day Up >
< Day Day Up >

Project for Individual Study: Pitching a Tent

This chapter's special project is one that will benefit nearly anyone interested in close-up photography.
Building your own lighting tent can be the best move you ever made if you regularly photograph shiny things
that pose seemingly insurmountable reflection problems when captured using conventional lighting
techniques. This section will help you get started.

Lighting tents are closely related to those photographic "soft boxes" you've seen in photographers' studios. A
soft box is, as you might guess, a large box-like affair holding a light source and having a large diffusing
surface on the front to soften the light. They're widely used to provide flattering lighting for portraits and for
product photography where glare might be a problem. You can build your own soft box, too, but I think a tent
might be more useful for close-ups.

An easy way to create a small tent is to use a translucent, diffusing object that can fit around the subject you're
photographing. An ordinary one-gallon plastic milk container, like the one shown in Figure 10.28, can do a
good job. You'll want the kind that is white and translucent. Clean the jug carefully and cut off the bottom so
you can place it over your subject. Enlarge the opening in the top so your camera lens will fit through. You
can light the jug from all sides to provide a soft, even lighting, while photographing the subject through the
top.

Figure 10.28. A translucent plastic milk container can be pressed into service as a makeshift tent.

292 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 293

This makeshift kind of tent isn't especially versatile. Only small objects fit inside, and your camera-to-subject
distance may be constrained by the size of the jug. A better choice is to build a full-fledged tent framework
out of lumber, using 2 x 2 or 2 x 4 studs to create an open cube. Then staple or fasten sheets of muslin, white
plastic trash bags, or other translucent white material to each face of the cube. Attach the diffusing material
only at the top of the frame.

Flip up the material on any side to insert your macro subject matter on an appropriate stand or backdrop. You
can cut flaps in the material on all four sides, plus the top, so you can insert the camera lens as required, or
close the flap and move to another side for a different angle. I like to set the tent apparatus on a tall barstool so
I can get close from any angle and move around for the best perspective.

A cubical tent of this sort offers all kinds of flexibility in terms of use and how you light it. For example, you
can place stronger lights on one side and slightly weaker lights on the other to provide a soft modeling effect.
Or hit all the sides with bright lights for flat, low-contrast illumination. Figure 10.29 shows a photograph of a
coin made inside a tent. There was enough directional quality to the light so that the raised features of the coin
can still be seen easily. Yet, nearly all the glare that a direct light source would produce has been eliminated.
It may not be the best coin photograph in the world, but you can see how the soft lighting has no glare to
interfere with viewing the coin's features, but there is still enough contrast to see the texture of the coin.

Figure 10.29. Tent lighting can be directional, yet soft and without glare.

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 293

294 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

< Day Day Up >

< Day Day Up >

Some Final Tips

I'll close out this chapter with a few final tips that might come in handy for specific types of close-up
photography.

• Chill out. Some nature photographers looking to increase the patience of their insectoid subjects put
the little creatures in an icebox for a few moments before posing them carefully back in more natural
surroundings. Chilled butterflies, for example, will remain in one spot long enough for an interesting
series of pictures. A brief visit to colder climes (a totable ice chest may work fine in the field) doesn't
harm them in the least.
• Have a spritz bottle handy. Flowers, vegetables, fruit, and spiderwebs often look better when dusted
with a light mist, as you can see in Figure 10.30. Don't over-dew (hehehe) the moisture and your
photos can be enhanced.

Figure 10.30. A spritz of water can add interest to a fruit or vegetable picture.

294 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 295

• Make creative use of reflections. I spent a lot of time in this chapter telling you how to avoid
reflections, but this is one rule that deserves to be shattered from time to time. Some interesting
close-up photos have been produced when the photographer accidentally or intentionally included a
reflection of something in the shiny surface of the subject being photographed. It might have been a
photographic umbrella or even the photographer. When photographing spoons, chromium bumpers, or
anything imprinted with an "Objects are closer than they appear" warning, see what you can do
creatively with the reflection. Check out Figure 10.31 for an example.

Figure 10.31. A close-up photo of a mirror yields a noncloseup view of a rollercoaster.

< Day Day Up >

< Day Day Up >

Next Up
That's all, folks! The next step is up to you. I hope I've filled you with enough information about digital
photography and picture taking to equip you to handle just about any situation that comes up, and enough
excitement to fire your imagination with new ideas.

I've tried to pass along some of the tricks I've picked up over the years as I explored the fascinating field of
photography. Still, we've only scratched the surface. Analog (film) photography hasn't yet been fully explored
in its 165 plus years of existence, so you can be certain that digital photography has many surprises in store
for all of us. As long as cameras keep getting better and their capabilities grow, the boundaries of digital
photography will never be approached. My goal is that this book will encourage you to explore photography
further, and that the chapters have held lots of nuggets and idea starters that will help you come up with the
kind of images that evoke those, "Wow! How was that photo created?" comments we all secretly yearn for.
< Day Day Up >
< Day Day Up >

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 295

296 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Appendix Illustrated Glossary of Photographic and Digital

Terms
If you've turned to this portion of the book, there's probably a technical term you don't fully understand, or,
perhaps, you'd like to see how related photographic concepts or techniques fit together. So, I've stuffed it with
all the most common words you're likely to encounter when working with your digital camera and the
photographs you create. This glossary includes most of the jargon included in this book, and some that is not
within these pages, but which you'll frequently come across as you work. Most of the terms relate to digital
cameras or photography, but I've sprinkled in a little information about image editing and photo reproduction.

16-bit images
So-called "48-bit" High Dynamic Range image files that contain 16 bits of information (65, 535
different tones) per channel, rather than the 8 bits per channel found in ordinary, 24-bit 16.8 million
color images. Photoshop CS 2.0 has new HDR features that let you combine several images taken at
different exposures to produce one extended-range image.

additive primary colors

The red, green, and blue hues which are used alone or in combinations to create all other colors you
capture with a digital camera, view on a computer monitor, or work within an image-editing program
like Photoshop. See also CMYK.

AE/AF lock
A control that lets you lock the current autoexposure and/or autofocus settings prior to taking a
picture, freeing you from having to hold the shutter release partially depressed.

Figure A.1. The additive primary colors, red, green, and blue combine to make other colors, plus white.

airbrush

296 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 297
Originally developed as an artist's tool that sprays a fine mist of paint, the computer version of an
airbrush is used both for illustration and retouching in most imageediting programs.

ambient lighting
Diffuse nondirectional lighting that doesn't appear to come from a specific source but, rather, bounces
off walls, ceilings, and other objects in the scene when a picture is taken.

analog/digital converter
In digital imaging, the electronics built into a camera or scanner that convert the analog information
captured by the sensor into digital bits that can be stored as an image bitmap. See also bitmap.

angle-of-view
The area of a scene that a lens can capture, determined by the focal length of the lens. Lenses with a
shorter focal length have a wider angle-of-view than lenses with a longer focal length.

anti-alias
A process in image editing that smoothes the rough edges in images (called jaggies or staircasing) by
creating partially transparent pixels along the boundaries that are merged into a smoother line by our
eyes.

aperture-preferred
A camera setting that allows you to specify the lens opening or f-stop that you want to use, with the
camera selecting the required shutter speed automatically based on its light-meter reading. See also
shutter-preferred.

aperture ring
A control on the barrel of many SLR lenses that allows setting the f-stop manually. Some lenses have
the aperture set by the camera only, and lack this ring.

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 297

298 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

artifact
A type of noise in an image, or an unintentional image component produced in error by a digital
camera or scanner during processing.

aspect ratio
The proportions of an image as printed, displayed on a monitor, or captured by a digital camera. An 8
x 10-inch or 16 x 20-inch photo each have a 4:5 aspect ratio. Your monitor set to 800 x 600, 1024 x
768, or 1600 x 1200 pixels has a 4:3 aspect ratio. When you change the aspect ratio of an image, you
must crop out part of the image area, or create some blank space at top or sides.

autofocus
A camera setting that allows the camera to choose the correct focus distance for you, usually based on
the contrast of an image (the image will be at maximum contrast when in sharp focus) or a mechanism
such as an infrared sensor that measures the actual distance to the subject. Cameras can be set for
single autofocus (the lens is not focused until the shutter release is partially depressed) or continuous
autofocus (the lens refocuses constantly as you frame and reframe the image).

Figure A.2. A dramatic view of an amusement park taken at the 70mm zoom setting (top) becomes even
more dramatic at the 35mm wide-angle setting.

298 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 299

autofocus assist lamp

A light source built into a digital camera that provides extra illumination that the autofocus system
can use to focus dimly lit subjects.

averaging meter
A light-measuring device that calculates exposure based on the overall brightness of the entire image
area. Averaging tends to produce the best exposure when a scene is evenly lit or contains equal
amounts of bright and dark areas that contain detail. Most digital cameras use much more
sophisticated exposure measuring systems based in center-weighting, spot-reading, or calculating
exposure from a matrix of many different picture areas. See also spot meter.

B (bulb)
A camera setting for making long exposures. Press down the shutter button and the shutter remains
open until the shutter button is released. Bulb exposures can also be made using a camera's electronic
remote control, or a cable release cord that fits to the camera. See also T (Time).

background
In photography, the background is the area behind your main subject of interest.

backlighting
A lighting effect produced when the main light source is located behind the subject. Backlighting can
be used to create a silhouette effect, or to illuminate translucent objects. See also front lighting, fill
lighting, and ambient lighting. Backlighting is also a technology for illuminating an LCD display
from the rear, making it easier to view under high ambient lighting conditions.

balance
An image that has equal elements on all sides.

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 299

300 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

barrel distortion
A lens defect typically associated with wide-angle focal lengths that causes straight lines at the top or
side edges of an image to bow outward into a barrel shape. See also pincushion distortion.

beam splitter
A partially silvered mirror or prism that divides incoming light into two portions, usually to send most
of the illumination to the viewfinder and part of it to an exposure meter or focusing mechanism.

bilevel image
An image that stores only black-and-white information, with no gray tones.

bit
A binary digit, either a 1 or a 0, used to measure the color depth (number of different colors) in an
image. For example, a grayscale 8-bit scan may contain up to 256 different tones (28), while a 24-bit
scan can contain 16.8 million different colors (224).

bitmap
A way of representing an image as rows and columns of values, with each picture element stored as
one or more numbers that represent its brightness and color. In Photoshop parlance, a bitmap is a
bilevel black/white-only image.

black
The color formed by the absence of reflected or transmitted light.

black point
The tonal level of an image where blacks begin to provide important image information, usually
measured by using a histogram. When correcting an image with a digital camera that has an on-screen
histogram, or within an image editor, you'll usually want to set the histogram's black point at the place

300 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 301

where these tones exist.

Figure A.3. Backlighting produces a slight silhouette effect, and also serves to illuminate the translucent
petals of this flower.

blend
To create a more realistic transition between image areas, as when retouching or compositing in
image editing.

blooming
An image distortion caused when a photosite in an image sensor has absorbed all the photons it can
handle, so that additional photons reaching that pixel overflow to affect surrounding pixels producing
unwanted brightness and overexposure around the edges of objects.

blowup
An enlargement, usually a print, made from a negative, transparency, or digital file.

blur
In photography, to soften an image or part of an image by throwing it out of focus, or to lose
sharpness because of subject or camera motion. In image editing, blurring is the softening of an area
by reducing the contrast between pixels that form the edges.

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 301

302 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

bokeh
A buzzword used to describe the aesthetic qualities of the out-of-focus parts of an image, with some
lenses producing "good" bokeh and others offering "bad" bokeh. Boke is a Japanese word for "blur,"
and the h was added to keep English speakers from rhyming it with broke.

Out-of-focus points of light become discs, called the circle of confusion. Some lenses produce a
uniformly illuminated disc. Others, most notably mirror or catadioptic lenses, produce a disk that has
a bright edge and a dark center, producing a "doughnut" effect, which is the worst from a bokeh
standpoint. Lenses that generate a bright center that fades to a darker edge are favored, because their
bokeh allows the circle of confusion to blend more smoothly with the surroundings. The bokeh
characteristics of a lens are most important when you are using selective focus (say, when shooting a
portrait) to deemphasize the background, or when shallow depth-of-field is a given because you're
working with a macro lens, long telephoto, or with a wide-open aperture. See also mirror lens, circle
of confusion.

bounce lighting
Light bounced off a reflector, including ceiling and walls, to provide a soft, natural-looking light.

bracketing
Taking a series of photographs of the same subject at different settings to help ensure that one setting
will be the correct one. Many digital cameras will automatically snap off a series of bracketed
exposures for you. Other settings, such as color and white balance, can also be "bracketed" with some
models. Digital cameras may even allow you to choose the order in which bracketed settings are
applied.

brightness
The amount of light and dark shades in an image, usually represented as a percentage from 0 percent
(black) to 100 percent (white).

broad lighting
A portrait lighting arrangement in which the main light source illuminates the side of the face closest
to the camera.

302 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 303

buffer
A digital camera's internal memory which stores an image immediately after it is taken until the
image can be written to the camera's non-volatile (semi-permanent) memory or a memory card.

Figure A.4. The out-of-focus discs in the background are slightly lighter at the edges than in the center,
producing "bad" bokeh.

burn
A darkroom technique, mimicked in image editing, which involves exposing part of a print for a
longer period, making it darker than it would be with a straight exposure.

burst mode
The digital camera's equivalent of the film camera's "motor drive," used to take multiple shots within
a short period of time.

calibration
A process used to correct for the differences in the output of a printer or monitor when compared to
the original image. Once you've calibrated your scanner, monitor, and/or your image editor, the
images you see on the screen more closely represent what you'll get from your printer, even though
calibration is never perfect.

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 303

304 Part II: Techniques Unlimited
Camera RAW
A plug-in included with Photoshop CS 2.0 that can manipulate the unprocessed images captured by
digital cameras.

camera shake
Movement of the camera, aggravated by slower shutter speeds, which produces a blurred image.
Some of the latest digital cameras from Konica Minolta, Olympus, and others have image
stabilization features that correct for camera shake, while a few highend interchangeable lenses have a
similar vibration correction or reduction feature. See also image stabilization.

candid pictures
Unposed photographs, often taken at a wedding or other event at which (often) formal, posed images
are also taken.

cast
An undesirable tinge of color in an image.

CCD
Charge Coupled Device. A type of solid-state sensor that captures the image, used in scanners and
digital cameras.

center-weighted meter
A light-measuring device that emphasizes the area in the middle of the frame when calculating the
correct exposure for an image. See also averaging meter and spot meter.

chroma
Color or hue.

304 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 305

chromatic aberration
An image defect, often seen as green or purple fringing around the edges of an object, caused by a
lens failing to focus all colors of a light source at the same point. See also fringing.

chromatic color
A color with at least one hue and a visible level of color saturation.

chrome
An informal photographic term used as a generic for any kind of color transparency, including
Kodachrome, Ektachrome, or Fujichrome.

CIE (Commission Internationale de l'Eclairage)

An international organization of scientists who work with matters relating to color and lighting. The
organization is also called the International Commission on Illumination.

circle of confusion
A term applied to the fuzzy discs produced when a point of light is out of focus. The circle of
confusion is not a fixed size. The viewing distance and amount of enlargement of the image determine
whether we see a particular spot on the image as a point or as a disc.

close-up lens
A lens add-on that allows you to take pictures at a distance that is less than the closest-focusing
distance of the lens alone.

CMOS
Complementary Metal-Oxide Semiconductor. A method for manufacturing a type of solid-state sensor
that captures the image, used in scanners and digital cameras.

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 305

306 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

CMY(K) color model

A way of defining all possible colors in percentages of cyan, magenta, yellow, and frequently, black.
Black is added to improve rendition of shadow detail. CMYK is commonly used for printing (both on
press and with your inkjet or laser color printer). Photoshop can work with images using the CMYK
model, but converts any images in that mode back to RGB for display on your computer monitor.

color correction
Changing the relative amounts of color in an image to produce a desired effect, typically a more
accurate representation of those colors. Color correction can fix faulty color balance in the original
image, or compensate for the deficiencies of the inks used to reproduce the image.

Color Replacement
A tool in Photoshop and Photoshop Elements that simplifies changing all of a selected color to
another hue.

Comp
A preview that combines type, graphics, and photographic material in a layout.

composite
In photography, an image composed of two or more parts of an image, taken either from a single
photo or multiple photos. Usually composites are created so that the elements blend smoothly
together.

composition
The pleasing or artistic arrangement of the main subject, other objects in a scene, and/or the
foreground and background.

306 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 307
compression
Reducing the size of a file by encoding using fewer bits of information to represent the original. Some
compression schemes, such as JPEG, operate by discarding some image information, while others,
such as TIFF, preserve all the detail in the original, discarding only redundant data. See also GIF,
JPEG, and TIFF.

continuous autofocus
An automatic focusing setting in which the camera constantly refocuses the image as you frame the
picture. This setting is often the best choice for moving subjects. See also single autofocus.

continuous tone
Images that contain tones from the darkest to the lightest, with a theoretically infinite range of
variations in between.

contrast
The range between the lightest and darkest tones in an image. A high-contrast image is one in which
the shades fall at the extremes of the range between white and black. In a low-contrast image, the
tones are closer together.

contrasty
Having higher than optimal contrast.

crop
To trim an image or page by adjusting its boundaries.

dedicated flash
An electronic flash unit designed to work with the automatic exposure features of a specific camera.

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 307

308 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

densitometer
An electronic device used to measure the amount of light reflected by or transmitted through a piece
of artwork, used to determine accurate exposure when making copies or color separations.

density
The ability of an object to stop or absorb light. The less light reflected or transmitted by an object, the
higher its density.

Figure A.5. The subtractive colors yellow, magenta, and cyan combine to produce all the other colors,
including black.

depth-of-field
A distance range in a photograph in which all included portions of an image are at least acceptably
sharp. With a dSLR, you can see the available depth-of-field at the taking aperture by pressing the
depth-offield preview button, or estimate the range by viewing the depth-of-field scale found on many
lenses.

depth-of-focus
The distance range over which the film could be shifted at the film plane inside the camera and still
have the subject appear in sharp focus; often misused to mean depth-of-field. See also depth-of-field.

desaturate
To reduce the purity or vividness of a color, making a color appear to be washed out or diluted.

308 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 309

diaphragm
An adjustable component used to control the amount of light striking the film or sensor, similar to the
iris in the human eye, which can open and close to provide specific sized lens openings, or f-stops.

diffuse lighting
Soft, low-contrast lighting.

diffusion
Softening of detail in an image by randomly distributing gray tones in an area of an image to produce
a fuzzy effect. Diffusion can be added when the picture is taken, often through the use of diffusion
filters, or in post-processing with an image editor. Diffusion can be beneficial to disguise defects in an
image and is particularly useful for portraits of women.

digital processing chip

A solid-state device found in digital cameras that's in charge of applying the image algorithms to the
raw picture data prior to storage on the memory card.

digital zoom
A way of simulating actual or optical zoom by magnifying the pixels captured by the sensor. This
technique generally produces inferior results to optical zoom.

diopter
A value used to represent the magnification power of a lens, calculated as the reciprocal of a lens'
focal length (in meters). Diopters are most often used to represent the optical correction used in a
viewfinder to adjust for limitations of the photographer's eyesight, and to describe the magnification
of a close-up lens attachment.

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 309

310 Part II: Techniques Unlimited
dither
A method of distributing pixels to extend the number of colors or tones that can be represented. For
example, two pixels of different colors can be arranged in such a way that the eye visually merges
them into a third color.

dock
A device furnished with some point-and-shoot digital cameras that links up to your computer or
printer, and allows interfacing the camera with the other devices simply by dropping it in the dock's
cradle.

dodging
A darkroom term for blocking part of an image as it is exposed, lightening its tones. Image editors can
mimic this effect by lightening portions of an image using a brush-like tool.

dot
A unit used to represent a portion of an image, often groups of pixels collected to produce larger
printer dots of varying sizes to represent gray or a specific color.

Figure A.6. Depth-of-field determines how much of an image, such as the prairie dog in this photo, is in
sharp focus, and what parts, such as the background and foreground, are out of focus.

Figure A.7. Diffusion can hide defects and produce a soft, romantic glow in a female subject.

310 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 311

dot gain
The tendency of a printing dot to grow from the original size to its final printed size on paper. This
effect is most pronounced on offset presses using poor-quality papers, which allow ink to absorb and
spread, reducing the quality of the printed output, particularly in the case of photos that use halftone
dots.

dots per inch (dpi)

The resolution of a printed image, expressed in the number of printer dots in an inch. You'll often see
dpi used to refer to monitor screen resolution, or the resolution of scanners. However, neither of these
uses dots; the correct term for a monitor is pixels per inch (ppi), whereas a scanner captures a
particular number of samples per inch (spi).

dummy
A rough approximation of a publication, used to evaluate the layout.

dye sublimation
A printing technique in which solid inks on a moving ribbon containing separate cyan, magenta, and
yellow panels are heated and transferred to a polyester substrate to form an image. Because the
amount of color applied can be varied by the degree of heat (and up to 256 different hues for each
color), dye sublimation devices can print as many as 16.8 million different colors.

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 311

312 Part II: Techniques Unlimited
electronic viewfinder (EVF)
An LCD located inside a digital camera and used to provide a view of the subject based on the image
generated by the camera's sensor.

emulsion
The light-sensitive coating on a piece of film, paper, or printing plate. When making prints or copies,
it's important to know which side is the emulsion side so the image can be exposed in the correct
orientation (not reversed). Image editors such as Photoshop include "emulsion side up" and "emulsion
side down" options in their print preview feature.

equivalent focal length

A digital camera's focal length translated into the corresponding values for a 35mm film camera. For
example, a 5.8mm to 17.4mm lens on a digital camera might provide the same view as a 38mm to
114mm zoom with a film camera. Equivalents are needed because sensor size and lens focal lengths
are not standardized for digital cameras, and translating the values provides a basis for comparison.

Exif
Exchangeable Image File Format. Developed to standardize the exchange of image data between
hardware devices and software. A variation on JPEG, Exif is used by most digital cameras, and
includes information such as the date and time a photo was taken, the camera settings, resolution,
amount of compression, and other data.

existing light
In photography, the illumination that is already present in a scene. Existing light can include daylight
or the artificial lighting currently being used, but is not considered to be electronic flash or additional
lamps set up by the photographer.

export
To transfer text or images from a document to another format.

312 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 313
exposure
The amount of light allowed to reach the film or sensor, determined by the intensity of the light, the
amount admitted by the iris of the lens, and the length of time determined by the shutter speed.

exposure program
An automatic setting in a digital camera that provides the optimum combination of shutter speed and
f-stop at a given level of illumination. For example a "sports" exposure program would use a faster,
action-stopping shutter speed and larger lens opening instead of the smaller, depth-of-field-enhancing
lens opening and slower shutter speed that might be favored by a "close-up" program at exactly the
same light level.

exposure values (EV)

EV settings are a way of adding or decreasing exposure without the need to reference f-stops or
shutter speeds. For example, if you tell your camera to add +1EV, it will provide twice as much
exposure, either by using a larger f-stop, slower shutter speed, or both.

eyedropper
An image-editing tool used to sample color from one part of an image so it can be used to paint, draw,
or fill elsewhere in the image. Within some features, the eyedropper can be used to define the actual
black points and white points in an image.

feather
To fade out the borders of an image element, so it will blend in more smoothly with another layer.

fill lighting
In photography, lighting used to illuminate shadows. Reflectors or additional incandescent lighting or
electronic flash can be used to brighten shadows. One common technique outdoors is to use the
camera's flash as a fill.

filter

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 313

314 Part II: Techniques Unlimited
In photography, a device that fits over the lens, changing the light in some way. In image editing, a
feature that changes the pixels in an image to produce blurring, sharpening, and other special effects.
Photoshop CS includes several new filter effects, including Lens Blur and Photo Filters.

FireWire (IEEE-1394)
A fast serial interface used by scanners, digital cameras, printers, and other devices to transfer
information.

flash sync
The timing mechanism that ensures that an internal or external electronic flash fires at the correct time
during the exposure cycle. An SLR's flash sync speed is the highest shutter speed that can be used
with flash. See also front curtain sync and rear curtain sync.

flat
An image with low contrast.

flatbed scanner
A type of scanner that reads one line of an image at a time, recording it as a series of samples, or
pixels.

focal plane
An imaginary line, perpendicular to the optical access, which passes through the focal point forming a
plane of sharp focus when the lens is set at infinity.

focal length
The distance between the film and the optical center of the lens when the lens is focused on infinity,
usually measured in millimeters.

314 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 315

focus
To adjust the lens to produce a sharp image.

focus lock
A camera feature that lets you freeze the automatic focus of the lens at a certain point, when the
subject you want to capture is in sharp focus.

focus range
The minimum and maximum distances within which a camera is able to produce a sharp image, such
as 2 inches to infinity.

Figure A.8. Fill flash has brightened the shadows on this mascot's jersey.

focus servo
A mechanism that adjusts the focus distance automatically. The focus servo can be set to single
autofocus, which focuses the lens only when the shutter release is partially depressed, and continuous
autofocus, which adjusts focus constantly as the camera is used.

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 315

316 Part II: Techniques Unlimited
focus tracking
The ability of the automatic focus feature of a camera to change focus as the distance between the
subject and the camera changes. One type of focus tracking is predictive, in which the mechanism
anticipates the motion of the object being focused on, and adjusts the focus to suit.

four-color printing
Another term for process color, in which cyan, magenta, yellow, and black inks are used to reproduce
all the colors in the original image.

framing
In photography, composing your image in the viewfinder. In composition, using elements of an image
to form a sort of picture frame around an important subject.

frequency
The number of lines per inch in a halftone screen.

fringing
A chromatic aberration that produces fringes of color around the edges of subjects, caused by a lens'
inability to focus the various wavelengths of light onto the same spot. Purple fringing is especially
troublesome with backlit images.

front-curtain sync
The default kind of electronic flash synchronization technique, originally associated with focal plane
shutters, which consist of a traveling set of curtains, including a front curtain (which opens to reveal
the film or sensor) and a rear curtain (which follows at a distance determined by shutter speed to
conceal the film or sensor at the conclusion of the exposure).

For a flash picture to be taken, the entire sensor must be exposed at one time to the brief flash
exposure, so the image is exposed after the front curtain has reached the other side of the focal plane,
but before the rear curtain begins to move.

Front-curtain sync causes the flash to fire at the beginning of this period when the shutter is
completely open, in the instant that the first curtain of the focal plane shutter finishes its movement
across the film or sensor plane. With slow shutter speeds, this feature can create a blur effect from the

316 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 317

ambient light, showing as patterns that follow a moving subject with subject shown sharply frozen at
the beginning of the blur trail (think of an image of The Flash running backwards). See also
rear-curtain sync.

front lighting
Illumination that comes from the direction of the camera. See also backlighting and sidelighting.

Figure A.9. Extreme magnification reveals fringing around the player's shoulders, a chromatic aberration
caused by the lens' inability to focus all the colors of light on the same spot.

f-stop
The relative size of the lens aperture, which helps determine both exposure and depth-of-field. The
larger the f-stop number, the smaller the f-stop itself. It helps to think of f-stops as denominators of
fractions, so that f2 is larger than f4, which is larger than f8, just as 1/2, 1/4, and 1/8 represent ever
smaller fractions. In photography, a given f-stop number is multiplied by 1.4 to arrive at the next
number that admits exactly half as much light. So, f1.4 is twice as large as f2.0 (1.4 x 1.4), which is
twice as large as f2.8 (2 x 1.4), which is twice as large as f4 (2.8 x 1.4). The f-stops which follow are
f5.6, f8, f11, f16, f22, f32, and so on.

full-color image
An image that uses 24-bit color, 16.8 million possible hues. Images are sometimes captured in a
scanner with more colors, but the colors are reduced to the best 16.8 million shades for manipulation
in image editing.

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 317

318 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

gamma
A numerical way of representing the contrast of an image. Devices such as monitors typically don't
reproduce the tones in an image in straight-line fashion (all colors represented in exactly the same
way as they appear in the original). Instead, some tones may be favored over others, and gamma
provides a method of tonal correction that takes the human eye's perception of neighboring values into
account. Gamma values range from 1.0 to about 2.5. The Macintosh has traditionally used a gamma
of 1.8, which is relatively flat compared to television. Windows PCs use a 2.2 gamma value, which
has more contrast and is more saturated.

gamma correction
A method for changing the brightness, contrast, or color balance of an image by assigning new values
to the gray or color tones of an image to more closely represent the original shades. Gamma
correction can be either linear or nonlinear. Linear correction applies the same amount of change to
all the tones. Nonlinear correction varies the changes tone-by-tone, or in highlight, midtone, and
shadow areas separately to produce a more accurate or improved appearance.

gamut
The range of viewable and printable colors for a particular color model, such as RGB (used for
monitors) or CMYK (used for printing).

Gaussian blur
A method of diffusing an image using a bell-shaped curve to calculate the pixels which will be
blurred, rather than blurring all pixels, producing a more random, less "processed" look.

GIF
An image file format limited to 256 different colors that compresses the information by combining
similar colors and discarding the rest. Condensing a 16.8-million-color photographic image to only
256 different hues often produces a poor-quality image, but GIF is useful for images that don't have a
great many colors, such as charts or graphs. The GIF format also includes transparency options, and
can include multiple images to produce animations that may be viewed on a web page or other
application. See also JPEG and TIFF.

318 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 319
graduated filter
A lens attachment with variable density or color from one edge to another. A graduated neutral
density filter, for example, can be oriented so the neutral density portion is concentrated at the top of
the lens' view with the less dense or clear portion at the bottom, thus reducing the amount of light
from a very bright sky while not interfering with the exposure of the landscape in the foreground.
Graduated filters can also be split into several color sections to provide a color gradient between
portions of the image.

grain
The metallic silver in film which forms the photographic image. The term is often applied to the
seemingly random noise in an image (both conventional and digital) that provides an overall texture.

gray card
A piece of cardboard or other material with a standardized 18 percent reflectance. Gray cards can be
used as a reference for determining correct exposure.

grayscale image
An image represented using 256 shades of gray. Scanners often capture grayscale images with 1,024
or more tones, but reduce them to 256 grays for manipulation by Photoshop.

halftone
A method used to reproduce continuous-tone images, representing the image as a series of dots.

high contrast
A wide range of density in a print, negative, or other image.

highlights
The brightest parts of an image containing detail.

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 319

320 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

histogram
A kind of chart, often available on the LCD of digital cameras for exposure evaluation, which shows
the relationship of tones in an image using a series of 256 vertical "bars," one for each brightness
level. A histogram chart typically looks like a curve with one or more slopes and peaks, depending on
how many highlight, midtone, and shadow tones are present in the image.

Histogram palette
A palette in Photoshop that allows making changes in tonal values using controls that adjust the
white, middle gray, and black points of an image. Unlike the histogram included with Photoshop's
Levels command, this palette is available for use even when you're using other tools.

hot shoe
A mount on top of a camera used to hold an electronic flash, while providing an electrical connection
between the flash and the camera.

hue
The color of light that is reflected from an opaque object or transmitted through a transparent one.

hyperfocal distance
A point of focus where everything from half that distance to infinity appears to be acceptably sharp.
For example, if your lens has a hyperfocal distance of 4 feet, everything from 2 feet to infinity would
be sharp. The hyperfocal distance varies by the lens and the aperture in use. If you know you'll be
making a "grab" shot without warning, sometimes it is useful to turn off your camera's automatic
focus and set the lens to infinity, or, better yet, the hyperfocal distance. Then, you can snap off a quick
picture without having to wait for the lag that occurs with most digital cameras as their autofocus
locks in.

image rotation
A feature found in some digital cameras, which sense whether a picture was taken in horizontal or
vertical orientation. That information is embedded in the picture file so that the camera and
compatible software applications can automatically display the image in the correct orientation.

320 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 321
Images can also be rotated manually in an image editor.

image stabilization
A technology that compensates for camera shake, usually by adjusting the position of the camera
sensor or lens elements in response to movements of the camera.

Figure A.10. A shutter speed of 1/8th second is too slow to prevent blur from camera shake (top), but
works just fine when the camera's image stabilization feature is turned on.

incident light
Light falling on a surface.

indexed color image

An image with 256 different colors, as opposed to a grayscale image, which has 256 different shades
of the tones between black and white.

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 321

322 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

infinity
A distance so great that any object at that distance will be reproduced sharply if the lens is focused at
the infinity position.

interchangeable lens
Lens designed to be readily attached to and detached from a specific camera model; a feature found in
more sophisticated digital cameras.

International Standards Organization (ISO)

A governing body that provides standards, including those used to represent film speed, or the
equivalent sensitivity of a digital camera's sensor. Digital camera sensitivity is expressed in ISO
settings.

interpolation
A technique digital cameras, scanners, and image editors use to create new pixels required whenever
you resize or change the resolution of an image based on the values of surrounding pixels. Devices
such as scanners and digital cameras can also use interpolation to create pixels in addition to those
actually captured, thereby increasing the apparent resolution or color information in an image.

invert
In image editing, to change an image into its negative; black becomes white, white becomes black,
dark gray becomes light gray, and so forth. Colors are also changed to the complementary color;
green becomes magenta, blue turns to yellow, and red is changed to cyan.

iris
A set of thin overlapping metal leaves in a camera lens that pivot outwards to form a circular opening
of variable size to control the amount of light that can pass through a lens.

322 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 323
jaggies
Staircasing effect of lines that are not perfectly horizontal or vertical, caused by pixels that are too
large to represent the line accurately. See also anti-alias.

JPEG (Joint Photographic Experts Group)

A file format that supports 24-bit color and reduces file sizes by selectively discarding image data.
Digital cameras generally use JPEG compression to pack more images onto memory cards. You can
select how much compression is used (and therefore how much information is thrown away) by
selecting from among the Standard, Fine, Super Fine, or other quality settings offered by your camera.
See also GIF and TIFF.

Kelvin (K)
A unit of measurement based on the absolute temperature scale in which absolute zero is zero; used to
describe the color of continuous spectrum light sources. Sunlight has a color temperature of
5,500-6,000K; indoor illumination is about 3,400K.

lag time
The interval between when the shutter is pressed and when the picture is actually taken. During that
span, the camera may be automatically focusing and calculating exposure. With digital SLRs, lag time
is generally very short; with non-dSLRs, the elapsed time easily can be one second or more.

Figure A.11. Jaggies result when the pixels in an image are too large to represent a
non-horizontal/vertical line smoothly.

landscape

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 323

324 Part II: Techniques Unlimited
The orientation of a page in which the longest dimension is horizontal, also called wide orientation.

latitude
The range of camera exposures that produces acceptable images with a particular digital sensor or
film.

layer
A way of managing elements of an image in stackable overlays that can be manipulated separately,
moved to a different stacking order, or made partially or fully transparent. Photoshop allows
collecting layers into layer sets.

lens
One or more elements of optical glass or similar material designed to collect and focus rays of light to
form a sharp image on the film, paper, sensor, or a screen.

lens aperture
The lens opening, or iris, that admits light to the film or sensor. The size of the lens aperture is usually
measured in f-stops. See also f-stop and iris.

lens flare
A feature of conventional photography that is both a bane and creative outlet. It is an effect produced
by the reflection of light internally among elements of an optical lens. Bright light sources within or
just outside the field of view cause lens flare. Flare can be reduced by the use of coatings on the lens
elements or with the use of lens hoods. Photographers sometimes use the effect as a creative
technique, and Photoshop includes a filter that lets you add lens flare at your whim.

lens hood
A device that shades the lens, protecting it from extraneous light outside the actual picture area, which
can reduce the contrast of the image or allow lens flare.

324 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 325

lens speed
The largest lens opening (smallest f-number) at which a lens can be set. A fast lens transmits more
light and has a larger opening than a slow lens. Determined by the maximum aperture of the lens in
relation to its focal length; the "speed" of a lens is relative: A 400 mm lens with a maximum aperture
of f/3.5 is considered extremely fast, while a 28mm f/3.5 lens is thought to be relatively slow.

lighten
A Photoshop function that is the equivalent to the photographic darkroom technique of dodging.
Tones in a given area of an image are gradually changed to lighter values.

lighting ratio
The proportional relationship between the amount of light falling on the subject from the main light
and other lights, expressed in a ratio, such as 3:1.

line art
Usually, images that consist only of white pixels and one color, represented in Photoshop as a bitmap.

line screen
The resolution or frequency of a halftone screen, expressed in lines per inch.

lithography
Another name for offset printing.

lossless compression
An image-compression scheme, such as TIFF, that preserves all image detail. When the image is
decompressed, it is identical to the original version.

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 325

326 Part II: Techniques Unlimited
Figure A.12. Even when the sun or another bright object is not actually within the picture area, it can
cause reduced contrast and bright areas in an image.

lossy compression
An image-compression scheme, such as JPEG, that creates smaller files by discarding image
information, which can affect image quality.

luminance
The brightness or intensity of an image, determined by the amount of gray in a hue.

LZW compression
A method of compacting TIFF files using the Lempel-Ziv Welch compression algorithm, an optional
compression scheme offered by some digital cameras and image editors.

macro lens
A lens that provides continuous focusing from infinity to extreme close-ups, often to a reproduction
ratio of 1:2 (half life-size) or 1:1 (life-size).

macro photography
The process of taking photographs of small objects at magnifications of 1X or more.

326 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 327

magnification ratio
A relationship that represents the amount of enlargement provided by the macro setting of the zoom
lenses, macro lens, or with other close-up devices.

Match Color
A new feature of Photoshop that allows synchronizing color palettes between images to provide
consistent hues.

matrix metering
A system of exposure calculation that looks at many different segments of an image to determine the
brightest and darkest portions.

maximum aperture
The largest lens opening or f-stop available with a particular lens, or with a zoom lens at a particular
magnification.

mechanical
Camera-ready copy with text and art already in position for photographing.

midtones
Parts of an image with tones of an intermediate value, usually in the 25 to 75 percent range. Many
image-editing features allow you to manipulate midtones independently from the highlights and
shadows.

mirror lens
A type of lens, more accurately called a catadioptric lens, which contains both lens elements and
mirrors to "fold" the optical path to produce a shorter, lighter telephoto lens. Because of their compact
size and relatively low price, these lenses are popular, even though they have several drawbacks,

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 327

328 Part II: Techniques Unlimited
including reduced contrast, fixed apertures, and they produce doughnut-shaped out-of-focus points of
light (because one of the mirrors is mounted on the front of the lens).

moiré
An objectionable pattern caused by the interference of halftone screens, or in some digital and TV
images, frequently generated by rescanning an image that has already been halftoned. An image editor
can frequently minimize these effects by blurring the patterns.

monochrome
Having a single color, plus white. Grayscale images are monochrome (shades of gray and white only).

negative
A representation of an image in which the tones are reversed: blacks as white, and vice versa.

neutral color
In image-editing's RGB mode, a color in which red, green, and blue are present in equal amounts,
producing a gray.

Figure A.13. When carried to the extreme, lossy compression methods can have a serious impact on
image quality.

328 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 329
neutral density filter
A gray camera filter reduces the amount of light entering the camera without affecting the colors.

noise
In an image, pixels with randomly distributed color values. Noise in digital photographs tends to be
the product of low-light conditions and long exposures, particularly when you have set your camera to
a higher ISO rating than normal.

noise reduction
A technology used to cut down on the amount of random information in a digital picture, usually
caused by long exposures at increased sensitivity ratings. Noise reduction involves the camera
automatically taking a second blank/dark exposure at the same settings that contains only noise, and
then using the blank photo's information to cancel out the noise in the original picture. With most
cameras, the process is very quick, but does double the amount of time required to take the photo.

normal lens
A lens that makes the image in a photograph appear in a perspective that is like that of the original
scene, typically with a field of view of roughly 45 degrees. A quick way to calculate the focal length
of a normal lens is to measure the diagonal of the sensor or film frame used to capture the image,
usually ranging from around 7mm to 45mm.

open flash
A technique used for "painting with light" or other procedures, where the tripod-mounted camera's
shutter is opened, the flash is triggered manually (sometimes several times), and then the shutter is
closed.

optical zoom
Magnification produced by the elements of a digital camera's lens, as opposed to digital zoom, which
merely magnifies the captured pixels to simulate additional magnification. Optical zoom is always to
be preferred over the digital variety.

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 329

330 Part II: Techniques Unlimited
orthochromatic
Sensitive primarily to blue and green light.

overexposure
A condition in which too much light reaches the film or sensor, producing a dense negative or a very
bright/light print, slide, or digital image.

pan and tilt head

Tripod head allowing the camera to be tilted up or down or rotated 360 degrees.

panning
Moving the camera so that the image of a moving object remains in the same relative position in the
viewfinder as you take a picture. The eventual effect creates a strong sense of movement.

panorama
A broad view, usually scenic. Photoshop's Photomerge feature helps you create panoramas from
several photos. Many digital cameras have a panorama assist mode that makes it easier to shoot
several photos that can be stitched together later.

parallax compensation
An adjustment made by the camera or photographer to account for the difference in views between
the taking lens and the viewfinder.

PC terminal
A connector for attaching standard electronic flash cords, named after the Prontor-Compur shutter
companies that developed this connection.

330 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 331
Figure A.14. Higher ISO settings lead to the random grain patterns known as noise.

perspective
The rendition of apparent space in a photograph, such as how far the foreground and background
appear to be separated from each other. Perspective is determined by the distance of the camera to the
subject. Objects that are close appear large, while distant objects appear to be far away.

perspective control lens

A special lens that allows correcting distortion resulting from high or low camera angle.

pincushion distortion
A type of lens distortion associated with telephoto focal lengths in which lines at the top and side
edges of an image are bent inward, producing an effect that looks like a pincushion.

pixel
The smallest element of a screen display that can be assigned a color, used to measure resolution. The
term is a contraction of "picture element."

pixels per inch (ppi)

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 331

332 Part II: Techniques Unlimited
The number of pixels that can be displayed per inch, usually used to refer to pixel resolution from a
scanned image or on a monitor.

plug-in
A module such as a filter that can be accessed from within an image editor to provide special
functions.

point
Approximately 1/72 of an inch outside the Macintosh world, exactly 1/72 of an inch within it.

polarizing filter
A filter that forces light, which normally vibrates in all directions, to vibrate only in a single plane,
reducing or removing the specular reflections from the surface of objects.

portrait
The orientation of a page in which the longest dimension is vertical, also called tall orientation. In
photography, a formal picture of an individual or, sometimes, a group.

positive
The opposite of a negative, an image with the same tonal relationships as those in the original
scenes for example, a finished print or a slide.

prepress
The stages of the reproduction process that precede printing, when halftones, color separations, and
printing plates are created.

332 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 333

process color
The four color pigments used in color printing: cyan, magenta, yellow, and black (CMYK).

RAW
An image file format offered by many digital cameras that includes all the unprocessed information
captured by the camera. RAW files are very large, and must be processed by a special program after
being downloaded from the camera.

Figure A.15. This exaggerated example shows pincushion distortion (top) and barrel distortion (bottom).

rear-curtain sync
An optional kind of electronic flash synchronization technique, originally associated with focal plane
shutters, which consist of a traveling set of curtains, including a front curtain (which opens to reveal
the film or sensor) and a rear curtain (which follows at a distance determined by shutter speed to
conceal the film or sensor at the conclusion of the exposure).

For a flash picture to be taken, the entire sensor must be exposed at one time to the brief flash
exposure, so the image is exposed after the front curtain has reached the other side of the focal plane,
but before the rear curtain begins to move.

Rear-curtain sync causes the flash to fire at the end of the exposure, an instant before the second or
rear curtain of the focal plane shutter begins to move. With slow shutter speeds, this feature can create
a blur effect from the ambient light, showing as patterns that follow a moving subject with subject

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 333

334 Part II: Techniques Unlimited
shown sharply frozen at the end of the blur trail. If you were shooting a photo of The Flash, the
superhero would appear sharp, with a ghostly trail behind him.

red eye
An effect from flash photography that appears to make a person's eyes glow red, or an animal's yellow
or green. It's caused by light bouncing from the retina of the eye, and is most pronounced in dim
illumination (when the irises are wide open) and when the electronic flash is close to the lens and
therefore prone to reflect directly back. Image editors can fix red eye through cloning other pixels
over the offending red or orange ones.

red-eye reduction
A way of reducing or eliminating the red-eye phenomenon. Some cameras offer a red-eye reduction
mode that uses a preflash that causes the irises of the subjects' eyes to close down just prior to a
second, stronger flash used to take the picture.

reflection copy
Original artwork that is viewed by light reflected from its surface, rather than transmitted through it.

reflector
Any device used to reflect light onto a subject to improve balance of exposure (contrast). Another
way is to use fill-in flash.

register
To align images.

registration mark
A mark that appears on a printed image, generally for color separations, to help in aligning the
printing plates. Photoshop can add registration marks to your images when they are printed.

334 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 335

reproduction ratio
Used in macro photography to indicate the magnification of a subject.

resample
To change the size or resolution of an image. Resampling down discards pixel information in an
image; resampling up adds pixel information through interpolation.

resolution
In image editing, the number of pixels per inch used to determine the size of the image when printed.
That is, an 8 x 10-inch image that is saved with 300 pixels per inch resolution will print in an 8 x
10-inch size on a 300 dpi printer, or 4 x 5 inches on a 600 dpi printer. In digital photography,
resolution is the number of pixels a camera or scanner can capture.

retouch
To edit an image, most often to remove flaws or to create a new effect.

RGB color mode

A color mode that represents the three colors red, green, and blue used by devices such as scanners
or monitors to reproduce color. Photoshop works in RGB mode by default, and even displays CMYK
images by converting them to RGB.

saturation
The purity of color; the amount by which a pure color is diluted with white or gray.

scale
To change the size of all or part of an image.

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 335

336 Part II: Techniques Unlimited
Figure A.16. Digital cameras usually have several features for avoiding the demon red-eye look, but you'll
still get the effect when you least want it.

Figure A.17. Fully saturated (left) and desaturated (right).

scanner
A device that captures an image of a piece of artwork and converts it to a digitized image or bitmap
that the computer can handle.

Secure Digital memory card

Another flash memory card format that is gaining acceptance for use in digital cameras and other
applications.

selection
In image editing, an area of an image chosen for manipulation, usually surrounded by a moving series
of dots called a selection border.

336 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 337

selective focus
Choosing a lens opening that produces a shallow depth-of-field. Usually this is used to isolate a
subject by causing most other elements in the scene to be blurred.

self-timer
Mechanism delaying the opening of the shutter for some seconds after the release has been operated.
Also known as delayed action.

sensitivity
A measure of the degree of response of a film or sensor to light.

sensor array
The grid-like arrangement of the red, green, and blue-sensitive elements of a digital camera's
solid-state capture device. Sony offers a sensor array that captures a fourth color, termed emerald.

shadow
The darkest part of an image, represented on a digital image by pixels with low numeric values or on
a halftone by the smallest or absence of dots.

Shadow/Highlight Adjustment
A new Photoshop feature used to correct overexposed or underexposed digital camera images.

sharpening
Increasing the apparent sharpness of an image by boosting the contrast between adjacent pixels that
form an edge.

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 337

338 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

shutter
In a conventional film camera, the shutter is a mechanism consisting of blades, a curtain, plate, or
some other movable cover that controls the time during which light reaches the film. Digital cameras
can use actual shutters, or simulate the action of a shutter electronically. Quite a few use a
combination, employing a mechanical shutter for slow speeds and an electronic version for higher
speeds. Many cameras include a reassuring shutter "sound" that mimics the noise a mechanical
camera makes.

shutter lag
The tendency of a camera to hesitate after the shutter release is depressed prior to making the actual
exposure. Point-and-shoot digital cameras often have shutter lag times of up to 2 seconds, primarily
because of slow autofocus systems. Digital SLRs typically have much less shutter lag, typically 0.2
seconds or less.

shutter-preferred
An exposure mode in which you set the shutter speed and the camera determines the appropriate
f-stop. See also aperture-preferred.

sidelighting
Light striking the subject from the side relative to the position of the camera; produces shadows and
highlights to create modeling on the subject.

Figure A.18. Increasing the contrast between pixels (right) makes an image appear to be sharper than the
unprocessed version (left).

338 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 339

single lens reflex (SLR) camera

A type of camera that allows you to see through the camera's lens as you look in the camera's
viewfinder. Other camera functions, such as light metering and flash control, also operate through the
camera's lens.

slave unit
An accessory flash unit that supplements the main flash, usually triggered electronically when the
slave senses the light output by the main unit, or through radio waves.

slide
A photographic transparency mounted for projection.

slow sync
An electronic flash synchronizing method that uses a slow shutter speed so that ambient light is
recorded by the camera in addition to the electronic flash illumination, so that the background
receives more exposure for a more realistic effect.

SmartMedia
A type of memory card storage, generally outmoded today because its capacity is limited to 128MB,
for digital cameras and other computer devices.

smoothing
To blur the boundaries between edges of an image, often to reduce a rough or jagged appearance.

soft lighting
Lighting that is low or moderate in contrast, such as on an overcast day.

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 339

340 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

solarization
In photography, an effect produced by exposing film to light partially through the developing process.
Some of the tones are reversed,generating an interesting effect. In image editing, the same effect is
produced by combining some positive areas of the image with some negative areas. Also called the
Sabattier effect, to distinguish it from a different phenomenon called overexposure solarization, which
is produced by exposing film to many, many times more light than is required to produce the image.
With overexposure solarization, some of the very brightest tones, such as the sun, are reversed.

specular highlight
Bright spots in an image caused by reflection of light sources.

spot color
Ink used in a print job in addition to black or process colors.

spot meter
An exposure system that concentrates on a small area in the image. See also averaging meter.

subtractive primary colors

Cyan, magenta, and yellow, which are the printing inks that theoretically absorb all color and produce
black. In practice, however, they generate a muddy brown, so black is added to preserve detail
(especially in shadows). The combination of the three colors and black is referred to as CMYK. (K
represents black, to differentiate it from blue in the RGB model.)

T (time)
A shutter setting in which the shutter opens when the shutter button is pressed and remains open until
the button is pressed a second time. See also B (bulb).

340 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 341
telephoto
A lens or lens setting that magnifies an image.

thermal wax transfer

A printing technology in which dots of wax from a ribbon are applied to paper when heated by
thousands of tiny elements in a printhead.

Figure A.19. Digital photographers can manipulate the color curves of an image to simulate one kind of
solarization.

threshold
A predefined level used by a device to determine whether a pixel will be represented as black or
white.

thumbnail
A miniature copy of a page or image that provides a preview of the original. Photoshop uses
thumbnails in its Layer and Channels palettes, for example.

TIFF (Tagged Image File Format)

A standard graphics file format that can be used to store grayscale and color images plus selection
masks.

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 341

342 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

time exposure
A picture taken by leaving the shutter open for a long period, usually more than one second. The
camera is generally locked down with a tripod to prevent blur during the long exposure.

time lapse
A process by which a tripod-mounted camera takes sequential pictures at intervals, allowing the
viewing of events that take place over a long period of time, such as a sunrise or flower opening.
Many digital cameras have time-lapse capability built in. Others require you to attach the camera to
your computer through a USB cable and let software in the computer trigger the individual photos.

tint
A color with white added to it. In graphic arts, often refers to the percentage of one color added to
another.

tolerance
The range of color or tonal values that will be selected with a tool like Photoshop's Magic Wand, or
filled with paint when using a tool like the Paint Bucket.

transparency
A positive photographic image on film, viewed or projected by light shining through film.

transparency scanner
A type of scanner that captures color slides or negatives.

tripod
A three-legged supporting stand used to hold the camera steady. Especially useful when using slow

342 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 343
shutter speeds and/or telephoto lenses.

TTL
Through the lens. A system of providing viewing through the actual lens taking the picture (as with a
camera with an electronic viewfinder, LCD display, or single lens reflex viewing), or calculation of
exposure, flash exposure, or focus based on the view through the lens.

tungsten light
Light from ordinary room lamps and ceiling fixtures, as opposed to fluorescent illumination.

underexposure
A condition in which too little light reaches the film or sensor, producing a thin negative, a dark slide,
a muddy-looking print, or a dark digital image.

unipod
A one-legged support, or monopod, used to steady the camera. See also tripod.

unsharp masking
The process for increasing the contrast between adjacent pixels in an image, increasing sharpness,
especially around edges.

USB
A high-speed serial communication method commonly used to connect digital cameras and other
devices to a computer.

viewfinder

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 343

344 Part II: Techniques Unlimited
The device in a camera used to frame the image. With an SLR camera, the viewfinder is also used to
focus the image if focusing manually. You can also focus an image with the LCD or EVF display of a
digital camera, both types of viewfinders.

vignetting
Dark corners of an image, often produced by using a lens hood that is too small for the field of view,
or generated artificially using image-editing techniques.

white
The color formed by combining all the colors of light (in the additive color model) or by removing all
colors (in the subtractive model).

white balance
The adjustment of a digital camera to the color temperature of the light source. Interior illumination is
relatively red; outdoors light is relatively blue. Digital cameras often set correct white balance
automatically, or let you do it through menus. Image editors can often do some color correction of
images that were exposed using the wrong white-balance setting.

white point
In image editing, the lightest pixel in the highlight area of an image.

wide-angle lens
A lens that has a shorter focal length and a wider field of view than a normal lens for a particular film
or digital image format.

zoom
In image editing, to enlarge or reduce the size of an image on your monitor. In photography, to
enlarge or reduce the size of an image using the magnification settings of a lens.

344 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 345

zoom ring
A control on the barrel of a lens that allows changing the magnification, or zoom, of the lens by
rotating it.

< Day Day Up >

< Day Day Up >

Index

[A] [B] [C] [D] [E] [F] [G] [H] [I] [J] [K] [L] [M] [N] [O] [P] [Q] [R] [S] [T] [U] [V] [W] [Z]

< Day Day Up >

< Day Day Up >

Index

[A] [B] [C] [D] [E] [F] [G] [H] [I] [J] [K] [L] [M] [N] [O] [P] [Q] [R] [S] [T] [U] [V] [W] [Z]

AC adapters
action photography. [See also sequencing options]
baseball photos
basketball photos
battery chargers
digital film considerations
electronic flash
advantages
compatibility issues
disadvantages
flash exposure
overview
synchronization options
exposure controls 2nd
fast action shots
focus controls
football photos
freezing action
basic guidelines
head on
overview
peak action
with flash

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 345

346 Part II: Techniques Unlimited
with panning
with shutter
golf photos
good photo techniques
gymnastics photos
halftone screening
high-speed motion stopping
hockey photos
horse racing photos
ISO speed considerations
lenses
aperture
focal lengths
optical versus digital zoom
zoom settings
motor sports
over shooting
planning and anticipation guidelines
positioning considerations
preparation and setup
shutter lag
shutter speeds
skating photos
skiing photos
soccer photos
strobe photography
swimming photos
track and field photos
tripods and monopods
wide-angle shots
wrestling photos
add-on attachments, lenses
advanced camera models
advertising, digital photo ethics
aluminum foil, lighting sources
aperture
aperture priority 2nd
aperture-preferred exposure
architectural photography
as documentation
camera and lens equipment
construction photos
distracting background elements
equipment needed
humor and drama in
interior lighting problems
painting with light exercise
permission to photograph
perspective control
shot selection considerations
tripod use
weather considerations
attenuating filters, lens accessories
auction items, macro photography

346 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 347
autoexposure
aperture priority
averaging mode
bottom-weighting mode
center-weighting mode
corner-weighting mode
evaluation metering
exposure lock control
exposure zones
manual exposure
matrix-metering technique
program modes
shutter priority
spot metering
top-weighting mode
autofocus
advanced parameters
basic modes
closest object focus
continuous 2nd
digital camera features
dynamic mode 2nd
face priority focus
infinity range
macro/close-up range
manual
predictive focus
single 2nd
user selected
zone focusing scheme
Avedon, Richard
averaged readings, exposure control
averaging mode, autoexposure

< Day Day Up >

< Day Day Up >

Index

[A] [B] [C] [D] [E] [F] [G] [H] [I] [J] [K] [L] [M] [N] [O] [P] [Q] [R] [S] [T] [U] [V] [W] [Z]

backgrounds
cloth in
distractions in
light considerations, people photography
macro photography and
studio equipment and props
backlighting, people photography
backlit pictures
balanced lighting, people photography
balancing rules, scenic photography

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 347

348 Part II: Techniques Unlimited
barn doors, studio setup
barrel distortion
baseball photos, action photography
basic composition
basic focus modes
basic point-and-shoot camera models
basketball photos, action photography
batteries
battery compartment, digital camera features
charging 2nd
power options
Bayer pattern, sensors and
Bellamy, Edward (Looking Backward: 2000-1887)
bellows and extension tubes, macro photography
Bibble Pro third-party RAW converter
Bing Crosby Laboratories
bitmap file format (BMP)
blooming
blur
motion blur
touch-ups
BMP (bitmap file format)
bottom-weighting mode, autoexposure
bracketing 2nd 3rd
BreezeBrowser application
Brightness option, Photoshop CS
broad lighting, people photography
buffer memory
building structures. [See architectural photography]
bulb/long exposure
butterfly lighting, people photography

< Day Day Up >

< Day Day Up >

Index

[A] [B] [C] [D] [E] [F] [G] [H] [I] [J] [K] [L] [M] [N] [O] [P] [Q] [R] [S] [T] [U] [V] [W] [Z]

C1 Pro (Phase One Capture One Pro)

Calibrate tab settings, Photoshop CS
camera obscura, darkroom techniques
cameras, digital
access cover for flash memory card
architectural photography
automatic focus options
battery compartment
category selection considerations
color options
contrast options
control wheel/jog wheel controls 2nd

348 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 349
costs
cursor controls
damaged
EVF (electronic viewfinder)
external flash terminal
eyepiece diopter correction control
eyepieces
filter options
filter threads
flip-up electronic flash
Foveon sensors
front view
handgrip controls
hot shoe covers
LCD status screen
LCD viewfinder 2nd
left side view
left-handed users
long term investments 2nd
lost
macro buttons
main control dials
manual focus buttons
menu buttons
microphone/speaker controls
models
advanced
basic point-and-shoot models
intermediate
professional
prosumer
picture taking features
ports and sockets
power options
program modes
quick view/delete button
rear view 2nd
removable storage
requirements, studio equipment and props
selection considerations
sensitivity options
sensors
sequence options
shapes and sizes
shutter release controls 2nd
size considerations
SLRs
spot meter/spot focus control
stolen
storage capacity
storage options
top view
video output features
video recording features

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 349

350 Part II: Techniques Unlimited
viewfinder controls
viewfinder swivel
viewing images with
voice recording features
white balance
zoom ring
Canon EOS File Viewer Utility
Capa, Robert 2nd
capacitance
capturing images. [See image capture]
catalog work, photoillustration
categories, camera selection considerations
CCD (charged coupled device)
CCD sensors
camera functionality
CMOS sensors versus
image capture and
center weighted exposure mode 2nd
charged coupled device (CCD)
chargers, batteries 2nd
chromatic aberration
Churchill, Winston
cloning, touch-ups
close-ups. [See also macro photography]
advanced focus parameters
focus ranges
closest object focus
cloth, background scenes
CMOS sensors
CCD sensors versus
image capture and
ColdWar, digital photography development and
color
color correction
scenic photography
skills transference
touch-ups
Color Noise Reduction slider, Photoshop CS
color options, digital camera features
color rules, scenic photography
Color Space option, Photoshop CS
composition
basic
good composition skills
macro photography
skills transference
compression
Huffman encoding
JPEG (Joint Photographic Experts Group) format
lossless
lossy
numeric method
quantization routine
RLE (run-length encoding)

350 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 351
sequencing options
constant aperture
construction photos, architectural photography
continuous advance sequencing mode
continuous autofocus mode 2nd
contrast option
digital camera features
Photoshop CS
control wheel/jog wheel controls, digital camera features 2nd
controls, digital camera settings
cookies, studio setup
copyright law
copystands
corner-weighting mode, autoexposure
corporate/industrial photography, photoillustration
costs, digital cameras
court systems, digital photo ethics
creative outlets, digital photography as
crime scene photographs, ethics
cropping, touch-ups
cursor controls, digital camera features

< Day Day Up >

< Day Day Up >

Index

[A] [B] [C] [D] [E] [F] [G] [H] [I] [J] [K] [L] [M] [N] [O] [P] [Q] [R] [S] [T] [U] [V] [W] [Z]

damaged cameras
darkroom techniques
DCT (discrete cosine transformation)
delete button, digital camera features
demosaicing
Depth option, Photoshop CS
depth-of-field
focus control considerations
macro photography
selective focus
diffraction
digital cameras. [See cameras, digital]
Digital Negative (DNG) format
Digital Photo Professional (DPP)
digital photography
advantages of
as creative outlet
ethics
future of
history of
skill transference
uses for

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 351

352 Part II: Techniques Unlimited
Digital Retouching and Compositing: Photographers' Guide 2nd
digital signal processing (DSP)
digital signatures, copyright law
digital versus optical zoom, action photography
digital zoom
direct versus soft light, people photography
discrete cosine transformation (DCT)
distracting background elements
DNG (Digital Negative) format
documentation, architectural photography
DPP (Digital Photo Professional)
drama, in architectural photography
DSP (digital signal processing)
dynamic focus mode 2nd

< Day Day Up >

< Day Day Up >

Index

[A] [B] [C] [D] [E] [F] [G] [H] [I] [J] [K] [L] [M] [N] [O] [P] [Q] [R] [S] [T] [U] [V] [W] [Z]

editing images. [See retouching]

electronic flash
advantages
compatibility issues
digital camera features
disadvantages
firing modes
flash exposure
freezing action with
lighting, people photography and
macro photography
overview
scenic photography
synchronization options
electronic news gathering (ENG)
electronic viewfinder (EVF) 2nd
embedded digital signatures, copyright law
encryption
ENG (electronic news gathering)
ethics, digital photography
evaluation metering, autoexposure
EVF (electronic viewfinder) 2nd
EVs (Exposure Values)
exposure
action photography 2nd
aperture priority mode
aperture-preferred
autoexposure
aperture priority

352 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 353
averaging mode
bottom-weighting mode
center-weighting mode
corner-weighting mode
evaluation metering
exposure lock control
exposure zones
manual exposure
matrix-metering technique
program modes
scene modes
shutter priority
spot metering
top-weighting mode
averaged readings
bracketing
bulb/long exposure
calculated
center weighted mode
digital camera features
evaluative matrix mode
EVs (Exposure Values)
Exposure option, Photoshop CS
exposure program modes, digital camera features
exposure weightings
f-stops and
full auto mode
full manual control
manual exposure adjustments 2nd
monitoring
over/under exposure controls
plus/minus controls
programmed 2nd
programmed selective
reciprocal
remote control
representation of
scene modes
self-timer
shutter priority
shutter speed and
shutter-preferred
spot metering
spot readings
time
extension tubes and bellows, macro photography
external flash terminal, digital camera features
eyepieces
digital camera features
diopter correction control

< Day Day Up >

< Day Day Up >

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 353

354 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Index

[A] [B] [C] [D] [E] [F] [G] [H] [I] [J] [K] [L] [M] [N] [O] [P] [Q] [R] [S] [T] [U] [V] [W] [Z]

f-stops 2nd
face priority focus
fast action shots, action photography
file formats. [See formats]
file size, file formats
fill flash firing mode
fill light, people photography
film
action photography
digital photography replacement
ISO speed
selection considerations
sensitivity
filters
conventional versus digital photography, skill transference
digital camera features 2nd
fireworks, scenic photography
firing modes, electronic flash
flash
advantages
compatibility issues
digital camera features
disadvantages
external flash terminal, digital camera features
firing modes
flash exposure
flexible flash features
freezing action with
lighting, people photography and
macro photography
overview
scenic photography
synchronization options
flat reflectors, studio setup
flip-up electronic flash, digital camera features
foamboards, lighting sources
focus
action photography
autofocus
advanced parameters
basic modes
closest object focus
continuous 2nd
digital camera features
dynamic mode 2nd
face priority focus
infinity range

354 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 355
macro/close-up range
manual
predictive focus
single 2nd
user selected
zone focusing scheme
close-ups
depth-of-field considerations
digital camera features
focus override
focus problems, infrared technology
focus range, lenses and
focus rings 2nd
image capture
macro lock/lockout
manipulating
manual
selective
skill transference
football photos, action photography
formats
BMP
DNG
file compression
file size
GIF
image size
JPEG 2nd 3rd
JPEG 2000
MMC
PCX
PDF
PICT
PNG
RAW
Bibble Pro
BreezeBrowser application
C1 Pro (Phase One Capture One Pro)
camera vendor solutions
Irfan View freeware program
manipulating, in Photoshop CS
TIFF 2nd
types of
Foveon sensors
framing technique, scenic photography
freezing action
basic guidelines
head on
overview
peak action
with electronic flash
with panning
with shutter
front and center rules, landscape photos

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 355

356 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

front-sync options, electronic flash

frontlit pictures
full auto exposure mode
full manual exposure control
full-frame shutters
fusion/separation rules, scenic photography

< Day Day Up >

< Day Day Up >

Index

[A] [B] [C] [D] [E] [F] [G] [H] [I] [J] [K] [L] [M] [N] [O] [P] [Q] [R] [S] [T] [U] [V] [W] [Z]

Gates, Bill
GIF (Graphics Interchange Format)
gobos, studio setup
golf photos, action photography
gradient color filters, lens accessories
grain
Graphics Interchange Format (GIF)
gray tone, exposure calculations
group shots, basic composition
gymnastics, action photography

< Day Day Up >

< Day Day Up >

Index

[A] [B] [C] [D] [E] [F] [G] [H] [I] [J] [K] [L] [M] [N] [O] [P] [Q] [R] [S] [T] [U] [V] [W] [Z]

hair light, people photography

halftones 2nd
handgrip controls, digital camera features
Hawks, Howard
high-resolution requirements
high-speed continuous advance mode, sequencing options 2nd
high-speed motion stopping, action photography
hockey photos, action photography
home studio versus nature scenes, people photography
horse racing, action photography
hot mirrors
hot shoe covers, digital camera features
Huffman encoding compression method
humor, in architectural photography

356 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 357

< Day Day Up >

< Day Day Up >

Index

[A] [B] [C] [D] [E] [F] [G] [H] [I] [J] [K] [L] [M] [N] [O] [P] [Q] [R] [S] [T] [U] [V] [W] [Z]

illumination, lighting problems

image capture
CCD sensors
CMOS sensors
focusing
light sources
sensors
image editing. [See editing images]
image size, file formats
images, viewing
incandescent lighting
macro photography
people photography
infinity range, autofocus
infrared (IR) photography
integrated metering, flash exposure
interchangeable lenses
interior lighting problems
interline shutters
intermediate camera models
interpolation
demosaicing
sensors and
inverse square law, balancing light
IR (infrared) photography
Irfan View freeware program
ISO film speed 2nd

< Day Day Up >

< Day Day Up >

Index

[A] [B] [C] [D] [E] [F] [G] [H] [I] [J] [K] [L] [M] [N] [O] [P] [Q] [R] [S] [T] [U] [V] [W] [Z]

jog wheel/control wheel controls, digital camera features 2nd

JPEG (Joint Photographic Experts Group) format 2nd 3rd
JPEG 2000 file format

< Day Day Up >

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 357

358 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

< Day Day Up >

Index

[A] [B] [C] [D] [E] [F] [G] [H] [I] [J] [K] [L] [M] [N] [O] [P] [Q] [R] [S] [T] [U] [V] [W] [Z]

Karsh, Yousuf
key light, people photography

< Day Day Up >

< Day Day Up >

Index

[A] [B] [C] [D] [E] [F] [G] [H] [I] [J] [K] [L] [M] [N] [O] [P] [Q] [R] [S] [T] [U] [V] [W] [Z]

Lambray, Maureen
landscape photos, scenic photography
balancing rules
color and texture rules
diagonal and vertical line scenes
framing technique
front and center rules
fusion/separation rules
orientation rules
overview
panoramas
rule of thirds
simplicity rules
Lang, Fritz
laptop use, travel photography
layers, touch-ups
LCD
digital camera features 2nd
viewing images on
left-handed camera users
legal photography, ethics and
Lempel-Ziv Welch (LZW) algorithm
lens flare
Lens tab settings, Photoshop CS
lenses
add-on attachments
attenuating filters
color correction filters
constant aperture
diffraction
digital camera features

358 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 359
f-stops
focal lengths, action photography
focus range
gradient color filters
interchangeable
lens aperture 2nd
macro
manual exposure adjustments
optical versus digital zoom
scenic photography accessories
selection considerations
through-the-lens viewing
varifocal
viewing images through
zoom 2nd
lighting
backlit/frontlit picture
digital photo ethics
image capture
interior lighting problems
inverse square law
light loss problems, infrared photography
low-light picture taking
macro photography lighting sources
aluminum foil
electronic flash
foamboards
incandescent lights
mylar sheets
setting up
tents
umbrellas
white cardboard
people photography
background light
backlighting
balanced lighting
broad lighting
butterfly lighting
direct versus soft light
electronic flash
existing lighting
fill light
hair light
incandescent lights
key light
main light
nature of light
outdoor lighting
rembrandt lighting
short lighting
side lighting
spotlights
travel photography

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 359

360 Part II: Techniques Unlimited
locking exposure
long term investments, camera selection considerations 2nd
long/bulb exposure
Looking Backward: 2000-1887 (Edward Bellamy)
lossless compression
lossy compression
lost cameras
low-light picture taking
low-resolution requirements
lower resolution
Luminance Smoothing slider, Photoshop CS
LZW (Lempel-Ziv Welch) algorithm

< Day Day Up >

< Day Day Up >

Index

[A] [B] [C] [D] [E] [F] [G] [H] [I] [J] [K] [L] [M] [N] [O] [P] [Q] [R] [S] [T] [U] [V] [W] [Z]

macro buttons, digital camera features

macro lenses, macro photography
macro lock/lockout, focus controls
macro photography. [See also close-ups]
background considerations 2nd
bellows and extension tubes
depth-of-field considerations
equipment needed
good composition techniques
lighting sources
aluminum foil
challenges of
electronic flash
foamboards
incandescent lights
mylar sheets
setting up
tents
umbrellas
white cardboard
macro lenses
magnification
online auctions
overview
perspective control
picture taking tips 2nd
subject setup
tripod use
macro/close-up range, autofocus
Magnetic Video Camera (Mavica)
magnification, macro photography

360 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 361
main control dials, digital camera features
main light, people photography
manual autofocus mode
manual control, flash exposure
manual exposure
adjustments
autoexposure
manual focus buttons, digital camera features
masking
Mastering Digital Scanning with Slides, Film, and Transparencies
Mastering Digital SLR Photography 2nd
matrix-metering technique, autoexposure
Mavica (Magnetic Video Camera)
medical photographs, photoillustration
medium-resolution requirements
memory buffer
menu buttons, digital camera features
metering difficulty, infrared photography
mezzotints
microphone/speaker controls, digital camera features
mini-movie sequencing mode
MMC (MultiMediaCard) format
monochrome capture
monopods, action photography
mosaic arrangement, sensors and
motion blur
motion photography. [See action photography]
motion picture mode, sequencing options
motor sports, action photography
mountain photos, scenic photography
multi-shot sequencing mode
MultiMediaCard (MMC) format
myler sheets, lighting sources

< Day Day Up >

< Day Day Up >

Index

[A] [B] [C] [D] [E] [F] [G] [H] [I] [J] [K] [L] [M] [N] [O] [P] [Q] [R] [S] [T] [U] [V] [W] [Z]

NASA, digital photography development and

National Press Photographers Association (NPPA)
nature photography. [See scenic photography]
newspapers, as photojournalism source
Nikon Capture converter/editor application
NPPA (National Press Photographers Association)
numeric compression method

< Day Day Up >

< Day Day Up >

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 361

362 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Index

[A] [B] [C] [D] [E] [F] [G] [H] [I] [J] [K] [L] [M] [N] [O] [P] [Q] [R] [S] [T] [U] [V] [W] [Z]

online auctions
macro photography
photoillustration
ophthalmic photography, photoillustration
optical versus digital zoom, action photography
optical viewfinder, viewing images through
optical zoom
orientation rules, landscape photos
outdoor lighting, people photography
over shooting, action photography
over/under exposure controls

< Day Day Up >

< Day Day Up >

Index

[A] [B] [C] [D] [E] [F] [G] [H] [I] [J] [K] [L] [M] [N] [O] [P] [Q] [R] [S] [T] [U] [V] [W] [Z]

panning, freezing action with

panorama photos, scenic photography 2nd
parallax error
passport photos, people photography
PCX file format
PDF (Portable Document Format)
peak action shots, action photography
people photography
Avedon, Richard
conventional film technology
digital portraiture advantages/disadvantages
lighting sources
background light
backlighting
balanced lighting
broad lighting
butterfly lighting
direct versus soft light
fill light
hair light
key light
main light
nature of light

362 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 363
outdoor lighting
rembrandt lighting
short lighting
side lighting
spotlights
passport photos
posing and shooting
studio equipment and props
background considerations
barndoors
camera requirements
flat reflectors
gobos and cookies
home studio versus nature scenes
lighting tools
snoots
soft boxes
spacing considerations
umbrellas
visible means of support
touch-ups
travel photography
uses for
permission to photograph
perspective control, architectural photography
Peterson's PhotoGraphic Magazine
Phase One Capture Pro (C1 Pro)
photoillustration
catalog work
corporate/industrial photography
ethics
medical photographs
online auction use
ophthalmic photography
photojournalism
photons
Photoshop CS
Photoshop CS 2.0: Photographers' Guide
PICT file format
pincushioning
Pixel Size option, Photoshop CS
pixels
plus/minus exposure controls
PNG (Portable Network Graphics) file format
point-and-shoot, basic camera models
Portable Document Format (PDF)
Portable Network Graphics (PNG) file format
portrait photography. [See people photography]
ports, digital camera features
posing and shooting, people photography
positioning considerations, action photography
power options, camera selection considerations
pre-flash metering, flash exposure
predictive focus

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 363

364 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

professional camera models

program modes
autoexposure
digital camera features
programmed exposure controls 2nd
programmed selective exposure mode
prosumer camera models

< Day Day Up >

< Day Day Up >

Index

[A] [B] [C] [D] [E] [F] [G] [H] [I] [J] [K] [L] [M] [N] [O] [P] [Q] [R] [S] [T] [U] [V] [W] [Z]

quantization routing, compression

quick view, digital camera features

< Day Day Up >

< Day Day Up >

Index

[A] [B] [C] [D] [E] [F] [G] [H] [I] [J] [K] [L] [M] [N] [O] [P] [Q] [R] [S] [T] [U] [V] [W] [Z]

RAW format
Bibble Pro
BreezeBrowser application
C1 Pro (Phase One Capture One Pro)
camera vendor solutions
Irfan View freeware program
manipulating, in Photoshop CS
rear-sync options, electronic flash
reciprocal exposure
red-eye flash
reflections, creative use of
rembrandt lighting, people photography
remote control exposure
removable storage, digital cameras
resolution
camera selection considerations
high-resolution requirements
low-resolution requirements
lower
medium-resolution requirements
myths about
Resolution option, Photoshop CS

364 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 365

retouching
people photography
skills transference
RLE (run-length encoding) compression scheme
rule of thirds, scenic photography

< Day Day Up >

< Day Day Up >

Index

[A] [B] [C] [D] [E] [F] [G] [H] [I] [J] [K] [L] [M] [N] [O] [P] [Q] [R] [S] [T] [U] [V] [W] [Z]

Saturation option, Photoshop CS

scanners
scene modes, autoexposure 2nd
scenic photography
camera basics
fireworks
flash considerations
IR (infrared) photography
landscape photos
balancing rules
color and texture rules
diagonal and vertical line scenes
framing technique
front and center rules
fusion/separation rules
orientation rules
overview
rule of thirds
simplicity rules
lens accessories
mountain photos
overview
panorama photos 2nd
snow scenes
sunsets and sunrises
tripod use
water scenes
SD Card (Secure Digital Card)
selection tools, touch-ups
selective focus
self-timer exposure
sensitivity options, digital camera features
sensors
Bayer pattern and
CCD 2nd 3rd
CMOS 2nd
Foveon
functions of

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 365

366 Part II: Techniques Unlimited
image capture and
interpolation and
mosaic arrangement and
pixels and
sequencing options. [See also action photography]
bracketing 2nd
compression ratios and
continuous advance modes 2nd
digital camera features
high-speed continuous advance mode
high-speed continuous mode
mini-movie
motion picture mode
multi-shot
overview
shooting sequences
single frame advance mode 2nd
testing sequence capabilities
time-lapse/interval mode 2nd
ultra high-speed continuous mode 2nd
setting selections, camera controls
Shadows option, Photoshop CS
sharpening, touch-ups
Sharpness slider, Photoshop CS
short lighting, people photography
shutters
freezing action with
full-frame
interline
shutter lag, action photography
shutter priority
shutter release controls, digital camera features 2nd
shutter speed
action photography
exposure and
shutter-preferred exposure
side lighting, people lighting
simplicity rules, landscape photos
single autofocus mode 2nd
single frame advance mode, sequencing options 2nd
size considerations, digital camera selection
sizing, touch-ups
skating photos, action photography
skiing, action photography
slow-sync options, electronic flash
SLRs, digital
snoots, studio setup
snow scenes, scenic photography
soccer photos, action photography
sockets, digital camera features
soft boxes, studio setup
soft versus direct light, people photography
spacing considerations, studio equipment and props
sports photography. [See action photography]

366 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 367
spot metering
autoexposure
digital camera features
spot metering exposure mode
spot readings, exposure control
spotlights, people photography
spotty images, infrared technology
stolen cameras
storage options, digital cameras 2nd
strobe photography
studio equipment and props, people photography
background considerations
barndoors
camera requirements
flat reflectors
gobos and cookies
home studio versus nature scenes
lighting tools
electronic flash
existing lighting
incandescent lights
snoots
soft boxes
spacing considerations
umbrellas
visible means of support
sunrises and sunsets, scenic photography
swimming, action photography
synchronization options, electronic flash

< Day Day Up >

< Day Day Up >

Index

[A] [B] [C] [D] [E] [F] [G] [H] [I] [J] [K] [L] [M] [N] [O] [P] [Q] [R] [S] [T] [U] [V] [W] [Z]

Tagged Image File Format (TIFF) format 2nd

telephoto settings, selective focus
tents, lighting sources
texture rules, scenic photography
The American Film Directors
through-the-lens viewing 2nd
TIFF (Tagged Image File Format) format 2nd
time exposure
time-lapse/interval mode, sequencing options 2nd
tonal controls, touch-ups
top-weighting mode, autoexposure
touch-ups. [See also retouching]
track and field photos, action photography
travel photography

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 367

368 Part II: Techniques Unlimited
cyber cafe
equipment needed 2nd
good photo techniques
landscape scenes
laptop use
lighting considerations
people in photos
storage devices
voice recording options 2nd 3rd 4th 5th
tripod use
action photography
architectural photography
copystands
macro photography
scenic photography

< Day Day Up >

< Day Day Up >

Index

[A] [B] [C] [D] [E] [F] [G] [H] [I] [J] [K] [L] [M] [N] [O] [P] [Q] [R] [S] [T] [U] [V] [W] [Z]

ultra high-speed continuous advance sequencing mode

umbrellas
lighting sources
studio setup
unsharp masking
user selected autofocus

< Day Day Up >

< Day Day Up >

Index

[A] [B] [C] [D] [E] [F] [G] [H] [I] [J] [K] [L] [M] [N] [O] [P] [Q] [R] [S] [T] [U] [V] [W] [Z]

vacation photography. [See travel photography]

varifocal lenses
video output options
video recording options
viewfinders
camera selection considerations
digital camera features
traditional film cameras
viewing images
voice recording options

368 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 369

< Day Day Up >

< Day Day Up >

Index

[A] [B] [C] [D] [E] [F] [G] [H] [I] [J] [K] [L] [M] [N] [O] [P] [Q] [R] [S] [T] [U] [V] [W] [Z]

Walsh, Raoul
water scenes, scenic photography
watermarks
wave/partical duality
weather considerations, architectural photography
white balance
digital camera features
White Balance option, Photoshop CS
white cardboard, lighting sources
wide-angle settings
action photography
lens selection considerations
wrestling photos, action photography

< Day Day Up >

Part II: Techniques Unlimited 369

370 Part II: Techniques Unlimited

370 Part II: Techniques Unlimited